GE-MB-SW.

XLS

G.E. - MAGNE-BLAST SWITCHGEAR

V.
iSii
%' .V

TAB# CAT SECTION DESCRIPTION CONTENTS

s

GEI-25390C Instructions Type MI-6 &MI-9 Metal-Clad Switchgear

GEH-1802W Instructions Type M26 & M36 Metal-Clad Switchgear

GEH-1802V Instructions & Recommended Pts for Magne-Blast Air Circuit Breaker
GEH-1802R Instructions & Renewal Parts Type AM-4.16&AM-13.8
GEH-1802K Instructions
GEH-1802H Instructions & Renewal Parts

GEF-4351B Renewal Parts Types M-26 & M-36 Metal-Clad Switchgear

3A GEI-88775A Instructions MC-4.76 Switchgear

0156C9403 Instructions Replacement of TUF-LOC Bushings

Below for GEH-1802R M26 & M36 Swgr

GEH-230Z Instructions Instrument Transformers
GEH-908M Instructions Control & Instrument Switches
198 45SSK10-006 Installation Type AB-30 Ammeters & Voltmeters
GEH-1788D Instructions Time Overcurrent Relays
GEH-2901 Instructions Lightning Arresters
GEI-10951L Instructions Current Limiting Fuse Units
GEI-88760A Instructions Capacitor Trip Device

Page 1
•'WW .!T'W

'I

:l
:is.-

f
Pi
L—-'

•^V;«
y
,' '• ...is
 -
CONTENTS
,.,.,!':' . :
,
•',' .
..
.. .. ........ ..... •.•.• . - ....... . Page

........................'. ,•
3 ·.
\

GENER.AL INFORMATION � ·- •,

.. •·...........................
DESCRIPTION • • • it • • • • • • 3 .,;

. . .. .........
....... .. ............
... . ...·•......
... .·-..· ....
. SHIPPING-UNPACKING-STORAGE 8
· Shipping and Unpackin g 8
: Storage · •••••••••• � � ' 9
...
·- .--·,,:i\;,�l>,ij:d
·. 'i·Y,':fr/'ijt1:,
e • e e e t e • e. • • e I'. e � e t • t t, e I 41 e I .. e .e 9, .• e ·� t, .. •· ..• .• •.
.i''.. :..,,,./,
'., .. ·::. ·:·�.; :...-.�...1�t1 ':�,�t
. ,:: 'x'.' --··t _.,_ '.,ti.,, ...
"'

·Location .••• , .••••..• • , • . •• • •. • • ••••••.•. 9 .· ;� 1

Preparation of Floor·Anchoring •••• • • •• • ••••, • •• •• 9

Putting Units in Place • • • •••••• ••• •••• ·9 ,'t

.Installation of Bus Ba.rs • • • • • ••• • • • ••• 10

:.: -�·.r -�:

Connection of Primary Cables •••• ••• ••••• • 10
:.: . :,." ':' .:: ' ·r:·,',:::'.•{
: 1, \"1

Installation of Potheads ••• •• ••• •• • • • 16 '.

Connection or Control Cables •• • •• 19 r·�, ..

Installation of; Ground Bus •••••••••••.• ·.19 ,'.'
�' .·-..
-�.
Installation of Ex.l1aust Pipi.'1.g ••••••••••••••••••••,•••, .•••_ 20 . � ·.•.
Installation of Circuit Breaker Removable Element •••••• ,• .• • • .. • 20:
Installation of Inspection Rack and Testing Cabinet •.• ·� �-� • • !�- -' ·:;::- .•:: •· ·;• '.2_3 \:- -
- Addition of Units.to Existing Equipment .•••••••• -•.••• • • . . .. . _ . . . _ . 2_ 4 . .,
;-, -
' .
. . '
•,·,··- ,. .... '

T�G & INSP$CTION. • .• • • • '. ."... r'•.

• •'.• ...... • • .• • • -. • • .• ·• ......, ·, • • e· •· •· • • i' 24·'. . ·. . �.; '

. ... . . ·-............•.. . .-.·.......... . ....... 29

OPERATION .-. ,/'/ �· ·� ·� -�· 2'1
'(':'ff'\:
-•.•· ••••• - •• ··-•• '• .••••• ·:-�-: ••••.• ! .•••• .......
-
- :: . J: ...•

.� . Pt/\
MAINTENANCE

................. ................ ·-.

-

...................... . . '$i��,r
SPECIAL FEATURES • .···•· .. ":�.:.�.·._').�·�:
'

. .· .::,·· : . .

........... ·-......
KEY INTERLOCKS & INTERLOCKING

<�'
'DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT .••••
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE ............. ......•....... 31
.............. •..•• 32
� :
31
�
::"' ... :. . ''!'.;,.f..
-� <.'.·�-/�:/\�:>
- . ' {{
·.,/·'

GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICES -••• -

>

Ji,.!t
'·

.. .. -: �.·; ·.�·;:�-·�

; !�,f
·.·

�
;>,::R/)'tifrift.
d< - or'•-· tM ..,w - . � n-.w #a -nl Bk<- -Yi
'
�
·,· \.
:�\�·.:
·-·· ........ .
:·:; - .. � ·,: .. �· .;·.: :·, ·_.
,....... ..,

'.'·; )'.}]\�',��\
-<iJ<t
"

,··:·:
 ii'jal i aL >j I'i/1 4Oi's 0 t E\-t'

00 type M1:6 and TYPE MI-9

FOR
OIL AND AIR CIRCUr: BREAKERS
•.J . • '-'i.f'--'

general information
nrpi; km tJCnr pott urrAt. ci.*nKemsmjij
'• aadprctect
^ M^al Clad Switchgear
various is equipmentto
types of electrical control
apparatus and
power circuits. ClRC.nT TTPB iNTeaRU{>r« MAX.8Xn. COSRSNT • Fioass
BaSAIURS cAPAcirr • VOLTACS
The switchgear consists of one or more units KVA

which are mounted side by side and corjiected me PK-l'l. Ol

OUAt
U.COO ^ . coo t
chanically and electrically together to forma com FK-KJ u.ooo 5000 : 000*1200
plete switching equipment. Typical equiuments are "AM-J -30 Maqm M.COO 9000
shown in figures 1-2-3-4. 000*1100 1 7
•nfps wd
Mmt. CLAD KomMl,
The circuit breakers are easily removable to
provide maximum accessibUity for maintenai ce- cmcin' wa rvTtjmupT. max. akn. cuiuiairr ncoaa
with mmimum interruption of service. The switch- CApAcrrv
KVA
VOLTAOS
gear is designed to provide maximum safety to the FK-iS'>-100 cu 100.000 90OQ 690*1200
operator. All equipment is enclosed in grounded IJO mast 200.000 15000 000*1200 a

metal compartments. 350

JOC
250,000
500,000
15030

100,boo 5000 600*1200*2000 • <' T'

X'^The^
in equipment
the following is available
tables. in theratings iWed
For outdoorinstallation the
;so
£S0
150,000
uojm
5000
fiOOO
000*1200*2000
SStl{9M«,
<2 . v'

^me basic equipment Is built into a weatherproof AMrlS'SftO

Ukst • • "
looioo , 1200*2000
i t' t t>- J
housing as in Fig. 4 and 9. ' ooo. UOStSM '
- y

DESCRIPTfON
Each unit is madeup of a secondary enclosure
and a primary enclosure, as shown in Figures 5-6.
Secondary Enclngirra
_ The secondary enclosure is usually located at
the front or breaker withdrawal side ofthe unit. It
exists of a compartment with a hinged door upon
wiucn axemounted the necessary Instruments, con
trol Md prrtective devices. The terminal blocks,
fuse olTCks, and sonae control devices are mounted
^ide theMclosure onthe side sheets and a trough
is provided atthe top tocarry wiringbetweenunits.
When a^genumber of devices are required a sec-'
WJd enclosureis sometimes providedat the rear.
Primary Enclosnre
tr^fer truck, the Magne-Blast Breakers are
juippec with wheels.
The circuit breaker unit cannot be lowered from •
its connected position nor raised from its discon-'
nectedposition,until the breaker has been tripped.
This is accomplished by a mechanical interlock '
which trips the circuit breaker immediately upoa '
application of the operatinghandle or the starting of '
the*motor operated elevating device. This interlock
^so keeps the breaker in its tripped position imtU.
theconnectedposition is reached(when elevating) or "
until the test position is reached (when lowermg).' "^ ;''^ ^^
with thus arrangement, the circuit breakermuirt!^ : ;
stripped prior to any travel of the removable
menti A OOSltlve aton OrevenrtB
movable element when; Raised to its cmmsctediio^^
•'Bition,.:

':<0: The primly enclosure containsthe highvoltage
equipnient mid Connections arranged in compart-
mems to cmifine the 'effects<rf short circuksand so
minimize the damage caused.
Romavable Element
The removable element consists of a circuit
operating mechanism mcun-
ted direcJy on the breaker frame, a trlppisf^ In-
tie removable portion of the primary and
secondary disconnecting devices and necessary
control wxr^. OilCircuit Breakers are inserted or
^uhdrawn from the stationaryframe by mpanq of a
The secondary disconnecting device'confers I
are used for connecting outside control cifcund to
the circuit breaker solenoid coil, trip coil and auK-
iliary switches. These couplers make contact '
matically when the removable element is raised-to
the connected position. Control test jumpers are
fumisned wnich are plugged into these ctaiplers on
the stationary and remoi^le elements when It is da -
sired to operate the breakers in the tcstpositimi.
All removable elements furnished on a partic
ular requisition and of like design and ratings are
completely interchangeable one with the^.er. The
removable as well as the stationary elements ere
built with factory jigs and fixtures thus insuring in-
terchange-abiliiy, ^ ...

^ '!•' 3
•V-
 QBJ-3S890C Me^ Clad SwUchgear

•fT-^

M:

fcl'~V'r-'j"'^t. •.•jf' • :' -i- v.i'- '-•'•-"1=';

TYPE Hi-fi METAL CUD SW1TCH6EAR (90" ENCLOSURES)

'i.u;v« ^^.«. ', ^'1,,

.-/•t"''».•.* ••'Vr'*''

?b " •: ''^:b^:
I-''-' : ' #" ts-.'"'-
i- .; •'••'.'• • ' > i' ''V.''

FIG. 2
.. TYPE Hl-6 METAL CUO SWITCKfiEAR (98' ENCLOSURES)
. (26' tflDE)

'-.ift. .'< :y- '

 MetaJ Clad SwUclj^ap GEl-asSftOC

1
ff t;

I'fsrtaiw 1-:

h:i'..'>r,
l.: >'!; • i;.

g^'^S}?.'.-g
.••'•'••t'-yi-m- ,:s.-

f-W ' ' .V :..•/». . . . • '

V:A:;'

-.sUi V>dS
Fie. 3
TVPE MI-6 metal CLAD SWITCHGEAR (32-
(82* EKC.)
EKC.
(38* WIDE)

. - i. f'

• -•• • . jg,'-- • ."-•-i-»«~Ti. •• ; .>"-

a;v

v'g^'V-; .:-.-r..;i '

Vv ' .JJ"'*'' '1 '.
y:..--"-'Ui\i
- i . .<'; • iK •" • V l\

• ••• •>:^\.,..-. •

. "• . •. ^-. -'• ,'>V«?;. .•^:-.V, •

• rt'. iVi. '>5

JHITSUBSTATIOK ••,••• '•;

,. .1 • ' C ¥ - ' ^ • . ' W " 5 . » « 2 ' . ,

•-f-'-.i.L.ii'.i,; .,,.i., :gfl|gpgili§gi;-

 GE1-2&380C Metal Clad Switchgear
CROSS
CROSS TROUGH
TROUGH FOR
FOS PRlM&fJT SINGLE CCNOUCTOH
SSCONOftRY BUSES ft MAIN BUSES DISC. C.T. POTHEAOS-
INTERCONNECTIONS I ^ DEVICE i
m-UT;:r
1 •:
"n -• . ; \
1 A •
•-'1 ^

jF/i
ELEVATING y' .cr- 4 pf—:..J
-j jjJj
MECHANISM
k ' '

U»"lriS%lBSpA
K.pfcW'ftrT-'p: i
MECHANICAL
TRIP AND -
(4=smu
interlock

LIFTING lb--. ,. „—g

BRACKET Oi "?•••• ' i'. -• j'
I-
2a •• I ••
J--1 INTKMEOIATB
BARRIER
PLOOR guide RAILS SHtfipiNO CHANNEL
FIfl. 5
•' '/I. A.-' TYPE METAL CLAO SWlTCrlQEAR (SIDE VJEWj

•Pk'

iV- r''.
•-.

Ji,'
I: • "•
iy, ' i
Ky: W^ l_ .r^Pli "
pA ^ ,
if::'-'
Ji%«. '

%''L -i fe
y- i 1^'^
Lb •. f V' ,
'• '.-• '.Sa "•'.
V'S tL.::/:- ; ^

FIG. 6
TYPE MI-8 METAL CUD SWITCHGEAR (SIDE VIEW)
 : ,./T^62C2995)
.^X'-
jvStf

--y
^»' At««w 'VV'''_S- '(
T» W.**« WViU-x^

r_9lin^
^v-Qlec.vr.'i.c-.ilei
>, Wc-.U.-ij
ES3»rtC

Wc. IB C-i^fa m
»:»•- •.•• -•
»'/; 18
fAI'fr!-A(«
«THOO OF LIFnNG

LIFTING MEMK^? CHANNELS

OR EQUIVALENT TO BE
SUPPLIED BY PURCHASER

y^N2I£-
j^y ASHiepING MCMBEftS TORtK'A N a-
COlMPMrNT UNTIl fnUlPMFNl is
Secondery 3 < BOLTED TO fOUNOATiON-ThEN RlMUVEO-
6re«ker "erntv*!
ConduiCiXr Y F-AU. FLOOR 5TCELT0 BE FURNISHED
Side _ * BV PURCHASER

Truck. Guide p FirdsKed Floor Line

Sradi__E-'U!srCl.L
une t
ChAnriele, Should be set level with eachwhcr
•••lUlc.? .-.-Y --> —
and Should be level overtheir full length.
. ftECOMMtNOtO M&THOO
ShirnA

.,. Rough floor ihickneos ShdremfbrciriQ depends

FlniiKed Floor tine ,,;. on,loadtrw and other norm&i Factors, and should
-bedssignedih accordance with recommended practice.

Si'^i^R.ough hocr
ALTERNATE. ME.THOD
*^orE»liJj>.1mp.«"« '•«. JDirt
fl«>rSi*«L 6«.£-«i>
With Finiohjd n«>fir
Ai>4.Tha5.,Bc3in ^
LU«i

FI6. 7
INDOOR METAL QUO SWITCHGEAR INSTALLATiOH DETAILS • -.•••A....'|'.,.
 '.. ·: � ',\'r' -.,

i :-i;r Jar
(.{:�-=��521�CC 1-!��cl Cl:..ti S·, .d.tc ·
(.:'i?C'J.; .. 3;..-s:-�;� ..:!· El1:v:ltL,;:; !,1L·cb�nisf!! s:-ilPPING - UNPACKING - STORAGE
-r,·
'I 11 e elevann; mechanisr,.1 for e!eva.ti?g or low- Shippin_g_and 'Q.npacki..rur.
I ·,'

. . . �.J..
. •·: . \ · erµag the remo'1ablc cl•;mer.t to or ..rorn its connec-
. .� . ther tcd positior. su�ports the rem�':'able element in ei- - Every ca.s� �r crate.leaving the factory is plain··>?>:·\\{\� >
·.r. ·, , the operatin g or test positions. This mechan- . ly marked at convenient places with case_!!ymber,. ·· ·.··'· · .
. .
. : .· ism consists of heavy-cluty steel jack screws on
1. ><: :\�:which are carri�d nu�s
to SUPP.Ort the elevating car­
.!'.!.9.!!isi!_ion number,customer's or� front o !'ill1...,._ .
an,nvfie:1 Ior size anaother reasons1t is necess,arY
r
. .: · \:· · ·.:: .!,;,;�
<. :.,_ . ._>=". . ·
'' · ·:·.":{'.·:�::ringe. The carr1age1S so designed that the remov­ · · to dividH the equipment for shipment, with t�e� .. · ;J.\f;:c :
··: .·:<. :;'_able element can be readily inserted or withdrawn
. :: after the carriage has been lowered to the discon­
number of the portion of equipment enclosed m � .·, A��; >>:
.·· . , shipping case. . .:. :.:�.."�i'.JS!'.:f'
· · nected pos1tlon without necessitatingthe removal of .. �·,/:<,� ;.r:})t/;.
•: .any bolts, nuts or screws. The .mechanism causes. . Tho contents of each packago of the c,hipment �.: :f.{. \'�}\?
·. ·: ... � . :· the brea.kor to trip 11a soon as the ralamg or lower· are listEd in the Packing Details. Thi.$ Ust is for .....
, , .... , ,:',
:·: · intf op 11:ration b_egins.and bolds the tripping mecha- .. warded \'lith the shipment, pacl,{ed in one of the c�es( . . · · ·;. : �-:(.·
·.;.,._.:·:::, tsrn:bl·. this posiUon·until·the .break.er reaches ei- · .
' · · ·:/· · 1: •

The case is especially marked and its number c. an .

) ;' •\•,: ,,·/ the
:I ·.•:·..,(1<·i.:··:.;-. ·r the connected.or test positions. ..· also be obtained from the Memorandum of Shipment� . . · &;:;�'. :;.
-:\f': '((.
1

: '. ·-.· '. ·. _ ,. · -
::·:. :'(<::' · :.Guide·.r.u1sare built into.the elevating mecha-
. .; . . · isin frame to guide the transfer truck and (or) re-
:'.':�., . moval breaker element into correct position before
: the breaker is raised into the operating position by
':>�i .' .,_ :: . mearts of the . elevating mechanism.
: . The elevating mechanism i s operated by a hand
;. · · crank. · On eqµipments using the large breakers (36"
wide) the mechanism is motor operated to increase
. the speed of .operation. ·
. ·,;. , , Primary Disconnecting Oev1ce (Fig. 34)
. · · ,: ,. mediate inspection should be.made for any darn�:J:"::··�_;{!;::, �\'·:·:
.,,::} , ·:; : . ' · , The primary disconnecting devices utilize. sil•
/).· · \\ .ver to silver contacts toinsure againstreduction of
·
: 'i{C:.. •. 'Cutr,ent car-rying capacity due to oxidation of the con-
. , .-tact' ·surfaces. These contacts are
· ·
sure line contact tube and socke design, the tube be- · · .tified promptly. Information·as to damaged. pail&;: : · · .::.:/ ·: S::.
f
When unpacking to avoid the loss·of sniall part&, the. ; .·;.: ·: ·:/;·
contents of ea.ch case should be carefully checked :.:,.· ,i/;:";'" c:.
against the Packing Details befor� discarding the ·:',: \)t{)'.
packing material. Notify the nearest General Elec�. ·':i _1::,:p[/'<
tric company representative at once.ii anyshortage· \:· I:t;i�\;·
of material 1s discover�d. ··. :· ·-'.· .··: ;. · ·-
All e l e in e n t s before leaving the factory are·
carefully inspected and packed byworkm�n experi· '
· \}\::· : _·:;,:.\·\\l.,:­
. enced in the proper handling and packing:of electri�.: /. :,,...;. y,·
cal equipment. Upon receipt of anyapparatus an un• . \..:. ;:::p;:.//!
·. _ sustained while enroute. If injury is evident _ or an··,··,,}s-:·;')',:':<, . -::
·:>
. indication of rough handling is visible. a ,claim for. ,:::":\/f;t('!:­
damage should be filed at once With thetransporta..;:. ,£:·'.t::)\f{>
of the high pres· . . tion company and the General Electric.Company no�. . ·:: ·;-,,· ···\;-.° · ·

ing backed up by. heavy garter springs to insure con- : · part number, case number requisition number, etc., , : ··., /t,'!'lf.:·(�.:i
: tact pressure. should accompany.the claim.
·
· .· : ,. · ..,;· .\
1.:. .
�:: ;1·-:t·/
,::Ji.U{;..:.9omi2a�fil Set screws are placed in all door latches (F.J.g.·:� :,:;:'.·:.,· .·::\ ·'.
8) to prevent doors fromaccidentallyopeningdw·mg"'' ,· · · ·.
\.''..:-·::: The main buses are enclosed in a metal com­
.· partment with removable front and top covers to
shipment and installation. These should be remove� · ·..
and discarded when the •equipment iS per�,'' · .-.
provide accessibility. The covers have louvers for .. located. ·, .

.
ventilating the compartment.
1'he bus is supponed by an insulating material
• •
. ' ' : ; ,
·;
}:;f:t;;
. .•. . ·• , t ::-. : ifJf5 v:: · , ., . ·. · ;.}:}�tfK;�
__,,__ SET SCREW ·. . • . . . .. , ,t,,�,),
whieh is practically impervious to moisture,· and a
excellent diel�ric. ·
.. The bus insulation is molded on the bars ex-
' . : . ·-Cept at the joints where the insulation is completed· · ,..J1�·· . 'J',:i:,,·:·�· ·,,-;, •'•,Y. ·. ··,';•':
.-.1j•....-- . .f'.\:•{�i·
, , •,A .,.: ��..,..:':"/·},� (";l· l�l-· t�·\'-�: .�J{!· · . ;··,· ·,::• '�.•;\.,. : • ,,,,.
1:•'.1;;�·
, :�·�:�1; __..
n .-
·., by means o! compound filled boxes. ,•,1,J.t<!f:�f :��, \;.:.t•:�t!',..�fl�" :;',� , : ., �,,;� ;�.rj'":;/

. ·-�. ·. . rJ: �.;,// :?f(i/ )�Y:f·�·/�t;· . . . ·.�·- �:. ·._. :};\:}&f

, · ·current· Transformer and Cable Compartment
• • ,; ', • I �. • ,•.;- �
:.
• • ,
-a .. .• · ;'j,..;,�
.... .. • i'. '
.. -.,. :'
•
.. •, •.•,. •··•.•
••�. " •.....

. ·. -'LATCH .. -...0,t
J, ' .. ' j f"• •
�

. . The current transformers are m oun t e d in a · · ... JG: ·� ... .

·compartment isolated fr o m ·t h e other equipment•.
t. • • ,:. 1- ·,.. .. r-: ... , • .. 1 • • ·• ,J • '" "' !· .;...s{t:i.-:·> 'I;. '.rt��

'.\· ;·.i��f/{{:2;?\;; :.:'}. \.'.\? ?\frttr-i,

. '.:i yr. . ·. : >\':': <';":tf. ·• · . c'.{t;u:. �_ .�-_'·:'..�,_:·•.�,_'.•·.' : _
. .- . . · . Pro�sion is made in this compartment for connec- .
: .,,: {:.., '. ,tmg the purchaser's. primary cable by means of pct· .
_(?/�i-
· . ·::':?� -1',,J)� ��
..,,...:.. (,<,·. ·.:.:, ..'.'·?'.,';,, :·< .. · :: �- .· ·, :J,;:: ::.;•-..!: ,:· · �:·· ,. i.,{·1 \itt
4 ·� � ·�· . .. ;..o
· ·, · •
!·a1·:,�

·.'.'"'',,; . heads r lampt

• '• , ,:. ,' ···� ... -,.•· •• �4 1 } \i .•.

} } / ·: : o' c · ; • '.' ype .1 terminals · :: ···r-'··'

· ....... ,:'. · ·� ·· '-� · '�,··, ·· ·. · '., ..
•

• . ' ' ;&

:·.{ :· '.'- ·.: • _ , . •• , ,'
i,;.
.· : ; :., .. Pot�ial T�..w-.me.!"� CoJnP.�1!1�1)! •
r�{.. '. . . Potential transformers are located in a com·

., ,.. ;/'. .18 ). ... ·..,

·" • .> ·partment above. the current transformers or in a
.separate unit adjacent to the breaker units.

. . ;:,,- . ·. : . \;,i. ' t.�{, -�;}:t

The transformers are :nounted on a movable
support equipped with primary :1,,c'. secondary dls­
connecti.'1:; devices. When the potential transform­
ers r\re cilsccv-mected they.are at a safe striking dis·
�·�
ta.nceJrom alllive parts o!the switchgear. In addi •
. ·��::?& .tion a grounding_ device is provided which contacts..
· � the fuses when t:ie potential transformers are dis·
. : connected,effectively discharging the transformers.
/in this position the transformer fuses may be safely
1
.
. FIG. i ·a . , .. :

OOOR, LATCH LOCK I mt SeaElf .

removed and replaced. · • I� :.,_.:-� • •

8· . :;�.

"HannUnT trndoor SaiUDinant)
Bti'ore vmcrating, ilu: eqmpaier.£ may be moved
by crane with slings under the skids. li crane
facilities axe not available rollers under the skids
may be used.
After tmcrating, the equipment should be han
dled as shown in Fig. 7. The longitudinal channels
tie me group of units together to prevent distortion
of the structure during shipment and handling, and
therefore should not be removed until the units are
permanentlybolted to the station floor. The lateral
or lifting channels are shipped separately and must
be bolted to the longitudinal channels before at
tempting to lift a group of units. The door niust be
hold open by the door stops in those units where the
lifting channels are assembled. If crane facilities
are not available, jacks may be applied under the
lifting channels to raise or lower^ and rollers used
to move the equipment.
Handling (Outdoor EcuiomentV
Methods of handling outdoor equipment are
shown in Fig. 9. After the equipment is in place,
the lifting plates should be removed and reassem
bled, "turned in", so that passageway at the ends of
( the equipment will not be obstructed.
•Storage
If it isnecessary to store the equipment for any
length of time, the following precautions should be :
taken to prev^ corrosion:-
• a-
1. Uncrate the equipment.
2. Cover Important parts such as jack screws,
gears and chain of lifting mechanism, linkage
and movingmachlne finished parts with a heavy
oil or grease.
3. Store in a clean, dry place with a moderate tern- ;
perature ai^ cover with a suitable canvas to pre
vent deposit of dirt or other foreign substances
upon movable parts and electrlcalcontact sur
faces.
INSTALLATION
Before any installation work is done consult
and study all drawings furnished by the General
Electric Company for the particular requisition.
These drawinginclude arrangement drawings, wir
ing and elemen^ry diagrams and a summary of the
\y:'
equipm^.
Location
The recommended aisle, space required at the
front and at the rear of the equipment is shown on
the floor plan drawing fimnished for the particular
r^uisltion. Tte space at the front must be suffi- •
cient to permit the insertion and withdrawal of the
circuit brealcers, and their transfer to other units.
The space at the rear must be sufficient for in
stallation of cables, for inspection and maintenance
^'r*' ^
Metal Clad Switchgear GEI-25S90C
a:idon iomc equipments to draw out potential trans-
fornie;-a.
Preparation of Floor Anchoring (Indoor
Equipment)
vent
structi impact stress;,cht^^
Suitable means must be provided by tho lnir" '
chaser for anchoring the equipment to the floor*;:
is essential that the floor be level to avoiadhstdr- ^
tion of the switchgear strticture, and the equlpment;-;K^
be completely aligned prior to final anchoru^. tile" ^
recommendedfloor coimtiructlon isshown to Blgure,',i;-'(i'J5.
7. The floor channels niust be level and stralght:;c?A^V-^^^^^^^
with respect to each other. Steel shims should o© ' -'
used for final leveling of the switchgear if necesr •; v '
sary. Care should be taken to provide a smooth, ( -
hard and level floor under and in front of the units "-v ^
to facilitate installation and removal of thebreaker^ •
The rear, or swivel wheels of the breaker and ths -
transfer truck will roll on the floor rather than the , •
unit giiide rails. If the floor is not level and fliish S^
with th<5 floor channels, it will be difficult tp handle
the breaker because it will not be levelwith
to the stationary element. *
The anchor bolts must be located aecordUng-te
the floor plan drawing furnished for the partioilar
requisition.
^ Anothermethod ofanchoringoftenused
ing. A tack weld Is substituted for an aachpir bolt
in each Ipcation,
Provision should be made in the floor for v
duits for primary and secondary cables, locatedas'
shown on the floor plan drawing furnished for the i
particular requisition. If-deSfred,
be installed before the switchgear. Con^iiitjiiT^ttqn-•
Should begiven toconduits which might bereaoired .
for futxire connections. •
Preparation of Foxm^tion— fOofdoor •
Equipment^ ——— •
• _ Recommendations for the foundations for out
dooreqviipment aregiven in Figure 9. Primaryand
secondary conduits should be installed in accord
ance with the requisition drawings, before. thQe<p^g*:
ment is put into place. '7
' Putting the Units in Place ' •(.
After the. floor has been prraored movetboi;:
equipment into place by the meth(w desorlbed^bove ' V
under "Handling". • —^
When the equipment Is shipped Is two or mpre .
sections, the sections must beboUed together witb
the spacers, which are furnlshet^ assentoled be---
tween the units. These spacers are requlrM to
maintain the reqtiired distance between the center
lines of the units as indlcatod on the floor plaik'
' ... "• 7
 GEi"2539CC Iiuetai Clad Switchgcar
^:olu3 .i.re '^rovictcci ir. the strui'.iurs for the bolts.
Whcr.several units areshipped from the factory as
0. gror.p, ti-,c spacers are already installed and the
bolting at inataiiaVjftn should be done in the same
manner.
The eqtilpment should b e completely aligned
and securely fastened to the floor by anchor bolts
or welding and the shipping channels removed.
. When outdoor equipments are shipped in more
than one section, the joint in the roof between sec
tions must be weather-proofed. Apply G.E, 4*1201
Glyptal cement to the gaskets v/hich are furnished
and assemble the gasket between tlie roof flanges
and bolt together. See Fig. 37, Assembly C. Joints
between transformer throats and the switchgear
should be weather-proofed In the same manner.
(Figure 11).
Tandem Lock for Outdoor Unite
Outdoor Metal Clad Eqiiipments v/ithmore than
one unit are provided with a tandem locking ar-
. rangement which makes It necessary to padlock
only one door on each side. (In exceptionally long
installations two or more locl^ may berequired on
each side). The unit containing the operating arm
of the tandem lock is clearly marked on the draw
ings andalso by n^meplate on the equipment itself.
Before anydoor in the equipment can be open
ed it is necessary to open the paddpcked door and
operate the tandem locking arm to the open posi
tion. In locking the equipment the reverse proced
ure should be used.
Where it is desired toseparately lockany par
ticular doer, the ^dem lock can be disconnected
in that unit by unbolting a connecting clip between
the tandem bar and the locking bar, and a separate
padlock used on that door.
Potential Transformer Compartment
Two 3/8" bolts are placed on the imd&rside of
the track to remove the weight of the rollout car-
during shipment. These bolts
should be removed-after the equipment is la place.
Installation of Bus Bars
Where bus bar connections are made to join
poups or separate units together, proceed as fol
lows:
(a) Remove compartment covers.
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars together, see
Fig. 10. Clean silvered contacts with carbon
tetrachloride. Where carbon tetrachloride does
not completely remove stains, use Silver polish.
Do not use sand-paper.
(c) Complete the taping of the vertical riser bars
u-sing varnished cambric tape (2/Z lap) stopping
the tape at the bus bar. If the riser bars con
nect to the bus from below,sufficient tape should
beadded to prevenfcompound leakagewhen fUl-
^ .10
ing. Apply a layer of cotton tape (1/2 lap) over
the varnished cambric tape, stopping the cotton
tape just inside molded splice cover. 0)
(d) Place molded covers around the bolted splice
joints. Note that compound filling space is at
top of joint, and add filler pieces furnished for
the purpose to the bottom of box and around bus'
bar Liminatlons (Fig. 10) to prevent compound,
leakage while filling. Duxseal shouldbe p/aced"
over the joints to make the box free of leate
while filling. The duxsool should be removed
after the compound has set. O.K. #860 cordr
should be used to hold the molded parts secure- -
ly in place. >^ \
(e) Heat G.E, #1347 compound (fUmished) to at^
proximately 200PC. Avoid overheating &e com
pound for the dielectric stoength may be ser
iously affected. Pour the compound into the
molded covers intermittently, allowing an inter
val of cooling to prevent formation of gas or air
pocke^.s. The final pouring should be level with
the to3ofthe box and should be done on^ after
due allowance for shrinkage is made,
(f) Paint the exposed cottontape on vertical riser
bars \tith G.E. #1201 varnish, for 15 KV equip
ments and G.E. #462 varnish for 5 Ky equip-
ments.
(g)In unit substations, the connection bars should
be assembled in the Transition Compar^^t
(Fig. 11) and the connections at the Tr^fdrxd-
er Terminals taped and painted as indicated
above. The conduit for secondary circuits-
should also beassembledin the Transition Com- ;
partment.
Primary Cables
Before any primary cable connections are
mado. thi} cables should be identified to indicate'
their pha.«:e relationship with the switchgear con .A'. '
nections. This is necessary to insure that the con
nections are made so that motors will rotate in the" ;.
proper direction, and that the phase rotatioh ls the;; v ./ ^
same when typmg two different sources
:;:together.-. , ,-
There are two common methods of
mary.cable connections: "x-aaiigpri.
(a) Potheads, see Fig. 12, are used when It Is de-
sired to hermetically seal the end of the cable u:/-:
/ to make a moisture proof connection between
the cable and the switchgear copper. A pothead
mso prevents seeping ofoil flrom the end of Oil
impregnated varnish cambric or paperinsulated
cable. .
(b) Clamp typeterminalsandwiping sleeve or cable
clamp.
In all cases carefully follow the cable manu^
facturar's recommendations for in^taUation of the
type of cable being used,as weU as thainateu^iotis^' ' A
contained'herein. - ' .
y_.
...
 ^ :>-s^(TT-628a837); '

. ...-^ .:-:FI6v9, / ,v--,

OUTDOOR METAL CLAD SKITCH6EAR IHSTALLATIOH DETAILS

.:r.-V V •- •''••••-,>-;i-.rtz
 apply DUX5EAL Ar?GU«D 'BO'A JOiMTA"
To MAKE LEhK P/?OOF
INSULATION
While pilunc w th comrouno. 0:'
BOX NliuXJEflL To JffP ffet^OVSP.
BUS BAR BUS BAR ^VERDCAl. RIStR
iNSuurio^ rK' INSULAriOW

ff-n mn,

PLATE
SECTION "NX*
bUSBA BUS BAR^
CORD BINDER
VERTICAL -YARNtSHEP.
CONNECTING CAMBRIC COTTON
RISER TAPE
FILLER BETWEEN
BUS BARS
"T? SPLICE 5-7
PLATE. tS plate r~^ y-"* p'ii Ryp<<K
I

FILLER
between
rQ (Dm
ft
I .
BUS BARS
S.OC
vertical
iser ' iw"

VARNISH
BOTTOM
girrmy
-TAPE SECTION THROUGH
•SECCrOM.lUA S£cnnii-'5VA" ^3 CONNECTUUi ^ I

BUS BA

BUS BAR ^if

/ -s
/m f?"r>
' ' " " 'n 1" •' I
) '
!r •

Hf
3. S
'••• ti-

BUS BAr pLAN VrESV.'BB"

SECTION AA
END CONNECTION
2 VERTICAL RISERS

F16. 10 \
METHOD OF MAKIH6 BUS BAR CONNECTIOHS
•12
 *v • ;• • •

>L--

: ;."5
•\ >-

'a f -f«.v
•="«- i.- -5^
K-i-i*?. 3-
•»'•=%
^r ^
Vij,

>•"'; 'cX'i'^:cV^r.'•>•!] -•' \f-:U)-v;.i'' /V.li

.||||:||| te|y fiir lllU^KETS^' 1 ^GASKETS:

t'-, • •-"&• "Lgrouwd

GROUMO . L E A D S . : ; ' •
GECONOARY;GOi4NECT10NSv-V;-;i;-^;-- ',:T| "
•>. SKWA'i*l>«o«,iri •,<L4>.2^ '«
••'.• •- :--r -

FI6. II "
UHIT SUSSTATiOH TRAKSlTIOM COMPARTISMT

V*- . ^

wV*'' ' ;•: ^t--'

'''' '^'V,' "^ **''
 l-'Sl

G. 12
ETAL CUD SWITCHGEAR
 Metal Clad Swttchgear GEI-253B0C

"WTiRsr--,

•J- ..•;^.ja-^-ii"' > . fv.'J5aLZj&£Z.!5 ^'> 1

Wf-
'i'/fti.R'- :^•"VjT.'sy •; rps •*•• r TrTT"*w I

< > j,.. •

m^Mh
, • yni ^'i'
'• . • '{' ••••.
-.
I •r*'T^/
1- ,» •; ; ^ir , • ' IC-
•-•: :i!. K.;
--.- . / '-yi:
' ••; .;•) .wu-,
i Uv;;>:J,;?^^'-v:3 f .• jtW-g—• v.'.V'••

; i •' « r
'Miv'*; ♦

-i-- --iv' i'.;:. .' • M,

'j ./''*•• 1 ^.. t

•. :f!•'?'••-• "- --' ---, ---'••.'.;; *.4^1?^

-^.•rrrrT'f;^^
r.'-i •.•'.:-r'f%-

i :., - - -•••iO'm.

FiG. IS FIG« HI S\

•es.-j>v-4

>-rv(?.. •»v
•-8Fi.-»irB»i •»--.'S'>!fe>w |UtJi,.i»>».-'T-. ., y :•••., ••<•••;

I'lH ^
. n.m r
.: ..KiWv" . Aij

V
'I '''
. »*. •

[•> /I i f •:' 't'^ .'

fe '-.i.-y . •^' • •••'^M-.-:'
';vq-
» s v>^
-L^ i^- ir:--y^-o:v-W.''-yi:

' - *. • . • • I V . t' , CP r Pi

FiG. IS Fi6. 16
 GEr-.25390C Metal Clad Swltcbgear
Insti..-)3tM)n cf Pof-heada
Potheacia are mounted on an adapter plate ex
tending across the width of the metal clad unii as
shora ia fig. 13. The adapter plate is split in two
parts to facilitate the installation of the pothesdis.
^
st^lation o.. a three<i8scriptlon
coiductorapplies to the
lead sheathed in-
cable
•v;lth a wiping sleeve cable entrance fitting on the
, pothead. This is the type most generally used, in-
• Btjwctiona for installationaf othertypeare included
in the tejct lollowing.
<a) Hemov® the wiping sleevefrom the pothead and
cut the tapered end at a point where the cable
will enter it freely, and file oH sharp edges,
thesleevebyapplyiagfluxanddlppiaginncit sol-
dor. Temporily assemble the wipingsleeve and
gasket on the pothead. .
'.v . >: f '
FIG. 17
0)) Trainthe cable in front ofthe pothead allowing
it to extend about twoiaches above the top of the
porcelain bushings. When training the cable
handle with care and avoid sharp bending which
might damage the Lnsulation. Mark a point ont he
lead sheath c: the cable about 1-1/2 Iziches above
the bottom of the wiping sleeve.
(c) Remove the pothead from the unit, and slip the
wiping sleeve and its gasket over the cable as
shown In Figure 14,
h-. l'»
:• i;.'-' v''"
- * , 'f
% <g ,
IJ- rPB .•••
•i_• • -A'• • •
-
_
,y.uv, t;
••'•••.V 'Wa'
FIG. 18
(d) Remove the lead sheath from the cable to the
pointmarked in operation "b', as shown in Flgr •
ures isandlG. Proceed as follows: First, mase
a cut aroundthe cable halfttvoughthesheath at'
the reference point. Second, split the sheath-
lengthwise between the cut and the cable and.
holding the cutting tool at an angle to the cable'
radius to avoid damaging the Insulatiai. Third,
reniovethesheathbycatchingthe split edge with
plicTS and pulling directly away from the cable
axi;>.
Clean and tin the outside of the lead sheath for
about 3 inches and bell out the end of the lead
sheath.
(e) Renove the belt andinterphase Insulation down
towithinl 1/2 inchesoftbeleadsheathasshown -
In Figure 17. Thelastfewlayersshouldbe tmm
off to avoid damaging the individual conductor ' •'
insulation. Toreiriorceandprotectthecc^uc-. :
tor insulation, wrap two layers of half lapped -
variilshedcambrictapeoverthe factory Insua- -
tion.
,(f) Place pothead body over cable and then fan out ^
the conductors, into approximately thefinal po
sition, as shown in Figure 18. The middle con
duct or should bebcwed slightly for final adfuirt-
ment of length. Avoid sharp bends and damage
to tlie insulation, particularly at the crotch.
For system voltage above 7500 volts it is recom
mended that stress relief cones be built up when
 Metid Clad Switchg^r GEX-25300C
sir.iiJe conciuctcr or cii.-ciu.t.ur •i.'-deldcd
cable is liHOd,...Construct stroia rcliui cones
I." icccrdance with therecomincr.diLtions oi the
cable nunufacturer. On lower voltage cables, m
belling out the end of the lead sheath, ordinarily
provides sufficient stress relief.

(h) Bolt pothead body to metal clad adapter plate.

Shaoe conductors into finalpositlonthen cut off
• : each conductor, distance "JC',Fig. 12, above the
pothead body,
(i) Remove?'oflnsulationfromtheendofeach con •••,;, ; >' V ' .•' • ' 1^'' '.•
ductor andassemble pothead terminals as shown
, in Figures 12 and 21. Potheads are furnished
. ;.with standard rou,id cable solderless lugs If •?l
sector cables are used the terminals should be
changed to the solder tyoe.

•>•..•; iir.::. r
, -TV

i.l'- -r-rv
Aii'^ fir.,;

''^

Fifl. 20
.V. £B5 -"v;i. . Ky,
•l-H

in ®®We,assh^
• """Pi'xa
I, ' iHfrtffhi ^ operation.
• UseasultablefluxtofacT' 'r ,V >
•
1:V^ illtate the wiping
V>' .

^n/flh . fUlingplugin
P>P®Pl"?s the studs.
inthetop of the potheadInsert
body '
.'...-.A kV r firw 1 " the filling hole, of suf-

Heat #J 27 compound to the pouring temoera-

ture (les Degree C). Do not ovefheaf '
higher temperatures may Injure cable
FIQc is ^si^Uon and also result in exceLive sh?S-
^eof tnecompound while cooling Before fin-
warmpothead body toprevStsSfiercWU- '
«onofcompound
of air vol^.which
The may result
potoead may be warSJtd • • -
• Cement all gasSs UkbS^a°JL^fh nodirect heat reaches
potheadthepo^
body
• "•
paSiaituS!^^®
- -r
K?^', <^®"»Press gaskets by a
successively until the
• fowl piuc,. until the
?""® terminal studs are
.. tact nut in place. See Figures 20 and 21. pot head studs.
a^d on thi°Ffi
and tne filling^blowtorch on theair
pipe to prevent pothead
voidsbody
and •

.• ,A • *

17>:- -bS.
• f •'
 "• ^-i.:-v.-''r

GE2-c53S'&C '^stal Glad SCTiJcigear

•v-f ••
•r.^i'

V •;• li2\--» »'«. • •.. • ^•. •--:. * "V* •• •-' :,-M f','-' i" ;>. •Vi-i : -u.

0Mi 18^8115'^^
• '''Q- 22 •

•''''''liisli;
\ \\ ' ' V. " ' / \' >

ir-•i®^"•:

:-:v

• " .' .V5 . •

'%ibik-='^i}:'l
: r.->rr»v< - ••

vr^-; Fia» 23
-• --• ••*--••' ••'•> 1 ,'\i-ii,"- 'if.'ti'r'r I .- ^, ' '•'
• •- • " -"•: "•• • . • •:• £;••• :':-';KSv^.:'- #^'V:?
Q. 'aJi-;•>
FIG. ••,; •• • ;• :•;
•i' - ,

u •••:;. ,--5^ Si' •

••/"v
•-'. - -• 'i-.
 •:i2l feitJihgear GE;-2539CC

clogging. When iaii insert pipe piags u -cop of

scuds to trap compound in the porceiam insula
tors. Continue pouring compound while the pot-
r head is cooling to fill air voids which might form
•while the compound is cooling.
Whenthe pothead has cooled, remove filling pipe ' tv-.j. %!
and insert plug. Clean offcompoundwhich might
have overflowed on the outside of porcelal^.
Retightenall bolts to be sure thatall Joints are
tight.
t", '
(xa) Assemble pothead connection bars, see Figure
;2S,and;i2^^
(1) Fill all cavities around bolts and nuts with
iiiiSlililii®
"Duxseai" compoundtoform smooth surface
for taping, thus preventing air voids. This
compound is not an insulating medium and
should not be used for that purpose.
(2) Wrap with varnished cambric tape, G.£.
U992, as shown In Fig. 2S, the number of r-
layers depending on the voltage rating of
the equipment. Where there are sharp an
gles apply additional layers to obtain the
equivalent of the insulation of the flat sur
faces.

(3) Over the varnished cambric tape apply one

layer ofwhitecc^on t^e, half lay, as a bind-
• / er.' • ,

(4) Overthe white cotton tapebrush a good coat

of G.E, #462 black varnish for 5KV. equip
ments, or G.E. #1201 red Glyptalfor 15KV.
equipments.
-'Cable Entrances other than Wiping sippw
Stufflngb03Ccableentrancefittings,Flg. 26, are
used for non-lead covered cable, and are installed
asfoUpws. Assemble stuffing boxonpothead. Wrap
p-aphite cordpacklngaround thecableandcompress
by screwing toe gland nut into the stuffing box.
A combination clamping ring and stuffing box,
Figure 27, is sometimesfurnishedinstead of a wip
ing sleeve for lead covered cables. This fitting is
installed as follows. Wrap graphite cord packing
around cable and compress by screwing glandnut
. into stuffing bcHc. Bell over lead sheath and notch the
expose screw holes. (Note the openings in
the fitting below the notches, which permit com
pound to reach, the sheath and seal any splits which
mightoccur whilebellingover andnotching). Clamp
lead
Leavesheath
aboutwith ringofand
1-1/2' belttrim off sheath smoothly^
insulation above the
clamping ring.
Single Conductor Potheads
The procedure for installation of single con-
ductor potheads is in general the same and des-
cribeci for three conductor potheads.
Connection of Control Cables
When controlconduits enterthe unit .from below
conduit should not extend more than 4 inches
FIG. 25
above the floor. The control cables may be pulled
through the conduits before or after, the switchgear-
is installed whichever,is more convenient. .
Connecttoe cables to the terminal blocks in ac
cordance with toe wiring diagrams furnished for the
requisition.
'.'t
If the control conduits enter from above, drill
the top andbottomcovers of the front enclosure wir-
Ing trough to suit toe conduits. Fasten the conduits
With locknv.ts to the l^bttotn covor*
The cablesfrom the controlpowersource to the
svdtcligear shouldbe large enoughto avoid excessive-
volt^e dropwhen thecircuit brewers are operated.
See testing instructions. • > ,
Check over all screws and nuts connectinff the "
controlwlringtomakesurethathonehavebeenl^-'
ened in shipment. - «
Installation-of nrmind Bub
The ground bus is shipped separate from the ~
equipment. Thebars shouldbe boltedin place In the
rear of the equipment after the shipping channels
have been removed, using the same holes in the
frame which are used for fastening the shippinc'
channels, " ,
Theswltchge^ groundbus mustbe connected to
the station ground bus bya conductor havii^ acur-

IS
 • ;">4.j3.k:c Clad Switch^ear

n"

, .,. -O'
o .•

w .

R.'r'

FiQ, 26 FIG. 27
STUFFING BOX CLAMPING RING AND STUFFING BOX
rent carrying capacity equal to that of the switcngear Place the breaker on the transfer truck, except
veryimportant
be ad^uately grounded, that theeqiiip^nt
to protect the operator where breaker is provided with wheels, (see v.; 1

irom injury when short circuits or other abnormal Figures 30 31 32, 33) adjusting it so-tliit the
•occurrences take place^and to insure that allparts bottom of the breaker fits into the guides pro
ofUie^uipment, other thanliveparts,are at ground vided on the truck platform for centering. Rub
pocontiu*
a sciall amountof Sovarex, LI (Socony Vacuum) •m
on the silvered portion of the breaker studs to'
. Installation of Exhaust Pinfafr form a thin coating for contacting purposes.''
4. Lower the elevating mechanism lifting brackets,
for oil'circuit breakers is bymeansof the crank,untU the liftingbracked
completely assembled at the factory except where are down against the lower stop bolts dntlw^
the^uipment IS splitfor shipment. To completethe frame. The breaker shouldthen enter thehous- •1^!"
mg freely. Thelower stcpb^ts canbeadjusted
- ^ •ww*** M* A . u necessary to allow the breaker to enter the? r '

hou.sing. Push thebreaker Into thehousinguntil

Installation of Circuit Breaker Remtwahio Element it rests against the stt^ at the rear of the ele^-
"•f:-

• 1* Hcfore /sv* xi..

vatlngmechanism frame. This top has been ad^;
justed at the factory so that the breaker will be '
in the correct position relative to the lifting
brackets. Raise the lifting brackets until the
lifted clear of the transfer truck.',
interlockdevice is given inparagraph 7 below.
on the lifting brackets.
^re^ers must be fUled with oU in . 5. Carefully raise the breaker to the connected
' ^r°®"?2nce with directions in the breaker in- . position - where the breaker plate or support
soUdly meets the upper stop bolts on the frame
• loosened orbecome
to make sure thatduring
disengaged no parts have
transit. and then lower and remove it from the unit. .. :

When elevating, note that breaker studs center

with respect to the stationary disconnecting de
IrA ^ accurately leveled vice or injury to the contacts may result/
adfusti^f^- n f should need no 6 (a) ^pMitne contact surfaces ofbotnthe:
er n- mfSl* ^°°®^."^staIlorremovethe break-
is <^e^ ^ adjustments unless the breaker breakerstuds and the stationary disconnec
ting devices. ;

SO

' •' • *•

P-. V'
 Metal Ciad Switchgear GEI-25390C

K>2-5oXr\l-C0\leG.
WlTW SIMGLE COAT OF CCTTTOt^l TAPE
0F^4<32 black
• varnish rorroA/tape HMD OF V.CTAPE
AdUWD

FOE ISOOOV-O
WITH SINGLE CO«T
0F*J20l BED GLYPTAL v.c.instape

'i/
COXTOKi
ppVE/e taps

s-iSsSRi!?-
INSULATION INSULATION UYERS
LEVEL V.C." COTTON
TAPE ; " !>
" r "'
5000 V. 4 1
't*

15000 V.
,

7 1

V.C. IS BUCK VARNISHED CLOTH (CAM8RIC) TAPE i©92 WIDTH li"

THICKNESS 0.012 COTTON TAPE IS WHITE G.E. 650-116 TODTH 11/2"
"ONE UYER (WOUND 2/3 UP)' REQU!RES 3 TURNS AROUND BAR IN ONE.
WIDTH OF TAPE. THE THICKNESS OF ONE UYER IS 3 TIMES THE
. , THICKNE^ OF THE TAPE. v •; 'K'r^yKtl-

y(•••,

iilH j'.

FIG. 28

: •: ^I
IKSULATIOH OF COHNECTIOM BARS

• ' ' * I.--' 1 . . ' t

-Kr.hv, 'u
 W!f-: tft' .

stK-c-.

^2£?0^3?W;

li m
EXHAUST ADAPTER
OPEN ELBOW NOT THREADED
U

RIGHT HAND UNIT INTERMEDIATE UNIT LEFT HAND UNIT

h VIEW LOOKING FROM SIDE OPPOSITE BREAKER MECHANISM
+

FIG. 29
METAL CLAO EXHAUST PIPE

. .-•-i;-' " '-tv- --'V

' .V'" '

• iC

P- • ' •'
':\'H.-y'''- ''••-''•"-•'a'"".
H"'.
•. 2-

liliB-^n^
i>«rr--.CX%S=^.. - T--->-C

' >'r •• '*.. *-
eEl-25S90C Metal Clad SwJtchi^&ar
1^1 /^!
•T- :" f
f-v V -tpptp:.;.
J:;' vr--;:4fi^y
:••-••• -rv,-.- • i-^
FIG. 32 ^
91L CIRCUIT BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMEHT
0)) Each s^mentol the stationary disconnect
ing device should make a heavy impression
in the Sovarex LI on the brcaicer studs.
(c) The wipe of the breaker stud inside the sta
tionary disconnecting device, as indicated by
the Sovarex H, should be 7/8" (3/4" for the
tube. This Indicates that the breaker studs
contacted at the full pressure center of the
silver band on the stationary disconnecting
device. The maximum permissable varia
tion in tite wipe is 3/32".
(d) Should Uie inspection of the contacts show
that the breaker is not being raised to the
properpositionreadjusttheupperstop bolts
to raiseor lower the breaker to the proper
• location. Lock thestop bolts in the new po
sition.
(e) Ifproper contacting cannot heattained bythe
above methods, i: is necessary to adjust the
stationary disconnecting device tube. DO
NOT MADE .ANY ADJUSTMENT. COM
MUNICATE WITH THE NEAREST GEN
ERAL ELECTRIC CO. OFFICE FOR ADDI
TIONAL INFORMATION.
The trip andinterlock see Fig. 5, 6, 7, should be
checkedto seethat the breaker cannot be raised
tc or lowered from the connected position unless
the breaker is open. The opftrating crank cannot
be inserted until the trip shield is moved to a
vertical position, which operates the roller arm
to trip the breaker. As the breaker starts to
raise, tlie roller arm en the breaker is operated
bythecam on thestatlonarystructuretotripthe
breaker. The cam holds the breaker in the trip
ped position (circuit breaker mechanism latch
in the trip free positicn) until the breaker is in
t • ; -s '^S
'y. y-
l
1.-
MAGNE BUST REMOVABLE ELEMENT %^
"'v-iy'?;'
the operating position. When lowering, the oper- .
ating crank cannot be inserted until the trip, ' •
shield is moved to a vertical position, which
operates the roller arm to trip the breaker.
Thus the breaker cannot be moved out- of con-
tactuntil the breakeristrlpped. Thecam holds'
the breaker in the tripped position until the
breaker is lowered to the test position. When-V ',
the mechanism is motor operated, the breaker' ,• • • .
is tripped electrically before the breaker canbe ' / '
raised or lowered. ; , ,
Installation of Insge^oh Rack
Tfof'OirCIrcuirfereiKrit
Aninspecticnrackis furnished (See Fig. S0,-35'
to provide a convenient means of inspecting, testing -
andmaintainingthecircuit breaker without interfer
ing with the normal operatioi ctf the switchgear.
The inspection rackis a replica of the umtframe .
andelevatingmechunismexceptthatit has agreater^,
travel in order to inspect the breaker contacts. ' • •
The inspection rack shouldbe installed at a lo- . . '
cation where the breaker can be approached from .-
all sides, providing the maximum accessibility for ' '
maintenance. Allow the same aisle space m frotit
trotit
for manipulating the transfer truck as provided in .
frcnt of the metal clad units. ' .
The floor should be level and the rack fastened
to the floor with anchor bolts. Conduit for control
power cables must be installed. For electrically.
operated breakers, insull conduits to carry'^16S
to supply control power for testing.
 Metal Ciad iSwitchgear GEI-25390C

TO BUS BAR
TAPE INSULATION

INSULATION COMPOUND

' >•#',• sV
FILLER METAL •:r- -ym.
i
REMOVABLE STUD ^ •

— PORCELAIN BUSHING

• • • ." . •' .lV

• •••i- i;' '

• ' - • •- - '.>,•-v.'
*; ••

.-••••;• •
• -.' . • sr. \ ' >»' ^ ,•

..'[I
' (\ frnr4=j:
POWER CIRCUIT
breaker
- >'>• ••' -f.'
: V
•' ::

•h: a-.v
\
/

,( POWER CIRCUIT
m-:.. \ BREAKER
TEST POSITION
\
- \/,. ;,.

FIQ. 31
ME^UREHEWT OF AOJUSTWENt OF PRIMARY OlSCOHHECTIHfi DEVICES
.1

f ,v-

25

..A. •
 C-i,'-^E.330C Metal Clad S^itchgear
Insta'-^ition qi Testing; Cabinet
(For Ma--T. Bias'- BroaRe'rs)
The testing cabinet, Fig. 44, should be installed
on the wall at a location where maintenance and test
ing of the breaker can be conveniently done. Conduits
must be installed to carry cables to supply control
power for testing.
AdcUtion of Units to Existing Equipment
Figures 36 and 37 indicate the special proced
ures involved to add now motalelad units to an ex-
iistieg equipment. Otherwise the' installation pro
cedure is tiie same as described above.
TESTING AND INSPECTION
^After the equipment has been installed and all
connections made it should be tested and inspected
before putting in service. Although the equipment
and devices have been completely tested at the fac
tory, a final field test should be made to be sure that
the equipment has been properly installed and that all
- connections are correct and have not become loose in
• transportation. The primary equipment should be
.. completely de-energized while the tests are in pro-
gress.
Directions for testing devices such as relays,
instruments and meters are given in the instruction
'' 'book furnish^ for each device. The settings of the
preventive reUys must be'coordinated i^h me ot^r:
Jim
FIGo 35
Ml-9 METAL CLAO SWITCHQEAR IHSPECTIOM RACK
26
relays on ihe system and therefore these- relays
must beset by the purchaser. General instructions
on setting the relays are given in the relay instruc I.
tion books. Special instruction books are furnished ,
for complicated automatic equipments, describing >
the sequence of operation of the devices required to l'
perform thedesiredfunction. The extentcV the tests
on the equipment as a whole will depend on the^pe'-'
and function of the equipment.
When transformers are furnished to supply the.i
control power, the primary taps should be selected.! ' ;
80 that the control voltage indioatod on-the wiring '
diagram is obtained (m the s^ccmdary o£thetrans-.^r^•i; a
former. ' '
When a battery is used to supply the control pow;: v
er the cables from the battery to the switchgear -
should be large enough to avoid excessive voltage'liaa-.'
drop. The voltage at the terminals of the breaker ' y;
closing coils, when the br eaker is being closed . •
should notbe less than 112.5 volts for 125 volt coils
and 225 volts for 250 coils.
The operation of the breaker with its associated ,
devices may betestedlntheunit whilethe equipment;
is energized by use of the test couplers which ;
furnished. Lower the breaker to the test position. !.
This is the position at which the trip' mechanism,''
roller arm diseng^es the cam onth'e Structure! At- •
tachthe test couplers to connect the breaker second'-:
ary disconnecting devicesto those on the airxicfx^Q, ;r
Highpotentlal tests tocheck toe mtegrity"of tfio V|4'^^ !;'.c^
insulation are not necessary if the instaUaUoh in-
structiohs in thisbook are carefuUy followed. the ^
purchaser wishes to make hi^ potential tests the, /
voltage should not exceed 75% of the AIEE facto.i^ ,,' ^
test voltages. Potential tran^ormers must be dis- ; i
connected during high voltage testing. \
•..•operation'-'" ^
The operation of metal clad switchgear is simi
lar tothat ofother types exceptthat it proviaes.max"vijv^5.y'f
imum safety to the'operator and thd feature of easy;v^
removal and replacement of the circuit breaker.'' :f'.
Lov/ering the breaker to the test position pro
vides a means of positively isolating the cables and '
remote .'ipparatus from the bus. Toinsurethe safety-
of personnel working on the isolated circuit, the ti'ip
shield may be padlocked in a position to preventin- i
sertion of the operating crank.
All circuit breaker removable elements of the ^^Vl
same type and rating which have duplicate vdrl^-
may be mterchang^
To tnstaU the breaker in the unit proceiMl-;as,' '
foUoro: , ^ -ffcy:
(a) Cleaacontacts and covdr witoVery-tbih-
coating of Sovarex LI. : \-t
(b) Placefile breakeronthetransfer tnick, •.
where required, adjusting itso that the :${;-
bottom of the breaker fits into the guides !
provided on the truckplalform for cen
tering.. .-•>
•fr-v'i'i-'-Av----'-'.---V
Metal Clad Switcbse^ GEI-25J»0C
 \)
q
*c'
t- • • &9
.S
i -St: ^•5

fii

o
r:
c.

t—
r«-
ri

^5

• (wn* •Hue Kt'tt •cr^ciN

• mVi
i •

1 $vi j»..i:« |:Ti.xin I

e«.*j nn '

IfiU i«0> *•»

Mttxau • • • •

mp
vs;:*;

:s.•:.'. 7::5:t: sv.-/: p•?•' 37-; "x;';;;.:;

ADDITIOH OF liMITS TO OUTDOOR i^TAL CLAD SWITCH6EAR
,.-yt't.v-'t'ty C

(i-5n36056}

(c) Ir.sert tlie cperaiin;/ (:r.V;k and raise or
lower ihe liltinijbrackets to the proper
pcsitior. for raising the breaker.
(d) Push the breaker into the unit until it
rests against the stop.
' (e) Operate crank to raise breaker imtU the
breaker contacts the stops on® the sta
tionary element. The breaker is now in
the operating position.
To remove the breaker from the unit proceed
as follows:
(a) Roll the transfertruck if required into
^ theunit until it rests against the stops.
:; : (b) Operate the manual trip button, opening
iv til® breaker.
(fi) Insert operating crank and lower the
breaker. Continue lowering until lift
ing brackets are against lower stop
bolts and free of the breaker.
(d) Roll the breaker out of the unit. Trans
port to another unit or to maintenance
location.
; ; M<kor Operated Elevating Mechanisms
To raise the breaker operate the control switch
on the door of the unit to the "Tripf' position. Con
tacts of the switch set up the "Raise" circuit to the
p^h button switch inside the enclosure. Operation
p., of the "Raisef' push button will nowcause thebreal-
.. er to raise into positioi. At the end of the travel, a
limit switch and auxiliary relays operate to cut off
the motor at the correct point.
To lower the breaker proceed the same as for
raising, except operate the "Lower' push button.
; The motor elevating mechanism may be dis
connected by pulling out the clutch rod handle (Fig.
38) which is located just above the trip shield, to
permit the use of a manual crank in raising or low
ering. To disengage the clutch it is necessary to
; ; pull on the clutch rod handle and at the same time
relieve the thrust of the motor againstthe mech^-
ismby joggingthe elevating mechanism as indicated:
(a) By using the manual crank to turnthe mechanism
in alternate directions.
(b) By using the motor mechanism push buttons to
alternately reverse the direction. Note that when
brewer is inthefullyraised positionagainst the
mechanical stops the mechanism must first be
lowered slightly before it is possible to jog the
lil , . mechanism With the :m<Aor.
The slide plate back ofthe handledrops down and
holds the clutch rod out, disconnecting Lhe clutch
coupler and making manual operation possible To
reconnect motor mechanism, hold clutch rod handle
push slide plate up and. then let clutch rod go. The
spring on the clutch mechanism will pull the clutch
back so that it will connect the motor mechanism.
A portable electric motor v/ith socket to fit the
elevating naechanism shaft, maybe furnished on re-
0
r^.
Metai Gl^id Swiichgcar GEI'25200C
t.ucst toraiseand lower the breakers in the station- ;
ary eiemcnts. This arrangement is equipped with
andccatrolledfrom a self releasing switch. A por-
table weatherproof cable and plug is part of the -
equipment.
Space Heaters X-y
Space Heaters areprovided inalloutdoor equipr^:')t:!;^vr
ment :j)orderto inhibit condepgatinn and the result* •
ant corrosion whichmight occur. The heaters shouldi vv, :v, ,
beturned onal all times. Heaters are ^sofuniished >
for indoor equipments when it is knownthat abncS-xaiOklW: -
atmospheric conditions exist at tha
;• MAINTENANCE
A regular maintenance schedule should be >
tablished to obtain the best service and -
from the switchgear. Plant, operating and localconr : fi:'
ditions will dictate the frequency of inspection rer .' ' -
'quired. ••
For specific information regarding the main-- ^
tenance of devices, such as circuit breakers, r^ .i3
lays, meters, etc., refer to the separate instruction ? • r
book fipnished for eachdevice. The Inspectiotftack 'v
or cabinet, which is furnished, provides a cipnYehif^''i)"% h
ent means for maintaining the circuit breakers. Xfti-
der normal conditions the protective relays do not;-
operate, therefore it Is important to checkthe bpeirr^
::atiQn of these-devices regularly,
The switchgear structure and connections
should be given thefoUowingoveri^'maintenance at-^iiS'S^'l"^^ '
•least anmially. -
1 De-energixe the equipment and thoroughlyclean
removing all dust and other accumulations. Wipe '
buses and supports clean with carbon tetrachloride. .
Inspect the buses and connections carefully for evir
dence oi overheating or weakening ofthe insulation/
•MeasJre the resistance to ground and between • ^
phases tjf the insulation of buses and connections.'^' /
Sincedefinite limits cannotbe given for satisfactory
insulation resistance values, a record must be kept "'
of the readings. Weakening of the insulation frmn -
<me maintenance period to the next can be: recog« S
nized from the recorded readings. The readings -^
should be taken under similar ccmditioM each time -
if possible, and the record should IncliuJe the tem-i' :
perature and humidity.
High potential tests are not required, but
seems adv^able, based onthe insulati<m resistance ' i ". .o,,.
tests or after repairs, the test voltag6 shdva<i ntot/^^#?i#S
exceed 75% of the AIEE factory test voltage.
potential transformers must be disconnecteddurinff' ^ ^ ' "'
the high voltage testing. , • •
2. C1 e a a elevating mechanism and lubricate jack
screws and gears with a half and half mixture of uni
versal wheelgrease andTexaco Krater#! compcuhd - '
or its equivalent;and bearings,with machine oil.
3. Inspectprimary disconnectingdevice contacts for
signs of r.bnormal wear or overheating. Clean con
tacts withcarbontetrachloride. Discolorationofthe
silvered surfaces is hot ordinarily hanhful unless V:'
29
 • ;y-. :;r
• .• • • • ••?•' ? ••••=»•
• ." • •- V '•. • • • -r.a

; ..'.•-.•-I.:'.',
f. ••

39 ."'v'•" •
TOR CRANK
 Metal Ciad Switchgc..l· GEI-253£JOC

a,,... , so'· •·ric CO.i' " i tion::. c::i.us(; dt:p;;isicS .sucn as s;;. -
��-
p�;ict�i the cc;;it- 3::ts . If nece ssa;:- !•the dCI??sits c. .n
grad e of sil vcr poash. B !­
b� removed with a good of rmc
!ore replacing breaker, apply a thin coat Sova ·. -• - ,,.,

�\:h ck to see that all anchor bolts and bolts in t!,e

· struc fure arc tight. Check tightness and continu1 :y
,: ., . . . . of all control coMections and wiring.
·
A e�manent record of all ,maintenance wo: ·k
shOuld ';;e kept, the degree of detail dep�nding on tl .e
operating conditions. In any e,·.?n_t it will be a v�l'. ,­
able.reference for subsequent mamtc:.ar.r.o work?�l,e .d
• .· ·· tor station oporation. It istestsrecommenc_led that
:< .-' :, · , ·
record include reports of made, tne conditwn
{.(f(;,'°' ._ _; . ·oI ·the eqUipment and ··repairs and adJustments th.i.t
: . . � '&.'.
. ..,
·r· .
:"Vere .made_.

1.' . :SPECJAL FEATURES

··Key Interlocks � Interlo_c�l_!l_g
. Key interlocks are applied !O metal clad switc� "
. gear equipments to protect against incorrect oper.. :
tion of the equipment. Key interlocks are commori- . . fi ·,·,: -.,·_'-_,-:.;;:: \ •...
ly used for the following purposes: '· •..:•' ,. : "'��-. ;
·. .,

; ';}ittliilt1[
'•1,
1 ·1

· ··· · (a) To prevent . the operation under load of associ - .

••

-._· ·, :··
l

· , · • .. ated disconnecting switches or dummy met;,,,l ,_

I,

·· · ·.. ·_. · clad removable elements which ba.ve .

· or· .•
· · limited
'·:{ :'·.,·!

no interrupting·ability.·· · ·
L.....o�--�--:----,,w·�
·. (b) To p�event the paralleling of non·synchron� ·.· �-y,.rw.
sources. FIG.,,i«>
:· c1··
' �··_ • j

(c) To prevent interconnecting systems in such a· . KEY' IHT£RLOCKIH·G:

manner as to exceed the interrupting capacity .
. ·)
'
,· of the circuit breakers. ·
(d) To prevent the withdrawal of fuse 11Rollout11 de­
' .

vices unless the load has been removed. ,, •.. > "
Figure40shows a typical application. of key in-:_ Dummy Removable Element
terlocks to a metal clad removable element and a . '.-' �(·.- > :.
·disconnecting switch, The purpose of the interlock­
ing is to prevent operating the: switch with the break­
er closed. Key interlocks A and B are the type ir.
Dum:ny removable elements, Fig. 41 are used
as a. me.ins of isolating circuits or bus sections,. . .. 1 .·., ,.J}.:\
which the key cannot be removed Wlless the bolt of where oporation is infrequent and a circuit breaker .:
·\,.t:t�.
0-- • '

the interlock is extended. Under normal operating
conditions, the bolt of interlock "K' is withdrawn. and
. � removable element with a set ot six studs. simi'" ·.",_.:/-1�,t\-y:,'../·
.. ·:;;;� the key held in this lock. The bolt of interlock"B"
..•.: <'_{ · is extended locking the disconnecting switch in· the
,. ··.. ····.. ·.open position. It is important that only one key for
;.i., · ,:·'. ·''·the pair of locks be availableto the operator other-
'. · wi.�e the nurpose of the inter locking will be d�ted.
, : .•.-() · · : To operatethe disconnc:ctingswitcn tne.proce­
>"·\.J/..,, , dure ,is as ·follows: Move . the trip shield to the ver-
·:>
2;;·.-.,y, · tic.al position, which operates the roller arm to t�ip
cannot be economically justified. The device con··: , -'.
. sists of a frame work to simulate the circuit break• ; .{i::./'.s;.;c,\;/ :::
lar to those on th� metal clad breakers. The lo:,vet·.:.; \:��)?�') ·
end of the studs are connected, front to back,'b��;;;\:·i;:;:�;\{<
. copper bars which are fully insulated and metal··en·.. ::::!,�\<:'.\:'::- ;.
closed. The stationary structure is the same.as.for:;: ::,::./r/,'?
· a cf.rcuit breaker•. When the device is elevated �to. ·.i�·.:.:t}.ff{:it
position it connects the fron,t set or metal clad .dis'"'. ·: .'·::'/i;,:::;:'.:·;:
cann'ecting devices to the rear set. · · , · · : :·· -·,,.. 1: 1 ·• t-�·: ..
'
.. :. -:�··; ' � .
Under no cooditions must· the dummy element. · ·:•: z::(/:::_:. ::
:

<., ,.· , .., the breaker. Turn key in interlock "A1' extending ·
;

··:· : :.,,�- ·, :, • ·the bolt. · The extended bolt holds the trip shield in
·., ·'·;:: :_ thcverticalpositionand the breaker in lhetrip-frec
· . · position. The key may now be moved from interlock
''A!' and used to operate interlock t B' to withdraw it.s
1
· be elevatl:d or lowered when the bus or the unit�is ' .. ·; ··i ';\, ,:;/!!5-:<•,
energized. Key.interlocks ar_e applied to:fn.sure µtat..>:::{; t: ':,.- )L
all sourc,is of power are disconn.ected before-the'.:·,::·.'•· .. )\\'..:·
dummy element can be operated. · · · · · ":- : \.;.. . /\( '.� · .\: .'.
·

bolt and release the operating mechanism of the dis­

connecting switch. An attachment on the shaft ot th�·
r O •'.' :, ..

cp�rating mechanism prevents the bolt ot interloct

"B" fror..1 being extended except when the switch iL Curront limiting fuses. with hig]j iriterruptingi ,1..
:fully open or fully closed. Consequently the key is rating are some times used in metal clad switch·-
[). held· in i.'lterlock "B' and the breaker cannot be rc- gear to protect small transformers or c i·r cu it_ s
i leased from the trip p os iti.on until the switch is where cir,�uit br.eakers cannot be economically or ·. :·.�::\ · ,

.•/
.-_.� ,{ . .locked open or loc�ed close� functi.onaL.y justified. ' . -: , _01, : ; ··i · ·

·. ;:;.);\i/\ti�:(iiiii�����
..
.· L •. ·.:' · .. .. ·· . .

,,,. -.. ,
·:,::
 Clad SKTiicis^f^a?

1he •'at.es arj inoantcu or, a aicvable suo ;Dri

•-.•.luippcd Witn discon;iect ing devices. When the K' ses u-otvY to .safeguard personnel -.vho may be i- .
a.-e uisconnecied, theyare at a safe striking distanee The device^ • •'h
from all live parts of the switchgear. In Iddition" tit? for applying
al teats or for fault location,power for highinsula
to measure poten- ;
tion resistance (megger); or for phasing out: Sbles,' V
' it
those,t of the
three studs
metal cladofcircuit
the device are ^imtVar
breakers. The'^ds ^- "^•
are ni ounted mi a removable plate which can h e ^
interrupt load current. For lar •

|^SSSSa%
er secondarybreakermustbelockedin markec:"Line'andassembly are
to .hi

Grounding and Test riPvi/>a'

houskS the metal cl^^ ' /
breaker, and raised ' t: .;^:i
of the ctrcutt v: ¥ ' w

y-5 ' ''' -• -'.• •'•* *'i i.'

i: 3:^i^!S i.

a-; hi
• •< A.) ••
•-i 'rl'¥ '-;¥ •

f-

-•s>>

m
',•'• i'j!"tb b;''

X'?

Fre. lij
dummy removable ELEHEUt

32
 Metal Clad SwUchgear GEI-2533pC ,

y . ' . V / ; - ' ' . v .v>

••3 ^,r -.rr'""v •'•;•••?'' ! • •> '•>
•'/•', k T. .TT!

• r .

t—A-^il ».•• v.-

flQ. 42
?USE ROLLOUT DEVICE
ir
,r7~J'••"•ij'

iirv ..:: l r r ' :

Avir-y ii'* ''<.3-*"^''

"''• . i'--'

FID. 43
OROUND AND TEST DEVICE

. ''\t^
 •-:r. •

li?>,

K/i
o
w
»
t:>
CT
c-
o
{!£•£:---^V£$1

K
%
.-V.l i±
o
PUSH
BUnON
CO
CONTROL Sj

REUY

.1 60 AMP.
COUPLER
FUSE BLOCK
\

<b
—31

S J D £ • F R O^ N E W
W{ T H CcisV iR COVER R E MO V E D

FIB.W
0 U

•.^ • •. ':H* . •• . •

' Q.
MmM
-m:
 .
,
INSTRUCTIONS GEH-1802W
SClPERSEDES
GEH-1802V & GEF-3837

METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR

Types M26 and M36

FOR MAGN!-BLAST AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
I '
_,
TYPES AM.. 4.16 AND AM·13.8

GENERAL fl EL-ECTRI C
 GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Fie. 1 T>'pical Indoor .Vtetal-clad Switcheear Equipment 4

Fie. 2 T;.-picai Outdoor .Metal-clad owitcheear Equipment - Front View 4
Fig. 3 T:.-pical Outdoor Metal-clad Swttchgear Equipment With Protected Aisle - side View 4
Fie. 4 .Magne Blast Breaker 5
Fig. 3 -Magne Blast Breaker 5
Fie. 6 .Maene Blast Breaker 5
Fie. 7 Installation Details (or Indoor Metal-clad Switchgear 6
Fig. 8 Installation Details for Outdoor .\Ietal-clad Switchgear.. 8
Fig. 9 Installation Details (or Outdoor Metal-ciad Switchgear With Protected Aisle 10
Fig. 10 Metal-clad Switchgear.... 12
Fig. 11 .Measurement of Adjustment of Primary Disconnecting Devices 12
Fig. 12 Potential Transformer Rollout Shown m Withdrawn Position 13
Fig. 13 Dummy Removable Element 13
Fig. 14 Ground and Test Device 14
Fie. 15 Padlocking Arrangement, Key Interlocking and Bus Boot Assembly 15
Fie. 16 Control Power Transformer RolloutShown in Open Position 16
Fig. 17 Outdoor .Metal-clad Switchgear - Addition of Units to Line-up 17
Fig. 18 Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear With Protected Aisle 18
Fie. 19 Outdoor Transition Compartment 19
Fig. 20 Outdoor Transition Compartment 19
Fig. 22 Inspection Box for 13.8 KV Metal-clad Switchgear 21
Fig. 23 Bolt Torque Values 21
Fig. 23A Bus Duct Gaskets 23
Fig. 24 .Method of Making Bus Bar Connections 24
Fig. 25 13.8 KV Taped Joints 24
Fig. 25A 4.16 13.8 Bus Insulating Boot 24
Fig. 258 Taping Roof Entrance Bushing 26
Fig. 26 Insulation of Connection Bars 26
27 Rear View of Unit Showing Ground Sensor Transformers 27
Fig. 28 Termination Without Pothead Single-Conductor 27
Fig. 29 Termination Without Pothead .Multi-Conductor 28
Fig. 29A Positive Interlock Adjustments 34
Fig. 29B Positive Interlock Assemblv for iOOO M.V.A 35
Fig. 29C Positive Interlock Assemblv for STD AM-2.4 and 4.6 36
Fig. 29D Positive Interlock Assemblv for .M-36 37

Renewal Parts

Fig. 30A View Showing Elevating Mechanism .Motor and Control Unit 38
Fig. 30 Elevaung .Mechamsm for .M-26 Equipments Rated 250 .M.V.A.
and M-36 Equipments Rated 1200A 500 .M.VjV 39
Fig. 31 Elevating Mechanism for .M-36H Equipments Rated 750 M.V.A.
M-26H Equipments Rated 350 M.V.A.
.M-36 Equipments Rated 200 39
Fig. 31A Elevating Mechanism for M-36HH Equipments Rated 1000 M.V.A 40
Fig. 32 Angle Bracket and Chain Drive 41
Fig. 33 Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-26 41
Fig. 34 Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-36 41
Fig. 35 Bus Support 42
Fig. 36 Molded Bus Support 42
Fig. 37 Bus Connection Boot 14.16 and 13.8KV) 42
Fig. 36 Door Handles and Locks.. 43
Fig. 39 Wiring Devices and Miscellaneous Parts 43
Fig. 40 Fuse Rollout Unit..... 43
Fig. 41 Potential Transformer Rollout Unit 44
Fig. 42 Control Power Transformer Rollout Unit 44
Fig. 43 Single and Triple-Conductor Potheads 44
.VOTE.- THIS ZHSTmCTZal BOOK HAS HAD A MAJOB RBVZSZOH. PISASB CHECK YOUR PHEVZOVS SDZTZOS TO COMPARE MATERIAL.
2
. -, Metal-clad Switcheear GEH-1802

CONTENTS
RECEI'\f'ffi'G, HANDLING & STORAGE ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• . 11
RECEIVING•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11
HANDL�G.................................................................................................................. .. 11
STORAGE•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11

DESCRIPTIO� ...........................................................•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••·•••••••••• 11
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11
PRIMARY E�CLOSURE••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.••••••••••••••••••••••••• ll
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT .•••••••.•••••••••••.•••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••.•••• 11
BREAKER ELEVATING MECHANISM............................................................................... 12
ELEVATING l\ilOTOR ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12
PRI1'lA.RY DISCONNECT DEVICE ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12
BUS COMPARTMENT························································· ····••••••••••••••••••••··················· 12
CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABLE COMPARTMENT................................................... 13
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER CO�tPART:\tENT .................................................................. 13
DUMMY EEMOVABLE ELEMENT.................................................................................... 13
R')LLOUT FUSE-::iWITCH UNITS ..................................................................................... l:?
FUS.£ CISCONNECTI�G DEVICE •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 13
GROU�"DL'lCi ANO TEST CEVICE ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-.

L'JS TALLATION................................................................................................................••• •
LOCATION••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• lt
PREPARATION OF FLOOR-ANCHORING .......................................................................... 1€
TRANSITION COMPARTMENTS....................................................................................... 19
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEltENT................................................................................. 20
TESTING CABU"lET••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 20
ADDITION OF U:S[TS TO EXISTING EQU[PMENT .............................................................. . 20
!\itA.IN BUS A!SSE l\1BL Y•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••,. 21
TORQUE VALUES•.•••.•.•••••••••••••.•••••.•••••••••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.•.•.•••••••••••.•••.••••••• 21
TAPED JOINTS............................................................................................................ 22
BU::i DUCT••••••••••••••••··························••••••••••···········••••••••••••••················•••••••·······•••••••• 2:?
CLEANING BUS l!':�ULATION......................................................................................... 22
PRll\lARY CABLES ••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ,....................... 2:?
POTIIEADS.................................................................................................................. 2::?
TER?t.fINATION WITHOUT POTHEAD SI�GLE·CONDUCTOR................................................ 2Z
TERMINAT[ON WITHOUT POTHEAD :\IUL TI-CONDUCTOR................................................. 2�
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TR ANSFORMERS !THROUGH TYPE}......................................... 2�
CONTROL CABLES .................................................................................................... ,.. 2�
GROUND BUSt............................................................................................................... 2�
LIGHTNING PROTECTION............................................................................................. 2!
ROOF £::-.TRANCE BUSHING TAP[NG............................................................................... 2'
DOOR ALIGNMENT....................................................................................................... 2'.
TESTING AND INSPECTION••.•.••••••••••••••••••••••••••.••••••.•••.•••••••.•••••• , ....................................... , 2f
OPEMTION •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••····················••••••••••••••••••·············•••••••••••••••••••• 2!.
.BREAKER POSITIONING................................................................................................ 2r
POSlTIVE INTERLOCK GENERAL................................................................................... 30
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR SOLENOID OPERATED BREAKERS......................... 3G
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEl\mLY FOR STORED E:SERGY BREAKERS................................ 31
:)TATIONARY AUXILIARY SWITCH.................................................................................. 31
SPfi.L�G DISCHARGE CAM.............................................................................................. 31
KEY LOCJc.:;................................................................................................................. 32
BREA KER INTERFERENCE STOP&••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 32
TRAN:sFER TRUCl<S ··············•••••••••••••••••••··········••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••···········••••••••• 32
�PACE HEATEB.:i ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 32
MAINTENANCE•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••�.......................................................................... 33
REN"£WAL PARTS••••••••••••••••-••••-•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••·····•••• ..••-••••••..•••••••·••••••••••-••••••••.. 38

3
 f 1

i-

l««~l

r-u
III
LJ a-
k-);

«<i

;.^s.
«,s\V
yv-

FIG. 2 (1169287) TYPICAL OUTDOOR METAL-CLAD SWITCH- FIG. 3 (8025290) TYPICAL OUTDOOR METAL-CLAD SWITCH-
GEAR EQUIPMENT - FRONT VIEW GEAR EQUIPMENT WITH PROTECTED AISLE-SIDE VIEW
.,
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
TYPES M26 AND M36
FOR MAGNE-BLAST AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
TYPES AM-4.16 AND AM-13.8

Metal-clad switchgear is equipment to control

and protect various types of electrical appararus and
power circuits.
The switchgear consists of one or more units
which are mounted side bv side and connected mech­ INTERRUPTING
arucally and electrically together to form a c.:,mplete CIRCUIT CAPACITY FIGURE
CURRENT
BREAKER
switching equipment. Typical equipments are shown KVA
in Figures 1, 2 and 3.
TYPE M-26
The circuit breakers are easilv removable to
OrOVide maximum accessibilitV for maintenance with
nunimum interruption of services. The switchgear AM-4.16-250 250.000 1200 - 2000 4
is designed to provide maximum safety to the AM-4.16-3 50 350,000 1200 - 3000 5
operator. All equipment is enclosed in grounded
metal compartments.
TYPE :\-1-36
The eauipment is available m the ratine:s listed
in the following table. The ratings of the equipment
and devices are based on usual service conditions AM-13.8-500 500.000 1200 - 2000 4
AM-13.8-750 750,000 1200 - 2000 4
as covered in ANSI standards. Operation at currents AM-13.8-1000 1.000.000 1200 - 3000 6
above the equipment rating will result in temperarure AM-7.2-500 500,000 1200 - 2000 4
rises in excess of these standards, and is not
recommended. For outdoor installation the same
basic equipment is built into a weatherproof housing
as m Figures 2 and 3.

--
--··"�-....;_·
· --,�--­
·'·)

�!G. J {8034472) FIG. 5 (8034807) FIG. 6 (8035725)

'AGNE-3LAST BREAKERS
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be mec in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should
further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for
the purchaser's purposes, the rnaccer should be referred to tho General Electric Company.
To �,e extent required the products described herein meet applicable ANSI, IEEE and NEHA standards;
but no such assurance is given with cespecc co local codes and ordinances because they vary greatly.

5
, GEH-1802 Metal-clad Swltchgear

icHowAtit eo¥C* '«• Acccti

'9 •<•!« la «eev9H

tNCMOwi^ or df** dweki MOwRce

?• NUClCM CLASS c »tlLT

\= _<: *•
• WWCLCA* Class •! (9j>»Mr4f •• ecowiBC A«i Ao»T>oii4i. «koe«
tfC r»e«T ¥•(• ¥0* *.x*ric«

*K^ fkoea s»c<i 'c St •u*««saco §» •uecnASCn

CHsaatiS S«ci4C U SC <.C.«k *ec«p*0t>4«
s*oive M a«u 3*i« »«V4 ^iRSfw

«e«c» *ioo» T«iCMiss *»o •i-««o*cii< flc'CMes * «e« M<ic*R

:m imo:h« *no oihc* 4a»«Ai «4cr&*s. mo s«oixo UASS •< COwtR*
dC USICMOI** *CCS«M«iCt «C€eM»4MCC0 M4cr>Ct vCRf 0»k»i^
f T»«*L ncAi * *MCM0««0 sr
IRCAdC* AjdiLiART •ueMo.RUfO
^kir VCiCMO «N MCNOR
"OLCS itmOualtO
•• AoetfiM to
**c« <*rk»M9
I *«CHoe«e ft
SOltdiO. T««
••SMfRt Ml
•COl^CO IW«CR
SCltKAOS
CL
—I —t
s^aL* •OM* nooR
FLOOR ANCHORING METHODS
'' RECOUMENOEO METHOD
- c MS r>.cCR ^:;a* .kS

mwm* fieoi latc

.rl^
XR STCCL

scenoM T.ff iCcriOH t-t

•CCOimtMtO AWCwORWO >T 4PCkO*w«_

ROTf: IT If (ttRCMSnrt THAT ALteRNATE METHOD
'LOe* SVCCi M KVCR ~ ^ TMft wOiRap.
VITR CNlftMCS #100R
MO THAt MTN K LfVU
9 NOlt IM ARAUC rOHCta
, - */•
S eiA. AStH OMW S MCNOR lOlT
.SHOkC H t TKK •ASMIR
scetioii r.T SICTIOM S<« SCCTKMI><
( AMCMORtRO ir SOLTINS

FIG. 7 {TT-6482630) INSTALLATION DETAILS FOR INDOOR METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR

 Metal-clad Swltcbgear GEH-1802

:l «» K •tCMS**'' 'O "'"5**

POThCAO '*• CA#tC »0«
MCMtCH c

300R
OPCN

; I
C B

inr ifr ^ r
:u-c

C0NDlltT9'

METHOD OF LIFTING
MCMBEKS A-BC -TO ec FURNISMCD BT PURCHASER
Raising NCNBtR * CHANNtt or wooo beam
B-J-CmannEU FURNISHEO with gear

c- liptihg jacks , . ,
0- COVER TO BE REMeveO ANO reassemble
after units are in place

NOTE. WHEN lifting M-26 SWITCMGEAH

locate beam a above lifting
CHANNELS *B'
notes top lifting steel available
«3«»
WHEN REQUIRED AT CUSTOMER'S REQUEST

1
i!

li
9*1 A 0^

T"1
^ f, ^

OOOR OPCN-

ALTERNATE METHOD OF LIFTING

MEMBERS ABE TO BE FURNISHEO BT PURCHASER
B - J* CHANNEL FURNISHED WITH GEAR
D - COVER TO BE REMOVED AHO REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS ARE 'H PlACE
£ - SPREADER

FIG. 7 (TT-6482630) CONTINUED

GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
/

CAti.f COM«tCTlO«

(] 1 g -n-

7 7 9 7

M
\

•000 OfAli

METHODS OF LIFTING

•.dTfdtn
^fC •"CW A

SAr/r
'^Sfcer
".c^T^ .','ir'''W£wy
..^0* I

Hoof cnP

,_L.
i-i4 11^ tri
hsicet

:: J« •-. i' 1 801.' sof OS '^3

/ iEcnoN

•<ie<if.tc :;; ; a iNLflnsfo ztc :c

VIST/^OJO iS«r/V^3fi/r»»i,/v<S
ecos^ (T-s® yt^o et^SAsa-r
^r-.-^a.r^cp S^i-'yS tfT -tTHtyy/y^iS SM./r^

FIG. 3 (118R0728 & TT-6482615) INSTALLATION DETAILS FOR OUTDOOR METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
 Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802

—t

aoiTt^
^coven.^

ANOTO
PRIMARY
CAI^LE
•IICMCII
^:r-^ C&MCMSRTM^ >

two
:l
r H 1 •II
••M
> r
9
n'
.1
1

>n
1 w«A4
ANCMdff soir
' 1' «dCRTiONs srr riAAff
AN ORAWINC,
• ulcNiSMrD Wm •MOISlTloif
imiltMTt
r»
CMOuiri

l5 View 'x'
SMORIAO AlfCMOOlltO Of UNIft
•ITN CNAWMCL MM

-SCffCCNS TO 9C OAIICO OM
CACW CNO AT iNSTRLlAriAN •eilOVAttC ALATCS TO 6C CUT
Au&T se «err cifAN r«A TO SUIT COttOUlTS IT AUACHAOIA
• A«rill*«*AW

FOUNDATION DATA
witlicut j^oor CncloS(*rA
AAO OCPTN or SOIL OCAIIIIlO SUOfACCS Of UCM
roURMTIOil MUST se AWTCRCO TO SUIT SOIL COROlTlOilS.
OOTTOM SUAFACCS OF FQUNOATIORS SHQULO OC 9CL0«
rnoST action on OACRritLCO RITN MNVIOUS HAlCNtAL
AHO AOCOUATCLT ONAIMCa

SUNF
TO INSUNC CAST HAMOLIftO OF NCMOVAOLC CLCMCNTS.
CONCNCTC MO SHOULD SC NCINrONOtO IN ACCONOANCI
WITH STANDAND PNACXtCC.

'3 >*ri«»AT *r *tucc

.:s3fu H.' '» *rjJ4T ;.evrN*s' to
»'«€ OCSIAfD -e SAT and .)CA 8T
* NUr 'A .

3
'ffsf

AOjuSTASlt "tATFONM VlfwV

fO nf. AH
'«CM .NO AT viML.ATlfiN.
•(M0¥A0LC PLATCS TO ftC CUT
••vsr Kt tfOT CtCAN fOA TO SUIT COMOUITS ST OUNCHASCN

with Rtar Cneloiur*

FIG. 8 {118RD728 & TT-6482615) CONTINUED

 •GEH-1802 Metai-clad Switchgear

3HlP9tN<&
»rs«

••c*rn
•fCM

.COVCR^
we itMC y*'
ANOTO
1*RIMAKy •y'»rcrtt
CAUJC View ' y
COMCW\RTMCM-\ iatmtm Mutmmm tr ONiri
virv CMMi i m

'"mTtcTto unrAi

GQMDUITI I
~ OGVtcc CWMBI. * >*
<M.ciecrtHiMK&oov:

'^ilL ^ Sns
mctalcuad
>^US£CQNCyvaY A\ SUE END SCCTiOh
BE BOLTtO OmX^ CONDUITS REMOVABLE PU^TES TO BE CUT END SHCET
.*N £N& AT <f<4STALCATlON
TO5UITC0HDUITS BY PURCHASE
MUST RS KEPTCl£AN POR
veNTiuAT.oN FOUNDATION CATA QA.SAET "N
\ APPUr STWUliM^
u.i'OOR U^I^QWIIM
SMippEs idosE) Bona siois
OF Basket

typical section A-A

S(MIN« casifT »r t •it'HTEI.'ii)

sarrtM^ Kt^CfB loose f ^VOOHOtrr
potcw«»et JO CUT TO ifNam ^
<)I5U soiTtwa
C4F-V
/ *irr«L Ct40
/ U04 CM^

PWTecTfO
Ptvtci
- «er4i. eiio
9444

P'SU too#
5UFT

CNCL.I
^iSLe m^w
TffUSS 4M<U SwfPPiifO
SSPCE

Hfr4l C140
AISLE

VJ£V X
£4144444 14744104 9£Crr4M
SM0WIN4 4f9ie 74 N£r4L Ct40 fMriM# I
VCW'nL4r4ff C4F ASSfHgtr
'SO-Ei'

FIG. 9 (118RD727) INSTALLATION DETAILS FOR OUTDOOR METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR WITH PROTECTED AISLE

10

RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE
RECEIVING
Every case or crate leaving the factory is plainly
marked at convenient places with case number,
reauisition number, customer's orderTTromor rear,
ana wnen lor size ana other reasons it is necessary
to divide the equipment for shipment, with the unit
number of the portion of equipment enclosed in each
shipping case.
The contents of each package of the shipment
are listed in the Packing Details. This list is
forwarded with the shipment, packed in one of the
cases. The case is especially marked and its number
can also be obtained from the Memorandum of Ship
ment. To avoid the loss of small parts when unpack
ing, the contents of each case should be carefully
checked against the Packing Details before discarding
the packing material. Notify the nearest General
Electric Company representative at once if any
shortage of material is discovered.
j^ll elements before leaving the factory are care
fully inspected and packed by workmen experienced
in the proper handling and packing of electrical
equipment. Upon receipt of any apparatus an
immediate inspection should be made for any damage
sustained while enroute. If injury is evident or an
indication of rough handling is visible, a claim for
damage should be filed at once with the transportation
company and the General Electric Company notified
promptly. Information as to damaged parts, part
number, case number, requisition number, etc.,
should accompany the claim.
HANDLING
Before uncrating, indoor equipment may be
moved by a crane with slings under the skids. If
crane facilities are not available, rollers under the
skids may be used. Fig. 7 shows suggested method of
handling the switchgear after it is "removed from the
skids.
DESCRIPTION
Each unit is made up of a secondary enclosure
and a primary enclosure, as shown in Figure 10.
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE
The secondary enclosure is usually located at
the breaker withdrawal side of the unit, although in
certain units it may be on the side opposite to the
breaker withdrawal area. It consists of a compart
ment wdth a hinged door or panel upon which are
mounted the necessary instruments, controlandpro-
tective devices. The terminal blocks, fuse blocks,
and some control devices are mounted inside the
enclosure on the side sheets and a trough is provided
at the top to carry wiring between units.
PRIMARY ENCLOSURE
The primary enclosure contains the high voltage
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1801
Methods of handling outdoor equipment are show
in Fig. 8. After the equipment is in place the liftir.
plates should be removed and reassembled, "turne
in" so that passageway at the ends of the equip me:
will not be obstructed.
STORAGE
. If it is necessary to store the equipment for ar.
length of time, the following precautions should t
taken to prevent corrosion:
1. Uncrate the equipment.
2. Cover important parts such as jack screws
gears and chain of lifting mechanism, linkage ar.
moving machine-finished parts with a heavy oil c
grease. (D6B15 or D50H15)
3. Store in a clean, dry place with a modera-
temperature and cover with a suitable canvas to pre
vent deposit of dirt or other foreign substances upc
movable parts and electrical contact surface;
4. Batteries should be uncrated and put c
tricle charge immediately on receipt.
5. If dampness or condensation may be er
countered in the storage location, heaters should I
placed inside the units to prevent moisture damag:
Approximately 500 watts of heaters per unit will b
required. Remove all cartons and other mis
cellaneous material packed inside units befor
energizing anv heaters. If the equipment has bee
subjected to nioisture the primary insulation syste:
should be tested with a lOOOv or 2500v megger,
reading of a least 200 megohms should be obtainet
6. Breakers should be prepared for storac
separately. Refer to appropriate breaker instructic
book.
equipment and connections arranged in compartment
to limit the effects of faults and so minimize tb
damage.
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
The removable element consists of a Magne
Blast circuit breaker which includes its operatir.
mechanism, interlocks, movable primary and sec
ondary disconnecting devices. The Magne-Blai
breakers are equipped wdth wheels for easy insertic
and removal. Refer to Figure 4, 5, 6.
All removable elements furnished on a particuls
requisition and of a like design and ratings ai
completely interchangeable one with the othe:
The removable as well as the stationary elemen-
are built with factory jigs and fixtures thus insurir
Interchangeability.
. GEH-1802 Metai-clad awitchgear

ELEVATING .MOTOR

One elevating motor is furnished for each equip

ment. It is designed for quick interchangeability
between units and is held in place by a stationary
clamp under the clutch handle and a snap hasp on the
front. Two dowels are located in the base to
maintain alignment.

A short cable with plug is provided and must be

plugged into the receptacle above the motor mounting.
.A selector switch is mounted on the motor for
reversing the motor direction. This selector switch
should not be used to start and stop the elevating
gear motor.
PRIMARY DISCONNECTING DEVICE
The primary disconnecting devices utilize silver
to silver contacts to insure against reduction of
current carrying capacity due to oxidation of the
contact surfaces. These contacts are of the high
pressure line contact tube andsocket design, thetube

I being backed up by heavy garter springs to insure

contact pressure. Refer to Figure 11.

BUS CO.VIPARTMENT

The main buses are enclosed in a metal com

partment with removable front covers to provide
rIG. 10 ^8039690) METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
accessibility.

The bus is supported by aflame retardent, track

For a detailed description of the Magne-Blast resistant, glass laminate insulating material which
^„,^reaker and its operation the applicable breaker is practically impervious to moisture, and an excel
istruction book should be consulted. lent dielectric. No additional coatings should be
applied.
BREAKER ELEVATING MECHANISM
The bus insulation is an extruded thermoplastic
The elevating mechanism for elevating or low insulation sleeve, suitable for 105°C operating tem
ering the removable element to or from its connected perature. The bus bars are inserted intothe sleeves
position supports the removable element in the oper leaving oniv the bolted joints exposed. Where
ating position. In the test position the breaker is standard coni'igurations exist the joint is insulated
lowered to the guide rails and withdrawn from the w-.th a Poivvmyl Chloride boot. Special conditions
fully inserted position 2 14 inches. and non standards are taped. See page 22 item II.
This mechanism consists of heavy-duty steel
jack screws on which are carried nuts to support the
elevating carriage. The carriage is so designed that
the removable element can be readily inserted or
withdrawn after the carriage has been lowered to the
disconnected position without necessitating the re
moval of any bolts nuts or screws.
•'•iOSk C5MTACT
»,atk M A
The breaker cannot be lowered or raised until Of
ISNTACT WiOTX
it has been tripped. The breaker cannot be closed
"qso* «1000A CJnTacT
except with the breaker m either the operating or .£CT«»C*u

test position. NtPt —'

i t J'
Guide rails are built into the mctal-clad frame to r-. %
guide the removable breaker element into correct
position before the breaker is raised into the
operating position by means of the elevating mech
anism which is motor operated.

For a detailed explanation of the elevating mech-

nism refer to description under "OPERATION". FIG. 11 BREAKER INSERTION IN PRIMARY DISCONNECTING
DEVICES

CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABLE
COMPARTMENT
The current transformers are mounted in a
compartment isolated from the other equipment.
Provision is made in this compartment for connecting
the purchaser's primary cable by means ofpotheads
or clamp type terminals.
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
COMPARTMENT
Potential transformers are located in a com
partment above the current transformers or in a
separate unit adjacent to the breaker units.
The transformers are mounted on a movable
carriage equipped with primary and secondary
disconnecting devices. When the potential trans
formers are disconnected, they are atasafestriking
distance from all live parts of the switchgear. In
addition a grounding device is provided which contacts
the fuses when the potential transformers are dis
connected, effectively discharging the transformers.
In this position the transformer fuses may be safely
removed and replaced. A barrier mounted at the
rear of the carnage moves with the carnage to a
position in front of the stationary part of the primary
disconnect device, providing a safe striking distance
from all live parts. See Figure 12.
V ;i * m circuits where circuit breakers cannot be econom
FIG. 12 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT SHOWN IN
WITHDRAWN POSITION
DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT
Dummy removable elements, Fig. 13, are used
as a means of isolating circuits or bus sections,
where operation is infrequent and a circuit breaker
cannot be economically jusUfied. The device consists
of a framework to simulate the circuit breaker
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
removable element with a set of six studs similar tf
those on the magneblast breakers. The lower end o
the studs are connected, front to back, by copper ban
which are fullv insulated and metal-enclosed. Tht
stationary structure is the same as for a circui
breaker. When the device is elevated into position
It connects the front set of metal-clad disconnectini.
devices to the rear set.
Under no conditions must the dummy element b(
elevated or lowered when the bus or the unit u
energized. Key interlocks are applied to insure tha
all source of power are disconnected before the
dummy element can be operated. Refer to Figure 15
FIG. 13 DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT
ROLLOUT FUSE-SWITCH UNITS
Rollout load-break disconnect switches, with o:
without current limiting fuses of high mterruptini
capacitv, are sometimes used in metal-clad switch-
gear to protect and switch small transformers anc
ically or functionally justified.
The rollout switch is designated as type SE-10
and the units in which they are used are designatec
as type SEM-26 or SEM-36. For additional infor
mation on these equipments, referto the supplement
ary instructions furnished.
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE
Current limiting fuses with high interruptint
rating are sometimes used in metal-clad switchgeai
to protect small transformers or circuits where
circuit breakers cannot be economically or funtion-
 CEH-1802 Metal-clad Swltchgear

ally justified. To indicate the proper placement of the studs on

The fuses are mounted on a movable support
uipped with disconnectin? devices. Control power
i.-anaiormers of 15 kva and smaller may demounted
on the rollout with the fuses. See Figure 16.
When the fuses are disconnected, they are at a
safe striking distance from all live parts of the
switchgear. In additiona grounding device is provided
which contacts the fuses after they are disconnected,
effectively removing any static charge from the fuses.
In this position the fuses may be safely removed and
replaced. The disconnecting devices are capable of
interrupting transformer magnetizing current, but
should not be used to interrupt load current. .Mechan
ical or key interlocks are applied to prevent operating
the disconnecting device while the load is connected.
This is generally accomplished by interlocking so
that the transformer secondary breaker must be
locked in the open position before the disconnecting
device can be opened or closed.
the device, opposite sides of the assembly are marked
"Line" and "Bus". The word corresponding to the
desired position must be toward the operator.
To use, the device is rolled into the metal-clad
housing in place of the circuit breaker, and raised
into or lowered from the connected position by means
of the circuit breaker elevating mechanism.
In addition to the device described above, there
is available a form of grounding and testing device
equipped with both bus and line side bushings, power
operated grounding contacts, phasing receptacles,
and a complete safety interlocking system. Refer
to GEI-88768 for general design or instruction book
called for on nameplate of device furnished.

GROUNDING .-^ND TEST DEVICE

The grounding and test device, Figure 14,
provides a convenient means of grounding the cables
or the bus m order to safeguard personnel who mav
be working on the cables or the equipment. The
device can also be used for applying power for high
potential tests or for fault location, to measure
insulation resistance (Megger). By using potential
transformers, it can also be used for phasing out
rubles.

The three studs of the deviceare similar to those

of the magne-blast circuit breakers. The studs are
mounted on a removable plate which can be placed
in either of two positions. In one position the studs
will engage the front (Bus) contacts onlv and in the
other position the studs will engage the rear (Line)
contacts only of a metal-clad unit.

FIG. 14 (8028015) GROUND AND TEST DEVICE

(Cable shown not furnished by 6. E. Co.)
 Metai-clad Switchgear GEH-1802

•0 :

Cl
a

V-* I

A .'s

1 nc
5#
a
ire }£S
2ii 0» I
Sju!
3. '3>-
Js:

a: !?
t ~ /
SV-
<• -^SuJ
?S
>-'a
a-

-.Nji
S:z^

^ i

FIG. 15 PADLOCKING ARRANGEMENT, KEY INTERLOCKING AND BUS BOOT ASSEMBLY

15
 GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
FIG. 16 (8918619B) CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT SHOWN IN OPEN POSITION
INSTALLATION
Before any installation work is done, consultand The space
study all drawings furnished by the General Electric
Company for the particular requisition. These
drawings include arrangement and floor plan draw
ings, elementary, connection and interconnection
diagrams and a device summary.
Occasionally additional shipping members are
installed in the pnmarv area to 'protect against
shipping damage.
SHIPPING BRACES MUST BE
REMOVED PRIOR TO ENERGIZING. SHIPPING
BRACES ARE PAINTED YELLOW AND MAY BE
FOUND IN ANY UNIT WITH A RED "CAUTION"
LABEL ON THE FRONT OF THE SHUTTER. THE
BRACES ARE INDICATED ON THE ARRANGEMENT
DRAWINGS. AN ADDITIONAL "CAUTION" LABEL
WILL BE FOUND ATTACHED TO ONE OF THE
BRACES.
After the shipping braces have been removed all
joints must be properly tightened and insulated before
energizing the bus.
•Mats, screens, railings, etc. which are external
to the switchgear, but which mav be required to meet
any local codes, must be furnistied by the purchaser.
LOCATION
The recommended aisle space required at the
,^<ront and at the rear of the equipment is shown on the
.oor plan drawing furnished for the particular
requisition. The space at the front must be sufficient
to permit the insertion and withdrawal of the circuit
breakers, and their transfer to other units.
\i^
at the rear must be sufficient for
installation of cables, for inspection and maintenance,
and on some equipments to draw out potential
transformers.
PREPARATION OF FLOOR - ANCHORING
Indoor Equipment
The station floor must be strong enough to
prevent sagging due to weight of the switchgear
structure and to withstand the impact stress caused
by the opening of the circuit breakers under short
circuit conditions. The impact loading is approx
imately 1-1,2 times the static load.
Suitable means must be provided bv the pur
chaser for anchoring the equipment to the floor. It
is essential that the floor be level to avoid distortion
of the switchgear structure and the equipment be
completely aligned prior to final anchoring. The
recommended floor construction is shown in Figure 7.
The floor channels must be level and straight with
respect to each other. Steel shims should be used for
final leveling of the switchgear if necessary. Care
should be taken to provide a smooth, hard, and level
floor under and in front of the units to facilitate
installation and removal of the breaker. If the floor
is not level and flush with the floor channels, it will
be difficult to handle the breaker because it will not
be level with respect to the stationary element.
Recommended practice is to weld the switchgear
structure to the floor channels, using a tack weld
at points indicated for anchoring on the drawing. If
welding facilities are not available the gear should
be bolted to the floor channels.
 Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802

, f.

• ' » t i ( -•
V *i) •** ""

« 't*

jaMW0 a««

is*t*

a^pU
t: ~ r«o i t 0 t f
. fifc *
a55gM^v '»•
•0kt«*0 ^ •o^wrmtmt 110 • ** ^.'

WITM Hlf\n FNCLCSuP e:

nT rzT
—1
SJ
•*; y
" fAHS
|!
:1
iV
I
ii
kj ! ertD uerxoN
M
k!~:
N
k
.
i-i ' "£ -'W * ' ®'

1.] • S£T vt» «..'•>.• "«« -•"*»» «»

M V. » 4J5a"i*0A»' ^ ' *4S|l*0lT C
11 > 'ac(Vi«ca
.j . ir« wcrtM'T-r' aj w** '*> 'A' I new tr.
li ^ w,« SKrwM** -wa
11 ,-jfOHMP I 1
/ •u} \ - '''i
1^ «f e«Mcp 1 1 y}""
p'ii«s«tr I)
i
.MS7AV^f*9M ^aoA
•?'•*•* "auiftfc rf«
•Bi snitc 1,^ ''Cftvec 1
y H
"CHD MtflN
astC^BLT C fae* ca^i trMwco /»cw "0"
eatriaa « •>«*'« '#ifTNrc) (c*f0 view M («

7/iTHOVT
I
ENCLOSURE
I"

UP.
FIG. 17 (545D856) OUTDOOR METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR - ADDITION OF UNITS TO LINE
GEH-1802 Metai-clad Switchgear

n fV"1 1T1
-n n
It

3 ti
M
ll
'
II

•
ii
ll'
' 1
ll
II

1!
II
|i
I •

ll
!; ! ll
II
I ^
ij 1 H
yplKIVIfVC 1 • ii
II Sr
hC- jlJ .JL.

VMlfS
—

FBOWT View

nBT
!«» fC»l
* n«r cm

tm9 cm •IB AMPfCI Citf

0*-
B»»r

l~ \
^ tw»»
c C
^imfU I en« A
Mfir
nifm Cktip AISIX

««•••» 1 "1 ro •(••<•£ (IISTI»« (W SM(T (icrij

cawtCftM 0 0 «. mHm rne FaiiawtM I'ltS nul ucntM
I iiwr »»TT»ii
«««IV n
t («B >iiir etr
.40*rrii M44C A j Hoof C*B1
Fwri « tup srcTiBM ctas'iriNc m mm® •
s. riwir e«n« f—t '• "«>»
>tKCm «tM»« i SCICIMS HI
a. «r«e»t «»' e»B.f»o icbiin, <nui>o mis
csMNrcTisN spB csB sierisB "fist eiss sICHsb

sfcriow « i*sr*i.i piw "f»i et»o uwitifuffi

• jtT »iw nmTiii i» 'i««e ••• ••I' r»««n<i»
e ssscntit irriis lono >• •
3 asscumt MfH 'MB C*BS
<440 • iMCitii ctMMS ms SBtice srrairtM (nsnaa
•HP alW CIMWO pas
S PSMHIlt PBS PPPS PRO WSPlPrt PtP
lalTPOCTIPM BSSP

la mirpiL Mw mrrerip pisk umrsFiiPn

t losTPis «iK «Mo« pppiws p«o ptppp man
nt Sam pppiS
t PcnPCi PtaaP ipppp popif pr "Pa WB «»»inp"
I osTPu If/ PiBPP n»m
t iPtCT afw capac* csianN(p«u)
i PBB «(« pisit 'Pass PUSH ppo Ptni esaa
•OPPTCP CUP TP ttissmp IBB pppp fpass
^MiMt M«iC «
•U SUPPPBI*
''"A i> ipsraii. actf c«B piSiC ipuss s«p-pssphbsp
e*ftt
f4mB miC I cpaSitTiNa OP POPP reats paplf. pppp supt.
SCCTIQN t_' couiPM Clip. PcrpL eiPB pbppppp ciipaaa
•«K*rr A PPBP supr ciiPS
wrr«nt»i4ra
t ptiairpii r*p itfps pippppb in p-p
>iM« nart vir o«Mi «*AU lA psff • use "Pw ppipprs pop PSSa lasfPtt
yiMliAMe •*tt
- I al
afw MMT
ppiriaas (pb ppppp cpvp* ph >pppp
VTfMiie OP arw |«B aair
ragar Cmt i IWSPPIL PIPIPP PPB tipPT'PS PPPPPIO
I'
UPWWT J
StCTION B-B
•laar (nb pbbitibiss

FIG. 18 (718D393) OUTDOOR METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR WITH PROTECTED AISLE.


t"
• I—!•• in
FIG. 19 (261C416)
OUTDOOR TRANSITION COMPARTMENT
Provision should be made in the floor for conduits
for primary and secondary cables, located as shown
on the floor plan drawing furnished for the particular
requisition. If desired, the conduits may be installed
before the switchgear. Consideration should be given
to conduits which might be required for future connec
tions.
Outdoor Equipment
Outdoor equipments are furnished both with and
without rear enclosures. Recommendations for
foundations for both types are given in Fig. 8.
Primary and secondary conduits should be installed in
accordance with the requisition drawings, before the
equipment is put into place.
aince outdoor equipments are provided with a
6" base, a transfer truck is required to place the
breaker in the housing. The level adjustment on the
truck is shown in Fig. 8.
When outdoor equipments are shipped in more
than one section, the joint between sections must be
weatherproofed. Assemble the gasket between the
doors, using cement provided. Refer to Fig. 8,
Section B-B. .Assemble the gasket between the roof
sections, bolt together and install the roof caps.
Refer to Fig. 8, Section C-C.
Outdoor Equipment with Protected Aisle
When specified by the purchaser, outdoor equip
ment is furnished with an enclosed, weatherproof
operating aisle. See Fig. 3. The aisle enclosure
is shipped separately from the switchgear.
The following procedure outlines the steps
necessary to install outdoor equipment with a
protected aisle:
(1) Install the switchgear in accordance with the
procedure given above for outdoor equipment.
Metai-clad Switchgear GEH-18C
-I
i.,
cj
'•£05
L=: ^
VS^.
FIG. 20 (453A738)
(2) Remove the shippingcovers from the cont.
panels. Since the relay and instrument cases are :
weather-proof, the control panels should be protec
from inclement weather until the installation of •
aisle enclosure is completed.
(3) Apply Sterling U-310 or U-311 varnish
both sides of the gaskets furnished for the jc
between the ends of the switchgear and the ai.
enclosure and to the surfaces against which
gasket presses and hang the gaskets on the p:
jecting studs at the ends of the switchgear line'
See Fig. 9, section A-A.
(4) Move the aisle enclosure into position guid
the holes in the end sheets over the studs on
switchgear lineup and guiding the roof sills betw*
the support clips bolted to the upper front of
switchgear units above the control panels. T
operation may be simplified bytemporarily loosen
the support clips.
The floor of the aisle enclosure must fit under
hinged breaker cover of the metal-clad, so the a;
enclosure must be moved into position on a le
with the switchgear units.
(5) Bolt the aisle enclosure in place at both en
and bolt the roof sills to the support clips, tighten
any support clips loosened in the previous operati
Replace any breaker compartment doors previou
removed.
(6) If the aisle enclosure was shipped in m
than one section, bolt the sections together
assemble the roof caps in the manner descri
above for roof joints in outdoor switchgear.
(7) Anchor the outside floor sill of the ai
enclosure with anchor bolts placed in accordance v
the requisition drawing. See Fig. 9, view
(8) Assemble the dome over the roof open
•1802 Metal-ciad Swuchgear
gasket P""".^" ^Jide', toMM™ "3
eTthe sv,ltchgear and the aisle enclosure.
'it. 9 view X.
transformer tank. ^ j^/2" from to tank.

9) Remove until the

' These braces fhoiUd be n^aintain and complete all )°ibts. -
enclosure is assem-iled m oru
.ment oi the enclosure. SdSt''lo'"?o'?e.S5. and assenible secondary
under the
transition. - ,3akv class tran-
'ifueff'wilh®m?wSh8 Connect heaters located m13.8 kv
rSs iurmshed tor the edulpment. sition compartment.
iince the "quired for asseSbUd%o?e'Ser°with"^^^^
^r»%witL^™tecteda« switchgear units.
The above
:ec.ed aisle cncio^^^ Jide
„ „o Ime- breaker removable element
le aisle onl% . d the . _ require slight Before
,S'iirn"''S ?h\SSs' mrnish'ed a-ith the SSnfr^s'tSS and inspection.
;^ition°ir speciiic instructions. mf thP elevating mechanism,
ui-ltim for outdoor unit sub- POSl- i f « »"f
Transition compartnwnt 20). re;ie«e5Cfore''£s«Uing removabie element.
.tions may be one
bse"compartments
o normally shipped assem-
Sr.l'ir.rbt are nor^"y ^p^g^'Yg)
comrrtmS cannot
iFlS can^" TESTmOCABmET^^uidUeinstaUed
The testing where maintenance and
on the wall at » g ^ n be convienUy done,
testing
Conduitsofmust
thebe ins iiort tn carrv cables tosprings
supply
$;;fctr&ediately.
ADDmON OF existing
assembled. gasket 2A, and to the
310 varnish to both ''^des | presses. Bolt
rfaces
insition
to throat on metal-clad
i,iiie the power transformer Before dddmg units t^dX'St^^^^e^ „i,h the
itchgear. Before
;oboth
its sides
final oflocation,
aterling U 310 varnish
.^J^^tothe surfaces against «£rs?eU«r-v
furnished with new
r^cated orspecial assem-
gasket l^-ana gasket over
lich the gasket P«^„^®®Ljfrailfor^^ be furmshed covering
bly work. Also, checK m
necessary
e mounting studs <^n the ^ansi ^^^j^sjormer parts are on hand.
ide transformer in place, gu in ffl.
.'..unting studs through the mounti^g^^
enter rubber ^ b®{J 24" between transformer before A^^pn^SrHICH permit A^^^
ghtening nuts, n^^antaining dS**
k wall and ®e^find.3^^
^ varnish PRfmR^'cmCmTS'^T l/f^.^NERGIZED AOT
Ln^uir?fo to ^ S "d'biW' gggSii^°||f™w^
POSITION AND TAjGED.
:ion.

IF WOHK IS WEFKit'tH^BbS^
(b) Should the
,n its foundation prior to th ^^e
irocedure ot P^^ufJJJ^er transformer after assem- SS?^lSoTO>||f«S°«S"E
POSITION RE ISOLATED FROM AI^
tS^uio'n SmpLtment to the switchgear. sowcls CONNECTED TO IT.
-./itchgear are m pla , -nd#9.adapter#1» dome Figure 17 indicates me
tollows; kemove ^^""'s^erlinB U310 varnish to both required to .^J^,"®^_oScSd aisle, and Figure 18
=7, braces ?4. ^PPfy„^i?othe surfaces against which
sides of gasket =2A,andto toe^^^^ce^ ag
Sams'm'JfoJl pme^-n ^e^p'^ln^wS
the gasket presses, befor yaraish to both sides pecm^itm' Fo""mdoor eguipment. it isusuaUy
FS! JS » me surfaces against which the
 Metai-clad Switchgear GEH-1802

necessary only to remove the end cover sheets and

to re-assemble them on the new units after these are
located and bolted to the existing units. Otherwise, -v^ vei
the installation procedure is the same as described •His
above.

When the units are in place and mechanical F

assembly is completed, assemble the main bus and
£€cr/A'£je\
other primary connections per the instructions below,
(Remc'/al of existing compound-filled connection -MM

boxes can be easily accomplished by packing the box

-

in dry ice for 2 -'3 hours". Remove the dry ice and 1-

the cord tying the box in place, and strike the box
with a hammer. The hardened box and compound will
crack away from the joint.) nr

Secondary wiring and control bus connections

should be made in accordance with the wiring
diagrams furnished with the equipment. T

CONNECTIONS
The main bus bars and other connection bars
will be either copper or aluminum. In either case,
the contact surfaces will be silver surfaced or
equivalent. Do not use unplated copper or aluminum FIG. 22 {899B745) INSPECTION BOX FOR 13.8 KV METAL-
bars. All field assembled joints in primary con CLAD SWITCHGEAR
ductors, regardless of material or method of insula
tion, should be made as described below: MAIN BUS ASSEMBLY
(1) Wipe silver clean. Do not use steel wool, For 4.16 kv, 7.2 kv and 13.8 kv equipment.
sandpaper or any abrasive on the silvered
surface. Avoid handling of cleaned surface (a) Remove compartment covers.
as much as possible.
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars together, follow
(2) After cleaning apply D50H109 contact com ing assembly instructions as given under CON
pound to the sUvered surfaces in sufficient NECTIONS. Also see Fig. 24 and Table A,
quantity so that the contact area will Fig. 23.
be thoroughly sealed with excess grease
squeezed out of the joint when tightened.
The bolts should be tightened to the torque TIGHTENING TORQUE IN FOOT POUNDS
values, shown in Table A, Fig. 23. After
Bolt Bolted connection Bolted connection
the bolts have been securely tightened, the
joints are insulated using the molded poly- Size using standard wash, using standard wash,
vinyl-chloride boots which are furnished. LK wash, nut with prevailing torque
These boots are placed over the bolted joints D50H109 lock nut with D50H109
and the boot flaps are secured with nylon
rivets. 3/8-16 20-30 15-20

(3) In some cases external connections are 1/2-13 45-55 30-35

made to metal-clad bus by bars. The
metal-clad bars are normally silver plated.
Unplated bars, either copper or aluminum, 5/8-11 60-70 45-55
should not be used to connect to silver
plated bars.
FIG. 23
(4) All field assembled Primary joints and
terminations must be insulated for the (c) There are two means of insulating bus joints for
operating voltage. There are two methods both 4.16 kv and 13.8 kv equipment.
of insulating joints, boots where applicable
and taped joints for all others. A detailed 1- Taped joints Fig. 26.
procedure for joint insulation is described
under "M.\IN BUS ASSEMBLY". 2- PVC(POLYVINYLCHLORIDE)bootsFig.25A.

21
 GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
. I-TAPED JOINTS for 13.8 KV EQUIPMENT
(1) Prepare all joints as outlined under "CONNEC-
^ TIONS".
(2) Fill all cavities around bolts and nuts with
A50H119 compound to form a smooth surface
for taping, thus preventing air voids. This
compound is not an insulating medium and
should not be used for that purpose.
(3) "T" Joint - Place 4" wide double thick Irrathene
tape over the A50H119 compound as shown in
Fig. 25. (This is not required for 4.16 joints).
(4) Wrap with insulating tape provided maintaining
tension on the tape while wrapping, as shown in
Fig. 26. Where there are sharp angles apply
additional layers to obtain equivalent of the
Insulation on the flat surfaces.
(5) Over the insulating tape, apply one layer of
glass tape, half lap as a protective covering as
shown in Fig. 26.
t6) Over the glass tape, brush a heavy coat of U310
(brown) varnish. Varnish may "be thinned, if
necessary with XYLENE D5B9.'
(7) Replace all covers previously removed.
U-PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) BOOT
INSULATION for 13.8 KV EQUIPMENT
(1) PVC boots for 13.8 equipment can only be
applied to those assemblies furnished with the
molded bus barrier, Figure 36. This barrier
is distinguished by the raised surface around
each bus bar. Those assemblies not furnished
with this barrier will have to be taped. See
above.
P VC boots can be applied to 13.8kv- 1000 .MVA
bus compartment or any elevated bus compart
ment us'ing flat, non' molded bus supports.
(2) Prepare all joints as outlined under "CONNEC
TIONS".
(3) Place the PVC boot over the joint as shown
in Fig. 25A.
(4) aecure the PVC boot with self-locking fasteners
furnished. Joint insulation is now complete.
(5) Replace all covers previously removed.
(6) Boots will be furnished for standard config
urations, however special conditions must be
taped.
III-PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) BOOT
INSULATION for 4.16 KV EQUIPMENT
The instructions for the.bolted joint and applica
tion of the PCV boot is the same as outlined for
the 13.8 equipment except there are no restric
22
tions on the bus barrier.
IV-TAPED JOINTS for 4.16 KV EQUIPMENT
(1) The instructions for the bolted joint and applica
tion of the tape insulation is the same as outlined
for the 13.8 equipment exceptuse 1/2 the amount
of insulating tape and use the U-311 (black
varnish). Refer to Table in Fig. 26.
(2) In unit substations, the connection bars should
be assembled in the transition compartment
(Figure 19 and 20) and the connections at the
transformer terminals taped and painted as
indicated above. The conduit for secondary
circuits should also be assembled in or below
the transition compartment.
CLEANING BUS INSULATION
Main bus bars are insulated with a high tem
perature thermoplastic material having excellent
dialectric and mechanical properties. When cleaning
is necessary only denatured alcohol or iso propyl
alcohol should be used to remove any foreign
materials from the insulation surface.
Paint on Porcelain; Use methylene chloride
based paint remover. Wipe off with distilled water.
Extreme care should be taken not to get any on
Noryl, compound or tape.
BUS DUCT
Bus ducts connecting between groups of metal-
clad switchgear, or between metal-clad switchgear
and other apparatus, should be installed as shown on
the arrangement drawings furnished with the ducts.
Supports should be provided as indicated on the
drawings.
All joints in the bus, including adjustable joints,
should be assembled and insulated as described
above for m.iin buses. Adjustable joints are pro
vided in long runs of bus duct to allow for variations
in building construction, etc. These joints should be
loosened before installation of the duct, then tight
ened after being set in the position required by the
fixed points at the ends of the duct.
Outdoor bus ducts must be gasketed at the
joints between shipping sections. Coat both sides
of the flat gasket and the flanges of both duct sections
with Sterling U310 or U31I varnish before assembly.
Bolt the two duct sections together. Remove the
top cover from one duct section and place 3/8"
elastic compound bead along top of joint slightlv
overlapping the sides. Bolt top cover in place and
fasten roof cap in place overthe joint. See Fig. 23A.
When top covers are removed after installation for
inspection the 3/8" elastic compound bead must
be replaced to insure a tight seal.
Removable front and rear covers of vertical
sections of bus duct must also be gasketed. Coat
both sides of the gasket, the flange of the duct, and
the edges of the inside surface of the cover with

Sterling U310 or U311 varnish before assembly. Do
not bolt these covers in place until all interior
assembly work on the duct is completed and access
will no longer be required.
Outdoor bus ducts of the 13.8 kv
provided with heaters. Connect these heaters in
accordance with the wiring diagrams furnished with
the equipment before energizing the bus duct.
T glass tape furnished by the factory. (2"fo:
-Ac-J
t I
'
• I
« :
eiST.i —•
FIG. 23A BUS DUCT GASKETS
PRIMARY CABLES
The primary cable connections in indoor switch-
gear are reached by removing the rear bolted covers.
In outdoor switchge'ar with rear enclosures the hinged
instrument panel, if present, must be swing open
and the bolted covers behind it removed.
Before any primary cable connections are made,
the cables should be identified to indicate their
phase relationship with the swltchgear connections.
This is necessary to insure that motors will rotate
in the proper direction and that the phase rotation is
the same when interconnecting two different sources
of power.
There are two common methods of making
primary cable connections:
(a) Potheads (see GEI-28838H) are used when
it is desired to hermetically seal the end of the
cable to make a moisture-proof connection
between the cable and switchgear bus. Apothead
also prevents seeping of oil from the end of oil
impregnated varnish cambric or paper insulated
cable.
(b) Clamp type terminals and wiping sleeve or
cable clamp.
No insulation materials are furnished for cable
terminations. When potheads are supplied as part
of switchgear insulation materials are furnished for
the bar terminations to the pothead studs.
In all cases carefully follow the cable manu
facturer's recommendations for installation of the
type of cable being used. A typical example of
terminating a shielded cable is shown in Figures
28 and 29.
If the cable is aluminum, the conductor surface
must be carefully abraided and the cable covered
liberally with a joint compound recommended by the
cable manufacturer.
Metal-clad Swichgear GEH-1802
INSULATING PRIMARY CABLE
TERMINATIONS
Al' field assembled joints for primary cabb
terminations should be prepared as outlined unde:
class are "CONNECTIONS". Upon completion of the cabh
termination, care must be exercised when tapint
the exposed termination.
(1) Check to see that a sufficient area c
insulating tape extends beyond the paintC'
5KV, 3" for 15KV). It may be necessar-
^ 1' to remove the current transformer primar
I
conductor insulating support to obtain prop
-J er insulation joint overlap. Replace suppor
I
upon completion of joint. Refer to Fig. 26
(2) All terminations should be insulated a
outlined in table Fig. 26 for correct layer
of insulating and glass tape.
(3) The instructions for application of the tap
insulation is the same as outlined fo
"Taped Joints" items 1, 2, 4, 3, 6 and T
POTHEADS
Potheads are mounted on an adapter plat
extending across the width of the metal-clad uni
as shown in Fig. 27. Where necessary the adapte
plate is split into two parts to facilitate the instal
lation of the potheads.
Three-Conductor Potheads
Installation procedures for a three-conducto
lead-sheathed cable with a wiping sleeve cabl
entrance fitting on the pothead is outlined in GET
28838H. This is the type most generally usec
The factory does not furnish insulating materials fo
comi<leting stress cones and cable terminationt
In all cases carefully follow the cable manufacturer'
recommendation for installation of the type cabl
being used. A suggested procedure for shielde
cables is outlined below. Refer to Fig. 28 and 29 fo
reference.
TERMIN.\TION WITHOUT POTHEAD
The factory does not furnish insulating material
for completing the primary cable termination at th
cable clam^' or for stress cones. In all case
carefully follow the cable manufacturer's recommen
dation for installation of the type cable being usec
A suggested procedure for shielded cables is outline
below. Refer to Fig. 28 and 29 for reference
Single Conductor
1. Cut cable to proper length.
2. Remove jacket and cable tape for distanc
of A plus B plus 3 inches, plus length to be inserte
into terminal lug.
3. Unwrap shielding tape to point M, cut an
solder it in place avoiding excessive heat on insu
23
 QEH-1802 Metal-ciad Switchgear

lation. Remove outer semi-conducting tape for same

distance. Thoroughly clean surface from which
the semi-conducting tape was removed.

4. Remove insulation and inner semi-conduc

ting tape to expose conductor for distance of one
inch plus length to be inserted into terminal lug.
i T-f. 5. Attach terminal lug to conductor. If the
cable is aluminum, the conductor surface must be
•^5"j ^^ ••• carefully abraided and the cable covered liberally
with a joint compound recommended by the cable
manufacturer.

6. Taper insulation for one inch as shown. See

Fig, 28.
« • •««*• I

7. Apply end seal. Clean surface over which

splicing tape is to be applied and coat with G.E.
No. A50P69 adhesive cement or equivalent. When
solvent evaporates, buildup with splicing tape GE8380
or equivalent, as shown.

FIG. Z4 (132C7770) METHOD OF MAKING BUS BAR CONNECTIONS

Dimensions in Inches
Rated
A"
kv

Phase to Phase Indoors B

f' Dry Locations
V

2 to 5 5 2
' 'N^,. Nsi
SUbATlOM
6 to 10 9 3
. » •. V' . > ASO" *
11 to 15 13 4

y I'H'
11-- * For ungrotmded neutral use 1.33 times the di
mensions in selecting distance A. See Fig. 28 and 29.
4. ' /e ftet
I set .
8. Build stress cone. Clean cable surface and
rAAt ^'4 coat with G.E. No. A50P63 adhesive cement or
> • S4»»S) equivalent. When solvent evaporates, build up cone
with splicing tape GE8380 or equivalent, for length
B plus B. Between points M and P, tape is applied so
FIG. 25 (104A2714) 13.8 KV TAPED JOINTS that wrapped thickness at N is equal to 75% of the
original insulation thickness - and so that the cone
tapers to zero thickness at points M and P. Apply
^£2e8ElAlI'5 MCrfi>T|6 • one layer No. 33 Scotch tape or equivalent, half
lapped. Obtain a smooth wrapping but do not stretch
tape more than necessary.
'.y

i%^l 9. Pass a turn of tightly drawn braid around

. ,^WA«T • • e:q)Osed portion of shielding tape at point M and solder
in place. Then apply shielding braid in tightly drawn
•••euiA'fcC
a,*; I/O inch lap wrappings to point N and spot solder.
S90A aus** £304k TArf^frCPC Terminate the braid by cutting 1/2 inch beyond
soldering point. Turn down and solder loose ends
<»+-• -i to preceding turns. Wrap four to sixtums of No. 19
AWG tinned copper wire around shielding braid and
solder. Solder ^ turns ofbraid together along three
lengthwise lines equally spaced around braided
surface.

*4
: It
led* ttws 10. Solder ground strip over shielding tape
dw^'«2£CA
near cable covering. Cover stress cone with one
layer No. 33 Scotch tape, half lapped. Obtain a smooth
FIG. 25A (208A8953) 4.16 KV AND 13.8 KV BUS wrapping but do not stretch tape more than necessary.
INSUWTING BOOT Add two layers of splicing tape.
24

11. Pencil jacket for 1/2 incii .13 .shown. Clean
surface. Take particular care in cleaning outside
jacket surface in order to entirely remove black
' ' wax finish. Coat with G.E. No. .\50P63 adhesive
cement or equivalent. When solvent evaporates, apply
splicing tape GE8380 or equivalent and make sheath
seal as shown on drawing. Apply one layer No. 33
Scotch tape or equivalent, half lapped. Obtain a
smooth wrapping tiut do not stretch tape more than
necessary.
12. Over entire termination, apply two layers
of No. 33 Scotch tape or equivalent, half lapped, in
manner to shed water. Obtain a smooth wrapping but
do not stretch tape more than necessary.
TERMINATION WITHOUT POTHEAD
MULTI-CONDUCTOR
The factory does not furnish insulating materials
for completing the primary cable terminations at the
ciamp terminal or for the stress cones. Refer to
Fig. *29 for reference.
Make termination as indicated for single-con
ductor except - substitute the following for para
graphs 10, 11 and 12;
Pencil jacket 1/2 inch. Clean surface over which
sheath moisture seal is to be applied. Take
particular care in cleaning outside jacket surface
in order to entirely remove black wax finish. Coat
with G.E. No. A50P63 adhesive cement or equivalent.
Allow to dry. Apply splicing tape GE8380 or
equivalent to make moisture seal as shown. This
is done by starting wrapping tape near end of jacket
and wrapping over ground wires for 1-1/2 inches.
Bend ground wires out and back over taping just
applied and continue applying lapped layers of tape
to completion of moisture seal including a complete
tape seal in crotch formed between the three
conductors. Bond and ground the ground wires.
For a multi-conductor cable not having ground
wires, the individual terminations should have
grounding strips applied as for a single-conductor
termination. These grounding strips are to be
joined together to a common ground. This common
ground must then be grounded.
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
(THROUGH-TYPE)
Thr jugh-type current transformers (See Fig. 27)
are furnished where specified for sensitive protection
against ground faults. These transformers are nor
mally installed in a horizontal position directly above
or below the primary cable terminals, so that the
primary cable or cables can pass through them. One
transformer is required for each three-phase circuit.
Where armored cable is used, the armor must
be terminated and grounded before the cable passes
through the transformer. Armor clamps are fur
nished for this purpose when specified.
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
When lead or other conducting sheath cable, or
cable with shielding tape or braid is used, it is
recommended that the sheath or shield be grounded
solidlv to the switchgear ground bus. The ground
lead should be bonded to the sheath or shield on the
side of the current transformer away from the
primary terminals. Incases wheretheground cannot
be applied before the cable passes through the trans
former, bond the lead to the sheath or shield between
the transformer and the primary terminals. The
ground conductor must then be passed backalongthe
cable path through the current transformer before
being connected to the ground bus.
Where potheads are used in units provided with
ground fault current transformers, the potheac
mountings must be insulated from ground.
CONTROL CABLES
When control conduits enter the unit from below
the conduit should not extend more than 4 inches abovt
the floor. The control cables may be pulled througt
the conduits before or after the switchgear i.
installed, whichever is more convenient.
Connect the cables to the terminal blocks ii
accordance with the wiring diagrams furnished fo:
the requisition.
If the control conduits enter from above, dril
the top and bottom covers of the front enclosure
wiring troughto suit the conduits. Fasten the conduiti
to the bottom cover with locknuts.
The cables from the control power source to thi
switchgear should be large enoughto avoid excessivi
voltage drop when the circuit breakers are operated
See testing instructio.is.
Where units have been split for shipment, an-
control or other secondarv leads which must connec
across the split will be arranged with terminal block
in the cross trough or convenient side sheet so tha
the wires can be reconnected. The wires will be cu
to length and formed before being folded back so tha
a minimum of time will be required for reconnectin
them.
GROUND BUS
The ground bus is bolted to the rear of the fram
near the bottom. It is arranged so that connection
to the station ground can be made in any unit. Wher
the equipment is shipped in more than one group, th
sections of ground bus must be connected by usin
the splice plates furnished with the equipment
Assemble the ground bus joints as outlined 'onde
"CONNECTIONS"' (Page 19). Ground bus connection
are made in the lo-«'/er portion of the cable entranc
comnartment. The switchgear ground bus must b
connected to the station ground bus by a conducto
having a current carrying capacity equal to that c
the switchgear ground bus. It is very important ths
•the equipment be adequately grounded to protect th
operator from injury when short circuits or othe
abnormal occurrences take place and to insure the
all parts of the equipment, other than live parts
are at ground potential.
25
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear

LIGHTNING PROTECTION

^ It will be the responsibility of the purchaser to

provide suitable lightning arresters to protect the
switchgear from damage due to lightning. The
General Electric Company's recommendations as to
the types of circuits requiring lightning protection,
and a list of recommended lightning arresters, are
contained in Bulletin GER-141 copies of which are
available upon request.
When lightning arresters are furnished the
,ROOF
primary cable terminal will be insulated at the
factory unless it must be disconnected for shipment.
When this connection is completed in the field it will
be necessary to insulate the primary connection
before the switchgear is energized.
ROOF ENTRANCE BUSHING TAPE OVER F/Rsr
RlWe Oh/LY
When assembling the connection bar end of roof
entrance bushings inside of the switchgear and other IRMTHfNE AND
terminations where porcelain insulators are used, (JIASS TAPE
insulation should be applied as follows: _2'- SHV.
ASOHin 3'-ISM
(1) Prepare the connection bars as outlined COMPOU/VO
under "CONNECTIONS".

(2) Fill all cavities around the contact nuts and

connection bars with A50H119 compound.
Form a smooth surface for taping*, thus
preventing air voids. The compound is not
an insulating medium and should not be used
for that purpose. FIG. 25B TAPING OF ROOF ENTRANCE TERMINATION

(3) Wrap joint with insulating tape provided,

maintaining tension on the tape while wrap END OP C1A2S TAPE
ping as shown in Fig. 26 where there are -LASS
eto at

sharp angles apply additional layers to 4„»iC "•

!3Z -'•oe
obtain equivalent of the insulation on the flat
surfaces.

i4) Over the insulating tape, apply one layer of

glass tape, half lap as a protective covering
as shown in Fig. 26.

(5) Over the glass tape, brush a heavy coat of

U-310 brown (for 15kv) or U-311 black
(for 5kv), varnish. See Fig. 253.
INSULATZOH UYEHSISCTE *.) pAiirr
INSDUITZON I'202 CLASS APPLT ONE
ISVEL vcn 2 KOTE ? COAT LaEnALLY

0 STSHLZKO
FOOOV * T-111 WAflt '
I STERLIKO
I5.C00V • 1 ' 0*310 6R0UN
34..500V !
MOTE I:
*•202 Te.ce • cne Upvr. wound 2/3 l«p reouirea 3 tumt around Oar
In one wiatn of tape. Cna layer tnicKneaa te 3 Stsaa tape thtetmasa.
• Cne layer, wound X/Z lap reoutree 2 tuma around bar in
ana width of tape. One layer thtekneaa la 2 tlsea tape thleknaaa.
KOTE 2:
Irrathene *202. width 1 1/2" thiekneaa 0.010*. Keep tenalon on
tape at all ttmea while appiyins.
von 3:
slaaa '.2L12B idth 1 1.'2" thtekneaa O.OCV".

26
1
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear

^CABLE LUQ

SPLlClMCa TAPE
Cb.E.8BBO OR EaUIV.
EWD SEAL

CABLE
IWSULATIOW

N9 BB SCOTCH
TAPE OR
EQUIV.

SHIELDIMG
BRWD (HAMD
APPUED)

CABLE SHIELDING
TAPE

,j^.^Nja33 SCOTCH
TAPE OR EQUW.

^AOISTURE SEAL

SPLICING TAPE
&.E.a380 CR EQUIV.
GROUND WIRES
CROUWD AT
ADJACENT
FRANCE
MEMBER

CABLE JACKET^

FIG. 29 (B232004C) TERMINATION WITHOUT POTHEAD MULTI-CONDUCTOR

28

DOOR ALIGNMENT
If for anv reason it is necessary to realign the
'^oors of metal-clad switchgear daring installation
the procedure given in the following paragraphs
should be followed.
After checking that the switchgear is level and
plumb as described above, start at either end of
the switchgear lineup and realign each door individ
ually as required.
The top of each door should be level with the
adjacent doors; the sides of each door plumb; the
surface of each door flush with the adjacent doors;
and the space between adjacent doors equalized to
permit their free swing and present a neat appear
ance. The door stops should be adjusted to permit
a door swing of approximately 105®.
Doors may be raised or lowered vertically, or
moved forward or backward horizontally, by loos
ening the hinee mounting nuts on the left side sheet
and shifting the hinae and door assembly as allowed
by the slotted holes in itie hinge.
Doors may be shifted to the right or left by
adding or removing washers or shims from between
the hinge and side sheet.
Doors may be plumbed by slightly banding the
appropriate hinges. To do this, open the door and
insert a drift pin in either of the two holes in the
hinge. Pulling forward on the drift pinwill move the
door to the right, and pushing back will move the
door to the left. .Adjust each hinge individually as
required to plumb the door.
When properlv aligned, the doors of outdoor
switchgear should be tightly seated on the gasket all
around. After aligning such doors, close and latch
the door and check the seal by running a 3 x 5'
card, shipping tag, IBM card, or some similar card
around the edge of the door. If the card will pass
between the door and the gasket, the door is
imnroperly adjusted, and should be readjusted until
the* card will no longer pass through.
TESTING AND
INSPECTION
After the equipment has been installed and all
connections mt.de, it should be tested and inspected
before putting in service. Although the equipme-it
and devices have been completely tested at the
factory, a final field test should be made to be sure
that the equipment has been properly installed and
tha' all connections are correct and have not become
loose in transportation. The primary equipment
should be comjiletely de-energized while the tests
are in progress, dee installation.
Directions for testing devices such as relays,
instruments and meters are given in the instruction
book furnished for each device. The settings of the
protective relays must be coordinated with the other
relavs on the system and therefore these relays
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
must be set by the purchaser. General instructions
on setting the relavs are given in the relay instruc
tion books. Special instruction books are furnished
for complicated automatic equipments, describ.'.ng
the sequence of operation of the devices required to
perform the desired function.
When transformers are furnished to supply the
control power, the primary taps should be selected
so tlut the control voltage indicated on the wiring
diagram is obtained on the secondary of the trans
former. Wh-en a battery is used to supply the contro.
power, the cables from the battery to theswitchgear
should be large enough to avoid excessive voltage
drop. The voltage at the terminals of the breaker
clos-in" coils, when the breaker is being closed,
should"not be less than 112.5 volts for 125 volt coils
and 225 volts for 250 volt coils.
The operation of the breaker with its associated
devices' may be tested in the unit w.hile the e^aip-
ment is energized by use of the test coupler which is
furnished.
SOLENOID OPERATED BREAKER
Lower the breaker to the test or down position.
Attach the test coupler to connect the breaker second
ary disconnecting device to that on the structure.
STORED ENERGY OPERATED BREAKER
Lower the breaker to the down position and with
draw the breaker 2 1/4" until a notch in the spring
discharge cam releases thebreaker interlock. Attach
the test coupler to connect the breaker secondary
disconnecting device to that on the structure.
High potential tests to check the integrity of the
insulation are not necessary if the insulation instruc-
tio.is in this book are carefully followed. Should the
purchaser desire to make high potevntial tests, the
test voltage should not exceed 14kv A. C. for 4.16kv
and 27kv A. C. for 13.8 equipments. These voltages
are 75% offactory test voltages and are in accordance
with A.NSI standards.
Potential transformers and control power trans
formers must be disconnected during high voltage
testing.
OPERATION
The operation of metal-clad switchgear is
similar to that of other types except that it provides
m'^ximum safetv to the operator and the feature of
easy removal and replacementof the circuit breaker.
All circuit bre.aker removable elements of the
same type and rating whichhave duplicate wiring may
be interchanged.
BREAKER POSITIONING
To place the breaker in the operating position,
proceed as given below.
The elevating mechanism is accurately leveled
29
 GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
a:id checked at the factory and should need no adjust
ment. Do not install or remove the breaker or make
adjustments unless the breaker is open.
Rub a small amount of contact lubricant D50H47
on the silvered portion of the breaker studs to form
a thin coating of contact purposes.
Lower the elevating mechanism lifting brackets
until the lifting brackets are in the fully lowered
position. The breaker should then enter the housing
freely. .After first assuring that the breaker is in the
open position, push the breaker into the unit until it
rests against the rear of the front lifting saddle of
the elevating mechanism.
The clearance between the interference block on
the breaker and the interference block on the inter
lock lock mechanism '.view X-X Figure 29)shouldbe
from 1/16" to 1/8". At this point the breaker positive
interlock roller should be centered in the bottom
"VEE" of the interlock cam plate.
To elevate the breaker, operate the elevating
control selector switch on the elevating motor to
"RAIhE". .A clutch handle just above the elevating
motor (Clutch handle is under the elevating motor
in the 1003 M\'A Unit) is then pulled forward until
a motor limit switch closes and the motor clutch
engages to raise the breaker in the unit. Carefully
raise the breaker and while elevating note that the
shutter slides open and the breaker studs center
with respect to the openings in the stationary
disconnecting devices or injury to the contacts may
' ^ result.
The clutch handle is held in the forward position
until a limit switch on the structure opens to stop
the motor at the end of the upward travel of the
breaker. The springs will charge.
The motor selector switch must not be used to
energize or interrupt the motor circuit at any time.
When the breaker is fully elevated the clearance
between the breaker lifting rail and the upper stop
bolts should not be more than 1/8" and not less than
3/32".
The positive interlock roller should be centered
in the upper "VEE" and the interlock roller should
have 1/16" clearance to the stationary interference
plate directly under it.
To lower the breaker, proceed the same as for
raising except operate the selector switch to
"LOWER". The clutch must be held in the engaged
position; otherwise, a spring will return it to its
normal position, opening the electrical circuit to the
motor.
The breaker may be raised or lowered by an
emergency hand crank which can be inserted after
removing the motor. The motor is removed by un-
latching the motor assembly from its support and
disconnecting the motor lead plug. After removing
the motor, pull the clutch forward and insert the
manual crank into the end of the clutch coupling. The
30
breaker must be open before the crank can be inserted
and held in the clutch coupling.
After the breaker is lowered and withdrawn from
the unit inspect the contact surfaces of both the
breaker studs and the stationary disconnecting
devices.
(a) Each segment of the stationary disconnect
ing device should make a heavy impression in the
contact lubricant D30H47 on the breaker studs.
Contact wipe should start not less than 1; 8" from top
of the contact ball although each contact need not
start at the same location. See Fig. II.
(b) The penetration of the breaker stud inside
the stationary disconnecting device, as* indicated by
the contact lubricant D50H47, should be 3/4" to
7/8". See Fig. 11. This indicates that the breaker
stads contacted at the full pressure center of the
silver band on the stationary disconnecting device.
(c) Should the inspection of the contacts show
that the breaker is not being raised to the proper
position, readjust the upper stop bolts and limit
switches to raise or lower the breaker to the proper
location. Lock the stop bolts in the new position.
(d) If proper contacting cannot be attained by the
above methods, additional adjustments will be nec
essary.
DO .\0T MAKE ANY AD-JUSTMENT. COMMUNI
CATE WITH THE NEAREST GENERAL ELECTRIC
CO OFFICE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
POSITIVE INTERLOCK
GENERAL
The positive interlock functions to prevent
raising or lowering a breaker except when the
primary contacts are open. It also prevents closing
primary contacts when the breaker is being raised
or lowered by blocking the operating mechanism
mechanically and electrically.
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR
SOLENOID OPERATE BREAKERS
To place the breaker in the operating position,
proceed as given below. The elevating mechanism is
accurately leveled and checked at the factory and
should require no adjustment. Do not install or
remove the breaker or make adjustments unless the
breaker primary contacts are open.
Lower the elevating mechanism lifting brackets
until the lifting brackets are in the fully lowered
position. The breaker should then enter the housing
freely. After first assuring that the breaker primary
contacts are in the open position, insert the breaker
into the unit until it rests against the rear of the
front lifting saddle of the elevating mechanism.
The interlock should be checked to see that the
removable element is obstructedfrom being raised to
or lowered from the operating oosition when the
primary contacts are closed.

before proceeding with this check it b
NECESSARY THAT THE PRIMARY CIRCUITS BE
de-energized.
Using the maintenance closing device, close
the breaker and snap the selector switch to "RAISE"
position and pull the clutch handle forward. Move
ment must be stopped bv the breaker interlock
roller before the contacts of the motor limit switch
close and before the sliding clutch and motor
connector engage. A minimum of 1/16" should be
maintained between the two clutch parts when the
positive interlock is blocked by the breaker inter
lock roller, see Fig. 15 for dimension.
Trip the breaker manually and elevate to_ the
operating position. AGAINITISEMPHASIZEDTHjVT
THE PRIM.-1RY CIRCUITS MUST BE DE-ENER
GIZED BEFORE M^^KING THIS CHECK OF THE
POSITIVE INTERLOCK.
Electrically close the breaker. Snap the selector
switch to "LOWER" position andpuU the clutch handle
forward, .\eain, a definite stop should be encountered
preventing "the motor circuit limit switch from
energizing the motor circuit and lowering the
breaker.
If the interlock does not fimction as indicated
above DO NOT MAKE ANY AD.IUSTMIINT. COM
MUNICATE WITH THE NEAREST GENERAL ELEC
TRIC CO. OFFICE FOR ADDITIONAL INSTRUC
TIONS.
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR
STORED ENERGY
To place the breaker in the operating position,
proceed as given below. The elevating mechanism is
accurately leveled and checked at the factory and
should require no adjustment. Do not install or
remove the breaker or make adjustments unless the
breaker primary contacts and or closing springs
are discharged.
Lower the elevating mechanism lifting brackets
until toe lifting brackets are in the fully lowered
position. The breaker should then enter the housing
freely. After first assuring that the breaker primary
contacts are in the open position, insert the breaker
into the unit until it rests against the rear of the
front lifting saddle of toe elevating mechanism.
BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THIS CHECK IT IS
NECESSARY THAT THE PRIMARY CIRCUITS BE
DE-ENERGIZED.
When entering a breaker into a unit for eleva
ting the spring discharge cam (on toe left hand
side of toe unit) will hold toe breaker interlock
trip free and the closing springs discharged imtil
toe breaker is 1/4" off the breaker floor rail.
(See detailed description of Spring Discharge Cam
under separate heading).
AGAIN IT IS EMPHASIZED THAT THE PRIMARY
CIRCUITS MUST BE DE-ENERGIZED BEFORE
MAKING THIS CHECK OF THE POSITIVE INTER
LOCK.
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
Elevate the breaker to the raised position ana
electrically close the breaker. The positive inter
lock should be checked to see that the removable
element is obstructed from being lowered from the
operating position.
Snap the selector switch to "LOWER" position
and pull the clutch handle forward. A definite stop
should be encountered preventing the motor circuit
limit switch from energizing the motor circuit anc
lowering the breaker.
A minimum of 1/16" mustbe maintained between
the sliding clutch and the motor connector when the
positive interlock is blocked by the breaker inter
lock roller. See Fig. 15 for dimension. Trip toe
breaker manually and lower the breaker to toe fully
lowered position. During the last 1/4" of travel the
spring discharge cam will discharge the storec
energy springs and maintain the breaker trip free
as long as the breaker remains in the unit. If the
interlock does not function as indicated above
DO NOT MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENT. COMMUNI
CATE WITH THE NEAREST GENERAL ELECTRIC
CO. OFFICE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
STATIONARY AUXILIARY SWITCH
On units equipped with stationary auxiliai"
switches (Fig. 30A) toe clearance between the endo:
the switch mechanism operating rod and the operating
plunger on toe circuit breaker should be 0 to 1/8'
with the circuit breaker in the raised and opei
position.
Any adjustment in this dimension must be midt
on the auxiliary switch setting. Care should be take:
to prevent destroying interchangeability of the circui
breaker by excessive adjustment.
A stationary auxiliary switch test position lin:
is furnished as an accessory for use when the circui
breaker is in the test position.
SPRING DISCHARGE CAM
The spring discharge cam is mounted on the lei
hand side of toe unit and operates in conjunction wit;
a spring discharge interlock on the breaker.
When entering a breaker into a unit, to elevate
to the operating position, the spring discharge can
will hold the breaker interlock trip free and to
closing springs discharged until the breaker is 1/4
off the floor rails. At this point toe positive interloc;
is blocking toe spring cliarging and closing circui
open.
When lowering the breaker from toe operatin
position the breaker must be open before toe elevatin.
mechanism can be operated. While the breake
is being lowered the springs are still charged bu
toe positive interlock blocks the breaker fror.
closing. When the breaker is about 1/4" from th
floor rails the spring discharge interlock hold,
the breaker trip free, discharges the closing spring:
 GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
and holds them discharged so long as the breaker
remains in its unit.
To operate the breaker in the test position it is
pulled forward, (out of the unit) about 2 1/4" until
a notch in the spring discharge cam releases the
breaker interlock and the breaker can be operated
manually, or, by assembling the test coupler,
electrically. In the test position a mechanical
block prevents operating the elevating mechanism.
If after test operations the breaker is left closed
and/or its closing springs charged, it will be auto
matically tripped and held trip free while the springs
are discharged when it is reinserted in; or while
being withdrawn from its unit.
KEY LOCKS
Key locks for breaker units can be furnished
when requested.
The purpose of this device is to prevent a
breaker from being closed in the connected position
when the lock key is removed from the lock. The
key lock consists of a metal support and key lock
moimted on the top plate flange and adjacent to the
elevating motor clutch.
To operate the key lock if the breaker is in the
disconnected or test position the clutch handle is
pulled forward allowing the key lock bolt to extend
in back of the clutch handle. The key lock key can
then be removed.
If the breaker is in the connected position the
breaker must first be opened.
Snap the selector switch to the "off" position.
The clutch handle can then bepulled forward allowing
the key lock bolt to extend in back of the clutch handle.
The key lock key can then be removed. With the
clutch handle pulled forward the positive interlock
cam plate has rotated the circuit breaker positive
interlock shaft so as to mechanically and electrically
block the breaker from closing.
To lower the breaker, snap the selector switch
to "LOWER", pull the clutch forward and lower the
breaker to the test position.
The key lock does not prevent operation of the
breaker in the test position. However, if the breaker
is elevated to the connected position the key lock will
prevent its closing until the key is returned and the
lock reset. See Fig. 15.
BREAKER INTERFERENCE STOPS
Stops are provided in the breaker unit to prevent
the insertion of a breaker with a 1200A continuous
current rating into a unit with a 2000A rating and
vice-versa. . properly.
The stop plate is bolted to the left hand unit frame
angle near the floor of all breaker units. A projec
32
tion on the breaker frame will interfere with the unit
stop plate when an attempt is made to insert an
incorrect breaker into the unit.
The breaker rating should be checked against the
unit rating and under no circumstances should the
interference stop be removed to allow the breaker to
be inserted.
TRANSFER TRUCKS
Circuit breaker transfer trucks are furnished
with outdoor metal-clad switchgear to facilitate
moving of circuit breakers from unit to unit or to
maintenance areas. The platform at the front end of
the transfer truck is adjustable in height. See Fig. 8,
view A, for instructions for adjustment. The truck
is equipped with two latches, one to hold the breaker
on the truck and one to hold the truck to the metal-
clad switchgear unit. Both latches engage auto
matically, and both are released by a single T-shaped
foot pedal on the rear of the truck. Depressing the
left side of the pedal unlatches the truck from the
switchgear unit, and depressing the right side of the
pedal unlatches the breaker from the truck. Trucks
can be stored in breaker unit when breaker is in
operating position.
SPACE HEATERS
Space heaters are provided in all outdoor equip
ment in order to keep the inside temperature several
degrees higher than that outside. Heaters are also
furnished for indoor equipment when it is known that
abnormal atmospheric conditions exist at the instal
lation, or when specified by the purchaser.
By maintaining a slight temperature differential,
the heaters help facilitate drying and prevent con
densation and the resulting corrosion and insulation
deterioration which might occur.
Heaters are normally located at the sides of the
breaker units, a few inches above the floor. In
auxiliary compartments with a single rollout, the
heaters will be in a space above the rollout. In
auxiliary compartments with two rollouts, the heater
will be in a space between the rollouts. Heaters may
also be located in superstructure compartments,
transition compartments, and in bus ducts if the
operating conditions require them.
Before energizing the heaters, be sure the power
source is of the proper voltage, frequency, and phase
arrangement, and is connected in accordance with
the wiring diagrams furnished with the equipment.
Also, be sure to remove all cartons and miscellaneous
material packed inside the units before energizing the
heaters.
Heaters should be visually inspected several
times a year to make sure they are operating
It is recommended that the heaters be energized
at all times and that thermostatic control not be used.

If thermostaiic control is used, the contacts ^ the
thermostat should be set to close between and
lOO'F on falling temperature, de-energizing the
heaters only when strong sunlight beats on the
switchgear. Under no condition should a differential
thermostat be used to control the heaters because
under conditions of extremely high humidity this
type of thermostat will not operate at all times to
keep the heaters on enough to prevent condensation
in the switchgear.
MAINTENANCE
A regular maintenance schedule should be
established to obtain the best service and reliability
from the switchgear or bus duct. Plant operating
and local conditions will dictate the frequency of
inspection required. For specific information re
garding the maintenance of devices, such as circuit
breakers, relays, meters, etc., refer tothesepa^te
instruction book furnished for each device. The
inspection cabinet, which is furnished, provides a
convenient means for maintaining the circuit
breakers. Under normal conditions the protective
relays do not operate, therefore, it is import^t to
check the operation of these devices regularly.
A permanent record of all maintenance work
should be kept, the degree of detail depending oa the
operating conditions. In any event, it will be a
valuable reference for subsequent maintenance work
and for station operation. It is recommended that
the record include reports of tests made, the
condition of equipment and repairs and adjustments
that were made.
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE REMOVED OR ANY
DOORS OPENED WHICH PERMIT ACCESS TO THE
PRIMARY CIRCUITS, IT IS ESSENTIAL T|^T TOT
CIRCUIT OR CIRCUITS BE DE-ENERGIZED A^
BREAKERS BE WITHDRAWN TOADISCONNECTED
POSITION AND TAGGED.
IF WORK IS TO BE DONE ON REMOTE EQUIP
MENT CONNECTED TO A UNIT, THE BREAKER
FOR THAT UNIT SHOULD BE PLACED IN THE
DISCONNECTED POSITION AND TAGGED. AI^O
THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE ISOLATED
FROM ANY OTHER POWER SOURCES CONNECTED
TO IT.
The primary circuits of metal-clad switchgear
are insulated in order to reduce the size of the equip
ment. However, this insulation, except in one or
two instances, requires a certain amount of air gap
between phases and to ground to complete the
insulation. Inserting any object in this air space,
when equipment is ener^zed, whether it be a tool
or a part of the body, may under certain conditions,
in effect, short circuit this air gap and may cause a
breakdown in the primary circuit to ground and
cause serious damage or injury or both.
Care should be exercised in the maintenance and
checking procedures that accidental tripping or
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
operation is not initiated.
The switchgear structure, bus duct, andconnec
tions should be given the following overall main
tenance at least annually.
1. Thoroughly clean the equipment, removing
all dust and other accumulations. Wipe clean the
buses and supports. Inspect the buses and connections
carefully for evidence of overheating orweakemng of
the insulation.
2 Measure the resistance to groimd and
between 'phases of the insulaUon of buses ^d
connections. Since definite limitscannot begiven for
satisfactory insulation resistance values, a record
must be kept of the reading. We^eiung of^
insulation from one maintenance period to the ne^
can be recognized from the recorded readings. The
readings should be taken under simUar conditions
each time if possible, and toe record should include
the temperature and humidity.
Hieh potential tests are not required, but if it
seems advisable, based on the insulation resistance
repairs, the test voltage should Mt
exceed 141cv A. C. for 4.16kv and 27kv A.C. for 13.8
equipments. These voltages are 75% of factory test
voltages and are in accordance with ANSI standards.
Potential transformers andcontrol power trans
formers must be disconnected during high voltage
testing.
3 Clean elevating mechanism and lubricate
jack screws and gears with lubricant G.E. Co.
#D50H15 or equal.
4 Check primary disconnecting device
contacts for signs of abnormal wear or overheating.
Clean contacts with silver polish. Discoloration
of the silvered surfaces is not ordinarily harmful
unless atmospheric conditions cause deposits such
as sulphides on the contacts. If necessary the
deposits can be removed with a good grade of
silver polish.
Before replacing breaker, apply a thm coat
of contact lubricant D50H47 to breaker studs for
lubrication.
5 Check to see that all anchor bolts and
bolts 'in the structure are tight. Check tightness
and continuity of all control connections and wirmg.
6 If toe switchgear is equipped with heaters,
check' to see that all heaters are energized and
operating.
7. All filters should be inspected and cleanec
or replaced once a year.
OUTDOOR ACRYLIC PAINT FINISH
The outside of standard outdoor switchgear has
acrylic paint finish, blue gray ASA #24, providing
imoroved resistance to all atmospheric conditions,
loiter life and less maintenance than with ordinary
33
• ·. GEB-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear

paint finishes. B. Refinishing with Alkvd or OU Base Paints. Two

a,,,.,.,. If it is desired to refinish acrylic painted
' '· switchgear, it is necessary to use one of the following
procedures in order to secure the best adhesion
of the paint to the original finish.
A. Refinishi with Acrvlic Paint. It is recom­
mended tffiat renrusfilng be done with DuPont
acrylic paint of the desired color. Obtain
materials and instructions for application from
the DuPont Company.
methods are recommended:
1. Spray one sealer coat of DuPont 233E75300
or equivalent which has been reduced to
spraying viscosity with DuPont 37692 or
37666 thinner. Air dry for one hour. Apply
alkyd or oil base paint.
2. Spray one sealer coat of Arco 214-806
primer which has been reduced to spraying
viscosity with Xylol. Air dry for one hour.
Apply alkyd or oil base paint.

OVE.RLAP

.i +o
ME.TAL CLAD
FRAME ANGLE.� ! _s-x,
1
1-+-,__
M/C. FR.

}1� I ··x·· ANG.LE..

-C ·x·
.l ) _J_ ,SHIMS
�·1- 1:0

Bl<R POS.
���I I:
�:I;·
STOP
MOTOR
LIMITSW.
lJI 11JTERLOf.K
CAM..
1
LIFTING BRKT.
E.NLARGE,p VIEW��

FIG. 29A {208A8952) POSITI-VE INTERLOCK ADJUSTMENT

34
 Me'al-olad Switchgear GEH-1802

- > A 1 l4

tJJfl

SICTION K-K
rote's
AFTER ASM « AOJUSTMBNTOF MOTOR SUPr R2.
/S^CRIND EXCESS STUO UENCTHfOT. 2) FLUSH TO ' D ®/i Sieexep
^the nut. to provide safe clearance for BY TH6///TSitLOUi
,?0LL£A

' Lij'V-i'

_ i/C • Eff.'V
-«-a
UMS[ntoYMf»Ae}
4«R#^7W Lu^S^Jtu^
.•S7
rn

wASPPE f.ei''. l^t^nKZ. on

NA«l P73
vM jAt "} Ao^oor^en etn. re
JA^-n /-jztf & faoMre^eA0H£
'"o VceusAir i.
Ton»»ltA"> O'
rttMnntf"

»B"' I
Fmwts
~ • t-i-'

#*4«« JMMf \
ms*f^ ^

iwiiBcnoiB ran witive imtciiuicic *ttUBiwiiT

Iniirt trMMT flitn* and raiaa to lan at iMwi. TOo elaaraect too araaaar tlatjjra twnortln; rail and tlia ttoo
tolti tiwiild not aa laia Oiao 3/31" and aotn tldat to at atuai. Sat fiiUra Intarlaek at V aotltian. Shtocao uaMft
e~3 to oalatatna I0-7/8" t diaantlao batoaan tna back of tna llftlno taadia and tba front of tna intarlock cao
Dtata Indleatod at "n*. Alta adlvtt tar a I/IC" elaartnea to ftitiira rolltr at •*". witJi boitt at Ioom. allow «•
A-*to ratt an ttao "f". Sat naodla F-/a to tntt oradit F-J It rtrtleal. Ilqbtto aolu at "S . Aftar tlqlttao^ baltt.
lock taeiirair wit# a Jano nut. Raima flitura Intarlock oin. Adjutt ttrtkar A -6 to '"••''.•"IJ?',,
data In tita latt k" of tartlcal tra»al of eaa. Flatiro Intarlock roller nitt tndlcata batwaan I3» and iBj idian
Mtor twlun cloia. wian nandla p-ti It In fonard aatltlon and eluien * f P-7 fully anqajad. oint E IimuJI
clottli P-7, Set fiitara Interlock In 130 ootltlan. ootrata unit Interlock! marmt autt ba ttoaaad ay tna
Interlock roller aaforc conacti of oottr twitcn clota and oafora eluun x g P-7 toqtqa. lower erMkar
Sat flktura interlock In S» ootltion, braakor intarlaek roller nutt ba eontarad In tna unit can « "ttb. *i'tura
Intvloek pin am aaarau unit Intarlaek: black "F" on eaa mt ottt in front of block C on
IM Intarfaranea bl«k on tna braakar flitura and tna Intarfaranea bl*k on tna intarlock can Attanoly i^ld M•!/« to ^
1/i" naliia. ro*a flataro out of noutmq to a onint tnat block "B" It oiar black F:. Oamto unit
anoaqa block "6" ana tna isitnant of cao bafora conuctt In ootor twlun clota. For
interlock foliar
flpttm
'1? '
In 13® ootltion, w.and........
.w . . . .
aovo flitura Into tna noutlnq. Osmta unit l^lact ^ wlUna elutcn oaMla
w. .«• ii.ukww fiitum Intarlaek roller bafora tna contact! of tna •otcr
ttivwit of Inttrlpck cm biic t« ittpocd ^ tlit ftratktr fUturt Inurlock roU^
wt cnrt btfcr* tftt sHdln^ cluttft p^7 «•
tnJT;r.;i£J U-bi.ikid-|!,"«.i flituro lnt».|ock roll«-

FIG. 29B (829C0463) POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR 1000 M.V.A.

35
 GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear

�,
11
1
IO
Jlll.LHI ,:-+! � !Z-..
• L!..· .. '
I
--- -.J

...
.....
"",.;""
,__._ __ ..,,..,. ___

-
-I
')(

..: \ �,:
��

,�"'·"� ,�
-·....·
... Z'

..,.
-=· -� NI 1-
l@ ..�1... ::i!
I ;::ii
.\" i ::.,
9. • i� .....
�1

I ...!�
.:$

I :o ";'f
e""lll �-li ���
�

FIG. 29C (6519802) POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR STD AM-2.4 ANO 4.6
 Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-18C

3» 'f*

Q
UJ
z): 1 v^/
0)1
U)l

-r-
.§)

01 I
Si —
t" "

— —-^ j t «. --"•!
• 1 1
1 t. ?•> ''
»!}*
S Si * .'''' .••S2S
•>^1 "» 2 r %! •> £> J I.I^oiSs^lsijsi'ratk
0-7Cjt-' • oSSJSaStS-o* • «
:u. 5|l?Ki:r:=55l55fs
,3S£j«
StSSVOSS
Xft / I i 2s3^*^ "s5si5-ij
^s2rs%!-ssr2|£vil°5
^ Ch
r^Z. :a-«
« 0*
xSa
3 »|

s.igrs55«"""
aSC a ao
.S-SS-!
a--
2^? ."s. .stviSsag.i?
-i2sr3TSa3'f2ss?'s|"s
s''o'5-";»- sscssas ~
»a!f-slss-.'ss-;-
——
^ i f J! .L «« • c « y <•«»i ••-"lo?—
^ ^
-»?"ss3tS

«
' V:^ •'
'''U' C'
^
(»•
«
:sasa<-^j7s;i-3;'3S
- r - t .23"..'ss«
IJAMl K i t SSS'3 3St S.:--''*5S..i:
•£r'5-=S':s:S»2!s43 2'»
s-oftsggsj-.a. :lczs
.233' i-Ci"SS"'^" S-.
i .^C-*5l!SSf-6C-oS"'5
9

«23. i-s «,.,

;nsas3:n6||23g-^2
iVL-^r-ssialfjg'is
tirWafA ^/?-4 -55 2 e-t t J r s J r:
vj
* •? ♦59 k ^9!* ^ 1 &??«

•y w- ?«:•.
22-2
-
»S|!
9

5fiSfSs;::sa:e33|-S
.8328:23223:15 ||Jl5

\''J

FIG. 29D {265C0235) POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR M-36

GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear

RENEWAL PARTS
ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS

1. RENEWAL PARTS SHOULD BE ORDERED FROM THE SWITCHGEAR PRODUCTS DEPARTMENT.

2. ALWAYS SPECIFY THE REQUISITION NUMBER ON WHICH THE EQUIPMENT WAS ORIGINALLY
FURNISHED.
3. SPECIFY THE QUANTITY. REFERENCE NUMBER, DESCRIPTION AND THIS BULLETIN NUMBER.
4. STANDARD HARDWARE, SUCH AS SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, ETC., IS NOT LISTED. SUCH
ITEMS SHOULD BE PURCHASED LOCALLY.
5. FOR PRICES, REFER TO THE NEAREST OFFICE OF THE GENER.-\L ELECTRIC COMPANY.
6. IF INSULATING M.^TERIAL, SUCH AS TAPE, VARNISH, COMPOUND, ETC., IS REQUIRED, IT MUST
BE SPECIFIED SEPARATELY.
7. IF PARTS LISTED SEPARATELY ARE TO BE ASSEMBLED AT THE FACTORY, ORDER MUST SO
bTATH •
8. NOT ALL PARTS LISTED HEREIN WILL BE USED ON ANY ONE EQUIPMENT. PARTS NOT USED IN
ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT SHOULD NOT BE ORDERED AS RENEWAL PARTS.

PRIMAHY DISCONNECT DEVICES

iSEE FIG. NO. Ill

REF.
NO.
DESCRIPTION

S Front Primary Disconnect Device

Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
Connections

6 1Rear Primary Disconnect Device

1Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
;Conneciions

NOTE: Insulating material required lor

Ref. Nos. a and 6 will be furnished
with oroer.

POSITIVE MECHANICAL INTERLOCK

(FIG. NO. 30A)

REF. NO. I DESCRIPTION

3 Complete positive mechanical

interlock assembly
4 Elevating mechanism motor
(llS-v Q-C)
4 Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-c)
4 Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-cl
18 Spring only

FIG. 30A VIEW SHOWING ELEVATING MECHANISM MOTOR AND CONTROL UNIT

38
 INSTRUCTIONS AND
GEH-1802V
RECOMMENDED PARTS
Supersedes
FOR MAINTENANCE GEH-1802U & GEF-3837

METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR

Types M26 and IVI36

FOR MAGNE-BLAST AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER

TYPES AM.4.I6 AND AM-13.8

SWITCHGEAR PRODUCTS DEPARTMEIMT

GENERAL® ELECTRIC
PHILAOELFHIA. PA.
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

PAGE

Fig. 1 Typical Indoor Metal-clad Switchgear Equipment .............••••........ .............................. 4

Fig. 2 Typical Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear Equipment - Front View .............•.......... ........... 4
Fig, 3 Typical Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear Equipment With Protected Aisle - Side View......... 4
Fig, 4 Magne Blast Breaker .................•.....•...........•.•.•••.•...•••..•..•.................•...•.•...•...... ... 5
Fig, 5 Magne Blast Breaker ......•.................•..........••.••. •.....••.•..••.•.............. .••..•••.•.......... .. 5
Fig. 6 Magne Blast Breaker •..•.................•.•.••••••..•••••••••••••••.••....•...........•••••••••............ .•.•. 5
Fig, 7 Installation Details for Indoor Metal-clad Switchgear ...... .... .......... ............... ..........••••• 6
Fig. 8 Installation Details for Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear ...................•••......................•••• 8
Fig, 9 Jnstalfatibn Details for Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear With Protected Aisle ................... 10
Fig. 10 Metal-clas Switchgear 11
Fig, 11 Measu!'ement of Adjustment of Primary Disconnecting Devices .. ......... ..... ..................... 12
Fig. 12 Potential Tra.'ISformer Rollout Shown in Withdrawn Position ......................................... 12
Fig. 13 Ollmmy Removable Element .•.•.. .••........•............ ........ .•.•.... .•..... ......•. ..•.... .•...•.. ........ 13
Fig. 14 Goound and Test Device ·····················································································•f•• 13
Fig. 15 Padlocking Arrangement, Key Interlocking and Bus Boot Assembly................................. 14
Fig, 16 Control Power Transformer Rollout Shown in Open Position......................................... 15
Fig, 17 Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear - Addition of Units to Line-up•....................................... 16
Fig. 18 Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear With Protected Aisle ........ ;.......................................... 17
Fig. 19 Outdoor Tran.sition Compartment •.•.•.....•......•.....•......• ••••••••• •...• .• ...... ...... .••••.....•... .••• 18
Fig. 20 Ou!doo� rr�Jtioµ Compartm�gt ········��············••••••••••••···············••••••••••••••••••••······· 18
Fig. 22 Inspection Box for 13.8 KV Metal-clad Switchgear ...................................................... 19
Fig. 23 Bolt Torque Values •••.•.. .•...•...•••••.•...•...•.....•••..••••.••.••..••...•.••.•••••••••..•.....•••••••.•••..... 20
FiJ. 23A Bus Duct Gaskets ..•.....•.•...•....•........•.....•...•...•.•.....•...............•.........•...•••....... ,......... 2U
Fig. 24 Method of Making Bus Bar· Connections ..................................................................... 21
Fig. 25 13.8 KV Taped Joints ·······································································••t1•••••••••••••••t1••• 2J
Fig. 25A 4.16 & 13.8 Bus Insulating: Boot ••••ti•••••••••••••••••••••·····················•······························· 21
Fig. 25B Taping Roof EntraJ1ce Bushing •.•.••• ti......................................................................... 23
Fig. 26 Insulation of Connection Bars •.•.••....•.•••.•...•.•.....................•......••.•.•.•.•••.•.•.•.........• ti.. 23
Fig. 27 Rear View of Unit Showing Through-Type Current Transformers .................................. 24
Fig. 28 Termination Without Pothead Single-Conductor ..........., .................... ............ .............. 24
Fig. 29 Termination Without Pothead Multi-Conductor ........................................................... 25
Fig, 29A Positive Interlock Adju'stments •••ti•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••··············································· 29
Renewal Parts

Fig, SOA View Showing Elevating: Mechanism Motor and Control Unit .......................................... 30
Fig, 30 Elevating: Mechanism .for M-26 Equipments Rated 250 MV A
and M-36 Equipments Rated 1200A 500 mva ......................................... 31
Fig. 31 Elevating: Mechanism for M-36H Equipments Rated 750 mva
M-26H Equipments Rated 350 mva
M-36 Equipments Rated 200A .............................................. . 31
Fig. 31A Elevating Mechanism for M-36HH Equipments Rated lOOOmva....................................... . 32
Fig. 32 A11gle Bracket and Ch.aln Drive ••••••••.•••••••.••••••••••••••...•.•••..••••.•....•••....•••••.•••••••.....••.. 33
Fig. 33 Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-26 ....•......••••.•...•.••........•...............•...........•••••...•...... 33
Fig, 34 Shutter MedhaniSm Assembly M-36 .......................................................................... . 33
Fig, 35 Bus Support ........................................................................................................... 34
Fig. 36 Molded Bus Support...•••....••.•••••...•••..••••••••....••...•.••••••..•••...•••••.••..•••.......................• 34
Fig, 37 Bus Connection Boot (4.16 and 13,SKV)...................................................................... . 34
Fig. 38 Door Handles and Locu.•...............................................•...•••••...•••••.•.•••.........•.......• 35
Fig, 39 Wiring Devices and Miscellaneous Parts.•••.......•.....••........••..•••.....•..••............••.•••...••. 35
Fig. 40 Fuse Rollout Unit ······················�··········································································· 35
Fig, 41 Potential Transformer Rc>llout Unlt;..................,ti••······················•••••••••••••••••••··········· 36
Fig, 42 Control Power Transformer Rollout Unit .................................................................. . 36
Fig. 43 Single and Triple-Conductor Potheads •....••••.....••••••....•.............•......•......•••.....•..••••..•• 36

2
 Metal-Clad Swltchgear GEH-1802

CONTENTS

RECEIVING, HANDLING & STORAGE I

RECEIVING 1
HANDLING 1
STORAGE I

DESCRIPTION I
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE 1
PRIMARY ENCLOSURE 1
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT 1
BREAKER ELEVATING MECHANISM 12
RLEVATING MOTOR 12
PRIMARY DISCONNECT DEVICE 12
BUS COMPARTMENT 12
CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABLE COMPARTMENT 12
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER COMPARTMENT 12
DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT 12
ROLLOUT OUT-SWITCH UNITS 13
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE 13
GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICE 13

INSTALLATION 15
LOCATION 15
PREPARATION OF FLOOR-ANCHORING 15
TRANSITION COMPARTMENTS 18
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT 19
TESTING CABINET 19
ADDITION OF UNITS TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT 19
MAIN BUS ASSEMBLY 20
TORQUE VALUES 20
TAPED JOINTS 20
BUS DUCT .V/.V.V.V".V.V."V.V.".".V 20
CLEANING BUS INSULATION 20
PRIMARY CABLES 20
POTHEADS 21
TERMINATION WITHOUT POTHEAD SINGLE-CONDUCTOR 21
TERMINATION WITHOUT POTHEAD MULTI-CONDUCTOR 22
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (THROUGH TYPE) 22
CONTROL CABLES 22
GROUND BUS 22
LIGHTNING PROTECTION 22
ROOF ENTRANCE BUSHING TAPING 23
DOOR ALIGNMENT 26

VESTING AND INSPECTION . 26

OPERATION 26
BREAKER POSITIONING 26
POSITIVE INTERLOCK GENERAL 27
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR SOLENOID OPERATED BREAKERS 27
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR STORED ENERGY BREAKERS 27
STATIONARY AUXILIARY SWITCH 27
SPRING DISCHARGE CAM 27
KEY LOCKS 28
BREAKER INTERFERENCE STOPS 28
TRANSFER TRUCKS 28
SPACE HEATERS 28

MAINTENANCE .... 28

RENEWAL PARTS 30
I
 Metal-clad SwUchgear GEH-1802

METAUCLAD SWITCHGEAR
TYPES M26 AND M36
FOR MAGNE-BLAST AIR CIRCUiT BREAKER
TYPES AM-4.16 AND AM-13.8

Metal-clad switchgear ia equipment to

control and protect various types of elec
trical apparatus and power circuits.

The switchgear consists of one or more

units which are mounted side by side and CIRCUIT
INTERRUPTING
connected mechanically and electrically to BREAKER
CAPACITY CURRENT FIGURE
gether to form a complete switching equip KVA
ment. Typical equipments are shown in
Figures 1, 2 and 3.
TYPE M-28
The circuit breakers are easily re
movable to provide maximum accessibility
for maintenance with minimum interrup AM-4.16-250 230,000 1200 - 2000
tion of services. The switchgear is designed AM-4.16-350 350,000 1200 - 3000
to provide maximum safety to the operator.
All equipment is enclosed in groundedmet^
compartments.
TYPE M-36
The equipment is available in the
ratings listed in the following table. The
ratings of the equipment and devices are
based on usual service conditions as cover
AM-13.8-500 500,000 1200 - 2000
ed in 'A_NSI standards. Operation at cur
rents above the equipment rating will re AM-13.8-750 750,000 1200 - 2000
sult in temperature rises in excess of AM-13.8-IOOO 1,000,000 1200 - 3000
AM-7.2-500 500,000 1200 - 2000
these standards, and is not recommended.
For outdoor Installation the same basic
equipment is built into a weatherproof
housing as in Figures 2 and 3.

• ' !' h
• I e.

A /

/ /-.

Kagne-blaat Breakers

Thf9« instructions do not pur^iort to cover sli detsjis oz variations in ^ulp/wne not to provide for
pC'SiitJe eof!Cin<^ncy tn tv r-ft m ewrrection snetaJiscion, operation or BaintQoance4 Should
futther intOTiwti^ desired or should perttcular probiow^ ansv vhich are noe covered suffieiently (or
thv purv,'iaace'£ puiposes, the natter should be referred to the General Sleceric Company.
To the eatenc rvjuirod the pfduots described herein aeet applicablo A.'iSl, tSSC and HtttA standardsr
bue no auc/i aasujance iS ylvcn i.'iCA respect to iocel coder end ordinances beeeose they vary greatly.
GEH-ld02 Metal^clad Swltchgear

.aCWOVA^LC COVCH ACCCll

^ro wtm fX WIRIX6 rnouGH

>#
ALL FLOOR STEEL TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER

CHANNELS SHOULD BE SET LEVEL WITH EACH OTHER

AND SHOULD BE LEVEL OVER THEIR FULL LENGTH

ROUGH FLOOR THICKNESS AND REINFORCING DEPENDS

ON LOADING AND OTHER NORMAL FACTORS. AND SHOULD
BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH RECOMMENDED PRACTICE

BUfMCn REHMBLC
SIDE

tlNISHEa FLOOD IKE

•vM'.-r.v'
RECOMMENDED METHOD

FINISHEO FLOOR LINE

ALTERNATE METHOD
NOTC: rr IS 1UPERDTIVE THDT
FLOOR STEEL 8E EVEN
WITH FINISHED FLOOR
DNO THAT BOTH BE LEVEL

Fis> 7 InstalUtlen 0«UUb

 Metal-Clad Svitchgear GEH-1802

IT MAT fiC NCCCSSAAY TO RCHOVC

POTKCAD 00 CAOLE tUPfOOT POO
MEHKO fi

1 i [LiL

METHOD OF LIFTING

MEMBERS A-aC TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER

A-RAISINO MEMBER • CHANNEL OR WOOD BEAM

B- 3" CHANNEL FURNISHEO WITH GEAR

3P C- LIFTWG JACKS
D« COVER TO BE REMOVEO AND REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS ARC IN PLACE

NOTE*. WHEN LIFTING M'26 SWITCHGEAR

LOCATE SEAM 'A' ABOVE LIFTING
CHANNELS "BT

-DOOR OPEN

ALTERNATE METHOD OF LIFTING

members ABC TO BE FURNISHED BT PURCHASER
a - 3* CHANNEL FURNISHEO WITH CEAR
0 ' COVER TO BE REMOVED AND REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS ARE IN PLACE
E - SPREADER

For Indoor Hotal-clad Switchgsar

OEH-1802 Metal-clad Swltchgear

CAM CONNICTION

WOOD

00

K
S
TRACK MCK

METHODS OF UFTIN6

fiP/>iLY OsAr OA 3/0*aro c£A)£Afr

C^^SKBT To 57^£1 Si/e/AAres Aai'D '3A:r^
/9zzat^ <r<e'/»ssvr 7S>
dock neyOP/T/^ TACA^ySAAoeB
' OASAAST Roor cftP
1
li'li •". STt.MUT
-IJRSICET

DOOR .|.n *|tST'l. BOlT .roof or (MO

/ SECTlOW

ENLBKGED StC. B-B ENLRRSCfl SEC.C-C

MtfWOO JfSsa.miBB/^1^ MBTAOJS or/fsSE.mS>BlfAti Fig. 8 Installation Details

XloOfZ eSftSKST AT" /ScoA CAP (^ASAsay r\
SA/A'A'/ivef ®=20 / 7 ^ /?T •£A/AA/AA<f SAB/TA
 Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
REMOVABI.L
BaatP
conn
IM RCCCS
TO C I S
UNO TO
PRIMART
cnaiC
CaMMRTMEMT
FOR ANCHOR BOLT
lOCRTIONS SEE FLOOR
PLAN ORRWINQS
FURNISHED WITH REOUISITION
I
t
VIEW "X"
SKOHIM ANCHORMe Of UNIT*
WITH CNANHEL MM
Hinu
-SCREENS TO BE bolted ON
EACH END AT IHSTALLRTION. REMOVOtLE PLATES TO BE CUT
MUST BE KEPT CLEAN FOR TO SUIT CONDUITS BT PURCHASER
VEUTILATinu
FOUNDATION DATA
Without Reir Enclosure
ANA** AND DCPTH Of SOIL DEARINC SUNFACEE Of EACH
fOUHOAtlON KUST DC ALTCftfD TO SUIT SOIL CONDITIONS.
bottom surfaces of FOUNDATIONS SHOULD BE BELOW
FROST ACTION OR OACNFILLCD WITH PERVIOUS MATERIAL
AND AOEOUATCLV DRAINEa
SURFACE'B'SHOULO BE LEVEL OVER US FULL LENGTH
TO INSURE EASY HANDLIN6 OF REMOVABLE ELEMENTS.
CONCREU FAO SHOULD BE REINFORCED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH STANDARD PRACTICE.
re CHANGE HEIGHT Of TRUCK flOOR
PANEL LdOSeN NI/T'AT. APJDST LEYER'a'TD
GifC DESIRFD HEIGHT AND LOCK 8Y
tightening nut *A'.
PAWARV
CONDUIT WulH
ADJUSTABLE PLATPDRH VirVjV
NCATEN
VlcRftNS to BE HelTEP ON
CftCH ENP AT fN STflLlATJON. ACNOVASLC PLATES TO BE CUT
MUST BE kept CLEAN fOR TO SUIT CONDUITS DY PURCHASER
VENTKATfOM
with Rear Enclosure
for Outdoor Hotal-ctad Switchgear
;etal-clad Svltchgear

«UC«6«^ itt
Ai^LC T« »ii. iBXfaoto
i>iM«7,s tu r.iHCvcrc
« CxfONSroN ff#iT5

ClAD }j
ceR»i>»Bu s!t h
ecnwHUbccM °'z
V
«
~ ^ j i»giT

] META^tCUfca
I £>4^ SECTION
snav^Tt

HlHCtD I
PCVICE I
PANEL I

lcni"Ml
I tMCL-l
 Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1602

RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE

RECEIVING
Every case or crate leaving the factory
Is plainly marked at convenient places with
ease number, requisition number, custom
er's order, front or rear. anTwBenforsize
and other reasons it is necessary to divide
the equipment for shipment, with the unit
number of the portion of equipment enclosed
in each shipping case.
The contents of each package of the
shipment are listed In the Packing Details.
This list is forwarded with the shipment,
packed in one of the cases. The case is
especially marked and its number can also
be obtained from the Memorandum of Ship
ment. To avoid thetossofsm^parts when
unpacking, the contents of each case should
be carefully checked against the Packing
Details before discarding the packing ma
terial. Notify the nearest General Electric
Company representative at once If any
shortage of material is discovered.
All elements before leaving the factory
are carefully inspected and packed by work
men experienced in the proper handlingand
packing of electrical equipment. Upon re
ceipt of any apparatus animmediate inspec
tion should be made for any damage sustain
ed while enroute. If injury is evident or an
indication of rough handling Is visible, a
claim for damage should be filed at once
with the transportation company and the
General Electric Company notlfiedprompt-
ly. Information as to damaged parts, part
number, case number, requisition number,
etc., should accompany the claim.
HANDLING
Before uncrating, Indoor equipment
may be moved by a crane with slings under
the skids. If crane facilities are not avail
able, rollers under the skids may be used.
Fig. 7 shows suggested method of handling
the swttchgear after it is removed from
the skids.
Methods of handling outdoor equipment
are shown in Fig. 8. After the equipment
is in place the lifting plates should be re
moved and reassembled, "turned In" so
that passageway at the ends of the equip
ment will not be obstructed.
STORAGE
If it is necessary to store the equip
ment for any length of time, the following
precautions should be taken to prevent
corrosion:
1. Uncrate the equipment.
2. Cover important parts such as jack
screws, gears and chain of lifting mechan
ism, ilnlage and moving machine-finished
parts with a heavy oil or grease.
3. Store in a clean, dry place with a
moderate temperature and cover with a
suitable canvas to prevent deposit of dirt
or other foreign substances upon movable
parts and electrical contact surfaces.
4. Batteries should be uncratedandput
on trickle charge immediately on receipt.
5. If dampness or condensation may be
encountered In the storage location, heaters
should be placed inside the units to prevent
moisture ^mage. Approximately SOOwatts
of heaters per unit will be required. Re
move all cartons and other miscellaneous
material packed inside units before energiz
ing any heaters. If the equipment has iKen
subjected to moisture it should be tested
with a lOOOv or 2500v megger. A reading
of at least 200 megohms should be obtained.
6. Breakers should be prepared for
storage separately. Refer to appropriate
breaker instruction book.

DESCRIPTION

Each unit is made up of a secondary

enclosure and a primary enclosure, as
shown In Figure 10.

SECONDARY ENCLOSURE

The secondary enclosure is usually

located at the brewer withdrawal side of
the unit, although in certain units it may be
on the side opposite to the breaker with
drawal area. It consists of a compartment
with a hinged door or panel upon which are
mounted the necessary instruments, control
and protective ddvlces. The terminal
blocks, fuse blocks, and some control de
vices are mounted inside the enclosure on
the side sheets and a trough ts provided at
the top to carry' wiring between units.

PRIMARY ENCLOSURE

The primary enclosure contains the

high voltage equipment and connections ar
ranged in compartments to limit the
effects of faults and so minimize the damage.
E
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT

The removable element consists of a

Magne-Blast circuit breakerwhichIncludes
its operating mechanism, interlocks, mov
able primary and secondary disconnecting
devices. The Magne-Blast breakers are
equpped with wheels for easy insertion
and removal. Refer to Figure 4, 5, 6.
All removable elements furnished on a
particular requisitian and of a like design
and ratings are completely Interchangeable
one with the other.

The removable as well as the station

ary elements are built with factory jigs
and fixtures thus insuring interchangeabUity.
Fig. 10 (8039690) Metal-Clad Switchgear
GEB-1802 Metal-Clad SwiU wear

For adetaileddescrlptionotttieMagne- are inserted into the sleeves leaving only

•Blast breaker and its operation the applica- CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABLE'
the bolted joints exposed. Where stand
ble breaker instruction' book should'be ard configurations exist the joint is in
COMPARTMENT'
consulted. sulated with a Polyvlnyl Chloride boot. The current transformers are mounted
BREAKER ELEVATING MECHANISM Special conditions and non standards are In a compartment isolated from the other
taped. equipment. Provision is made in this com
The elevating mectianism lor eleva partment for connecting the purchaser's
ting or lowering the removable element primary cable by means of potheads or
to or from its connected position supports clamp type terminals.
the removable element in the operating
position. In the test position the breaker CQiii'Ctf'P POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
PSO>4*9
is lowered to the guide rails and withdrawn COMPARTMENT
from the fully insertedpositlon 2 1/4 inches.
Potential transformers are located In
This mechanism consists of heavy- a compartment alxive the current trane-
duty steel jack screws on which are carried formers or in a separate unit adjacent to
the breaker untts.
nuts to support the elevating carriage. The •
carriage is so designed that the removable,
element can be readily inserted or' with The transformers are mounted on a
drawn after the carriage has been lowered movablecarriageequipped with primary and
to the disconnected position without neces secondary disconnecting devices. Whenthe
sitating the removal of any bolts nuts or. potential transformers are disconnected,
screws.
they are at a safe striking distance from
•cvCA CdwT
mutci all live parts of the switchgear. In addi
tion a grounding device Is provided which
The breaker cannot be lowered or
raised until Ithasbeentripped. The breaker contacts the fuses when the potential trans
cannot be closed except with the breaker
formers are disconnected, effectively dis
in either the operating or test position. charging the transformers. In this position
the transformer fuses may lie safely re
Guide rails are built into the metal- I •NCItlH moved and replaced. A terrier mounted at
clad frame to guide the removable breaker ttFT PMitKa the rear of the carriage moves with thecar-
element into correct position before the riage to a position In front of the stationary
breaker is raised into the operating posi part of the primary disconnect device, ^
tion by means of the elevating mechanism mm providing a safe striking distance from all
which is motor operated. live parts. See Figure 12.
DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT
For a detailed explanation of the eie- Dummy removable elements. Fig. 13,
vatiiw mechanism refer to descriptlonunder are used as a means of isolating circuits
"OPERATION". or bus sections, where operation is infre
ELEVATING MOTOR Fig. II Heawrement of Adjustment for quent and a circuit breaker cannot be
Priaary Disconnecting Devices economically justified. The device con
sists of a framework to simulate the clr-
One elevating motor is furnished for cull breaker removable element with a set
each equipment. It is designed for quick
interchangeability between units and is
held in place by a stationary clamp under
the clutch handle and a snap hasp on the
front. Two dowels are located in the
base to maintain alignment.
A short cable with plug is provided
and must be plugged into the receptacle
above the motor mounting. Aselector switch
Is mounted on the motor for reversing the
motor direction. This selector switch
should not be used to start and stop the
elevating gear motor.
PRIMARY DlaCONNECTLNG DEVICE
The primary disconnecting devices uti
lize silver to silver contacts to insure
against reduction of current carrying cap
acity due to oxidation of the contact sur
faces. These contacts are of thehi^pres-
sure line contact tube and socket design,
the tube being backed up by heavy garter
springs to insure contact pressure. Refer
to Fi^re 11,
BUS COMPARTMENT
The main tnises are enclosed in a
metal compartment with removable front
covers to provide accessibility.
The Inis is supported by a flame
retardent, track resistant, glass laminate
insulating material which is practlcaiiy
impervious to moisture, and an excellent
dielectric.

The tnis insulation is an extruded ther

moplastic insulation sleeve, suitable for
105° C operating temperature. The bus bars Fig. 12 Potential Tranaforner Kollout ShoHn in Withdrawn Position

Dumiy Removable Element
of six sbids similar to those on the magne-
blast breakers. The lover end of the studs
are connected, front to back, by copper
bars vhlcb are fully insulated and me^l-
enclosed. The stationary structure la the
same as for a circuit breaker. When the
device is elevated into position, it con
nects the front set of metai-ciad discon
necting devices to the rear set.
Under no conditions must the dummy
element be elevated or lowered when the bus
or the unit is energized. Key interlocks
are applied to insure that all source of
power are disconnected before the dummy
element can be operated. Refer to Figure
15.
ROLLOUT FUSE-SWITCH UNTTS
Rollout load-break disconnect switch
es, with or without current limiting fuses
of hl^ interrupting capacity, are some
times used in metal-clad swltchgear to
protect and switch small transformers and
circuits where circuit breakers cannot be
economically or functionally Justified.
The rollout switch Is designated as
type SE-10, and the units In which they are
used are designated as type SEM-26 or
SEM-36. For additional informatton on
these equipments, refer to the supplement
ary Instructions furnished.
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE
Current limiting fuses with high in
terrupting rating are sometimes used in
metal-clad swltchgear to protect small
transformers or circuits where circuit
MetaJ-clad Switchgear GBH-1802
breakers canno't be economically or func
tionally justified.
The fuses are mounted on a movable
support equipped with disconnecting de
vices. Control power transformers of 15
kro and smaller may be mounted on the
rollout with the fuses. See Figure 16.
When the fuses are disconnected, they
are at a safe striking distance from aU
live parts of the swltchgear. In addition
a grounding device is provided which con-
tects the fuses after they are disconnected,
effectively removlngany static charge from
the fuses. In this position the fuses may
be safely removed arid replaced. The dis
connecting devices are capable of inter
rupting transformer magnetizing current,
but should not be used to Interrupt load
current. Mechanical or key interlocks
are applied to prevent operating the dis
connecting device while the load Is con
nected. nis is genearally accomplished
by interlocking so that the transformer
secondary breaker must be locked In the
open position before the disconnecting de
vice can be opened or closed.
GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICE
The grounding and test device, Figure
14, provides a convenient means of ground
ing the cables or the bus In order to safe
guard personnel who may be working on the
cables or the equipment. The device can
also be used for applying power for high
potential tests or for fault location, to
measure insulation resistance (Megger).
By using potential transformers, it can
also be used for phasing out cables.
lUllU The three studs of the device are sim
ilar to those of the magne-blast circuit
breakers. The studs are mounted on a re
movable plate which can be placed in either
of two positions. In one position the studs
will engage the front (Bus) contacts only
and In the other position the studs will en
gage the rear (Line) contacts only of a
metal-clad unit.
To indicate the proper placement of the
studs on the device, opposite sides of the
assembly are marked "Line" and "Bus".
The word corresponding to the desired
position mils' be toward the operator.
To use, the device is rolled Into the
metal-clad housing in place of the circuit
breaker, and raised into or lowered from
the connected position by means of the
'lV— circuit breaker elevating mechanism.
In addition to the device described
alx3ve, there is available a form of ground
ing and testing device equipped with both
bus and line side bi^hii^s , power operated
grounding contacts, posing receptacles,
and a complete safety Interlocking system.
For details of construction and operation
of this device, refer to GEI-38957 for 4.16
kv equipment, or GE1-50H4 for 7.2 kv and
Fig. 14 (8028015) Ground and Test 13.8 kv equipment.
Device
(C^le shown not furnished by G. E. Co.
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear

j Wj

B—m

M2ZZ2&.

Fig. IS Padlockiqg Arrangement, Key Interlocking and Bus Boot Assembly

14
 Fig. 16 Control Power Transformer RoUbut Shown in Open Position
Before any installation work is done,
consult and study all drawings furnished
by the General Electric Company for the
particular requisition. These drawings in
clude arrangement drawings, wiring and
elementary diagrams and a summary of
the equipment.
Frequently additional shipping mem
bers are installed in the tius and primary
area to insure against shipping damage.
It is imperative that all shipping members
be removed, joints properly tightened and
insulated before energizing the bus. All
exposed primary joints and connections
must be insulated for the system rating.
Shipping braces are shown on fte arrange
ment drawings.
Mats, screens, railings, etc, which
are external to the switchgear, tnit which
may lie required to meet any local codes,
must be furnished by the purchaser.
LOCATION
The recommended aisle space required
at the front and at the rear of the equipment
is shown on the floorplandrawingfurnislied
for the particular re^isltion. The space at
the front must be sufficient to permit the
insertion and withdrawal of the circuit
breakers, and their transfer to other units.
The space at the rear must besulficlentfor
installation of cables, for inspection and
maintenance, and on some equipments to
draw out potential transformers.
PREPARATION OF FLOOR - ANCHORING
Indoor Equipment
The station floor must be strong enough
to prevent ss^ging due to weight of the
switchgear structure and to withstand the
impact stress caused by the opening of the
circuit breakers under short circuit con-
dltions. The impact loading is approxi
mately 1-1/2 times the static load.
Suitabie means must be provided by
the purchaser for anchoring the emipment
to the floor. It is essential that the floor
be level to avoid distortion of the switch-
gear structure and the equipment be com
pletely aligned prior to final anchoring.
The recommended floor construction Is
shown in Figure 7. The floor channels
must be level and straight with respect to
each other. Steel shims should be used
for final leveling of the switchgear tf nec
essary. Care should be taken to provide a
smooth, hard, and level floor under and in
front of. the units to facilitate Installation
and removal of the breaker. If the floor is
not level and flush with the flOOT channels,
It will be difficult to handle the breaker
because it will not be level with respect to
the stationary element.
Recommended practice is to weld the
switchgear structure to the floor channels,
using a tack weld at points indicated for
anchoring on the drawing. If welding fac
ilities are not available the gear should be
bolted to the floor channels.
GBH-1802 Metal-clad Switcbgear

AH, .

T"
"t;

1 t

ji

nTw vmrs Aooto a t t s ^ r c s o Mfw aooao a t

FROHJ v/#iv
tm)

tttfwt ntesr Mrm m»ftr tcrr

CHO MtTf*** OKLT if-

I f E«0 seCTtQ/4

^ M9kn f9t Aeiro*

ro%srHtm m k
snrt»n'^f-r*

GWIMp M
Cdiwrcndv
ipta

assembly *0* VOW-A-

(OotAMtf i^vn Tb«rrMnO (fM& A^4Attrtt* Vt*ir)

WITH REAR enclosure:

t.«ra
/'HiNovt Tffi» STffip witv fftair
/ |lt» SCCTlMf ONIY i
::i Si
V
fnoicotjfie
CKB ^eri0N I AtfwA /W CAA tfto SeAOH^ dMVigva COHMtCTtAH, Af*0
r "J
£AfO i£CTtOf4. View iy f "fIfW V
y y

2 srr MWVHtr&) tf*AtACt mo OOLT- r04€THtA AS SA0¥M

'^Ndlfs MR «MflNC ' ift ASSSMOLY • f •MIWBir "C
tdCcrMM
see s<cTrsN'Y«r* ^ AASKMOLA trMMS JJfTtO Ot AAOC£OUA£ MO.t
4k AMStfASUS HtW OOOA CAPS AS SftOMf tM Vt£W ^ # ?ltVV«
fCOOND SVS
e»NNunoN s AiitMsif o^oi/Mo evs SAtfcr osthma/ t*ts^£

vmvo
^8-
^QMitr
itsvY OAoof^o svs. AS xwiMy /V AstMMesr e t issvwx
6. i4i5i'i40AX £AS OAAJ A/fO MSUIATC ItR
esssriitt ' MSTAU^TtOM £OOf(.

r* CM» UtllM
MSStMBLT 'c U94 e«fft vcMsreo VIEW 'O*
(B6trfK« w uNtrs i»<irR(K^ (eN0 vtcM Of t«»TW4 mt)

WITHOUT REAR ENCLOSURE

Fig. 17Outdoor Metal-CladSwitcbgear - Addition of Unite to Line - Up.

16
 Uetal-clad SwUchgear GBH-180S

I < I r1\-
II
II
1! II
ii
II
ii

In
!E
!1
I
u ll.
iS
I..JL-

Miw vNiTs «oocp «r icrr fitp CVlSTIMp UMIT^

fftOWT VIEW

itiir
mo vr»r MfTca
/Mf'CP ymitntom
y»P
Z/'iMtT/ ffiMT
n etp

SMT Cif
Qllf,
O-J n o c«p— Hit Murnt M
tHf tttPf
r "1 jr ^disix Ttu»» Aii4Lr
t C
HiMTfL I evm A
CMP--*
m SPffT
•UT«L CUP AtSlX A
Q

«a««s n> r" 1 ro Knayc e«isTii(4 cno Sjrcer(i(M>

caancnw e B A. RrKOVC TNC MLlPWiMf iTfMS FM«t AIPLE StCTlM
I vrNT pamii
t. t1» VtMT CUF
tsppin M4U
^eOTEA 9. noof CAAS
KtoA rurr 4. IMP srcrrdN ctNSiArmf pa irrfis maiop a
s. ritoAr covCB (tmt rtutwitHn)
4 pcACfirs it)
B. ACAPVe AMA CAA.CNP SCAieN, pMClAP BPS
coNNecTfw Awp tND sfcriPN mn nerAi cuo scmii

SECTION 0-fl TO lASTALL Nfk^ ACTAl CLAP VAfTS^UAT;

I. scr NEW iuiir(s) m aiacc amp s#tr TAsifNCi
I. AssEneic iTfAs iisrco in •
S. ASSCAPK new tPAA CAPS
ICT«L ClAO
4. Assmaic CCACMP svs spiicc Arrmf
NNP mew ^«(MP CPS
wciPAnsA
S ASSEMBU APS MAS AMP MSfflATE AEA
WSTAUCTUN BOAA

tOAATCA TO INSTALL NEW PAATECrfP AlSiC UNITSfiEAi:)

CKO SMBT^ ' 4«|lCS t INSTALL NEW riOOA AAAIffS ANP ALOAA ALATI
A TIC DOWN AAELE
e. ACAIACE AlOOA MANE AMClf AT NEW CAP mSflMN
MlT' 5. INSTALL NEW TlONt AlATES
4. ERECT NEW CMNCA COLHNN
S NOP NEW AISLE 1APSS ANAlC NNp NC1AL CUP
ROArTTR CLIP TO CAISTINC ENP A04A TAPSS
*»r ciiA UNO SUffMr
n«(« 4. INSTALL NEW CNO AlUC TAPSS SttB-ASSCNBLT
A CONSISTINC OA AOOA TAOSS AN«U,A06A SUPT»
»A UIA A SgCTlQN r-E COLUKN CLIP, NETAL CLAP AMATfA CLIP AND
riMA tAKKcr A COOA SUPT CLIPS
CIMfR*-
cMwn tiTftiifwari T VCIMSTALL TNC ITENS AINOrfP IN A-4
etLOMt • r.fl4M nilTC Tir Qimi AMSU IS
r»»r yuMHSM
Vnirriiitfft vitn am fmat NOTEXISE NEW fASNETS ANP ALSO INSIAU
A NtCVlOUS ENP AAONA COVfB ON AfOUT
VUff CVD
OF NEW ENP UNIT
rtlMT C««tR

sE{;T!W ft'B
Tl eiisfiAS
CfMrMCHT
0. INSTALL WIAtNE ANP tlCATlNO TEODfH

NOTE'.-A SINILAA PAOCEPPAE IS VSCP fOA

iMTfBMftt Virw C RtquT ENP AOPfTIONS

Fig. 18 Outdoor Metal-Clad Switehgear with Protected Aisle.

17
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
SSff4"^^* TM^te
AT TMMta. AMMAkVl
•vyjSKS
1a«S^wS*i
7<t A^wtMn
isss
MgTAk- e
• HVITCM#
;»«•««««» WITM
8^525^^
TAMMBAmkJI
Fig. 19
Provision should be made in the floor
for conduits for primary and secondary
cables, located as shown on the floor plan
drawing furnished for the particular requi
sition. If desired, the conduits may be in
stalled before the switchgear. Consider
ation should be given to conduits which
might be requiredf for future connections.
Outdoor Equipment
Outdoor equipments are furnished lx>th
with and without rear enclosures. Recom
mendations for foundations for both typos
are given in Fig. 8. Primary and secondary
conduits should be installed in accordance
with the requisition drawings, before the
equipment is put into place.
Since outdoor equipments are provided
with a 6" l»8e, a transfer truck is required
to place the breaker in the housing. The
level adjustment on the truck is shown in
Pig. 8.
When outdoor ewipments are shipped
tn more than one section, the Joint between
sections mustbeweatherproofed. Assemble
the gasket between the doors, using cement
provided. Refer to Fig. 8, Section B-B.
Assemble the gasket between the roof sec
tions, bolt together and Install the roof caps.
Refer to Fig. 8, Section C-C.
Outdoor Equipment with Protected Aisle
When specified t)y the purchaser, out
door equipment is furnished with an en
closed, weatherproof operating aisle. See
Fig. 3. The aisle enclosure is shipped
separately from the switchgear.
The following procedure outlines the
steps necessary to install outdoor equip
ment with a protected aisle:
(1) Install the switchgear In accordance
with the procedure given above for outdoor
equipment.
(2) Remove the shipping covers from
the control panels. Since the relay and
Instrument cases are not weather-proof,
the control panels should be protected
from inclement weather until the installa
tion of the atsle enclosure is completed.
18
©-•]
@-
Outdoor Transition Ccnpartnent
(3) Apply Sterling U-310 or U-311
varnish to both sides of the gaskets fur
nished for the Joint between the ends
of the switchgear and the aisle enclos
ure and to the surfaces against which
the gasket presses and hang the gaskets
on the projecting studs at the ends of the
switchgear lineup. See Fig. 9, section
A«A.
(4) Move the aisle enclosure into posi
tion guiding the holes in the end sheets over
the studs on the switchgear lineup and
guiding the roof sills between the support
clips bolted to the upper front of the switch-
gear units above the control panels. This
operation may be simplified by temporarily
loosening the support clips.
The floor of the aisle enclosure must
fit under the hinged breaker cover of the
metal-clad, so the aisle enclosure must
be moved into position on a level with the
switchgear units. If desired this job may
be simplified by removing the breaker
enclosure doors.
(5) Bolt the aisle enclosure in place
at both ends, and bolt the roof sills to
the support clips, tightening any support
clips loosened in the previous operation.
Replace any breaker compartment doors
previously removed.
(6) If the aisle enclosure was shipped
in more than one section, bolt the sections
together and assemble the roof caps in the
manner described above for roof Joints in
outdoor switchgear.
(7) Anchor the outside floor sill of
the aisle enclosure with anchor Imltsplaced
in accordance with the requisition drawing.
See Fig. 9, view Y.
(8) Assemble the dome over the ruof
opening between the switchgear and the
aisle enclosure. See Fig. 9. view X.
(9) Remove shipping braces from aisle
enclosure. These braces should be left
1^^
¥ -<D
<
o
C4
COV£»S
0-
-©
0
CO
:n *•4
u
Fig. 20 (D
CJ.
O
in place until the aisle enclosure is as
sembled. in order to maintain alignment
of the enclosure.
(10) Connect secondary wiring to lights,
convenience outlets, etc., in accordmice
with the wiring diagrams furnished for
the equipment.
Since the aisle floor is level with
the floor of the switchgear units, no trans
fer truck is required for outdoor equipment
with a protected aisle.
The above procedure describes in
stallation of a protected aisle enclosure
with switchgear on one side of the aisle
only. If the aisle is common to two line
ups of switchgear, the procedure will re
quire slight modification. See thedrawinra
furntshed with the requisition for specific
instructions.
Transition Compartments
Transition compartments for outdoor
unit substations may be one of two types
(Figs. 19 and 20). These compartments
are normally shipped assembled. The
full height compartment (Fig. 19) cannot
be disassembled for installation. The
throat trae compartment (Fig. 20) can tie
installed in any of three ways, in accord
ance with the following instructions:
(a) Should the switchgear be position-
^ on its fou^tion prior to the power
toansformCT. the complete transition can
be mounted on the metal-clad as assembled.
Remove covers #8. Apply Sterling U 310
varnish to lioth sides of gasket 2A, and
to the surfaces against which the gasket
presses. Bolt transition compartment to
throat on metal-clad switchgear. Before
Jacking the power transformer into its
final location, apply Sterling U 310 varnish
to both sides of gasket lA and to the sur
faces against which the gasket presses,
and place the gasket over the mounting
studs on the transformer tank wall. Slide
transformer in place, guiding the trans
former mounting studs through the mounting
holes in #1. Center rubber seal between

II and *3 before tightening nuta, toaln-
tatnlng 24" between transformer tank wall
and end of metal-clad. Do not apply var
nish to the rubber seal between *1 and #3.
Cut secondary conduit 110 to length and
assemble under the transition.
(b> Should the power tranaformer t)e
positioned on its foundation prior to the
swttchgear. follow the procedure of para-
graph (a) above, except move the s^tch-
gear up to the power transformer after
assembling the transition compartment
to the swltchgear.
(c) If the power transformerandmetal-
clad ssrttcheey are in place, dlaaasemble
transition aa lollop Remove covers #8
and 19, ad^ter *1, dome 17, braces *4.
Apply Sterling U 310 varnish to tx>th sides
of gasket *2A, and to the surfaces against
which the ^sket presses, before tioltlng
12 to metal-clad throat. Apply Sterling
I) 310 varnish to both sides of gasket IIA,
and to the surfaces against which the gasket
presses, and loosely fasten II and IIA to
transformer tank. Slide throat al *3 into
II and maintain approximately 4 1/2"
from 13 to tank. Assemble braces 14
top and bottom to maintain size and proper
alignment, then tighten *1 to transformer
tank. Assemble connections, terminals,
supports and complete all Joints. Assemble
dome #7, side covers #8 and bottom cover
S 19. Cut secondary conduit *10 to length
and assemble imder the transition.
Connect heaters located in 13.8 kv
class transition compartment.
Indoor transition compartments are
ifa
shipped assembled together with the ad
jacent metal-clad swltchgear units.
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
Before installing or operating the re
movable element consult the circuit breaker
instructions for directions on InstaltMion
and inspection.
The operation of the elevating mech
anism, positive interlock and associated
features are described under Operation
of Equipment and should be reviewed be
fore installing removable element.
TESTING CABINET
The testing cabinet, Fig. 22, should be
installed on the wall at a location where
maintenance and testing of the breaker can
be convtently done. Conduits must be in
stalled to carry cables to supply control
power for testing.
ADDITION OF UNITS TO EXISTING
EQUIPMENT
Before adding units to existing equip
ment, consult ana study all drawings fur
nished with the equipment. In addition
to the usual drawings furnished with new
equipment special drawings may be fur
nished covering complicated or special
assembly work. Also, check to make
sure all necessary parts are on hand.
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE REMOVED
OR ANYJ500RSOPENED WHICH PERMIT
ACCESS TO THE PRIMARY CIRCDITS,
IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE CIRCUIT
OR CIRCUITS BE DE-ENERGIZED AND
BREAKERS BE WITHDRAWN TO A DIS
CONNECTED POSITION AND TAGGED.
IF WORK IS TO BE DONE ON REMOTE
EQUIPMENT CONNECTED TO A UNIT,
THE BREAKER FOR THAT UNIT SHOULD
BE PLACED IN THE DISCONNECTED PO
SITION AND TAGGED. ALSO THE REMOTE
EQUU-MENT SHOULD BE ISOLATED FROM
ANY OTHER POWER SOURCES CONNECT-
ED TO IT.
Figure 17. Indicates the special pro
cedures required to add new metal-cl^
units to outdoor equipmentwlthoutprotected
aisle, and Figure IB Indicates the special
procedures required to add new metal-
clad units to outdoor equipment with pro
tected aisle. For indoor equipment, it
Is usually necessary only to remove the
end cover sheets and lo.rerjissejiible them
on the new units Mter these are located
and bolted to the existing units. OUier-
wlse, the Installation procedure is the
same as described above.
When the units are in place and mech
anical assembly is completed, assemble
the main bus and other primary connec
tions per the instructions below. (Removal
of existl^ compound-filled connection box
es can be easily accomplished by packli^
the box tn dry ice for 2 - 3 hours. Remove
the dry tee and the cord tying the box In
place, and strike the box with a hammer.
The hardened box and compound will crack
away from the Joint.)
Secondary wiring and control bus con
nections should be made In accordance
with the wiring diagrams furnished with
the equipment
aurfM,
-a/kwV/fnj —
(uHr/t ge\Me.)
Fig. 22 Inspection Box for 13.8 KV Metal-Clad Swltchgear
Metal-clad Swltchgear GEH-1802
CONNECTIONS
The main bus barsandother connection
bars may be either copper or aluminum.
In either case, the connection surfaces will
be silver surfaced or equivalent. All field
assembled Joints in primary conductors,
regardless of material or method of in
sulation, shouldbe made as described below:
(1) Wipe silver clean. ~ Do not use
san^faper or any abrasive on the
silvered surface. Avoid handling
of cleaned surface as much as
possible.
(2) Join the clean contact surfaces
by using the hardware provided
as shown in Figure 24 and the
torque values listed in Table A,
Figure 23.
(3) In some cases external connections
are made to metal-clad bus by
bars. The metal-clad bars are
normaUy silver plated. Unptated
bars, either copper or aluminum,
should not be used to connect to
silver plated bars.
(4) All field assembled Primary joints
and terminations must be Insulated
for the operating voltaige. There
are two methods of insulating
joints, boots where applicable and
taped Joints for all others. A
detailed procedure for Joint in
sulation is described under "MAIN
BUS ASSEMBLY".
-si'
££Zr/fi'€£
"Z'
/O MTU
v/£cu
19
GEH-1%02 Metal-clad Switchgear
MAIN BUS ASSEMBLY
For 4.16 lev, 7.2 kv and 13.8 kv equip-.
ment.
(a) Remove conqiartment covers.
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars
together, following assembly in
structions as given under CON
NECTIONS. iUso see Fik. 24
and Table A, Fig. 23.
TABLE A
BOLT TORQUE VALUES FOR
HEBtL-CLAD 8MBR.
BQUE TORQQE NAZHOAL
SIZE FOOT FOUNDS
3/8"-16 15-25 SXSEL
30-45 COFFQI
5/a"-u 35-'»5 ALUKIBUM
COIFODND
"Fig. 23
(c) There are two means of insula
ting bus Joints for lx>th 4.16 kv
and 13.8 kv equipment.
1 - Taped Joints Fig. 26.
2 - PVC(POLYVINYL CHLORIDE)
boots Fig. 2SA.
I-TAPEC JOINTS for 13.8 KV EQUIPMENT
(1) Prepare all Joints as outlined under
"CONNECTIONS".
(2) Fill all cavities around bolts and nuts
with ASOHllO compound to form ai
smooth surface for taping, thus pre
venting air voids. This compound is not
an insulating medium imd should not
be used for mat purpose.
(3) "T" Joint - Place 4" wide double
thick Irrathene t^e over the ASOHllO
compound as shown in Fig. 25. (This
is not required for 4.16 J^ts).
(4) Wrap with insulating tape provided
maintaining tension on the ti^e wtiile
wrapping, as shown in Fig. 26. Where
titere are sharp angles apply addition
al layers to obtain e<piivalent of the
insulation on the flat surfaces.
(5) Over the insulating t^, amly one
layer of glass tape, half as a
protective covering as shown in Fig.-
.26.
(6) Over the glass tape, brush a heavy
coat of U310 (brown) varnish. Varnish
may be thinned, if necessary with
XYLENE D5B0.
(7) Replace all covers previously removed.
n-PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDl^ BOOT
INSULATION for 13.8 KV EQUIPMENT
(1) PVC boots for 13.8 equipment can only
be qmUed to those assemblies furnished
with the molded busliarrier. Figure 36.
This barrier is distinguished by the
raised surface around each bus Inr.
Those assemtiUes not furnished with
this barrier will have to be taped.
See above.
20
(2) Prepare all Joints as outlined under
"CONNECTIONS".
13) Place the PVC boot over the Joint
as shown in Fig. SSA.
(4) Secure the PVC boot with self-lock
ing fasteners furnished. Joint insul
ation is now complete.
(.5) Replace all covers previously remov
ed.
(6) Boots will iM furnished for standard
configuratiaaa, however special con
ditions must be taped.
m-PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) BOOT
insulation for '4:16 KV EQUIPMENT
The instructions for the bolted Joint
and application of the PCV boot is
the same as outlined for the 13.8
equipment except there are no re-
strictiooB on the bus barrier.
IV-TAPED JOINTS for 4.16 KV EQUIPMENT
(1) The instructions for the iiolted Joint
and application the tape insulation
is the same as outlined for the 13.8
equipment excqit use 1/2 the amount
of insulating tape and use the U-311
(Uack varnish). Refer to Table in.
Fig. 26.
(2) In unit substations, the connection bars
should be assembled in the transition com
partment (Figure 19 and 20)attdtheconnec-
tions at the transformer terminals taped and
painted as indicated above. The conduit for
secondary circuits should also be assembled
in or below the transition compartment.
CLEANING BUS INSULATION
Main bus liars are insulated with a
high temperature thermoplastic material
having excellent dialectric and mechanical
prqierties. When cleaning is necessary
only denatured alcohol or iso pn^yl alco
hol should be used to remove any foreign
materials from the insulation surface.
BUS DUCT
Bus ducts connecting between grmqts of
metal-clad switcbgear, or between metal-
clad switchgear and other apparatus, should
be installed as shown on the arrangement
drawings furnished with the duets. Sup
ports should be provided as on
the drawings.
All Joints in the bus, including adjust
able Joints, should be assembled and in
sulated as oeacribad above for main tmses.
Adjustable Joints are provided in long runs
of bus duct to aUow for variatiw in
building construction, etc. These Joints
should be loosened before installation of the
duct, then tightened after being set in the
position required l)y the fixed points at the
ends of the duct.
Outdoor bus ducts must be gasketed at
the Joints between shipping sections. Coat
Iwth sides of the flat ptwet and the flangra
of both duct sftctifflu with Sterling U310or
U311 varnish before assembly. Bolt the
two duct sections together. Remove the top
cover from one duct section and place 3/8"
elastic compound bead along t(9 ot Joiuc
slightly overlapping the sides. .Bolt
cover in place and fasten roof cim in place
over the Joint. See Fig. 23A. men
tqp covers are removed after installation r\
for inspection the 3/8" elastic conqmund
bead must be replaced to insure a tight
seal.
Removable front and rear covers of
vertical sections of bus duct must also be
gasketed. Coat both sides <d the gasket,
the flange of the duct, and the edges of the
inside surface of the cover with Sterling
U310 or U311 varnish before assembly.
Do not bolt these covers in place until all
interior assembly work on the'duct is com
pleted and access will no longer be required.
Outdoor bus ducts of the 13.8 kv class
are provided with heaters. Connect these
heaters in accordance with the wiring dia
grams furnished with the equipment before
energizing the bus duct.
Fig. 23A Bus Duct Gaskets
PRIMARY CABLES
The primary cable connections in indooi;
switchgear are reached by removing the
rear bolted covers. In outdoor switchgear
with rear enclosures the hinged instrument
panel, if present, must be swung open and
the bolted covers .behind it removed.
Before any primary cable connections
are made, the cables should be identified
to indicate their phase relationship with
the switchgear connections. This is nec
essary to insure that motors will rotate in
the proper direction and that the phase
rotation is the same when interconnecting
two different sources of power.
There are two common methods of
making primary cable connections:
(a) Potheads (see GEI 28838H) are
used when it is desired to hermetically
seal the end of the caUe to make a molst-
ure-proof connection between the cable
and switchgear bus. A pothead also pre
vents seeing (d oil from the end oi oil
inqiregnated varnish cambric or paper
insulated cable
(b) Clamp type terminals and wiping
sleeve or caBle clanq>.
No insulation materials are furnished
for cable terminations. When potheads
are -siqmlied as part of switchgear insula
tion nunerials are furnished for the bar
terminations to the pothead studs;
In aU cases carefuUy follow the cable
manufacturer's recommendations for in
stallation of the type of cable beingus^.
 ^ Metal-clad Switcbgear GEH-1802

A typical ejcample (tf termlnatiiig a shield

ed cable is shown in figures 28 and 29. Omo
If the cable is aluminum, the conductor
surface must be carefully abraided and the
cable covered liberally with a joint com
pound recommended by the cable manu
facturer. gi OI lO

.INSULATING PRIMARY CABLE O lO -»»•«» SCCT7-T-

terminati5n§ TTOCA IMOt BIK. TOIHT

All field assembled joints for primary

cable terminations shoiUd be prepared as
outlined under "CONNECTIONS". Upon
completion of the cable termination, care
must be exercised when taping the exposed
termination.

(1) Check to see that a sufficient area

O lO
of insulating tape extends beyond the
painted glass tape furnished by the or

factory. (2" for 5KV, 3" for 15KV). OliO

It may be necessary to remove the
current transformer primary con
ductor insulating support to obtain
proper insulation joint overlap. Re-
Jilace support upon completion of
oint. Refer to fig. 26.
Fig. 24 (132C7770) Method of Making Bus Bar Connections
(2) All terminations should be insulated
as outlined in table fig. 26 for
correct layers of insulating and
glass tape.
TAfitP
(3) The instructions for application of
the tape insulation is the same as
outlined for "Taped Joints" items
1, 2, 4, 5, 6 and 7.

POTHEADS
AgOMiie
Potheads are mounted on an adapter e.nrMH»
plate extending across the width of the
metal-clad unit as shown in Fig. 27. Where
necessary the ad^ter plate is split into
two parts- to facilitate the installation of ^ rntAi^Hh%JiCt»ituL.oos "ifSftOg
OAAS 4fSe x*.!
the potheads. Ztot.
/OXfA. MA'Xt9' Xtoi f0

Three-Conductor Potheads rAtm

Installation procedures for a three-

conductor lead-sheathed cable with a
wiping sleeve cable entrance fitting on Fig. 2S (104A2714) 13.8 kv Taped Jointe
the pothead is outlined in GEI-28838H.
This, is the type most generally used.
The factory does not furnish insulating
materials for completing stress cones and •mtOWIHJOTM; WMUWll »U!1~
cable terminations. In all cases care
fully follow the cable manufacturer's
recommendation for installation of the type
cable being used. A suggested procedure
for shielded cables is outlined below. Refer
" 'li. !l
tl
to fig. 28 and 20 for reference.
TERMlNAtlON WITHOUT POTHEAD MM. OM

The factory does not furnish insulating t=vC=t^

materials for completing the primary I2I>0*-8IIS " IZOO* TAKBaFV

cable termination at the cable damp or

for stress cones. In all cases carefully
follow the cable manufacturer's recommen
dation for Installation of the type cable
beii» used. A suggested procedure for
' sMelded cables is outlined below. Refer
to-fig. 28 and 29 for reference.
Single Conductor

1. Cut cable to proper length.

2. Remove Jacket and cable tape for
distance of A plus B plus 3 inches, plus Fig. 29A (208A88S3) 4.16 kv and 13.8 kv Bus Insulating Boot
l^gth to be inserted tntb terminal lug.

21
GEH-ia02 Metal-clad Swltchgear
3. Unwrap shielding tape to point M,
cut and solder it In place avoiding exces
sive heat on insulation. Remove outer
semi-conductin«r tape for same distance.
Thorouiddy clean surface from which the
semi-conducting tape was removed.
4. Remove insulation and inner semi
conducting tape to expose conductor for
distance of one inch plus length to be in
serted into terminal lug.
5. Attach terminal lug to conductor.
If the cable is aluminum, the conductor
surface must be carefully abraided and the
cable covered liberally with a Joint com
pound recommended by the cable manu
facturer.
6. T^er insulation for one inch as
shown. See Fig. 28.
7. Apply end seal. Clean surface over
which splicing tape is to be applied and
coat with G.E. No. AS0P68 adhesive cement
or equivaient. When solvent evaporates,
build up with splicing tape GE8380 or
equivalent, as shown.
Dimensions in Inches'
Rated
kv A»
Phase to Phase
Indoors
B The cables from toe control power
Dry Locations
2 to 5 5 2
6 to 10 9 3
11 to 15 13 4 s^ as shown. This is done by starting See testing instructions.
* For ungrounded neutral use 1.33 times
the dimensions in selecting distance A.
See Fig. 28 and 29.
8. Build stress cone. Clean cable sur
face and coat with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive
cement or equivalent. When solvent evapo
rates, build up cone with splicing tope GE-
8380 or equivalent, for length -B' plus B.
Between points M and P, tope is applied so
that wrapped thickness at N is equal to 75%
of the original insulation thickness - and
so that the cone tapers to zero thickness at
points M and P. Apply one layer No. 33
Scotch tope or equivalent, half lapped. Ob
tain a smooth wr^ping but do not stretch
tape more than necessary.
9. Pass a turn of tightly drawn braid
around exposed portion of shielding tape at
point M and solder In place. Then apply
shielding braid in tightly drawn 1/6 inch
lap wrappings to point N and spot solder.
Terminate the braid by cutting 1/2 inch
beyond soldering point. Turn down and
solder loose ends to preceding turns. Wrap
lour to six turns of No. 19 AWG tinned
copper wire around shielding braid and
solder. Solder all turns of braid together
along three lengthwise lines equally spaced
around braided surface.
10. Solder ground strip over shielding
tope near cable covering. Cover stress
cone with one layer No. 33 Scotch tope,
half lapped. Obtain a smooth wrapping
but do not stretch tape more than neces
sary. Add two toyers of splicing t^e.
11. Pencil jacket'for 1/2 inch asshown.
Clean surface. Take particular care in
cleaning outside jacket surface in order to
entirely remove black wax finish. Coat
22
with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive cement current transformer away from the primary
or equivalent. When solvent evaporates, terminals. In cases where the groundcannot
apply slicing t^e GE8380 or equivalent be applied before toe cable passes through
and make sheath seal as shown on drawing. toe tnuisformer, bond toe lead to toe sheath
Apply one layer No. 33 Scotch tape or or shield between toe transformer and toe
equivalent, half lapped. Obtain a smooth primary terminals. The ground conductor
wrapping but do not stretch tape more than must then be passed back along the cable
necessary. path through the currenttransformer before
being connnected to toe ground bus.
12. Over entire termination, apply two
layers of No. 33 Scotch tape or equivalent, Where potoeads are used in units pro
half lapped, in manner to shed water. Ob vided with groundfault current transform
tain a smooth wrapping but do not stretch ers, toepotn^d mountings mustbeinsulated
tape more than necessary. from ground.
CONTROL CABLES
TERMINATION WITHOUT FOTHEAD
MULTI-CONDUCTOR When control conduits enter toe unit
from below, the conduit should not ex
tend more than 4 inches above the floor.
The control cables may be pulled through
The factory does not furnish insula toe conduits before or after toe switch-
ting materials for completing the primary gear is installed, whichever is more con
cable terminations at the clamp terminal venient.
or for the stress cones. Refer to Fig.
29 for reference. Connect the cables to the terminal
blocks in accordance with the wiring dia
grams furnished for toe requisition.
Make termination as indicated for sin
gle-conductor except - substitute the follow If toe control conduits enter from
ing for paragraphs 10, 11 and 12; above, drill toe top and bottom covers
of the front enclosure wiring trough to
Pencil jacket 1/2 Inch. Clean sur suit the conduits. Fasten toe conduits
face over which sheath moisture seal is to toe bottom coVer with locknuts.
to be aoDlied. Take particular care in
cleaning outside jacket surface in order,
to entirely remove black wax finish. Coat'
with G.'E. Vo. A50P6B adhesive cement or source to the switchgear should be large
equivalent. Allow to. dry. Apply splicing enough to avoid excessive voltage drop
tope GE8380 or equivalent to make moisture when the circuit breakers are operated.
wrapping tape near end at jacket and wrap
ping over ground wires for 1-1/2 inches. Where units have been split for ship
Bend ground wires out and back over taping ment, any control or other secondary leads
just applied and continue applying lapped which must connect across toe split will
layers of tape to completion of moisture be arranged with terminal blocks in toe
s ^ including a complete tape seal in cross trou^ or convenient side sheet
crotch formed between the three conductors. so that toe wires can be reconnected.
Bond and ground the ground wires. The wires will be cut to length and form
ed before being folded back so that a
For a multi-conductor cable not having minimum of time will be required for
ground wires, the individual terminations reconnecting them.
should'have grounding strips applied as for
a single-conductor termination. These GROUND BUS
grounding strips are to be joined together
to a common ground. This common ground The gromtd bus is bolted to toe rear of
toe frame near toe bottom. It is arranged so
must then be grounded.
that connections to toe station ground can be
made in any unit. Where the equipment is
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORM shipped in more man one group, toe sections
ERS (THROUGH-TYPE) of ground bus must be connected by using toe
splice plates furnished with the equipment.
Aspemble the ground bus joints as out
Throueh-type current transformers linedunder "Connections" (Page 19). Ground
(see Fig. 27) are furnished where specified bus connections are made in toe lower por
for sensitive protection' against ground tion of the cable entrance compartment.
faults. These transformers are normally Itoe switchgear groimdtiusmustbeconnect
installed in a horizontal position directly
ed to toe station ground bus by a conductor
above or below the primary cable terminals, having a current carrying capacity equal to
so that the primary cable or cables can pass that of toe switchgear ground bus. It is very
through them. One transformer is required important that the equipment be adequately
for each three-phase circuit. grounded to protect the operator from injury
when short circuits or other abnormal oc
Where armored cable is used, the arm currences titoe place and to insure that all
or must be terminated and groimded before
parts of toe equipment, other than live
toe cable passes through the transformer. parts, are at ground potential.
Armor clamps are furnished for this pur
pose when specified.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
When lead or other conducting sheath It will be toe responsibility of toe pur
cable, or cable with shielding tope or braid, chaser to provide suitable li^tningarrest
is usM, it is recommended that the sheath or ers to protect toe switchgear from dama^
shield be grounded solidly totoeswitchgear due to lightning. The General Electric
ground bus. The ground lead should be bond
Company's reco.mmendations as to toe types
ed to toe sheath or shield on toe side of toe
 Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802

of circuits recpjlring lightning protection,

and a list of recommendedlightningarrest-
ers, are contained in Bulletin GER-141
copies of which are available upon request.
When llghtninE arresters are furnished
the primary cable terminal will t>e insula
ted at the factory unless it must be dis
connected for shipment. When this con
nection is completed in the field it will
be necessary to insulate the primary con
nection before the swjtchgear is enei^lzed.
ROOF ENTRANCE BUSHING

When assembling the connection bar

end of roof entrance bushit^s inside of the
switchgear and other terminations where
porcelain insulators are used, insulation
should be applied as follows:

(1) Prepare the connection bars as

outlined under "CONNECTIONS".

(2) Fill all cavities around the contact

nuts and connection barswithA50-
H110 compound. Form a smooth
surface for taping, thus preventing
air voids. The compound is not
IRRATHiWe ANO_
an insulating medium and should GLASS TAPE
not be used for that purpose.

(3) Wrap joint with insulating tape pro

vided, maintaining tension on the
ASOHin "
tape while wrapping as shown in COMPOU/VO
fig. 26 where there are sharp angles
apply additional layers to obtain
equivalent of the insulation on the
flat surfaces.

(4) Over the insulating tape, apply one

layer of glass tape, half lap as a Fljf. 25B Taping of Roof Entrance Tern*
protective covering as shown in
fig. 26,
END op OLASS TAPE
(5) Over the glass tape, brush a heavy
coat of U-310 brown (tor 15KV}
or U-311 black (for 5KV). varnish.
See fig 25B.

mm
CLASS
COVER TARE

rastm-noH iayehs[hois i) wiifr

IK30LATION 1-202 1CLASS V.C. APPLY OHS
LEVEL HOn 2 WMS 3 MOYB I COAT LZBBRALLT

HOTE li
1-202 a V.C. - One layer, wound 2/3 lap requlr
In ona wldtti of tape. One layer thlekneee la 3 t
class: - One layer, wound 1/2 lap requlree 2
ant width of tape. One layer thiokneee la 2 tine
HOTE 2i
Irrathene #202, width 1 1/2" thiokneee 0.010
tape at all tlnaa while applying.
GCH-1802 Metal-cUd Switchgear

v\ 1 / f
Ml/

Fig. 27 {8026383) Rear View of Unit Showing

Through-Type Current Transformers

.DO I* Mmc TNC^

co»»ca «iAC

••0 ) ) score*
r*»c ON soutw

SNVieiM
ON lOiKV
••ss score* t*»r
" ON tNurv

Fig. 28 (B230046C) Termination Without Pothead Single-Conductor

 Metal-Clad Switcbgear GEH-i802

CAvBLE LU(q

5PLiaW(5, TAPE
C3.E.S360 OR EaUlV.
EWD SEAL

CABLE
IKJSULATIOM

NQ SB SCOTCH
TAPE OR
EQUIV.

SHlELDlKiS
BRA\0 (HAMD
APPLIED)

CABLE SHELWME
TAPE

Mass SCOTCH
TAPE OR EQUN.

)AO\STURE SEAL

SPLICING TAPE
G.E.8SaO OR EQUiV.
GROUND VWIRES
GROUND AT
ADJACENT
FRAhNE
MENABER

CABLE JACKET

Fig. 29 (B232004C) TerminaUon Without Pothead MulU-Conductor

25
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Swltchgear
DOOR ALIGNMENT
11for any reason it is necessary tore-
align the doors of metal-clad swltchgear
during installation the procedure given in the
following paragraphs should be followed.
After chei^ing that the swltchgear is
level and plumb as described above, startat
either end of the swltchgear lineup and re
align each door individually as required.
The top ofeachdoor shouldiSe levelwith
the adjacent doors; the sides of each door volt coils.
plumb; thesurfaceofeachdoorflushwlththe
adjacent doors; and the space between ad its associated devices may be tested in
jacent doors equalized to permit their free the unit while the equipment is energized
swing and present a neat appearance. The
door stops should be adjusted to permit a
door swing of approximately 105*>.
Doors noay be raised or lowered vertic
ally ,or moved,forward or. backward horl-
zonrally, tqr loosening the hinge mounting
nuts on the left side sheet and shifting the
hinge and door assembly as allowed by
the slotted holes in the hinge.
Doors may be shifted to the right or
left by adding or removingwasherspr shims
from between the hinge and side sheet.
Doors may be plumbed byslightly bend
ing the appropriate hinges. To do this, open
the door and Insert a drutpln in either of the
two holes in the binge. Fulling forward on
the drift pin will move the door to the right,
and pushing back will move the door to the'
left. Adjust each hinge individually as re
quired to plumb the door.
When properly aligned, the doors of out
door swltchgear should be tightly seated on
the gasket all around. After aligning such
doors, close and latch the door and check with ANSI standards.
the seal by running a 3" x 5" card, shipping
tag, IBM card, or some similar card around
the edge of the door. If the card will pass power transformers must be disconnected
between the door and the gasket, the door is
improperly adjusted, and should be read
justed until the card will no longer pass
through.
TESTING AND
INSPECTION
After the equipment has been Installed
and all connections made, it should be
tested and inspected before putting in ser
vice. Although the emipment and devices
have been completely tested at the factory,
a final field test should be made to be sure
that the equipment has been properly in
stalled and that all connections are correct
and have not become loose in transporta
tion. The primary equipment should be
completely de-energized while the tests
are in progress.
Directions for testing devices such as
relays. Instruments and meters are given
in the instruction book furnished for each
device. The settings of the protective re
lays must be coordinated with the other
relays on the system and therefore these
relays must be set by the purchaser. Gen
eral instructions on setting the relays are
^ven in the relay instructloh'biooks.' Speic-
ul instruction books are furnished for
complicated automatic equipments, des
cribing the sequence of operation of the
devices required to perform the desired
fimction.
26
When transformers are furnished to
supply the control power, the primary
taps should be selected so that the control
voltage indicated on the wiring diagram
is obtained on the secondary of the trans
former. When a battery is used to supply
the control power, the cables from the
battery to the swltchgear should be large
enough to avoid excessive voltage drqp.
The voltage at the terminals of the breaker
closing coils, when the'breaker is being
closed, should not be less than 112.S volts
for 125 volt coils and 225 volts for 250
The operation of the breaker with
by use of the test coupler which is fur
nished.
SOLENOID OPERATED BREAKER
Lower the breaker to the test or do^
position. Attach the test coupler to con
nect the breaker secondary disconnecting
device to that on the structure.
STORED ENERGY OPERATED BREAKER
Lower the breaker to the down posi
tion and withdraw the breaker 2 1/4"
until a notch in the spring discharge cam
releases the breaker interlock. Attach
the test coupler to connect the breaker
secondary disconnecting device to that on
the structure.
High potential tests to check the integ
rity of the insulation are not necessary
H the insulation instructions in this bookare
carefully followed. Should the purchaser
desire to make high potential tests, the
test voltage should not exceed 14 kv A.C.
for 4.16 kv and 27 kv A. C. for 13.8
equipments. These voltages are 75% of
factory test voltages and are in accordance
Potential transformers and control
during hi^ voltage testing.
OPERATION
The operation of metal-clad switch-
gear is similar to that of other types
except that it provides maximum safety
to the operator and the feature of easy-
removal and replacement of the circuit
breaker.
All circuit breaker removable ele
ments of the same type and rating which
have duplicate wiring may be interchanged.
BREAKER POSITIONING
To place the breaker in the opera
ting position, proceed as given below.
The elevating mechanism is accura
tely leveled and checked at the factory and
should need no adjustment. Do not install
or remove the breweror make adjustments
unless the breaker is open.
Rub a small amount of contact lubri
cant D50H47 on the silvered portion of the
breaker studs to form a thin coatii^ for
contact purposes.
Lower the elevating mechanism lift
ing brackets until the lifting brackets are
in the fully lowered position. The breaker
should then enter the housing freely. After
first assuring that the breaker is in* the
open position, push the breaker ,into the
unit uniil it rests against the rear of the
front lifting saddle of the elevating mech
anism.
The clearance between the interfer
ence block on the breaker and the inter
ference block on the interlock lock mech
anism (view X-X Figure 20) should be
from 1/16" to 1/8". At this point the
breaker positive interlock roller should
be centered in the bottom "VEE" of the
interlock cam plate.
To elevate the breaker, operate the
elevating control selector switch on the
elevating motor to "RAISE". A clutch
handle just above the elevating motor (clut
ch handle is under the elevating motor
in the 1000 MVA Unit) is then puUed for
ward until a motor limit switch closes and
the motor clutch engages to raise the break
er in the unit. CarefiHly raise the breaker
and while elevating note that the shutter
slides open and the breaker studs center
with respect to the openings in the station
ary disconnecting devices or injury to the
contacts may result.
The clutch handle is held in the for
ward position until a limit switch dn the
structure opens to stop the motor at the
end of the upward travel of the breaker.
The motor selector switch must not
be used to energize or interrupt the motor
circuit at any time.
When the breaker is fully elevated the
clearance between the breaker lifting rail
and the upper stop bolts should not be more
than 1/8" and not less than 3/32".
The positive interlock roller should
be centered in the upper "VEE" and the
interlock roller should have 1/16" clear
ance to the stationary interference plate
directly under it.
To lower the breaker, proceed the
same as for raising except operate the
selector switch to "LOWER". The clutch
must be held in the engaged position;
otherwise, a spring will return it to its
normal ;msition, opening the electrical
circuit to the motor.
The breaker may be raised or lower
ed tiy an emergency hand crank which can
be inserted after removing the motor.
The motor is removed by unlatching the
motor assembly from its support and dis-
bonnecting the motor lead plug. After
removing the motor, pull the clutch for
ward and insert the manual crank into the
end of the clutch coupling. The breaker
must be open before the crank can be
inserted and held in the clutch coupling.
After the breaker is lowered and with
drawn from the unit inspect the contact
surfaces of both the breaker studs and
the stationary disconnecting devices.
(a) Each segment of the stationary
disconnecting device should make a heavy
impression in the contact lubricant D50H47'
on the breaker studs. Contact wipe should
start not less than 1/8" from top of th6
contact ball although each contact need
not start at the same location. See Fig.
11.
(b) The wipe of the breaker stud

inside t&e stationary disconnectins device,
as indicated by the contact lubricant D50H47,
should be 3/4" to 7/8", This indicates that
the breaker studs contacted at the full
Sressure center of the silver band on
le stationary disconnecting device. See
Fig. 11.
(c) Should the inspection of the con
tacts show that the. breaker is not beii^
raised to the proper position, readjust
the upper stop bolts and limit switches
to raise or lower the breaker to the
proper location. Lock the sl^ bolts
in the new position.
(d) If proper contacting cannot be
attained by the above methods, additional
adjustments will be necessary.
DO NOT MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENT. COM
MUNICATE WITH THE NEAREST GENERAL
ELECTRIC CO OFFICE FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION.
POSITIVE INTERLOCK
GENERAL
The positive interlock functions to
prevent raising or lowering a breaker
except when the primary contacts are
open. It also prevents closing primary con
tacts when the breaker is being raised
or lowered by blocking the operating mech
anism mechanically and electrically.
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR
SOLENOID OPERATE BREAKERS
To place the breaker in the opera
ting position, proceed as given below.
The elevating mechanism is accurately
leveled and checked at the factory and
should require no adjustment. Do not
r*N
Install or remove the breaker or make
adjustments unless the breaker primary
contacts are open.
Lower the elevating mechanism lift
ing brackets until the lifting brackets are
in the fully lowered position. The breaker
should then enter the housing freely. After
first assuring that the breaker primary
contacts are in the open position, insert
the breaker into the unit until it rests
against the rear of the front lifting saddle
of the eleyating mechanism..
The interlock should be checked to
see that the removable element is obst
ructed from being raised to or lowered
from the operating position when the pri
mary contacts are closed.
BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THIS CHECK
IT IS NECESSARY THAT THE PRIMARY
CIRCUITS BE DE-ENERGIZED.
Using the maintenance closing device,
close the breaker and snap the selector
switch to "RAISE" position and pull tte
clutch handle forward. Movement must
be stopped by the breaker interlock roUer
before the contacts of the motor limit
switch close and before the sliding clutch
and motor connector engage. A mimimun
of 1/16" should be malntitined between
the two clutch parts when the positive inter
lock is blocked \fv the breaker interlock
roUer. See Fig. 15 for dimension.
Trip the breaker manually and elevate
to the operating position. AGAIN IT IS
EMPHASIZED THAT THE PRIMARY CIR
CUITS MUST BE DE-ENERGIZED BEFORE
MAKING THIS CHECK OF THE POSmVE
INTERLOCK.
Electrically close the breaker. Snap
the Selector switch to "LOWER" positipn
and puU the clutch handle forward. Again,
a definite stop should be encountered pre
venting the motor circuit limit switch
from energizing the motor circuit and lower
ing the breaker.
If the interlock does not function as
indicated above DO NOT MAKE ANY AD
JUSTMENT. COMMUNICATE WITH THE
NEAREST GENERAL ELECTRIC CO. OF
FICE FOR ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS.
POSITIVE INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR
STORED ENERGY
To place the breaker in the operating
position, proceed as given below. The
elevating mechanism is accurately level
ed and checked at the factory and should
require no adjustment Do not install
or remove the breaker or make adjust
ments unless the breaker primary contacts
and or closing springs are discharged.
Lower the elevating mechanism lift
ing brackets until the luting brackets are
in the fully lowered position. The breaker
should then enter the housing freely. After
first assuring that the breaker primary
contacts are in the open position, insert
the breaker into the unituntilitrests again
st the rear of the front luting saddle of
the elevating mechanism.
BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THIS CHECK
IT IS NECESSARY THAT THE PRIMARY
CIRCUITS BE DE-ENERGIZED.
When entering a breaker into a unit
for elevating the spring discharge cam.
(on the left hand side of the unit) will'
hold the breaker interlock trip free and
the closing springs discharged untU the
breaker is 1/4" off the breaker floor
rail. (See detailed description of Spring
Discharge Cam under separate heading).' operating position the breaker must be
AGAIN IT IS EMPHASIZED THAT THE
PRIMARY CIRCUITS MUST BE DE-JINER-
GIZED BEFORE MAKING THIS CHECK OF
THE POSITIVE INTERLOCK.
Elevate the breaker to theraisedposi-
tion and electricaUy close the breaker.
The positive interlock should be checked
to see that the removable element is ob-'
structed from being lowered from the
operating position.
Snap the selector switch to "LOWER"
position and pull the clutch handle forward.
A definite stop should be encountered pre
venting the motor circuit limit switch from
energizing the motor circuit and lowering
the breaker.
A mimimun of 1/16" must be main
tained between the sliding clutch and the
motor connector when the positive interlock
is blocked by the breaker interlock roller.
See Fig. 1$ for dimension. Trip the break
er manually and lower the breaker to the
fully lowered position. During the last i/4''
of travel the spring discharge cam will
discharge the stored energy springs and
maintain the breaker trip free as long
as the breaker remains in the unit. If
Metal-Clad Swltchgear GEH-1802
the interlock does not function as indica
ted above.
DO NOT MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENT. COM
MUNICATE WITH THE NEAREST GENER
AL ELECTRIC CO. OFFICE FOR ADDIT
IONAL INFORMATION.
STATIONARY AUXILIARY SWITCH
On units equipped with stationary aux
iliary switches (Fig.30A)the clearance be
tween the end of the smtch mechanism
operating rod and the operating plunger
on the circuit breaker should be 0 to
1/8" with the circuit breaker in the rais
ed and open position.
Any adjustment in this dimension must
be made on the auxUiary switch setting.
Care should be taken to prevent destroy
ing InterchangeabiUty of the circuit break
er by excessive adjustment.
A stationary auxiliary switch test posi
tion link is furnished as an accessory for use
when the circuit breaker is in the test
position.
SPRING DISCHARGE CAM
The spring discharge cam is mount
ed on the left hand side of the unit and
operates in conjunction with a spring dis
charge Interlock on the breaker.
'When entering a breaker into a unit,
to elevate to the operating position, the
spring discharge cam wiU hold the break
er interlock trip free and the closing
springs discharged until the breaker is
1/4" off the floor rails. At this poiiit the
positive interlock is blocking the spring
charging and closing circuit open.
When lowering the breaker from the
open before the elevating mechanism can
be operated. While' the breaker is being
lowered the spring are still charged Init
the positive interlock blocks the breaker
from closing. When the breaker is alxiut
1/4" from the floor rails the spring dis
charge interlock holds the breaker trip
free, discharges the closing springs and-
holds them discharged so long as the
breaker remains in its unit.
To operate the breaker in the test
position it is pulled forward, (out of the
unit) about 2 1/4" until a_notch in the sp
ring discharge cam releases the breaker
interlock and the breaker can l>e operat
ed manually, or, by assembling the test
coupler, electrically. In the test posi
tion a mechanical block prevents operating'
the elevating mechanism.
If after test operations the breaker
is left closed and/or its closing springs
charged, it wiU be automatically tripped
and held trip free while the springs are
discharged when it is reinserted in; or
while being withdrawn from its unit.
27
Metal-Clad Swltchgear GEH-1802
KEY LOCKS
Key locks for breaker units can be
furnished when requested.
The purpose of this device is to pre
vent a breaker from lieing closed in the
connected position when the lock key is
removed from the lock. The key lock
consists of si metal support and key lock
mounted on the top plate flange and ad
jacent to the elevating motor clutch.
To operate the key lock if the break
er is in the disconnected or test position
the clutch handle is pulled forward allow
ing the key lock bolt to extend In t>ack
of the clutch handle. The key lock key can
then be removed.
If the breaker is in the connectedposi-
tion the breaker must first be opened.
Snap the selector switch to the "off"
position. The clutch handle can then be
pulled forward allowing the key lock bolt
to extend in back of the clutch handle.
The key lock key csui then be removed
With the clutch handle pulled forward tte
positive interlock cam plate has rotated the
circuit breaker positive interlock shaft so
as to mechanically and electrically block
the bresiker from closing.
To' lower the brewer, snap the select
or switch to "LOWER", puU the clutch for
ward and lower the breaker to the test
position.
The key lock does not prevent opera
tion of the breaker in the test position.
However, if the breaker is elevated to
the connected position the key lock will
prevent its closing until the key is re
turned and the lock reset. See Fig. IS.
BREAKER INTERFERENCE STOPS
Stops are provided in the breaker unit
to prevent the insertion of a breaker with
a 1200A continuous current rating into a
unit with a 2000A rating and vice-versa.
The stop plate is bolted to the left
hand unit frame angle near the floor of
all breaker units. A projection on the
breaker frame will interfere with the unit
stop plate when an attempt is made to insert
an Incorrect breaker into the unit.
The breaker rating should be checked
against the unit rating and under no cir
cumstances should the interference stop
be removed to allow the breaker to be
inserted.
TRANSFER TRUCKS
Circuit breaker transfer trucks are
furnished with outdoor metal-clad switch-
gear to facilitate moving of circuit break
ers from unit to unit or to maintenance
areas. The platform at the front end of
the transfer truck is adjustable in height.
28
See Fig. 8, view A, for instructions for
adjustment. The truck is equipped with two
latches, one to bold the breaker on the
truck and one to hold the truck to the
metal-clad switchgear unit. Both latches
engage automatically, and both are re
leased by a single T-shaped foot pedal
on the rear of the truck. Depressinig the
left side of the pedal unlatches the truck
from the switchgear unit, and depressing
the right side of the pedal unlatches the
breaker from the truck. Trucks can tie
stored in breaker unit when breaker is
in operating position.
SPACE HEATERS
Space heaters are provided in all
outdoor equipment in order to keep the
Inside temperature several degrees higher
than that outside. Heaters are also fur
nished for indoor equipment when it is
known that abnornuil atmospheric condi
tions exist at the ins'tallation,'or 'when
specified by the purchaser.
By maintaining a slight temperature
differential, the heaters help facilitate dry
ing and prevent condensation and the re
sulting corrosion and insulation deter
ioration which mi^t occur.
Heaters are normally located at the
sides of the breaker units, a few 'inches
almve the floor. In auxiliary compart
ments with a single rollout, the heaters
will be in a space above the rollout. In
auxiliary compartments with two rollouts,
the heater will be in a space between the
rollouts. Heaters may also be located
in superstructure compartments, transi
tion compartments, and in bus ducts if
the operating conditions require them.
Before energizing the heaters, be sure
the power source Is of the proper voltage,
frequency, and phase arrangement, and
is connected in accordance with the wiring
diagrams furnished with the equipment.
Also, be sure to remove all cartons and
miscellaneous material packed inside the
units before energizing the heaters.
Heaters should be visually inspected
several times a year to make sure they
are operating properly.
It is recommended that the heaters
be energized at all times and that ther-
fflostatic control not be used. If thermo-
static control is used, the contacts of
the thermostat should be set to close be
tween 95 F and 100 F on falling temper
ature, de-energizing the heaters only when
strong sunlight beats on the switchgear.
Under no condition should a differential
thermostat be used to control the heaters
because under conditions of extremely high
humidity this type of thermostat will not
operate at all times to keep the heaters on
enou^ to prevent condensation in the
switchgear.
MAINTENANCE
A regular maintenance schedule should
be established to obtain the best service and
reliability from the switchgear. Plant oper
ating and local conditions will dictate the
frequency of inspection required. For
specific information regarding the main
tenance of devices, such as circuit breakers,
relays, meters, etc., refer to the separate
instraction hook furnished for each device.
The inspection cabinet, which is furnished, o
provides a convenient means for maintain
ing the circuit breakers. Under normal
conditions the protective relays do not
iterate, therefore, it is Important to check
the operation of these devices regularly.
A permanent record of all maintenance
work should t>e kept, the degree of detail
depending on the operating conditions. In
any event, it will be a valuable reference
for subsequent maintenance work and for
station operation. It is recommended that
the record include reports of tests made,
the condition of equipment and repairs and
adjustments that were made.
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE REMOVED
OR ANY DOORS OPENED WHICH PERMIT
ACCESS TO THE PRIMARY CIRCUITS,
IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE dRCUIT
OR CIRCUITS BE DE-ENERGIZED AND
BREAKERS BE WITHDRAWN TO A DIS
CONNECTED POSITION AND TAGGED.
IF WORK IS TO BE DONE ON REMOTE
EQUIPMENT CONNECTED TO A UNIT,
THE BREAKER FOR THAT UNIT SHOULD
BE PLACED IN THE DISCONNECTED POSI
TION AND TAGGED ALSO THE REMOTE
EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE ISOLATED FROM
ANY OTHER POWER SOURCES CONNEC
TED TO IT.
The primary circuits of metal-clad
switchgear are insulated in order to reduce
the size of the equipment. However, this
insulation, except in one or two instances,
requires a certain amount of air gap be
tween phases and to grotmd to complete the
Insulation. Inserting any object in this air
space, when equipment is energized, wheth
er it be a tool or a part of the body, may
under certain conditions, in effect, short
circuit this air gap and may cause a break
down in the primary circuit to ground and
cause serious damage or injury or hoth.
Care should be exercised in the main
tenance and checking procedures that ac
cidental tripping or operation is not in
itiated.
Tne switchgear structure and connec
tions should be given the following overall
maintenance at least annually.

1. ThorougMy clean the equipment,
removing all dust and other accumulations.
Wipe clean the buses and sivports. In
spect the buses and connections carefully
for evidence of overheating or weakening of
the insulation.
2. Measure the resistance to grotmd
and between phases of the Insulation of
buses and connections. Since definite
limits cannot be given for satisfactory
Insulation resistance values, a record must
be kept of the reading. Weakening of the
insulation from one maintenance period
to the next can be recognized from the
recorded readings. The readings should
be taken under similar conditions each time
If possible, and the record should Include
the temperature and humidity.
High potential tests are not required,
but If it seems advisable, based on the In
sulation resistance tests or after repairs,
the test voltage should not exceed 14 kv
A.C. for 4.16 av and 27 kv A. C. for 13.8
equipments. These voltages are 75% of
factory test volt^es and are in accord
ance with ANSI standards..
METAL CLAD
FRAME ANGLE.^
BKR PQS
STOP ^1
LIFTIKIG BRKT. iO
8 ENLARGED VIEW X-X
Jfl.
Fig. 29A (208A8952) Positive Interlock Adjustment
Potential transformers and control pow
er transformers must be disconnected dur
ing high voltage testing.
3. Clean elevating mechanism and lub
ricate jack screws and gears with lubri
cant G.E. Co. #D50H15 (Atlantic Ref. Co.
#52 or e(p^).
4. Check primary disconnecting device
contacts for signs of abnormal wear or over
heating. Clean contacts with silver polish.
Discoloration of the silvered surfaces Is
not ordinarily harmful unless atmospheric
conditions cause deposits such as sulphides
on the contacts. If necessary the deposits
can be removed with a good ^ade of silver
polish.
Before replacing breaker, apply a thin
coat of contact lubricant 050H47 to breaker
studs for lubrication.
5. Check to see that all anchor bolts
and bolts In the structure are tight. Check
tightness and continuity of all control con
nections and wiring.
6. If the swltchgear Is equipped with
heaters, check to see that all heaters are
energized and operating.
*1 ^ j
mJI
MOTOR
_aMlT SW.
•
Metal-Clad Switchgear GEH-1802
OUTDOOR ACRYLIC PAINT FINISH
The outside of standard outdoor switch-
gear has acrylic paint finish, blue gray
ASA #24, providing Improved resistance
to all atmospheric conditions, longer life
and less maintenance than with ordinary
paint finishes.
If it Is desired to reflnlsh acrylic
painted swltchgear. It Is necessary to use
one of the following procedures In order
to secure the best adhesion of the paint to
the original finish.
A. Reflnlshlng with Acrylic Paint. It Is
recommendea that reimisnuig be done
with Du Pont acrylic paint of the desired
color. Obtain materials and Instruc
tions for application from the Du Pont
Company.
B. Reflnlshlng with Alkyd or Oil Base
Paints, •iwometnoasarerecommenaea:
1. Spr^ one sealer coat of Du Pont
233Er7S300 or equivalent which has
been reduced to spraying viscosity
with Du Pont 37692 or 37666 thinner.
Air dry for one hour. Apply alkyd
or oil base paint.
2. ^ray one sealer coat of Arco
214-806 primer which has been re
duced to spraying viscosity with
Xylol. Air dry for one hour. Apply
alkyd or oil base paint.
OVERLAP
m/c. fr.
/angle
ULI)
tm M
SHIMS
INTERLOCK
^CAM SUPT
interlock
CAM •plate
29
GEH-1802 Metal-clad SwUchgear

RENEWAL PARTS
OHDERING INSTRUCTIONS
1. RENEWAL PARTS SHOULD BE ORDERED FROM THE SWITCHGEAR PRODUCTS DEPARTMENT.
2. ALWA-ra SPECIFY THE REQUISITION NUMBER ON WHICH THE EQUIPMENT WAS ORIGINALLY FURNISHED.
3. SPECIFY THE QUANTITY, REFERENCE NUMBER, DESCRIPTION AND THIS BULLETIN NUMBER.
4. STANDARD HARDWARE, SUCH AS SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, ETC., IS NOT LISTED. SUCH ITEMS
SHOULD BE PURCHASED LOCALLY.
5. FOR PRICES, REFER TO THE NEAREST OFFICE OF THE GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY.
6. IF INSULATING MATERIAL, SUCH AS TAPE, VARNISH, COMPOUND, ETC., IS REQUIRED, IT MUST BE
SPECIFIED SEPARATELY.
7. IF PARTS LISTED SEPARATELY ARE TO BE ASSEMBLED AT THE FACTORY, ORDER MUSTSO STATE.
8. NOT ALL PARTS LKTED HEREIN WILL BE USED ON ANY ONE EQUIPMENT. PARTS NOT USED IN
ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT SHOULD NOT BE ORDERED AS RENEWAL PARTS.

1 • ® «
: »
A • «

I
PRIMARY DISCONNECT DEVICES
(SEE FIG. NO. U) 1 ^
DESCRIPTION
I^ '1 r
5 Front Primary Disconnect Device
Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
Connections
^ I \

6 Rear Primary Disconnect Device

Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
Connections

NOTE; Insulating material required lor

Ref. Nos. 5 and 6 will be furnished
with order.

POSmVE MECHANICAL INTERLOCK

(FIG. NO. aOA)
REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

3 Complete positive mechanical

interlock assembly
4 Elevating mechanism motor
(115-v ^c)
4 Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-c)
4 Elevattng mechanism motor
(230-v d-c)
18 ^ring only

Fig. 30A View Showing Elevating Mechanism Motor and Control Unit
 Metal-Clad Swltchgear CEH-1B02

Complete Left Hand (Ref. No. 1) Complete Right Hand (Ref. No. 2)
Fig. SO Elevating Mechanism for M.26 Equipments Bated 2S0 mva and M-36 Equipments Rated 1200A 500 mva

Complete Left Hand (Ref. No.- lA) Complete Right Hand (Ref. No. 2A)
Fig. 31 Elevating Mechanism for M-Stm Equipments Hated 750 mva, M-26H Equipments Rated 350 mva and M-36 Equipments
Rated 500 mva 200CIA
(See Paee 32 for Parts Table)
GEH-1802 Metal-o.lad Switchgear

ELEVATING MECHANISMS
Flga. 30, 31, and 31A
REF. NO. DESCRIPTION
7 Miter gears, pair
7A Roll pin lor miter gear
8 Shaft, right
8A Shaft, left
9 Sprocket
9A Roll pin for sprocket
9B Bearing Block
10 Spur gear
10 Pinion gear and rod
lOA Roll pin for spur gear
11 Stop stud
llA Stop bolt
12 Pinion gear and rod
12 Spur gear
12A Boll pin for spur gear
13 Locking spring
14 Stop sl^t
14A Roll pin for stop shaft
14B Stop shaft bracket
15 Clutch spring
ISA Roll pin lor clutch spring
16 S'.tde Clutch
17 Jack Screw

7 8ft 9B 9 9A 9A 9 9B 7A7 7ft IOIOA14AI3

Complete Left Hand (Ref. No. IB) Complete Right Hand (Bef. No. 2B)

Fig. 31A Elevating Mechanism for M-36HH Eqfuipments Rated 1000 MVA
 9II Vutn*.1 •«« r#M *oi B»ii#a"aIBf nt i>»atp»a >u»M*n Wn >a»n

DESCRIPTION

Fig. o3 Shutter Mechanism Assembly M~26.

lu"

F^. 34 Shutter Mechanism Assembly M>36

QEB-1602 Metal-clad SwitchKear

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

25 Isolating barrier support angle

26 Rear Isolating barrier
27 Intermediate isolating barrier
28 Front isolating barrier
29 Isolating barrier clip
30 Isolating Ijarrier support

LOCATION RATING DESCRIPTION

1200A. 1 connection bar, down

1200A. 1 connection bar, up
1200A. 1 connection bar, down
1200A. 1 connection bar, up
I200A. no connection tiar
1200A. no connection bar
1600A. 1 connection bar, down
1600A. 1 connection bar, up
1600A. 1 connection bar, down
1600A. I connection bar, up
1600A. no connection bar
Fig. 35 Bus Support 1600A, no connection bar
2000A, 1 connection bar, down
2000A. 1 connection bar, up
2000A, 1 connection bar, down
2000A. 1 connection bar, up
2000A. no connection bar
2000A. no connection bar
2000A. 3 connection bars, dow
2000A. 3-connection bars, up
2000A. 3 connection bars, dow
2000A. 3 connection bars, up
Insulating boot
Plastic rivet for tioot
• Specify unit number and phase on which boot is
to be used.

Fig. 36 Molded Bus support Fig. 37 Bus Connection Boot

(U.IS or 13.8 kv Units) 4.16 kv and 13.8 kv
 Metal-clad Swltcheear qEH-1802

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

60 Limit Switch SBl type

61 Light Switch
62 Keyless receptacle
63 Duplex receptacle
64 Strip heater
65 Fuse block, open type*
66 Fuse block, dead front*
67 _ Limit switch, mercury type
(66 Complete secondary disconnect Device
Fig. 30A (6£ Complete stationary auxiliary
61 65 \ switch mechanism

'Specify amp rating of fuse and number of poles.

Fig. 39 Wiring Devices and Miscellaneous Parts

71 72 7J

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

Panel locking handle

Panel handle
Door locking tiandle
Door handle
Socket
w- "ff

F«. 36 Door Handles and Locks

FUSE ROLLOUT UNIT

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

75 Fuse clip
76 Insulator
77 Ground Bar
76 Ground Finger
79 Barrier
80 Cover
81 Tray
82 Strap
83 Insulator Support
84 Insulator Clamp
85 Barrier
86 Compound Strap
87 Finger
88 Connection bar
39 Connection txir
90 Connection liar
91 Connection liar
Connection t>ar
Connection bar
locator Support

Fig. 40 Fuss Rollout Unit

GEH-1802 ' Metal-clad Swltchgear

=^H06 104 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT UNIT

REF. NO.I DESCRIPTION ^
94 Insulator
95 Insulator clamp
96 Insulator support
97 Disconnect barl
98 Finger
99 Barrier
100 Disconnect bar
101 Disconnect tor
102 Barrier
103 Ground finger
104 Ground finger support
105 Ground finger support
106 Barrier
107 Sec. disconnect (stationary)
108 Sec. disconnect (movable)
109 Brace
110 Tray
111 Cover

Fig. 41 Potential Transformer Rollout Unit

U>
CO
CO

St
CONTROL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT UNIT fa

REF. NO. DESCRIPTKRf

175 Insulator
176 Insulator clamp
177 Insulator support
178 Contact bar
179 Ground finger support
180 Ground finger
181 Ground shoe contact
182 Fuse clip
183 Primary contact
184 Ground bar
185 Ground finger support
186 Ground finger
187 Cross angle
188 Barrier
189 Barrier
190 Sec. disconnect (movable) u
191 Sec. disconnect (stationary)
(not shown)
192 Tray
193 Cover

h
Fig. 42 Control Power Transformer Rollout Unit

SINGLE & TRIPLE-CONDUCTOR POTHEAQS

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION
J0«<
201 Triple-conductor pothead assembly
2ar,208,209 202 Body
203 Insulators and support
204 Wiping sleeve o
205 Gaskets for triple-conductor pothead
206 Terminal
207 Contact nut
208 Washer
209 Palnut (3/4 in. - 12)
210 Pipe plug (3/4 in. std.)
211 Pipe plug (1/8 in. std.) fMi
212 Single-conductor pothead assembly
213 Body and insulator
214 Gaskets for single-conductor pothead
215 Wipii^ sleeve
Fig. 43 Single and Triple-Conductor Potheads

3-74 12-70
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA, PA.
 GEH-1802R
INSTRUCTIONS Supersedes
AND GtH>l802P AND 6EF-3837

RENEWAL PARTS

METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
Types M-26 ond M-36
For Magne-blast Air Circuit Breoker
Types AM-4.16 and AM-13.8

SWITCHGEAR DEPARTMENT

GENERAL ELECTRIC
PHILADELPHIA, PA.
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

PAGE

Fig. 1 Typical Indoor Metal-clad Swltchgear Equipment 4

Fig. 2 T^lcal Outdoor Metal-clad Swltchgear Equipment - Front View 4
Fig. 3 iTPical Outdoor Metal-clad Swltchgear Equipment - Side View 4
Fig. 4 Magne-blast Breaker 5
Fig. 5 Magne-blast Breaker S
Fig. 6 Magne-blast Breaker S
Fig. 7 Installation Details for Indoor Metal-clad Swltchgear 6
Fig. 8 Installation Details lor Outdoor Metal-clad Swltchgear 8
Fig. 9 Installation Details for Outdoor Metal-clad Swltchgear with Protected Aisle 10
Fig. 10 Metal-clad Swltchgear 11
Fig. 11 Measurement of Adjustment of Primary Disconnect Devices 12
Fig. 12 Potential Transformer Rollout Shown In Withdrawn Position 12
Fig. 13 Dummy Removable Element 13
Fig. 14 Ground and Test Device 13
Fig. IS Padlocking Arrangement, Key Interlocking and Method for Pouring Connection Boxes 14
Fig. 16 Control Power Transformer Rollout Shown In ^en Position 15
Fig. 17 Tandem Lockfor Outdoor 13.8 I^ Units IS
Fig. 18 Outdoor Metal-clad Sqltchgear - Addition of Units to Line-up 16
Fig. 19 Outdoor Metal-clad Swltchgear - With Protected Aisle 17
Fig, 20 Outdoor Transition Compartment 18
Fig. 21 Outdoor Transition Compartment 18
Fig. 22 Positive Interlock Mechanism Interference Block 19
Fig. 23 Inspection Box for 13.8 KV Metal-clad Swltchgear 19
Fig. 24 Torque Values for Metal-clad Swltchgear 20
Fig. 24A Bus Duct Gaskets 20
Fig. 25 Method of Making Bus Bar Connections 21
Fig. 26 13.8 KV Taped Joints 21
Fig. 27
to Potheads 22
Fig. 38
Fig. 39 Insulation of Connection Bars 23
Fig. 40 Single-Conductor Pothead with Stress Cone 23 '
Fig. 41 Triple-Conductor Pothead 24
Fig, 42 Rear View of Unit Showing Through-type Current Transformers 25
Fig. 43 Termination Without Pothead - Single-Conductor 25
Fig. 44 Termination Without Pothead - Multi-Conductor 25
Renewal Parts

Fig. 45 Elevating Mechanism for M-26 Equipment Rated 250 mva or Less
and M-36 Equipment Rated 1200A 500 mva or Less 28
Fig. 45A View Showing Elevating Mechanism Motor and Control Unit 28
Fig. 46 Elevating Mechanism for M-36H Equipment Rated 750 mva
M-26 Equipment Rated 350 mva
M-36 Equipment Rated 2000A 28
Fig. 46A Elevating Mechanism for M-36HH Equipments Rated 1000 MVA 29
Fig. 47 Angle Bracket and Chain Drive 29
Fig. 48 Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-26 29
Fig. 49 Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-36 29
Fig. 50 Bus Supports 30
Fig. 51 Door Handles and Locks 30
Fig. 52 Bus Connection Box 30
Fig. 53 Bus Connection Boot ! 31
Fig. 54 Wiring Devices and Miscellaneous Parts 31
Fig. 55 Fuse Rollout Unit 31
Fig. 56 Potential Transformer Rollout Unit 32
Fig. 57 Control Transformer Rollout Unit 32
Fig. 58 Single and Triple Conductor Potheads 32
 CONTENTS

PAGE

RECEIVING, HANDLING & STORAGE 11

RECEIVING 11
HANDLING II
STORAGE 11

DESCRIPTION 11
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE 11
PRIMARY ENCLOSURE 11
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT 11
BREAKER ELEVATING MECHANISM 12
PRIMARY DISCONNECT DEVICE 12
BUS COMPARTMENT 12
CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABLE COMPARTMENT 12
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER COMPARTMENT 12
DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT 12
ROLLOUT FUSE-SWITCH UNITS 13
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE 13
GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICE 13
TANDEM LOCK (WHEN FURNISHED) FOR OUTDOOR UNITS 13
INSTALLATION 15
LOCATION 15
PREPARATION OF FLOOR-ANCHORING 15
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT 19
TESTING CABINET 19
ADDITION OF UNITS TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT 20
CONNECTIONS 20
CONTROL CABLES 25
' GROUND BUS 26
DOOR ALIGNMENT 26
TESTING AND INSPECTION 26
OPERATION 26
BREAKER POSITIONING 26
TRANSFER TRUCKS 26
SPACE HEATERS 27

MAINTENANCE 27
RENEWAL PARTS 28
 >« ^1
ii
rA

Typical Outdoor Metal-cUd Switciisear Figi 3 Typical Outdoor Hetal-clad Switchgear Equipasnt
Equlpnent • Front View Nitii Protected Aisle ' Side View
 METAUCLAD SWITCHGEAR
TYPES M26 AND M36
FOR MAGNE-BLAST AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
TYPES AM>4.16 AND AM-13.&

Metal-clad switchgear is equipment to

control and protect various types o( elec
trical apparatus and power circuits.
The switchgear consists of one or more
units which are mounted side by side and INTERRUPTING
CIRCUIT CAPACITY CURRENT FIGURE
connected mechanically and electrically to BREAKER
gether to form a complete switching equip KVA
ment. Typical equipments are shown in
Figures 1, 2 and 3.
TYPE M-26
The circuit breakers are easily re
movable to provide maximum accessibili^
for maintenance with minimum interrup AM-4.16-150 150,000 1200
tion of services. The switchgear is designed AM-4.16-250 250,000 1200 - 2000
to provide maximum safefy to the operator. AM-4.16-350 350,000 1200 - 3000
All equipment is enclosed in grounded metal
conqiartments.
TYPE M-36
The equipment is available in the rat
ings llstedin&e followingtable. The ratings
of the equipment and devices are based on AM-13.B-150 150,000 1200
usual service conditions as covered In AM-13.8-2S0 250,000 1200
AIEE and NEMA standards. Operation at AM-13.8-250 500,000 1200 - 2000
currents above the equipment rating will AM-13.8-750 750,000 1200 - 2000
result in temperature rises in excess of AM-13.8-1000 1,000,000 1200 - 3000
NEMA standards, and is not recommended. AM-7.2-250 250,000 1200
For outdoor Installation the same basic AM-7.2-500 500,000 1200 - 2000
equipment is built into a weatherproof
bousing as in Figures 2 and 3.

I ar

Hagne-bUat Breakers

These initrvcffons do not purport lo cover oil datailt or rariatioru in equipmerrf rtor lo provide for every potsible
conlinganey lo be met in connectionwith instoHotron, operation or fflointenence. ShovM further informetion be daiirtd
or shouldparlieular problems arite which ore not covered sufftcienlly for the purchaser's purposes, the maftor should
be referred lo the General floetrie Company.
GEE-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear

RtHOValLE COVER POR ICCEIS

TO HIRES IN VIRINO TROUSH

ALL FLOOR STEEL TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER

CHANNELS SHOULD BE SET LEVEL WITH EACH OTHER

AND SHOULD BE LEVEL OVER THEIR FULL LENGTH

ROUGH FLOOR THICKNESS AND REINFORCING DEPENDS

ON LOADING AND OTHER NORMAL FACTORS. AND SHOULD
BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH RECOMMENDED PRACTICE

SRERRER HEHOVARLE
SlOt

PINtSMED PLOOR LINE

SHINS'- RECOMMENDED METHOD

riNISHEB FLOOR UNE

ALTERNATE METHOD
HOTEi IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT
FLOOR STEEL SE EVEN
WITH FINISHEO FLOOR
AMD THAT 80TH BE LEVEL

Fig. 7 Installation Details

 Metal-Clad Switchgear OBH-1802

IT HAY K NIOeSSAIIY TO RtKOVC

POTWAO OH OABLC tUFPOHT FOH
KCHBCfl •

METHOD OF LIFTING
MEMBERS A-a C TO BE FURNtSHEO BY PURCHASER
A* RAtSlNO IfEMBCR - CHANNEL OR WOOD BEAM

B- 3* CHANNEL FURNtSHEO WITH GEAR

C* LIPTWO JACKS
0- COVER 10 BE REMOVED AND REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS ARE M PLACE

note: when UFTIN6 M-26 SWITCHGEAR

UOCATE BEAM V ABOVE UFTINO
CHANNELS *8*

-DOOR OPEN

ALTERNATE 'METHOD OF LIFTING

MEMBERS A a E TO BE FURNISKEO BY PURCHASER
8-3* CHANNEL FURNISHED WITH SEAR
D - COVER TO BE REMOVED AND REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS ARE IN PLACE
E - SPREADER

For Indoor Metal-clad Swltchgear

GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear

MtLC CONNeeTieM
/,

1=
•O

to

„n-T-r-r-is •OOP CAM

TPACK 4ACIC

METHODS OF LIFTING

anjusriiBLE
PLsmarl
SEE VIEW a

BPFiY CMT 3n7 C£i»£nrr

OjfiOKt/ STe-£^
c£(^/fS*YEr- /fUa>^ /9aYD 3^/:'
C£/f/E/\rr7S
DOOR
iiey(£/r/4. tae^V SE/^aes
Roor c«P
/
j|-l4 tn.MlT
"(JflSKEt

ceoR •l-H *lj STl. 8«LT \i

I f
-R»8f OR int>
sttriON

ENlflRCf P SEC. B-B ENLflRsro src.c-c

neTMov OF £esa.m/e^AF/t^ /EBTEEB <9^/PSSEm&LW<r Fig* 6 Installation Details
3}eioJZ efftSfoET Ey EOOE CAf/9/^0 efASA!^
SH/FV//y<f SK£./7-^ /PT SM//'/'//vef SP/./TE
 Metal-clad Swttchgear OBH-ISOS

HCMtVnBl.t.
etlTEC
COVEBS
ft*. fiCCtSS
T» CT.-S
(IMP TP
PmHARY
CABLE
CEMrSRTMtMT

FOR RHCHPR BPLT

9 LPCRTIPNS SEE Fia»(
PIRN PRRWIII4S
FURNISHED WITH RERBISITIAN

•o
VIEW "X"
to SNMIM RHCHORMR OP UNITS
s NITN CMRMHEl. SRSC

HMTU

-SCREENS TO BE BOLTED ON
ERCH END RT INSTAllRTieM. AENOTAilC PLOTES TO BE CUT
MUST BE KEPT CIERN FOR TO SUIT COHOUITS ST fURCMSER
VEMTILRTION

FOUNDATION DATA
Mithout Rear Enclosure
AREA AKO DEPTH OP SOIL SERRINO tURmCES OP EACH
nc FOUHDRTION MUST SE M.TIREO TO SUIT SOIL CONOlTIONS.
r^ bottom SURPACEt OF POUNOATIONS SMOULO SE BELOW
ram ACTHIH M BACRPILLEO WITH PERUIOUS EMTtRIAL
AND AOEOUATStT ORAIHSOl
SURFACE 'B'SMOULO SE LEVEL OVER ITS FULL LENOTM
TO INSURE EASY HANDLINO CP REMOVABLE ELEMENTS.
CORCRETE RAO SMOULO EE REIRFORCEO IN ACOONDANOE
WITH STAROARO PRACTICS.

TO CHANae Htl«NT OF TRUCK FLOOR

LOOSEN NVr'«r. OOOVST LIVER'B* TO
RIVE PfSIREO VCISiir AND LOCK BY
TIRUTCNINR NUT 'H*.

AMUSTAOLe PUimRN view V

V^CitfCHS TO BC ffOLfeo ON
EACH END OT IN STALlOTfOH. . R(MOV*eU DUTC9 TO ttC CUT
Mt»&T eC KEPT clean FOR TO tUlT CONDUITS SV DVNCHASCR
VENTIIATION

With Resr Enclosure

for Outdoor Hetel-clad Swltchgear

SCRE{r<S
CDC ENC
Husr a t
VENTUftl

AISLE Utf
SU^T

^LflTCH
 Metal-clad Swltcbgear OEH-1802

RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE

RECEIVIMG
Every case or crate leavlngthefactory
is plainly marked at convenient places with
raBB niimhor, requisition number, custom-
er'B order, front or rear, and whenforsize
and other reasons It Is necessary to divide
the equipment for shipment, with the unit
number of the portlon^equlpmentenclosed
in each shippii^ case.
The contents of each pack^e of the
shipment are listed in the Packing Details.
TbU list is forwarded with the shipment,
packed in one of the cases. The case is
especially marked and its number can also
^ be obtained from the Memorandum of Ship
ment. To avoid the loss of small parts when
unpacking, the contents of each case should
be carefully checked against the Packing
Details before discarding the packing ma-
teriaL Motily the nearest General Electric
Company representative at once if any
g shortage of material is discovered.
S All elements before leaving thefactory
S are carefully inspected andpackedbywork-
£ men e^erienced in the proper handlingand
packing of electrical equipment. Upon re-
2 ceipt of any apparatusanlmmediateinspec-
. tion should be madeforanydamagesustaln-
^ ed while enroute. If injury is evident or an
Indication of rough handling is visible, a
claim for damage should be filed at once
with the transportation company and the
General Electric Company notified prompt
ly. Information as to damaged parts, part
number, case number, requisition number,
etc., should accompany the claim.
HANDLING
Before uncrating, indoor equipment
may be moved by a crane with slings under
the skids. If crane facilities are not avail
able, rollers under the skids may be used.
Fig. 7 shows suggested method of handling
the switchgear after it is removed from
the skids.
Methods of handling outdoor equipment
are shown in Fig. 8. After the equipment
ts in place the lifting plates should be re
moved and reassembled, "turned in" so
that passageway at the ends of the equip
ment will not be obstructed.
STORAGE
If it is necessary to store the equip
ment for any length of time, the following
precautions should be taken to prevent
corrosion:
1. Uncrate the equipment.
2. Cover Important parts such as jack
screws, gears and chain of lifting mechan
ism, linkage and moving machine-finished
parts with a heavy oil or grease.
3. Store In a clean, dry place with a
moderate temperature and cover with a
suitable canvas to prevent deposit of dirt
or other foreign substances upon movable
parts and electrical contact surfaces.
4. Batteries should be uncratedandput
on trickle charge immediately on receipt.
5. If dampness or condensation may be
encountered in the storage location, heaters
should be placed inside tne units to prevent
moisture &mage. ApproximatelySOOwatts
of heaters per unit will be required. Re
move all cartons and other miscellaneous
material packed Inside units before energiz
ing any heaters. If the equipment has been
subjected to moisture it should be tested
wtth a lOOOv or 2500v megger. A reading
of at least 200 megobms should be obtained.
6. Breakers should be prepared for
Storage separately. Refer to appropriate
breaker instruction book.

DESCRIPTION
Each unit Is made iq) of a secondary
enclosure and a primary enclosure, as
shown In Figure 10.
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE

The secondary enclosure is usually

located at the breaker withdrawal side of
the unit, although In certain units tt may be
on the side opposite to the breaker wttta-
drawal area. It consists of a compartment
with a hinged door or panel upon which are
mounted the necessaryinstruments.control
and protective devices. The terminal
blocks, fuse blocks, and some control de
vices are mounted inside the enclosure on
the side sheets and a trough is provided at
the top to carry wiring between units. |#ll Ml

T't
PRIMARY ENCLOSURE

The primary enclosure contains the

hi^ voltage equipment and connections ar
ranged in compartments to confine the
effects of faults and so minimize the damage.

BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT

The removable element consists of a

circuit breaker with trip-free operating
mechanism mounted directly on the breaker
frame, interlock mechanism, the removable
portion of the primary and secondary dis
connecting devices, Ihe operating mech
anism control device, and necessary con
trol wiring. The magne-blast breakersare
equipped with wheels for easy removal and
insertion. Refer to Figs. 4, 5 and 6.
The circuit breaker Interlock mechan
ism is designed to obstruct the operator
from lowering the breaker from the con
nected position or raising it from the dis
connected position unless the breaker is in
the open position. This Interlock is also Fig. 10 Metal-clad Switchgear
GEB-1S02 Uetal-cUd Switchgear

CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABLE

designed to keep the breaker in the open
positton whtle it Is being elevated or lower
ed. With this arrangement it is imperative
that the circuit breaker be tripped prior
to any vertical travel of the removable
element. A positive stop prevents over-
travel of the removable elementwhenraised
to its connected position. The secondary
disconnecting device coupler Is used for
connecting outside control circuits to the
circuit breaker, operating mechanism, trip
coll and auxiliary switches. This coupler
makes contact automatically when the re
movable element is raised to the connected
position. A control testjumperlsfurnlshed
which is plumed into the coupler on the
stationary and removable elements when
it is desired to operate the breaker in the
test position.
All removable elements furnished on a
particular requisition and of like desien
and ratings are completely interchangeable
one with the other. The removable as well
as the stationary elements are built with
factory Jigs and fixtures thus insuring
Interchangeablllty.
BREAKER ELEVATING MECHANISM
The elevating mechanism for elevating
or lowering the removable element to or
from Its connected position supports the
removable element in the operating posi
tion. In the test position the breuer is
lowered to the guide rails. This mech
anism consists of heavy-duty steel jack
screws on which are carried nuts to sup
port the elevating carriage. The carriage
is so designed that the removable element
can be readllv Inserted or withdrawn after
the carriage has been lowered to the dis
connected position without necessitatlngthe
removal of any bolts, nuts or screws. The
breaker cannot be lowered or raised until
it has been tripped. The breaker cannot
be closed except with the breaker in either
the operating or test position.
Guide rails are built into the metal-
clad frame to guide the removable breaker
element Into correct position before the
breaker is raised Into the operating posi
tion by means of the elevating mechaniam
which is motor operated.
COMPARTMENT
The current transformers are mounted
in a compartment Isolated from the other
equipment Provision is made in this com
partment for connecting the purchaser's
iNSgtAtlOM primary cable by means of potheads or
INSULATION COM^OUMO clamp ^pe terminals.
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
COMPARTMENT
HewOvAOlC STUD Potential transformers are located in
POftCCLBIN BUtHlNS a compartment above the current trans
formers or In a separate unit adjacent to
the breaker units.
The transformers are mounted on a
movable support equipped with primary and
secondary disconnecting devices. Whenthe
potential transformers are disconnected,
they are at a safe striking distance from
all live parts of the swltchgear. In addi
KUCII CIMIHT
tion a grounding device is provided which
contacts the fuses when the potential trans
formers are disconnected, effectively dis
charging the transformers. In this position
the transformer fuses may be safely re
moved and replaced. A barrier mounted at
the rear of the carriage moves with the car
I •eaca catewT riage to a positton in front of the stationary
1 UCAKCa part of the primary disconnect device.
J Tear aoaniOH Figure 12.
DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT
Dummy removable elements. Pig. 13,
are used as a means of Isoiating circuits
or bus sections, where operation Is infre
quent and a circuit breaker cannot be
economically justified. The device con
Fig. II Heasureisent of Idjuateent of sists of a framework to simulate the cir
Prieary Disconnecting Devices cuit breaker removable element with a set

PRIMARY DISCONNECTING DEVICE

The primary disconnecting devices uti

lize silver to silver contacts to Insure
i^lnst reduction of current carrying cap
acity due to oxidation of the contact sur
faces. These contacts are of the bighpres-
sure line contact tube and socket design,
the tube being backed up by heavy garter
springs to Insure contact pressure. Refer
to Figure 11.
BUS COMPARTMENT

The main buses are enclosed in a metal

compartment with removable front covers
to provide accessibility.
The bus is supported by an insulating
material which is practically Impervious to
moisture, and an excellent dielectric.

The bus insulation is molded on the

bars except at the joints where the insula
tion is completed by means of compound
filled boxes, molded boots or tape. Fig. 12 Potential Tranaforoer Roliout Shorn in Withdrawn Position

fig. 13 Dunny Removable Element
of six studs similar to those on the magne-
blast breakers. The lower end of the studs
are connected, front to back, by copper
bars which are fully Insulated and metal-
enclosed. The stationary structure Is the
same as for a circuit breaker. When the
device is elevated Into position, it con
nects the front set of metal-clad discon
necting devices to the rear set.
Under no conditions must the dummy
element be elevated orloweredwhenthebus
or the- unit Is energized. Key Interlocks
are applied to Insure that all source of
power are disconnected before the dummy
element can be operated. Refer to Figure
15.
ROLLOUT FUSE-SWITCH UNITS
Rollout load-break disconnect switch
es, wtth or without current limiting fuses
of hl^ interrupting cecity, are some
times used in metal-clad swltchgear to
protect and switch small transformers and
circuits where circuit breakers cannot be
economically or functionally justified.
The rollout switch is designated as
type SE-10, and the units in which they are
used are designated as type SEM-26 or
SEU-36. For additional information on
these equipments, refer to the supplement
ary InsUucttons furnished.
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE
Current limiting fuses with high tn-
terrupttng rating are sometimes used in
metal-clad swltchgear to protect small
transformers or circuits where circuit
Metal-clad Swltchgear OEE-1802
breakers cannot be economically or func
tionally justified.
The fuses are mounted on a movable
support equipped with disconnecting de
vices. Control power transformers of IS
kva and smaller may be mounted on the
rollout with the fuses. See Figure 16.
.-TV.r-.ll
. * •••j When the fuses are disconnected, they
are at a safe striking distance from aU
live parts of the swltchgear. In addition
a grounding device is provided which con
tacts the fuses after they are disconnected,
effectively removingany static charge from
the fuses. In this position the fuses may
be safely removed and replaced. The dis
connecting devices are capable of inter
rupting transformer magnetizing current,
tnit should not be used to internqft load
current. Mechanical or key interlocks
are applied to prevent operating, the dis
connecting device while the load is con
nected. nls is genearally accomplished
by interlocking so that the tranaormer
secondary breaker must be locked in tiie
open position before the disconnecting de
vice can be opened or closed.
GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICE
The grounding and test device. Figure
14, provides a convenient means of ground
ing the cables or the bus in order to safe
guard personnel who may be working on the
cables or the equipment The device can
also be used for applying power for high
potential tests or for fault location, to
measure Insulation resistance (Megger).
By using potential transformers, it can
also be used for phasing out cables.
The three studs of the device are sim
ilar to those of the magne-blast circuit
breakers. The studs are mounted on a re
.A. iL A- movable plate which can be placed in either
of two positions. In one position the studs
will en^ge the front (Bus) contacts only
and in the other position the studs will en
gage the rear (Line) contacts only of a
metal-clad unit.
To Indicate the proper placementof the
studs on the device, opposite sides of the
assembly are marked "Line" and "Bus".
The word corresponding to the desired
position must be toward the operator.
To use, the device is rolled Into the
metal-clad housing In place of the circuit
breaker, and rals^ Into or lowered from
the connected position by means of the
circuit breaker elevating mechanism.
In addition to the device described
above, there Is available a form of ground
ing and testing device equipped with both
bus and line side buildings, power operated
grounding contacts, phasing receptacles,
and a complete safety interlocking system.
For details of construction and operation
of this device, refer to CEI-38957 for 4.16
kv equipment, or GEI-50114 for 7.2 kv and
13.8 w equipment.
TANDEM LOCK (WHEN FURNISHED)
FOR OUTDOJR UNITS
Outdoor metal-clad equipments with
more than one unit may be provided with a
Fig. lU Ground and Teat Device tandem locking arrangement which makes it
(Cable shown not furnished by G. £. Co.) necessary to padlock only one door on each
 GEH-1802 Metal-clad Swltchgear

RIGHT HAND Stg SHEET BKR COMP^

RIGHT HAM3 SIDE SHFFT RKR. COUfP'T

' \ BfTi F mR Rare nrx

-*2^ / gtgMCVAag

TOR PLATE

MOnrKWn ARRANfif^MFIMT
prevtms MSW. aa lO^fBiw! pf.« « n.«M> KEY inte;rlqck fPR PC.a
iiB<i»aB.r ttfitfMT
PBCVCt<TS CLQSWC fiftfilKfP

AnfjR Rnnr

CHOI
I I

a'LQl__ /
EiaasnE[i.ey
PURCHASER
BB^ja.9 OUTDOOR 6 ir^OOO?

tCaaffilKJCLBQKES
RWT HWfll 'VPg <»hfft rkr roMi/T
as

-oooe

WETHOO FOR PaXVK COWECTION BOXES

soLXMUsa:

EEELfiE I

^XjmPuXK F(Ti fug/j.ff RfMi^iARi F r

PROtSffS n» irwRwc oi-^WT^i;Mq«agix_FAL^TNr

Fig. IS Padlocking Arrangemont, Key interlocking and Method for Pouring Connection Boxes
14
 T
Fig. IS Control Power Transforaer Rollout Shown in
Open Posi tion
side. (In exceptionally long installations
two or more locks may be required on each
side). The unitcontalnlngtheoperatingarm
Before any installation work is done,
consult and study all drawings furnished
by the General Electric Company for the
particular requisition.
These drawings include arrangement
drawings, wiring and elementary diagrams
and a summary of the equipment. Mats,
screens, railings, etc., which are external
to the switchgear, but which may bo re
quired to meet any local codes, must t>e
furnished by the purchaser.
LOCATION
The recommended aisle space required
at the front and at the rear of the equipment
Is shown on the floor plan drawiugfurnished
for the particular requisition. The space at
till' front must bo sufficient to permit the
insertion and withdrawal of the circuit
breakers, and their transfer to other units.
of the tandem lock is clearly marked on
the drawings and also by nameplate on the
equipment itself. Refer to Figure 17.
INSTALLATION
The space at the rear must t>e sufficientfor
InstaUation of cables, fur inspection and
maintenance, and on some equipments to
draw out potential transformers.
PREPARATION OF FLOOR - ANCHORING
Indoor Equipment
The station floor mustl>estrongenough
to prevent sagging due to weight of the
switchgear structure and to withstand the
impact stress caused by the opening of the
circuit In-eakcrs under short circuit con
ditions. The impact loading is approxi
mately 1-1/2 times the static load.
Suit^lc means must be provided by
the purchaser for anchoring the equipment
to the floor. It is essenti^ that the floor
be level to avoid distortion of the switch-
Tanden Lock for Outdoor 13.8 Units
Beiore any door intheequlpmentcanbe
opened, It is necessary to open the padlocked
door and operate the tandem locking armto
the open position. In locking the equipment
the reverse procedure should be used.
Where It is desired to separately lock
any particular door, the tandem lock can
be disconnected in that unit by unbolting a
connecting clip t>etween the tandem bar and
the locking bar, and aseparatepadlock used
on that door.
The light switches, front and rear,
will be located in the units with the tandem
gear structure and the equipment be com
pletely aligned prior to final anchoring.
The recommended floor construction is
shown in Figure 7. The floor channels
must be level and straight with respect to
each other. Steel shims should be used
for final leveling of the switchgear if nec
essary. Care shouldbe taken to provide a
smooth, hard, and level floor under and in
front of the tmits to facilitate installation
and removal of the breaker. If the floor is
not level and flush with the floor channels,
It will be difftoilt to handle the breaker
because it will not be level with respect to
the stationary elemenU
Recommended practice is to weld the
switchgear structure to the floor channels,
using a tack weld at points indicated for
anchoring on the drawing. Ifweldingfac-
ilities are not available the gear should
be bolted to the floor channels.
 GEH-ie02 Metal-clad SwttchBear

^
"T
I^
i k
..
l|

-•r 1 til •h
>1
II
II

I!
II
I "I*

d .Jl

Htw vm/rs Aooeo AT ex*srtfr» u^frx Mgw t/MffS Aec€0 AT Rl9»*r fMO

FfiO/*T
(MHti. CMD)

MtMOVt rxtsi Af*ftrt rn^tm ^trJ f o

Ao«^ t.HO etiLf
•

.J S

I I"

r~

^ Mdars ae^riMd
r»«*nr<« M r
se^TtoH 'f-r'

OAMva ass
cenMtenaH

ASSEMSCV *6' V/£W*A' ®

(aanMf cf iMfi y9*MTMnii (CM0 Q^gMtsru^ vm')

WITH REAR ENCLOSURE

y^RCKove Tins sTjriP vit* mst

irMf CUfS / MCTWM 0Mir

/
cf!
1^ '•8US 8ftRS
PNoccov^r
END ^CriON
/. tteo^ C*f» gxc Scggp*, 0*09*0 Bvf cOMfttcn^*, AMO
r "I £^o S£cr/oH. SEE VIEW TT t VIEW V
Y y

2. Srr ffff UMtr^} M ^dAco MO eotr ToognttA aa Smowm

'^KOLtS MR 0AITINC iM ASS£AtOLY 'B ' f OSSIASir *C'
TORirtrtK
see KCTieH'T-* J. ASSSAfOdO /rg/ts dJSTiO /ft PACceOtAOf MO.t
♦, ASS£MOt£ NiAf ftocr CAPS AS SftOmff* (f* YtrttA 'a' f FtfWV.
ftOONO OUS
eoNNicnoM S opovfto st/s SPiiCc eerweoAi £*tsrwo Afto
r^6«srEr /tsiv cpovA/o aos. AS sffOMif tM AssrAfBir 'a ' t nsionxV
«R04)KP &. ASSPf^OLC OltS OAJfS AHO iNSUinrC TEN
mssrutc QdVfR msTptfcrtoft 900A,

3r ^ sesriN
ASSCKBtr 'C* rw CAPS RCNiveo VIEW 'D*
(aotriKS •» iMtrs n4if«fR^ (CNp VIEW «#C4nSTW9 OHtl)

WITHOUT RE/IR TNCLOSUR^

Flj. 18 Outdoor Hetal-clad Switchgear - Addition of Units to Line-up

16
 Metal-clad Swttchgear GKH-1802

— -ri--.
I I ' r-Tl-
1 ij
II
^j ii
II

i.'
I I
li
II
II

li
i I
II

!!
II

I II
II
II

li
I
II
ii
! "I ii
II
A Ji..j ,JL.
:z2
exISTlNft UNIT5 NEW uMtTS ddpEB n msiir end

FRONT View

vCNr
CNI VeNT /BRTtCH /MUlMrcltJlTe
rfNT CR^

ROD' Cir
3
<•> (dSMT
Woor
WO CR^ — itte RBurrfK CUP
t»»F surr
AlSlC TRUSS ANQIC

I CUPS &

NCTAL CUP

QRMIIP IDS T« DEIUVC KISIIN^ tup SVECT ( lEEl)

(flOVCTtMl a REHOVt THE E«llOWIN« ITEMS FRDM «IUE SECEION
(M«CT I VENT aUTTlM
I ENP VENT CNP
RMPrit MRiC ^ 3 Mef CUPS
fiooK PMre 4 CNP SECTION COKSISTINIf OF ITEMS M»««B A
fkM« ntiNC 5. FRONT COVER (HOVE TO NEW UNIT;
M4U riecu FRMC C SCNCENS (e;
SCRriNI- B. REMOVE ROOF CAP,END SCREEN, «ROUNS BUS
w CONNECTION AND END SECTION IROM NEEAl CIRO SECTION

SECTION TO INSTAIL HEW HETAL ClAO UNITSf lEFTJ

I. JET NEW UNIT(S) IN FIACE ANO BOIT TOOETNE*
t assemble items listed in B
S. ASSCMSIE NEW ROOF CAPS
4 ASSEHSIC WOUND BUS SPLICE SETWEEN lEISTINS

.4
AND NEW WOUND BUS
DMN—
mjc RORPflR . 5 ASSEMBLE BUS BARS AND INSULATE FEN
WSIC f MSRtr INSTRUCTION BOOK
6

^ao«fl RMPTM
TO INSTALL NEW FROTECTEO AISLE UNITSfUFT;
CND sMcrr-t • RVRICS I install new floor frames and floor plate
A A TIE DOWN ANOLE

1/
E RcriACf floor frame anrle at new end position
t u . MIT' J. INSTAIL NEW FLOOR PLATES
4 ERECT NEW CORNER COLUMN (OII«LE>
5 ROD NEW AISLE TRUSS AMALC AMD NETAL CLAD
RtUC <
ADAPTER CLIP TO ERISTIN4 END ROOF IRUSS
TOP tllP^ AND SUPPORT
0 install new end AISLE TRUSS SUB-ASSEMBLY
mo MUtc I COHSISriNA or ROOF TRUSS AMBLE, ROOF SUPT,
»P CUP A SECTION E'E COLUMN CLIP, NEFAl CLAD AAAPTER CLIP ANO
FLAM OKRCKCr A ROOF SUPT CLIPS
MTrRNfewrt T REINSTRIL TRE ITEMS FEMOVED IM R-«
e&LUKM • .riOM PlRTt Ttf CMIVN AN(i( fS NOTE -USE NEW OASnrs ARDALSO install
XrvMlSKCD
• — WITN N
- I NCW FMRf
FRCriOUS END FRONT COVER ON FRONT
VifTeifp OF NEW END UNir
rCMIT C»vtR 0 install wirin« and LIBRTINE TROUBN
MtV l» J
E««in<tiir J L- EMir«ENT
SECTION B-fl note:-A SINILAR PRACEDURE IS USED FOR
• MTfRMKI VifWC RIANT END ADDITIONS

Fig« 19 Outdoor I4etal-cl«d Switehgear with Protected AIbIb

17
3EH-1802 Metal-clad Swltcligear
•K. •^OUMD
Fi9> 20
Provision should be made in the floor
for conduits for primary and secondary
cables, located as shown on the floor plan
drawing furnished for the particular requi
sition. If desired, the co^utts may be in
stalled before the switchgear. Consider
ation should be given to conduits which
might be required for future connections.
Outdoor Equipment
Outdoor equipments are furnished both
with and without rear enclosures. Recom
mendations for foundations for both types
are given in Fig. 8. Primary and secondary
conduits should be installed in accordance
with the requisition drawings, before the
equipment is put into place.
Since outdoor equipments are provided
'th a 6" iKkse, a transfer truck is required
iKi place the breaker in the housing. The
level adjustment on the truck is shown in
Fig. 8.
When outdoor equipments are shipped
In more than one section, the joint between
sections mustbeweatherproofed. Assemble
the gasket between the doors, using cement
provided. Refer to Fig. 8, Section B-B.
Annemble the gasket bemeen the roof sec
tions, bolt together and install the roof caps.
Refer to Fig. 8, Section C-C.
Ckitdoor Equipment with Protected Aisle
When specified by the purchaser, out
door e.iuipment is furnished with an en
closed, weatherproof operating aisle. See
Fig. 3. The aisle enclostire is shipped
separately from the switchgear.
The following procedure outlines the
steps necessary to install outdoor equip
ment with a protected aisle:
(1) Install the switchgear in accordance
with the procedure given above for outdoor
equipment
(2) Remove the shipping covers from
the control panels. Since the relay and
instrument cases are not weather-proof,
tlie control panels should be protected
from inclement weather until the installa
tion of the aisle enclosure is compieted.
18
(D~]
®--
0-
Outdoor Transition Conpartaent
(3) Apply Sterling U-310varnish to both
sides of the gaskets furnished for the joint' sembled in order to maintain alignment
between the ends of the switchgear and the
aisle enclosure and to the surfaces against
which the gasket presses and hang the
gaskets on the projecting studs at the ends
of the switchgear lineup. See Fig. 0,
section A-A.
(4) Move the aisle enclosure into posi
tion, guiding the holes in the end sheets
over the studs on the switchgear lineup
and guiding the roof sills between the
support clips bolted to the upper front
of the switchgear units above the control
panels. This operation may be simplified
by temporarily loosening the siqiport clips.
The Hoor of the aisle enclosure must fit
under the hinged breaker cover of the metal-
clad, so the aisle enclosure must be moved
into position on a level with the switch-
gear units. If desired, this Job may be
simplified by removing the doors over the
circuit breaker compartment. To remove
these doors, loosen the two bolts holding
the lower hinge, remove the hinge, and
lower the door to remove the hin^ pin
from the upper hinge.
(9) Bolt the aisle enclosure in place
at both ends, and bolt the roof sills to
the support clips, tightening any support
clips loosened in the previous operation.
Replace any breaker conqiartment doors
previously removed.
(6) If the aisle enclostire was shipped
in more than one section, bolt the sections
together and assemble the roof caps in the
manner described above for roof Joints in
outdoor switchgear.
(7) Anchor the outside floor sill of
the aisle enclosure with anchor bolts plac^
in accordance with the requisition Rawing.
See Fig. 9, view Y.
(8) Assemble the dome over the roof
opening between the switchgear and the
aisle enclosure. See Fig. 9, view X.
(9) Remove shipping braces from aisle
enclosure. These braces should be left
21-<D
-0
COV£V?S
-0
Fig. 21
in place until the aisle enclosure is as
of the enclosure.
(10) Connect secondary wiring to lights,
convenience outlets, etc., in accordance
with the wiring diagrams furnished for
the equipment.
Since the aisle floor is level with
the floor of the switchgear units, no trans
fer truck Is required for outdoor equipment
with a protected aisle.
The above procedure describes In
stallation of a protected aisle enclosure
with switchgear on one side of tte aisle
only. If the aisle is common to two Itne-
iqis of switchgear, the procedure will re
quire sll^t modification. See the drawings
furnished with the requisition for specific
instructions.
Transition Compartments
Transition compartments for outdoor
unit substations may be one of two types
(Figs. 20 and 21). These compartments
are normally shipped assembled. The
full height compartment (Fig. 20) cannot
be disassembled for instalmtion. The
throat ^e compartment (Fig. 21) can be
installed in any of three ways, in accord
ance with the following instructions:
(a) Should the switchgear be position
ed on Its fouiHiatlon prior to the power
transform^, the complete transition enn
be mounted on the metal-clad as assembled.
Remove covers #8. Apply Sterling U 310
varnish to both sides of gasket 2A, and
to the surfaces against which the gasket
presses. Bolt transition compartment to
throat on metal-clad switchgear. Before
Jacking the power transformer Into its
final locaiion, apply Sterling U 310 varnish
to both sides of gasket lA ^d to the sur
faces against which the gasket presses,
and place the gasket over the mounting
studs on the transformer tank wall, ^ide
transformer in place, guiding the trans
former mounting studs throughthemounting
holes in #1. Center rubber seal between

#1 and fS before tightening nuts, main
taining 24" iKtween transformer tank wall
and end of metal-clad. Do not apply var
nish to the rubber seal between #1 and 43.
Cut secondary conduit #10 to length and
assemble under the transition.
(b) Should the power transformer be
positioned on Its foundation prior to the
switcheear. follow the procedure of para-
graph (a) alxnre, except move the switch-
gear up to the power transformer after
assembling the transition compartment
to the switchgear.
(e) U ttepowertransformerandmetal-
clad OTltChgear are In place, disassemble
transition as follows: Remove covers #8
and #9, adapter #1, dome #7, braces #4.
Apply Sterling If 310 varnish to both sides
of gasket #2A, and to the surfaces agatnst
which the gasket presses, before bolting
#2 to metal-clad throat. Apply Sterling
U 310 varnish to both sides of gasket #iA,
and to the surfaces against whlchthcgasket
presses, and loosely fasten fl and #1A to
transformer tank. Slide throat of #3 into
#1 and maintain approximately 4 1/2"
from #3 to tank. Assemble braces #4
top and bottom to maintain size and proper
alignment, then tighten #1 to transformer
tank. Assemble connections, terminals,
supports and complete all Joints. Assemble
dome #7, side covers #8 and bottom cover
#9. Cut secondary condutt #10 to length
and assemble under the transition.
Connect heaters located In 13.8 kv
class transition compartment
Indoor transition compartments are
shipped assembled together with the ad
jacent metal-clad switchgear units.
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
Before instalitng or operating the re
movable element consulttheclrcuitbreaker
instructions for directions on installation
and inspection. The operation of the inter
lock device is given below.
The elevating mechanism Is accurately
leveled and checked atthe factory and should
need no adjustment. Do not Install or re
move the breaker or make any adjustments
unless the breaker is open.
Rub a small amount of contaci lubri
cant D50H47 on the silvered portion of the
breaker studs to form a thin coating for
contacting purposes.
Lower the elevating mechanism lifting
brackets until the lifting brackets are in the
fully lowered or test position. Thebreaker
^should then enter the housing freely. Push
the breaker Into the housing until the wide
part of the breaker supporting plate rests
arainsl the front part of the lifting bracket
of the elevating mechanism. Theclearance
between the interferenceblock on the break
er and the interference block on the inter
lock mechanism (dimension "X", Fig. 22)
should be from 1/16" to l/8".
Carefully raise the breaker to the con
nected position. The clearance between the
breaker supporting plate and the stop bolts
should be not more than 1/32". Then lower
and remove itfrorotheunlt. When elevating,
note that breaker studs center with respect
to the stationary disconnecting device or in-
>jury to the contJicts may result.
.-•d
FiQ. 22 Positive Interlock Hechanisn
interference Block
Inspect the contact surfaces of both the
breaker studs and the stationary discon
necting devices.
(a) Each segment of the stationary dis
connecting device should make a heavy im
pression in the contact lubricant D50H47
on the breaker studs. Contact wipe should
start not less tlian 1/8" from top of contact
ball although eacti contact need not start at
the same dimension.
(b) The wipe of the breaker stud Inside
the stationary disconnecting device, as in
dicated by the contact lubricant D50H47,
should be 3/4" to 7/8". This indicates that
the breaker studs contacted atthefullpres-
sure center of (he silver bandon the station
ary disconnecting device. See Fig. 11.
(c) Should the Inspectionofthecontacts
show that the breaker is not being raised to
the proper position, readjust the upper stop
tiolts and limit switches to raise or lower
the breaker to the proper location.
the stop twits in the new position.
I-
— g/Cg •J/£W —
(u^rM coViSie.)
Fig. 23 Inspection Box for 13.8 KV Hetal-eUd Switchgear
Metal-Clad Swltchgear GEH-1802
(d) U proper contacting cannot be at
tained by the above methods, It Is necessary
to adjust (hestationarydisconnectingdevice
lube. DO NOT MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENT.
COMMUNICATE WITH THE NEAREST
GENERAL ELECTRIC CO. OFFICE FOR
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
The trip interlock should be checked to
see that the removable element is obstructed
from being raised to or lowered from the
operating position. Using the manual closing
device, close the breaker and then push It
into place for elevating. Snap the selector
switch to the "Raise" position and pull the
1 clutch handle forward. A definite stop
should be encountered preventing the motor
circuit limit switch from energizing the
circuit. Then trip the breaker manually
and elevate to the raised position. Elec
trically close thebreaker. Snap the selector
switch to the "Lower" position and pull the
clutch handle forward. Again, a definite
stop should be encountered preventing the
motor circuit limit switch from energizing
the circuit.
If the Interlock does not function as in
dicated above DO NOT MAKE ANY AD
JUSTMENTS. COMMUNICATE WITH THE
NEAREST GENERAL ELECTRIC CO. OF
FICE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
On units equipped with stationary aux
iliary switches (Fig. 45A, reference *69),
the clearance between the end of the switch
mechanism operating rod and the operating
plunger on the circuit breaker should beOtO
1/8" with the circuit breaker in the raised
and open position. Any adjustment in this
dimension must be made on the circuit
breaker. See instruction book furnished with
circuit breaker ior method of adjustment.
Care should be taken to prevent destroying
Interchangeabillty of circuit breakers by
excessive adjustment on one breaker.
TESTING CABINET
The testing cabinet. Fig. 23, should be
installed on the wall at a location where
maintenance and testing of the breaker can
be convlently done. Conduits must be in
Lock stalled to carry cables to supply control
power for testing.
AC'.
/o •* I
^•eo . v r vAS'W
Ceovse eaMovs.sii
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Svltchgear
ADDITION OF UNITS TO EXISTING
EQUIPMENT
Before adding units to existing equip
ment, consult and study all drawings lur-
nlshcM with the equipment. In addition
to the usual drawings furnished with new
equipment, special drawings may be fur
nished covering complicated or special
assembly work. Also, check to make sure
all necessary parts are on hand.
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE REMOV
ED OR ANY DOORS OPENED WHICHPER-
MIT ACCESS TOTHEPRIMARYCIRCUr^
IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT TEE CIRCUIT
BE DE-ENERGIZED.
Figure 18 indicates the special pro
cedures required to add new metal-clad
units to outdoor equipmentwlthoutprotected
aisle, and Figure 19 Indicates the special
procedures required to add new metal-
clad units to outdoor equipment with pro
tected aisle. For Indoor equipment, It
Is usually necessary only to remove the
end cover sheets and to re-assemble them
on the new units after these are located
and bolted to the existing units. Other
wise, the installation procedure is the
same as described above.
When the units are In place and mech
anical assembly Is completed, assemble
the main bus and other prlnu^ connec
tions per the Instructions below. (Removal
of existing compound-filled connection box
es can be easily accomplished by packing
the box In dry Ice for 2 - 3 hours. Remove
the dry Ice and the cord tying the bm in
place, and strike the box with a hammer.
The hardened box and compound will crack
away from the joint.)
Secondary wiring and control bus con
nections should be made In accorduce
with the wiring diagrams furnished with
the equipment.
CONNECTIONS
The main bus bars and other connection
..ars may be either cqiper or aluminum. In
either case, the connection surfaces will be
silver plated.
All field assembled joints in conduct
ors, regardless of material or method of
insulation, should be made as follows:
(1) Wipe silver clean. Do not use
sandpaper or any abrasive on the
silvered surface. Avoid handling
of cleaned surface as much as
possible.
(2) A sufficient quantity of DS0H47
grease should be applied to the
joint at each contact area so that
the complete contact area will be
thorou^y sealed with excess
grease squeezed out of the joint
when tightened.
(3) Brush a thin coat of D50H47 over
the outside surfaces of the joint
area and hardware covering the
silvered area.
(4) In some cases external connections
are made to metal-clad bus by
bars. The metal-clad bars are
normally silver plated. Unplated
tiars, either copper or aluminum,
should not be used to connect to
stiver plated tors.
20
MAIN BUS ASSEMBLY
(1) For 13.8 kv or 7.2 kv equipment:
(a) Remove compartment covers.
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars
together following assembly Instructions
(2) For 4.16 kv equipment:
above, we also Fig. 25 and Table A, Fig. 24.
TABLE A (a) Remove compartment covers.
Torque Values for Metal-clad Swltchgear (b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars
(Torque in Inch-Pounds) together, following assembly Instructions.
Bolt Copper Aluminum
Size or Steel or Compound
3/8"-16 180-300 180-240
1/2--13 360-540 360-480
5/8"-ll 420-600 420-540
Fig. 2>l
(c) Complete the taping of the vertical
riser bars using insulating tape furnished
(2/3 lap) stopping the tape at the bus bar.
If the riser l^s connect to the Inis from
below, sufficient tape should be added to
prevent compound leakage when filling.
Apply a layer of glass tape (1/2 lap) over
the insulating tape, stopping the glass tape
just Inside molded splice cover.
(d) Place molded covers around the
bolted splice joints. Note that compound
filling smce is at top of joint, andadd filler
pieces furnished for the purpose to the
bottom of box and around bus 1^ lamina
tions (Fig. 20) to prevent compoundleakage
while filling. Duxseal should be placed
over the joints to make the box free of
leaks while filling. The Duxseal should be
removed after the compound has set. G.E.
#860 cord should be us^ to hold the molded
parts securely in place.
(e) Heat G.E. D50B49 compound (fur
nished) to minimum 200oc and maximum
of 220^0. Avoid overheating Ihe compound Adjustable joints are provided in long runs
for the dielectric strength may be seriously
affected. Pour the compound into the molded
covers intermittently, allowing an interval
of cooling to prevent formation of gas or
air pockets. The final pouring should be
level with the top of the box a:M should be
done only after due allowance for shrinkage
is made. Refer to Fig. IS.
the joints between shipping sections. Coat
(f) Paint the eiqiosed glass tape on both sides of the flat gasket and the flanges
vertical riser bars with U310 or U311
varnish furnished.
(g) Taped joints may be used instead
of boxed joints. If they are. Insulate as
follows:
(1) Fill all cavities around bolts and
nuts with Duxseal compound to
form smooth surface for taping, vertical sections of bus duct must also be
thus preventing air voids. Thte
compound is not an insulating med
ium and should not be usedforthat
purpose.
(2) Place 4" wide Irrathene tape over
the Duxseal, as shown in Fig. 26.
(3) Wrap with insulatingtapeprovided,
as shown in Fig. 39. Where there
are sharp angles, apply additional
layers to obtain the equivalent of
the Insulation of the flat surfaces.
(4) Over the insulating tape, apply one
layer of glass tape, half lap, as
a binder.
(5) Over the glass tape, brush a good
coat of U-310 varnish. Varnish
may tie thinned if necessary, with
Xylene, D5B9.
(h) Replace all covers previously re-
moved.
See Fig. 25 and Table A, Fig. 24.
(c) Place flexible molded cover over
joint, as shown In Fig. 15. Note that on
joints where no tap Is made from bus the
opening In the molded cover should be at
the top<
(d) Secure 'flexible cover with self-
locking fasteners furnished. Joint Insula
tion Is now completed.
(e) Replace all covers previously re
move
(3) In unit substations, the connection bars
should be assembled In the transition com
partment (Fig. 20 and 21) and the connec
tions at the transformer terminals greased,
taped and painted as Indicated above. The
conduit for secondary circuits should also
be assembled In or lielow the transition
compartment.
BUS DUCT
Bus ducts connecting between groups of
metal-clad swltchgear, or between metal-
clad swltchgear and other apparatus, should
be installed as shown on the arrangement
drawings furnished with the ducts. Sup
ports would be provided as Indicated on
the drawings.
All joints in the bus. Including adjust
able joints, should be assembled and In-
sulatM as described above for main buses.
of bus duct to allow for variations in
building construction, etc. These joints
should be loosened before installation of the ^
duct, then tightened alter being set in the g
position required by the fixed points at the <g
ends of the duct.
Outdoor bus ducts must be gasketed at —
<
S
of iMth duct sections with Sterling U310 or
U311 varnish before assembly. Bolt the .?
two duct sections together. Remove the top
cover from one duct section and place 3/8"
elaslic compound bead along top of joint.
Bolt top cover In place and fasten roOf c^
In place over the joint. See Fig. 24A.
Removable front and rear covers of
Fig. 244 Bus Duct Gaskets
 Uetal'ClBd SwUehgnr GBH-180a

gasketed. Coat both sides ol the _ PMUCAL AROUHO 90k JOiMTX

the flange of the dnct, and the. edges of the TO MANC LtAlT VJHOOF
inside surface of the cover with Sterling WKtiC FlLUMaWITNCOMXOUNO.

D310 or U311 vamlsh before assembly. 9t ffCPWVlPk

Do not bolt these covers In place until all .VEWTKALRlStR

Interior assembly work on the duct Is com

pleted and access will no longer be required.
Outdoor bus ducts of the 13.8 kv class
are provided with heaters. Connect these BMCM

heaters In accordance with the wiring dia

grams furnished with the equipment b^ore mSuP
energizing the bus duct. cMOCmpn
VWftCAt _ iNtJ^RTUte
PBIMARY CABLES RIMR—J ^ TAPC
fMCA CtTWCU
MitSAOt
The primary cable connections In Indoor
swltohgear are reached by removing the
rear bolted covers. In outdoor swltchgear
with rear enclosures the hinged Instrument
panel, If present, must be swung open and V|ffT:cak
IWA
the bolted covers behind It removed.
Before any primary cable connections
are made, the cables should be Identified
to Indicate their phase relationship with mPC fcvrroH
the swltchgear connections. This is nec aKTiOM'Ar secTioM iA leCTI^'AA*
SECTION TMieMM
M CDNNietlON
essary to Insure that motors will rotate In
the proper direction and that the phase
8 rotation Is the same when Interconnecting
two different sources of power.

There are two common methods of

making primary cable connections:
(a) Potheads (see Figs. 40 and 41) are
used when It Is desired to hermetically seal BUS BA- yiew'BB"
the end of the. cable to make a moisture-
proof connection between the cable and the
swltchgear bus. A pothead also prevents 31CTI0NAA'
BND COtlweCTION
rvemicAt bums
seeping of oil from the end of oil Impreg
nated vamlsh cambric or paper InsulatM
cable.
fig. 26 Nstliod of Mklng Bus Bar Comectioos
(b) Clamp Qq>e terminals and wiping
sleeve or cable clamp.

In all cases carefully follow the cable

manufacturer's recommendations for In
stallation of the type of cable being used,
as well as the Instructions contained here
in. See Flm> 43 and 44. If the cable Is
aluminum, the conductor surface must be
S carefully abralded and the cable covered
liberally with a joint compound recom TAPED
mended by the cable manufacturer. sfooLo ovs>r A/SEH
8 SAP
POTHEADS

Potheads are mounted on an ad^ter

plate extending across the width of the
metal-clad unit as shown In Fig. 10. Where pe/fpourE SAP
necessary the adapter plate Is split Into two L
parts to facilitate the Installation of the
potheads.
ouKseu.
Three-Conductor Potheads

The following description (qq>llestothe

Installation of a three-conductor lead-
sheathed cable with a wiping sleeve cable
entrance fitting on the pothead. This Is
the type most generally used. Instructions POP f/sppoi/rE s</s •4-'w/0£ /O AA/i. X ZOZ OAPPBO
for installation of other types are Included BAPS VSB /OAt/JL P P oooBEE 77//epp£ss exep b o o t
in the text following: TZOl . POP «, 'BPPB PPBA APO OVAPAPPP/PO AP/SEAt
/O AO//L. X A 29 ' X2.0Z BAP / ' TMEP PPOCBEO TO TAnC
(a) Remove the wiping sleeve and cut /// POPPfAt AfAPpep. (4-
the tapered end at a point where the cable rAPe Pop A'baps amo & aous pop
will enter It freely, and file offsh^ edges. & ' BAPS.)
Temporarily reassemble on the pothead.
(b) Train the cable In front of the
pothead allowing It to extend about two
Inches above the top of the porcelain bush
ings. Handle with care and avoid sharp Fig. 26 13.8 KV Taped JoinU

31

Fig. 27
Fig. 31
i
Fig. 35
bending which might damage the Insulation.
Mark a point on the lead sheath of the
cable about 1-1/2 Inch above the bottom of
the wiping sleeve.
(c) Remove the pothead from the unit,
disassemble the wiping sleeve and slip it
and its gasket over the cable as shown In
Fig. 27.
(d) Remove the lead sheath from the
cable to the point marked In operation
"b" as shown in Figs. 28 and 29 proceeding
as follows:
First, make a cut around the cable
half through the sheath at the reference
Eoint. Second, split the sheath lengthwise
etween the cut and the cable, holding the
cutting tool at an angle to the cable radius
to avoid damaging the Insulation, l^ird,
remove the sheath by catching the split
edge with pliers and pulling directly away
from the cable axis.
Clean and tin the outside of the lead
Sheath for about 3 Inches and bell out the
end of the lead sheath.
Fig. 28 Fig. 29
J .. S'
Fig. 32 Fig. 33
Fig. 36 Fig. 37
(e) Remove the belt and interphase
Insulation down to within 1-1/2 Inches of
the lead sheath as shown in Fig. 30. The
last few layers should be torn off to avoid
damaging the individual conductor Insula
tion. To reinforce and protect the con
ductor insulation, wrap two layers of half
lapped varnished cambric or Irrathene
tape over the factory insulation.
(f) Disassemble insulator supportplate
from pothead body. The insulators should
not be removed from the support plate
because they are factory assembled for
proper compression of their gaskets. Place
pothead body over cable and then fan out
the conductors Into approximately the final
position, as shown In Figs. 31, 32. The
middle conductor should be bowed slightly
for final adjustment of lengtt. Avoid sharp
bends and damage to (he insulation, par
ticularly at the crotch.
(g) For system voltage above 7500
volts It Is recommended that stress relief
cones be built up when single-conductor or
three-conductor shielded cable Is used.
Construct stress reltel cones in accord
I
Fig. 30
Fig. 3>«
Fig. 38
ance with the recommendations of the
cable manufacturer. See Fig. 41 for one
recommended method. On lower voltage
cables, belling out the end of the lead
sheath ordinarily provides sufficient stress
relief. {Stress cone material will not be
furnished with pothead).
(h) Bolt pothead body to metal-clad
adapter plate. Shape conductors Into final
position, then cut off each conductor to fit
Its terminals.
(1) Remove pothead terminals from
Insulators. Remove two inches of Insula
tion from the end of each conductor and
assemble pothead terminals to cables.
(j) Assemble ^skets where shown in
Fig. 41 and bolt insulator support plate
and wiping sleeve to pothead body. Com
press gaskets by a partial turn on each bolt
successively until the gasket Is uniformly
compressed to dimensions shown in Fig. 41.
Check to be sure the terminal studs are
seated properly on their gaskets, then
screw contact nut In place afterassembllng
top gaskets and washers. See Figs. 32, 33
and 34.

sm OP auss taps
\ *iDr
•4
0US5
COVTR TAPE
iraSOLATIO)! lAmaCWOTO \) I
IWOIATION IT-«« OUSS [ 7.C.
LEVEL nOTt 8 HOTE 2
^OCOT 2 1
15,000V j * I 1
NOn 1:
1-202 li T.C* - One laper. wound 2/3 lap re<iulre& 3 tuna aroiad bar
in one width or Up«. Om layer thlekaeas la 3 tlaas tape thUlraeea.
QLA5S - One layer, wound 1/2 lap re^ulrea 2 tume around bar In
one width of tape. One layer thieknesa te 2 tlaea tape thlolmeeB.
NOTE 2i
Irratbese #202. width 1 1/2* thUkmae 0.010*.
tape at all tlaee while applying.
HOIE 3:
dlaae A2L12B width I 1/2* thldmeea 0.004".
NOTE 4:
Vamlehed eanbrle A22A11A (#992) width 1 1/2*. thiokneae
0.012*.
Fig. 39 Inaulation of Connection 8ers
(k) Make a plumber^s wiped Joint be
tween the wiping sleeve and the lead sheath
of the cable, as shown in Figs. 35 and 36.
(1) Remove the 3/4** filling plug In the
pothead body, the pipe plugs In the top of
the studs and in the insulator support plate.
Insert a stand pipe and funnel In the filling
hole of sufficient height to extend above the
top of the studs as shown In Fig. 37.
Heat compound to the pouring tempera-
hire, 165°C £or #227 or iSS-ieo^C for
Novoid "X". Do not overheat compound as
higher temperatures may injure cable In
sulation and also result in excessive shrink
age of the compound while cooling. Before
and while filling, warm pothead body and
stand pipe to prevent sudden chilling of
compound which may result in theformation
of air voids. The pothead may be warmed
by playing a blowtorch over the body, taking
care that no direct heat reaches the por
celains or gaskets.
Pour until the compound appears
at the insulator support plate plug holes.
Insert plugs and continue filling until it
appears at holes at the top of terminal
studs. Insert plugs and continue pouring
while the pothead and compound cools to
fill air voids which mt^t form.
When the pothead has cooled, re
move filling pipe and insert plug. Clean
off compound which might have overflowed
on the outside of tlie porcelains.
(m) Assemble pothead connection
bars, applying grease as outlined under
"Connections" (Page 20). See Fig. 39. Insu
late connections as follows;
ENP «P I-tPE »R r.C.
toHTPCfWr I
wwmnX
f »«icsuKin
^INK/LAIW
^v.C.ttl'UtMVl
'MUaUMf
CCJ,«M9
PAUfT^ ^
APPLY OME noyt«nn«f
tlARKCt-'
HOTE ft rrUT TTaw»JTtv
SYERLIMO
HT-ifff
STBRLINO
I 7 I P-110 BROWW
Keep fcenalon on
30-30 WtPC y/
W^AO 9Hg«TH
Single-Conductor Pothead with Streee Cone
(1) Fill all cavities around bolts
and nuts with Duxseal compound to form
smooth surface for taping, thus preventing
air voids, l^is compound is not an insula
ting medium and should not be used for
that purpose.
(2) Wrap with 1202 Irrathene tape
provided, as shown in Figs. 39, 40 and 41,
the number of layers depending on the volt
age rating of the equipment. Where there
are sharp angles, apply additional layers
to obtain the equivalent of the insulation
of the flat surfaces.
(3) Over the insulating tape, apply
one layer of glass tape, half lap, as a
binder.
(4) Over the glass tape, brush
a good coat of varnish (U-310 for 15 kv and
U-311 for 5 kv). Varnish may be thinned if
necessary, with Xylene, D50B9.
Single-Conductor Potheads
The procedure for installation of sin
gle-conductor potheads is in general the
same as described for three-conductor
potheads.
Cable Entrances Other Than WiplngSieeves
Stuffing box cable entrance fittings are
used for cables other than lead sheathed.
These fittings may be provided with or
without armor clamps as necessary.
The fitting consists of a cast and
machined base, one or more rubber or
neoprene >vashers, and a packing nut which
compresses the washers around the cable.
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
r-KTC/^O 7>9^e
* riNiM wm* HIV msuiATih^ met
ffflurNf
V3fO
..Owub ge wr^n iomiv Ikc €fa/rr%
or AliNVO UP TO M*vl TMC
rHAM OAiOlHAU IH«ULAT10H.
i copeta MMO TO ev ah amv*
V ia» # •OVOCAEO TO CoreCA3mCcD
-TAnc OK CAftWf. BKAlO TO ftt WOOND
TIOAT ANP CueSt. AUU TUAKft OP
OPAlD TO fit. BOUOCRKO AbOhO
UmCB WAAAbVCV TO CAftCB TO
PPEVKNT BCPAPATIOn,
«e*(p TO Ba wouNb Aitoueee
MKTALUe OmOCfA AKO OOCOtPktd
•OTtI TO BiNDKA AMD WtA& •HCATH*
U5c}BAU.4.1.eO*1P«ia«D.*B euBWOHtOt
TO PIVW POTHCAO APTBlh HAK|N«
OORNBOTIOMB.
These parts should be assembled on the
cable in the above order, with the base near
est to the pothead. The packing nut should be
tightened after the cable is located in thepot-
head and before any compound is poured.
Where an armor clamp is required, it
Is usually made an Integral part of the
packing nut. This requires that the packing
nut and armor clamp be tightened on the
cable before the assembly of the pothead is
completed.
Cable Sheath or Conduit Grounding
Where three-conductor conducting
sheath or shielded cables are used, or
where non-conducting sheath cable is car
ried in metallic ducts or conduits, It is
usually desirable that both ends of the cable
sheath or conduit be grounded directly to
the switchgear ground bus or structure or
other apparatus. In some cases thismaybe
accomplished by the mounting of potheads
or terminating fittings on a grounded sup
port. When such mounting cannot be ar
ranged, a separate ground wire should be
connected between the cable sheath or
conduit and the switchgear ground bus.
Where single conductor conducting
sheath cables arc used, thesameprocedure
should be observed, except that only one
end of the sheath should be grounded. This
also applies to single conductor non-con
ducting sheath cables in separate metallic
conduits. Where three phases are carried
by single conductors in a common metallic
conduit, grounding procedure should be the
same as that described for three conductor
cables.
 GEH-1B02 Metal-clad Swltchgear
«3i 4 c«a Cff^v or im-
Aow <vi>» 0 Mt nugme
4UBf3 i UAmwrwl*
sriKUNd ui'd remtM
flaCHPwar0Mt I'rcm
mrwvr afiiw0*n«M
termtnation wtthodt pothead
SINGLE-CONDUCTOR
1. Cut cable to pr<q>er length.
2. Remove Jacket and cable tape for
distance of A plus B plus 3 inches, plus
length to be inserted into terminal lug.
3. Unwrap shielding tape to point M,
cut and solder it in place avoiding exces
sive heat on insulation. Remove outer
.^mi'COnduct^ tape for aatne dlBtanra.
Thorou^iW clean surface from which the
semi-conducting tape was removed.
4. Remove insulation and inner semi
conducting tape to expose conductor for
distance of one inch plus length to be in
serted into terminal lug.
5. Attach terminal lug to conductor.
If the cable is aluminum, the conductor
siurface must be carefully abraided and the
cable covered liberaUy with a Joint com
pound recommended 03 the cable manu
facturer.
6. Taper insulation for one inch as
shown.
7. Apply end seal. Clean surface over
which splicing tape is to be applied and
coat with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive cement
24
MOTR
KOTATIOM TO OQ
CH«cwu> b i f o a a «e*iM*eT(»4a
TO 1*OTHeAO -ntKMIMAiO.
Fig- 41 Triple-Conductor Pothead
or equivalent. When solvent evaporates,
build up with Atliclng tape GE8380 or
equivalent, as shown.
Dimensions in Inches
Rated
kv A»
Phase to Phase
Indoors
Dry Locations
2 to 5 5 2
6 to 10 9 3
11 to IS 13
* For ungrounded neutral use 1.33 times
the dimensions in selecting distance A.
8. Build stress ccne. Clean cable sur
face and coat with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive
cement or equivalent. When solventevmio-
rates, build up cone with splicing tape GE-
8380 or equivalent, for length B plus B.
Between points Ma^ P, tape is applied so
that wrapped thickness at N is equal to 75%
of the original insulation thickness - and
so that the cone tapers to zero thickness at
points M and P. Apply one layer No. 33
Scotch tape or equivalent, half lapped. Ob
tain a smooth wrapping but do not stretch
tape more than necessary.
9. Pass a turn of tightly drawn braid
around eiqiosed portion of shielding tape at
point M and solder in place. Then apply
shielding braid in tlghtty drawn 1/6 inra
#*nwBWflm<urflww wwrnwes 4>*mao» eoMMim «
o*«w«*F/*eeFFe»oew m i r it^ii rrniiiiiinrti r «Rtiin_ iinj
ut not rm ocwwowoion n«ermiiioioeiN8»E«*»Mow*w
t9a0nmMMrmmai*ommrmjKBaa^rtm«>M£,MOftmwmrt
fi-^rflTTo
0e—j m lutmn mvm ai/iWit >ta do mmeaum ammr
deflwaomeepeea yeaww crrsMO ow»i>«
o.„f]
x]
1
tr
tXVWtXTKP >€»THKiKO^
* VKmT I* at TMA Ta»e» WtMMfr M.R«V« TOOMAIW
Tua AtvtL or coMVouNb with a wiriNa auiAve Aft
AMOWM MOVtOe A frM ALA. VKHT MOLA tN TH« WiT«0 JOINT
aVUlMta AM ftMAMUaO OA AlAMIKUW WM. CkOMTMC MOL«
tHY aocOEAiMa uAOii rnmn aTinn orr comtoumoino.
lap wr^plngs to point N and spot solder.
Terminate the braid by cutting 1/2 inch
beyond soldering point Turn down and
solder loose ends to preceding turns. Wrap
four to six turns of No. 19 AWG tinned
copper wire around shielding braid and
solder. Solder all turns of braid together
along three lengthwise lines equ^y spaced
around braided surface.
B
10. Solder ground strip over shielding
tape near cable covering. Cover stress
cone with one layer No. 33 Scotch tape,
4 half lapped. Obtain a smooth wrapping
but do not stretch tape more than neces
sary. Add two layers splicing tape.
11. Pencil Jacket for 1/2 inch as shown.
Clean surface. Take particular care in
cleaning outside Jacket surface in order to
entireW remove black wax finish. Coat
with G.E. No. AS0P68 adhesive cement
or equivalent. When solvent evaporates,
apply spUcing tape GE8380 or equivalent
and make sheath seal as shown on drawing.
Apply one layer No. 33 Scotch tape or
equivalent, half lapped. Obtain a smooth
wrapping but do not stretch tape more than
necessary.
12. Over entire termination, apply two
layers of No. 33 Scotch tape or equivalent,
half lapped, in manner to shed water. Ob
tain a smooth wrapping but do not stretch
tape more than necessary.
 Metal-Clad Swltchgear GEH-1802

OT COi
•eWD &SAL

' CdlLi MMkATlOM

-CABLE INBllLATION

• NO.M worcN Ta^E

m cftviv.
r 5 £ 1
-(PLiWM Tare ai.MfO

i|.J on eouiv

• iHicLoiNe anaio
(•UNO aaniEsi
- n o tBMS TM<0
Bft?i .. V9 G MMcn rnmt

-DO »> SCOTCH

•/•'
TAAC OH lewv
-casLE SMELOure
TaaE

\! >HS as SCOTCH n a c
on EOuiK

i^\Tm' WHTUHE (EEL

vc)C>as laaiaLasM
oa coiav
m i l ICOTCa uac I -i\' ^ MllCIHE T»HI «a.UM
- oa COUIV. Vlt\ C«C9Ul»

9H0UND ET EDJECCKT
FHEUE UEWKH

Fig. >13 Teniination Without Pothead

Single-Conductor

grounding strips are to be joined together

Fig. W Rear View of Unit Showing
Through-Type Current Transfomers
TERMINATION WITHOUT POTHEAD
MULTI-CONDUCTOR
Make termination ae Indicated for sin
gle-conductor except - substitute thefollow-
Ing for paragraphs 10, 11 and 12;
Pencil jacket 1/2 inch. Clean sur
face over which sheath moisture seal is
to be applied. Take particular care in
cleaning outside jacket surface in order
to entirely remove black wax finish. Coat
with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive cement or
equivalent. Allow to dry. Apply splicing
tape GE6380 or equivalent to m^e moisture
seal as shown. This is done by starting
wrapping tape near end of jacket and wrap
ping over ^ound wires for 1-1/2 inches.
Bend ^ound wires out and back over taping
lust applied and continue applying lapped
layers of tape to completion of moisture
seal Including a complete tape seal in
crotch formedl>etweenthe three conductors.
Bond and ground the ground wires.
For a multi-conductor cable nothavlng
ground wires, the individual terminations
should have grounding strips applied as for
a single-conductor termination. These
to a common ground. This common ground
must then be grounded.
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORM
ERS (THROUGH-TYPE)
Throu^-type current transformers
(see Fig. 42) are furnished where specified
for sensitive protection against ground
faults. These transformers are normally
installed in a horizontal position directly
above or below theprimary cable terminals,
so that the primary cable or cables can pass
through them. One transformer is required
for each three-phase circuit.
Where armored cable isusecL thearm-
or must be terminated and grounded before
the cable passes through the transformer.
Armor clamps are furnished for this pur
pose when specified.
When lead or other conducting sheath
cable, or cable with shielding tape or braid
is used, itisrecommendedthat the sheath or
shield be grounded solidly to the swltchgear
ground bus. The ground lead should be bond
ed to the sheath or shield on the side of Uie
current transformer awayfromtheprlmary
terminals. Incaseswherethegroimdcannot
be applied before the cable passes through
the transformer, bond the lead to the sheath
or shield l>etween the transformer and the
primary terminals. The ground conductor
must then be passed tack along the cable
path through thecurrent transformer before
being connnected to the ground bus.
Where potheads are used In units pro
vided with ^ound fault current transform
ers, the potheadmountlnga must be Insulated
from ground.
Fig. <|)| Terninatlon Without Pothetd
Multi-Conductor
CONTROLCABLES
When control conduits enter the unit
from below, the conduit should not ex
tend more than 4 inches above the floor.
The control cables may be pulled through
the conduits before or after the switch-
gear is installed, whichever Is more con
venient.
Connect the cables to the terminal
blocks in accordance with the wiring dia
grams furnished for the requisition.
If the control conduits enter from
above, drill the top and bottom covers
of the front enclosure wiring trough to
suit the conduits. Fasten &e conduits
to the bottom cover with locknuts.
The cables from the control power
source to the swltchgear should be large
enough to avoid excessive voltage drw
when the circuit breakers are operated.
See testing instructions.
Where units have been split for ship
ment, any control or other secondary leads
which must connect across the split will
be arranged with terminal blocks In the
cross trough or convenient side sheet
so that the wires can l>e reconnected.
The wires will be cut to length and form
ed before being folded tack so that a
minimum of time will be required for
reconnecting them.
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Swttchgear
GROUND BUS
The ground bus Is bolted to the rear of
the frame near thebottom. Itisarranged so
that connections to the station ground can be
made in any unit. Where the equipment is
shipped in more than one group, Uie sections
of ground bus must be connected by using the
splice plates furnished with the equipment.
Apply grease and assemble Joints as out
lined under "Connections" (Page 20). Ground
bus connections are made in tiie lower por
tion of the cable entrance compartment.
The swttchgear groundbus must be connect
ed to the station ground Ims by a conductor
haying a current carrying capacity equal to
that of the swttchgear groundbus. It is very
important that the emipment be adequately
grounded to protect the operator from injury
when short circuits or other abnormal oc
currences take place and to insure that all
parts of the equipment, other than live
parts, are at ground potential.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
It will be the responsibility of the pur
chaser to provide suitable lighlningarrest-
ers to protect the swttchgear from damage
After the equipment has been installed
and all connections made, it should be
tested and inspected* before putting in ser
vice. Althoue^ the equipment and devices
have been completely tested at the factory,
a final field test sho^ be made to be sure
that the equipment has been properly in
stalled and that all connections are correct
and have not l)ecome loose in transporta
tion. The primary equipment should be
completely de-energizra while the tests
are in progress.
Directions for testing devices such as
relays, instruments and meters are given
in the instruction book furnished for each
device. The settings of the protective re
lays must be coordinated with the other
relays on the system and therefore these
relays must lie set by the purchaser. Gen
eral instructions on setting the relays are
The operation of metal-clad switch-
gear is similar to that of other types
except that it provides maximum safety
to the operator and the feature of easy
removal and replacement of the circuit
breaker.
All circuit breaker removable ele
ments of the same type and rating which
have duplicate wiring may be intercnanged.
BREAKER POSITIONING
To place the circuit breaker in oper
ating position, proceed as given below:
Clean contacts and cover with a very
thin coating of Contact Lubricant D50H47.
Push the breaker into the unit until it
rests against the stop.
26
due to lightning. The General Electric
Company's recommendations as to the types
of circuits requiring lightning protection,
and a list of recommended lightning arrest
ers, are contained in Bulletin GER-Ml,
copies of which are available upon request.
DOOR ALIGNMENT
If for any reason it is necessary to re
align the doors of metal-clad swttchgear
during Installation the procedure given in the
following paragraphs should be followed.
After checking that the swttchgear is
level and plumb as described above, start at
either end of the swttchgear lineup and re
align each door individually as required.
The top of each door should be level with
the adjacent doors; the sides of each door
plumb; the surface of each door flush with the
^acent doors; and the space betweenad
jacent doors equalized to permit their free
swing and present a neat appearance. The
door stops should be adjusted to permit a
door swing of approximately lOSO.
Doors may be raised or lowered vertic
ally, or moved forward or tackward hori
TESTING AND INSPECTION
given in the relay instruction l>ooks. Spec
ial Instruction books are furnished for
complicated automatic equipments, des
cribing the sequence of operation of the
devices required to perform the desired
funcUon.
When transformers are furnished to
supply the control power, the primary
taps should be selected so that the control
voltage indicated on the wiring diagram
is obtained on the secondary of the trans
former. When a battery is used to supply
the control power, the cables from the
battery to the swttchgear should be large
enough to avoid excessive voltage drop.
The voltage at the terminals of the breaker
closing coils, when the breaker is being
closed, should not be less than 112.5 volts
for 125 volt coils and 225 volts for 250
volt coils.
OPERATION
To raise the breaker, operate the
elevating control selector switch on the
elevating motor to "Raise". A clutch handle
just above the elevating motor is then pulled
forward until it closes the clutch limit
switch and engages the motor to raise the
breaker in the housing. The clutch handle
is held in this position until a limit switch
on the structure opens to stop the motor
at the end of the upward travel of the
breaker. The selector switch must not be
used to energize or interrupt the motor
circuit at any time.
To lower the breaker, proceed the
same as for raising except operate selector
switch to "Lower".
The clutch must be held in the en
gaged position; otherwise, a spring will
zontally, l>y loosening the hinge mounting/^^S
nuts on the left side sheet and shifting the '
hinge and door assembly as allowed by
the slotted holes in the hinge.
Doors may be shifted to the ri^t or
left by adding or removing washers or shims
from tietween the hinge and side sheet
Doors may beplumbedl>y slightly bend
ing the appropriate hinges. To do this, open
the door and insert a drift pin in either of the
two holes in the hinge. Pulling forward on
the drift pin will move the door to the right,
and pushing back will move the door to the
left Adjust each hinge individually as re
quired to plumb the door.
When properly aligned, the doors ofout
door swttchgear should be tightly seated on
the gasket all around. After aligning such
doors, close and latch the door and check
the 8^ by runninga 3" x S"card, shipping
tag, IBM card, or some similar cardaround
the edge of the door. If the card will pass
between the door and the gasket, the door is
improperly adjusted, and should be read
justed until the card will no longer pass
through.
The operation of the breaker with its
associated devices may be tested in the
unit while the equipment is energized by
use of the test coiqiler which is furnished.
Lower the breaker to the test or down
position. Attach the test coupler to con
nect the breaker secondary disconnectini
device to that on the structure.
High potential tests to check the in
tegrity of the insulation are not necessary
if the installation instructions in this book
are carefully followed. If the pxirchaser
wishes to make high potential tests the
voltage should not exceed 75% of the AIEE
factory test voltages.
Potential transformers and control
power transformers must be disconnected
during high voltage testing.
return it to its normal position opening
the electrical circuit to the motor.
The breaker may be raised and lowY'^>i
ered l>y an emergency hand wrench which
can be inserted after removing the motor.
The motor is removed by unlatching
the motor assembly from the support and
disconnecting the motor lead plug.
After removing the motor, pull the
clutch forward and insert the manual wrench
Into the end of the clutch coupling. The
breaker must be tripped before the wrench
can be inserted and held in the clutch
coupling.
TRANSFER TRUCKS
Circuit breaker transfer trucks ar(
furnished with outdoor metal-clad switch-

gear to facilitate moving of circuit brealc-
ers from unit to unit or to maintenance
areas. The platform at the front end of
the transfer truck is adjustable in height
See Fig. 8, view A, for instructions for
adjustment The truck is equipped with
two latches, one to hold the breaker on
the truck and one to hold the truck to the
metal-clad switchgear imit. Both latches
engage automatically, and both are re
leased by a single T-shaped foot pedal
on the rear of the truck. Depressing the
left side of the pedal unlatches the truck
from the switchgear unit, and depressing
the right side of the pedal unlatches the
breaker from the truck.
SPACE HEATERS
Space heaters are provided in all
outdoor equipment in order to keep the
inside temperature several degrees higher
than that outside. Heaters are also f(ur-
nished for indoor equipment when it is
known that abnormal atmospheric condi
A regular maintenance schedule should
be established to obtain the best service and
reliability from the switchgear. Plant oper
ating and local conditions will dictate the
frequency of inspection required. For
specific information regarding the main
tenance of devices, such as circuit breakers,
relays, meters, etc., refer to the separate
Instruction book furnished for each device.
The inspection cabinet, which is furnished,
r\ provides a convenient means for noainlain-
ing the circuit breakers. Under normal
conditions the protective relays do not
operate, therefore. It Is Important to check
the operation of these devices regularly.
A permanent record of all maintenance
work should be kept, the degree of detail
depending on the operating conditions. In
any event, it will be a valuable reference
for subsequent maintenance work and for
station operation. It is recommended that
the record Include reports of tests made,
the condition of equipment and repairs and
adjustments that were made.
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE RE
MOVED OR ANY DOORS OPENED WHICH
PERMIT ACCESS TO THE PRIMARY CIR
CUITS, IT IS ESSENTUL THAT THE CIR
CUIT BE DE-ENERGIZED.
The primary circuits of metal-clad
switchgear are insulated in order to reduce
the size of the equipment. However, this
insulation, except In one or two instances,
requires a certain amount of air gap l)e-
tween phases and to ground to complete the
Insulation. Inserting any object In this air
space, when equipment Is energized, wheth
er it l>e a tool or a part of the body, may
under certain conditions. In effect, short
circuit this air gap and may cause a break
down In the primary circuit to ground and
cause serious damage or Injury or both.
Care should be exercised In the main
tenance and checking procedures that ac
tions exist at the installation, or when
specified Ijy the purchaser.
By maintaining a slight temperature
differential, the heaters he^ facilitate dry
ing and prevent condensation and the re
sulting corrosion and insulation deter
ioration which might occur.
Heaters are normally located at the
sides of the breaker units, a few inches
above the floor. In auxiliary compart
ments with a single rollout, the heaters
will be in the space above the roUout.
In auxiliary compartments with two roll
outs, the heater will be on one of the
rollouts, for greater accessibility. Heat
ers may also be located in superstructure
compartments, transition compartments,
and In bus ducts, if the operating con
ditions require them.
Before energizing the beaters, be sure
the power source is of the prtqjer voltage,
frequency, and phase arrangement, and
MAINTENANCE
cidental tripping or operation is not In-
ituted.
The switchgear structure and connec
tions should be given the following overall
maintenance at least annually.
1. Thoroughly clean the equipment,
removing all dust and other accumulations.
Wipe clean the buses and supports. In
spect the buses and connections carefully
for evidence of overheating or weakening of
the insulation.
2. Measure the resistance to ground
and between phases of the insulation of
buses and connections. Since definite
limits cannot be given for satisfa'ctory
insulation resistance values, a record must
be kept of the reading. Weakening of the
Insulation from one maintenance period
to the next can be recognized from the
recorded readings. The readings should
be taken under similar conditions each time
if possible, and the record should include
the temperature and humidity.
High potential tests are not required,
Init if it seems advisable, based on the
insulation resistance tests or after re
pairs, the test voltage should not exceed
75% of the AIEE factory test voltage. Po
tential transformers and control power
transformers must be disconnected during
high voltage testing.
3. Clean elevating mechanism and lub
ricate jack screws and gears with lubri
cant G.E. Co. #D50B15 (Atlantic Ref. Co.
#52 or equal).
4. Check primary disconnecting device
contacts for signs of abnormal wear or over
heating. Clean contacts with silver polish.
Discoloration of the silvered surfaces is
not ordinarily harmful unless atmospheric
conditions cause deposits such as sulphides
on the contacts. If necessary the deposits
can be removed with a good grade of silver
polish.
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
is connected in accordance with the wiring
diagrams furnished with the equipment.
Also, be sure to remove all cartons and
miscellaneous material packed Inside the
units before energizing the heaters.
Heaters should be visually inspected
several times a year to make sure they
are operating properly.
It is recommended that the heaters
be energized at all times and that ther-
mostatlc control not be used. If thermo-
static control is used, the contacts of
the thermostat should be set to close be
tween 95 F and 100 F on falling temper
ature, de-energizing the heaters only when
strong sunlight beats on the switchgear.
Under no condition should a differential
thermostat be used to control the heaters
because under conditions of extremely high
humidity this type of thermostat will not
operate at all times to keep the heaters on
enough to prevent condensation in the
switchgear.
Before replacing breaker, apply a thin
coat of contact lubricant D50H47 to breaker
studs for lubrication.
5. Check to see that all anchor bolts
and bolts in the structure are tight. Check
tightness and continuity of all control con
nections and wiring.
6. If the switchgear is equipped with
heaters, check to see that all heaters are
energ^ed and operating.
OUTDOOR ACRYLIC PAINT FINISH
The outside of standard outdoor switch-
gear has acrylic paint finish, blue gray
ASA #24, providing improved resist^ce
to all atmospheric conditions, longer life
and less maintenance than with ordinary
paint finishes.
If It Is desired to refinlsh acrylic
painted switchgear, it is necessary to use
one of the foUowing procedures in order
to secure the best adhesion of the paint to
the original finish.
A. Reflnishlng with Acrylic Paint. It is
recommended that reiimsning oe done
with Du Pont acrylic paint of the desired
color. Obtain materials and instruc
tions for application from the Du Pont
Company.
B. Reflnishlng with Alkyd or Oil Base
Paints, "iwo memods are recommended;
1. Spr^ one sealer coat of Du Pont
233£f75300 or equivalent which has
been reduced to spraying viscosity
with Du Pont 37692 or 37666 thinner.
Air dry for one hour. Apply alkyd
or oil base paint.
2. Spray one sealer coat of Arco
214-806 primer which has been re
duced to spraying viscosity with
Xylol. Air dry for one hour. Apply
alkyd or oil base paint.
27
GEg-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear

RENEWAL PARTS
ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
1. RENEWAL PARTS SHOULD BE ORDERED FROM THE HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR DEPARTMENT.
2. ALWAYS SPECIFY THE REQUISITION NUMBER ON WHICH THE EQUIPMENT WAS ORIGINALLY FURNISHED.
3. SPECIFY THE QDANnTY, REFERENCE NUMBER, DESCRIPTION AND THIS BULLETIN NUMBER.
4. STANDARD HARDWARE, SUCH AS SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, ETC., IS NOT LISTED. SUCH ITEMS
SHOULD BE PURCHASED LOCALLY.
5. FOR PRICEH REFER TO THE NEAREST OFFICE OF THE GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY.
6. IF INSULATING MATERIAL, SUCH AS TAPE, VARNISH, COMPOUND, ETC., IS REQUIRED, IT MUST BE
SPECIFIED SEPARATELY. . . .
7. IF PARTS LISTED SEPARATELY ARE TO BE ASSEMBLED AT THE FACTORY, ORDER MUST SOSTATE.
8. NOTALL PARTS LISTED HEREIN WILL BE USED ONANY ONE EQUIPMENT. PARTSNOT USED IN
ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT SHOULD NOT BE ORDERED AS RENEWAL PARTS.

PRIMARY DISCONNECT DEVICES

(SEE FIG. NO. 10)

DESCRIPTION

5 Front Prlmarr Disconnect Device

Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
Connections

6 Rear Primarv Disconnect Device

Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
Connections

NOTE: Insulating material required for

Ref. Nos. 5 and 6 will be furnished
with order.

^SaiMKll
Ccaalete Left Hand (Kaf. Ho. I) Coapleta Right Hand (Raf. Ho.

Fig. 46 Elevating Hechanlsn for |ih26 Equipnente Rated 250 ava or lass
and H-36 Equipoenta Rated 1200* 600 ava or lesa

FiS- 46* View Showing Elevating Heeh-

anin Motor and Control Unit

POSITIVE MECHANICAL INTERLOCK

(HG. NO. 45A)
REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

3 Complete positive mechanical

4
4
Interlock assembly
Elevating mechanism motor
(1I5-V (Pc)
Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-c)
IL
4 Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-c)
18 Spring only

Coaplate Left Hand (Ref. No. f*) Coapleta Right Hand (Raf. Ho. 2A)
Fig. HO Elevating Hechanisa for K-36H Eguipaents Ratad 760 ava,
K-2GH Equipmenta Rated 350 ava and H-SG Equipnents Rated 2000*
 Metal-cUd Switchgear GEH-1802

7 8A 9B 9 9A 9A 9 9B 7A7 7A 1OI0AI4AI3

7 17 r

Complete Left Hand (Ref. Ko. IB] Conplete Ri^i Hand (Ref. No. 2B)

Fig. Elevating Hechanlam for H-3SHH Equipments Rated iOOO HVA

ELEVATING MECHANISMS
Figs. 45, 46 and 46A 20 2i

REF. NO. ' DESCRIPTION

7 Miter gears, pair

7A Roll pin for miter gear
8 Shaft, right
8A Shaft, left
9 Sprocket
9A Roll pin for sprocket
9B Bearing Block
10 Spur gear
10 Pinion gear and rod
lOA Roll pin for spur gear
11 Stop stud
llA Stop bolt Fig. 47 Angle Bracket and Cnain Drive
12 Pinion gear and rod
12 Spur gear
REF. NO. DESCRIPTION
l£>
<0
12A Roll pin for spur gear
CO
13 Locking spring
Bracket
14 Stop shaft

•
Roller
40 14A Roll pin for stop shaft
Retainer
14B Stop shaft bracket
Clutch spring Chain
<D 15
ISA Roll pin for clutch spring
16 Slide Clutch
'iZ 17 Jack Screw

III

Fig. 48 Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-26 Fig. 49 Shutter Mechanism Assembly H-36
GEH-1802 MeUl-clad Swltcbeear

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

Isolating barrier support angle

Rear isolating barrier
Intermediate Isolating barrier
Front isolating barrier
Isolating barrier clip
Isolating barrier support
Front support clip (not shown)
Front Intermediate support
Intermediate support
Rear intermediate support
Rear support clip (not shown)
Lower Intermediate support
Lower intermediate support clip

LOCATION RATINd DESCRIPTION

1200A.
I200A.
1200A.
1200A.
1200A.
1200A.
1600A.
1600A.
1600A.
I600A.
1600A.
F'g< 50 Bus Supports 1600A.
2000A. ictton tnr, oown
2000A. ictlon bar, up
2000A. sction bar, down
3ctlon bar, up
lectlon bar
lecUon bar
sction bars, dow
ictlon bars, up
sctlon bars, dow
action bars, up
ing boot
; rivet for boot
* Specify unit number and phase on which boot Is
to be used.

f, SI Bus Connection Box rig. S2 Bus Connection Boot

«.]6 or 13.a kv Units) (a.re kv units only)
 Metal-clad Swltcbgear GEH-1802

70 71 72 73

60 64
I y.;?

,!«/ I i

'iXar

Fig. 511 Ooor Hwdles and Locks

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

Panel locking handle

Panel handle
Door locking handle
Door handle
Socket

Fig. S3 Wiring Devices and Hiscellcmeous Parts

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

BOA Limit Switch SBl type (upper)

BOB Limit switch SBl type (lower]
61 Light switch
62 Keyless receptacle
63 Duplex receptacle
64 Strip heater
65 Fuse block, c^en type*
66 Fuse block, dead front*
67 Limit switch, mercury type
See C61 Complete secondary disconnect device
Fig.dSA^BS Complete stationary auxiliary
switch and mechanism

* %)ecify amp rating of fuse and number of poles.

FUSE ROLLOUT UNIT

REF. NO DESCRIPTION
m Fuse clip
Insulator
Ground Bar
Ground Finger
Barrier
Cover
Tray
Strap
Insulator Support
Insulator Clamp
Barrier
Compound Strap
Finger
Connection bar
Connection bar
Connection bar
Connection bar
Connection bar
Connection bar
Fig. 55 Fuse Rollout Unit
 GEH-1802 Metal-clad Swttchgear
!•

-106 104
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT UNIT
REF. NO. DESCRIPTION
94 Insulator
95 Insulator clamp
96 Insulator support
97 Disconnect barl
98 Finger
99 Barrier
100 Disconnect bar
101 Disconnect bar
102 Barrier
103 Ground finger
104 Ground finger support
105 Ground finger support
106 Barrier
107 Sec. disconnect (stationary)
108 Sec. disconnect (movable)
109 Brace
110 Tray
111 Cover

Fig> 56 Potential Transfonier Rollout Unit

ni-l8B

CONTROL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT UNIT

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION
175 Insulator
176 Insulator clamp
177 Insulator support
178 Contact bar
189 I 179 Ground finger support
180 Ground finger
181 Ground shoe contact
182 Fuse clip
183 Primary contact
184 Ground bar
185 Ground finger support
186 Ground finger
187 Cross angle
188 Barrier
189 Barrier
190 Sec. disconnect (movable)
191 Sec. disconnect (stationary)
(not shown)
192 Tray
193 Cover

Fig. 57 Control Transformer Rollout Unit SINGLE & TRIPLE-CONDUCTOR POTHEADS

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION
201 Triple-conductor pothead assembly
202 Body
203 Insulators and support
207, ZC
204 Wiping sleeve i
207.20«.209 205 Gaskets for triple-conductor pothead
206 Terminal
207 Contact nut
208 Washer
209 Palnut (3/4 in. - 12)
210 Pipe plug (3/4 in. std.)
211 Pipe plug (1/8 in. std.) E '
212 Single-conductor pothead assembly
213 Body and insulator
214 Gaskets for single-conductor pothead
215 Wiping sleeve
1 ^
Fig. 58 Single and Triple-Conductor Potheads

7-63
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA, PA.
 GEH-1802K
INSTRUCTIONS SUPERSEDES GEH- t 802J I1
AND GEF.3837

METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
Types M-26 and M-36
For Magne-blast Air Circuit Breaker
Types AM-4.16 and AM-13.8

MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR DEPARTMENT

GENERAL ELECTRIC
PHILADELPHIA, PA.
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

PAGE
Fig. 1 Typical Indoor Metal-clad Switchgear Equipment •••••••••••••••••••• •••••••••• 4
Fig. 2 Typical Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear Equipment - Front View •••••, ••••••••••••, • 4
Fig. 3 Typical Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear Equipment - Side View •••, , , , •••••••••••••• 4
Fig. 4 Magrie-blast Brea.ker ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •••••••••••••••••••• 5
Fig. 5 Magne-bls:a.st Breaker ••••••••••.•••••••••••••••• .•• ••••••••••••••••••• 5
Fig. 6 Magne-bla.st Breaker •••••.•••••••••••, .•• .•.. .•.••••••.••• ••• ••••.••• 5
Fig. 7 Installation Details for Indoor Metal-clad Switchgear •••••• , •, ••••, ••••, •••, ••, • 6
Fig. 8 Installation Details for Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear •••, , • , , •••, •, •••, •••••• , • 8
Fig, 9 Installation Details for Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear with Protected Aisle •••••, ••••, • 10
Flg.10 Metal-clad Switchgear •••.•, •••••, , ••.•, ••.••••.......•••.••, •..••••.• 11
Flg.11 Measurement of Adjustment of Primary Disconnect Devices •••••••• , ••••••••••••• 12
Fig.12 Potential Transformer Rollout Shown In Withd rawn Position ••• , •, , •••• , •••• , , •• , , 12
Fig.13 Dummy Removable Element •••.••••••••••••••...•••••••, •••..••••••.••• 13
Fig.14 Ground and Test Device .••••••.••••••••, ••• , ••.. ... ••••••••••.••••••.• 13
Fig.15 Padlocking Arrangement, Key Interlocking and Method for Pouring Connection Boxes ••••, • 14
Fig.16 Control Power Transformer Rollout Shown In Open Position ••••••••••••••• , ••• , , • 15
Fig.17 Tandem Lock for Outdoor 13.8 KV Units •, .••, ••• , ••••••••••, •, , , , •••• •••••• 15
Fig.18 Outdoor Metal-clad Sqitchgear - Addition of Units to Line-up •••••••• , , , , , •••••, , • 16
Fig.19 Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear - With Protected Aisle , •••••••••••••, ••••••••••• 17
Fig. 20 Outdoor Transition Compartment •• , •, , •••••••••••, • , • , •••••, • , • , •••••, • 18
Fig, 21 Outdoor Transition Compartment •••••••.•••••••••...•. ., , , , , •••.•.••••.. 18
Fig.22 Posltlve Interlock Mechanism .Interference Block ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••, , 19
Fig. 23 Inspection Box for 13.8 KV Metal-clad Switchgear •••••, , , , •••••••••••••••••, , • 19
Fig, 24 Torque Values for Metal-clad Switchgear ••, ••••••••••, ••••••••••••••••••••• 20
Fig.25 Melliod of Making Bus Bar Connections , , , , •, • , ••, , , ••••••, •, •, , , ••••••••, • 21
Flg.26 13.8 KV Taped Joints ••••••.•..•••••.••...•..•..••.••..•, ••••••..••, • 21
Fig.27
to Potheads •.•••••••••.•..•...••. •• .••.•••••. .... .. .•••••••••.• .•••• 22
Flg.38
Fig. 39 Insulation of Connection Bars , •••••••••••••••••••, , , , , •, •••••••• •••••••• 23
Fig.40 Single-Conductor Pothead with Stress Cone •••, •• , •••••••••••••••• , , •••••••• 23
Fig.41 Triple-Conductor Pothead ••••••••••• , ••••••••••, •••••••••••• , , , , , ••••• 24
Fig.42 Rear View of Unit Showing Through-type Current Transformers •••••••• , , ••••••••• 25
Fig.43 Termination Without Pothead - Single-Conductor •• , •••••••• •••••• ••••••••••••• 25
Fig.44 Termination Without Pothead - Multi-Conductor •••••••••••• , , , , •••••••••••• , • 25
Renewal Parts
Fig.45 Elevating Mechanism for M-26 Equipment Rated 250 mva or Less
and M-36 Equipment Rated 1200A 500 mva or Less , •••••••••••• 28
Fig.45A View Showing Elevating Mechanism Motor and Control Unit •• • ••• •••••••••• , •••••• 28
Fig. 46 Elevating Mechanism for M-36H Equipment Rated 750 mva
M-26 Equipment Rated 350 mva
M-36 Equlpment Rated 2000A , , , •• , , ••• , , , , , •••• , ••••• 29
Fig.47 Angle Bracket and Chain Drive ••••, •••, •, •, •••••.•.• , •••••••••• ••• · ••• •• 29
Fig.48 Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-26 ••••••••.••••••.•••••••••••••••••••, ••• 29
Fig.49 Shutter Mechanism Assembly M-36••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.••••••••• 29
Fig. 50 Bus Supports. •••••••, •, ••••••••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••••••• 29
Fig.51 Door Bandies and L<,cks ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •••••• 29
Fig. 52 Bua ConnecUon Box ••.••.•••••••..••..••••..•••••••• •••••••• · ••••••• 30
Fig. 53 Bua Connection Boot .......•••••••••••••••••..••••••••••••••••••••••• 30
Fig.54 Wiring Devices and Miscellaneous Parts•••••••...••••••••••••••.••••••••· ••• 30
Fig.55 Fuse Rollout Unit •.•••••••....••. •••••••.•.•••.••••••••••••••••••••• 31
Fig.56 Potential Transformer Rollou\ Unit ••••••••••••.•••••• •.• , ••••••, ••••••••• 31
Fig.57 Control Transformer Rollout Unit , •••, ••••••, •...• , • •.., .• , ••••••••••••, 31
Flg.58 Single and Triple Conductor Potheads •, , •••••, , •, , •, , , , , , , ••, •, , •, , •, , , ••, , 31

2
 CONTENTS

PAGE

RECEIVING, HANDLING & STORAGE 11

RECEIVING 11
HANDLING 11
STORAGE 11

DESCRIPTION 11
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE 11
PRIMARY ENCLOSURE 11
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT 11
BREAKER ELEVATING MECHANISM 12
PRIMARY DISCONNECT DEVICE 12
BUS COMPARTMENT 12
CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABLE COMPARTMENT 12
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER COMPARTMENT 12
DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT 12
ROLLOUT FUSE-SWITCH UNITS 13
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE 13
GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICE 13
TANDEM LOCK (WHEN FURNISHED) FOR OUTDOOR UNITS 13
INSTALLATION 15
LOCATION 15
PREPARATION OF FLOOR-ANCHORING 15
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT 19
TESTING CABINET 19
ADDITION OF UNITS TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT 20
CONNECTIONS 20
m CONTROL CABLES
GROUND BUS
25
26
DOOR ALIGNMENT 26

TESTING AND INSPECTION 26

OPERATION 26
BREAKER POSITIONING 26
TRANSFER TRUCKS 26
SPACE HEATERS 27

MAINTENANCE 27

RENEWAL PARTS 27

OUTDOOR ACRYLIC PAINT FINISH

The outside of standard outdoor swltchgear has an acrylic paint finish, blue gray ASA#24, ^ovidtog im
proved resistance to aU atmospheric conditions, longer life and less maintenance than with ordinary
paint finishes.
If it is desired to refinish acrylic paintedswltchgear, it is necessary to use one of the following procedures
in order to secure the best adhesion of the paint to the original finish.
A. RefinishinR with Acrylic Paint. It is recommendedthat refinishlng be done with DuPont acnrllc paint
of the des&ed color. UbtauTmaterials and instructions for application from the DuPont Company.
B. Refinighing with Alkyd or Oil Base Paints. Two methods are recommended:
(1) Storay one sealer coat of DuPont 233E75300 or equivalent which has been reduced to spraytog
viscosity with DuPont37692 or 37666 thinner. Air dry for one hour. Apply alkyd or oil base paint.
(2) ^ray one sealer coat of Arco 214-806 primer which has been reduced to sprayingviscosity
with Xylol. Air dry for one hour. Apply all^d or oil base paint.
 re:
m

f t
i--

i.-rL

•5-^

Typical Outdoor Hetal-clad Switchgear Typical Outdoor Hatal-clad SMttchgear Equipaant

Equipaeat - Front View With Protected Male - Side View
 METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
TYPES M26 AND M36
FOR MAGNE-BLAST AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
TYPES AM-4.16 AND AM--13.8

Metal-clad switchgear is equipment to

control and protect various types of elec TYPE M-26
tric^ apparatus and power circuits.
The switchgear consists otoneormore INTERRUPTING
units which are mounted side by side and CIRCUIT CAPACITY CURRENT FIGURE
connected mechanically and electrically to BREAKER KVA
gether to form a complete switching equip
ment. Typical equipments are shown In
Figures 1, 2 and 3. TYPE M-26
The circuit breakers are easily re
movable to provide maximum accessibility AM-4.16-150 150,000 1200
for maintenance with minimum Interrup 250,000 1200 - 2000
AM-4.16-250
tion of services. The switchgear is designed AM-4.16-3S0 350,000 1200 - 3000
to provide maximum safety to the operator.
All equipment is enclosed In grounded metal
compartments. TYPE M-36
The equipment Is available in the rat
ings listedlnthefoUowlngtable. The ratings AM-13.8-1S0 150,000 1200
of the equipment and devices are based on AM-13.8-250 250,000 1200
usual service conditions as covered In
AM-13.8-250 500,000 1200 - 2000
AlEE and NBMA standards. Operation at TSO.OOO 120O - 2000
AM-13.8-750
currents above the equipment rating will AM-13.8-1000 1,000,000 120O - 3000
result in temperature rises In excess of AM-7.2-250 250,000 1200
NBMA standards, and is not recommended. AM-7.2-500 500,000 1200 - 2000
For outdoor installation the same basic
equipment is built Into a weatherproof
housing as in Figures 2 and 3.

al ,{*n.
•-•--Is' • 1,^ , I
« 1-7.

/>:
,c

Haone-bUst Breakers

Thete /nrirueh'ons do net purport to cover all detai't or variatioru in eqvipnient nor to provide for every potsbie
contingency to be met in connectionwith insfo/iotion, oporation or mointenonce. Should furthar information bo desired
or shou/d particular preblamt ariie which ore not covered mffieianlljr for the purchoser's purposes, the fflotfar should
be re/erred to the Generoi {lactric Company.
G£H-1802 Uetal-clad Switchgear

.FIEHOVABLC C0V6ft FOR ACCSSS

/TDWREB in WIRlNfi TROgftH

I
M

ALL FLOOR STEEL TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER

CHANNELS SHOULD BE SET LEVEL WITH EACH OTHER

AND SHOULD BE LEVEL OVER THEIR FULL LENGTH

ROUGH FLOOR THICKNESS AND REINFORCING DEPENDS

ON LOADING AND OTHER NORMAL FACTORS, AND SHOULD
BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH RECOMMENDED PRACTICE

ftR£AKCR RUIWkSLC
SlOE

flKISHED R.OSR LRIE

•Dromon ftoon
RECOMMENDED METHOD

FWItMEO FLOOR UMC

ALTERNATE METHOD
NOTC: 4T 1$ IWPSRATIVE THAT
FLOOR STWL BE EVEN
WITH FIHISHEO FLOOR
AHD THAT BOTH BE LEVEL

Fig. 7 InBUItfttion DeUils

 Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802

IT MAY B£ NUeSSAKY TO ACMOVC

poTKeAo OA CAOLC fon
MEMBCR B

eONBUITS
i
METHOD OF LIFTING
MCMBCftS A-a C TO 6£ FURNISHED 8Y PURCNASCft
A-RAISINS MEMBER - CHANNEL OR WOOD BEAM

B- 3* CHANNEL FURNISHED WITH GEAR

C- UFTtNG JACKS
D- COVER TO BE REMOVED AND REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS ARE IN PLACE

note; when lifting m-zg switghgear

U3CATE BEAM V ABOVE LIFTING
CHANNELS "B*

i-i y n r-i iT
DOOR OPEN-

ALTERNATE METHOD OF LIFTING

MEMBERS A a E TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER
B • 3' CHANNEL FURNISHED WITH GEAR
0 - COVER TO BE REMOVED AND REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS ARE IN PLACE
E - SPREADER

For Indoor Hetal-clad Switchgear

GBB-1802 Hetal-clad Switchgear

CAILC eONNtCTION
/<

—n F=F^ wt o o

WOOD •CAH

ff a
METHODS OF LIFTING

E,—I I ' —e: '

RCntVE TALC VITH LDCQOCR THINKER (

KOISTEN cement sack with 3-H
DOOR-^ CEMEMT/CC-BZ6
ROOF CAP

Z
,|-lt «l| 571. B#tT
(JASKET

|-lt *1^ ST L. BSIT

ROOF OR END
z . SECTION

ENLARSEO SEC. B-B

Fig. 8 Inotallatlon Details
ENinRliED SEC. C-C
 Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802

fJlIEO
COTtfS
tiK. ACCESS
TO CTS
AND TO
PKIMRRY
CABLE
COHPARTMCNT

FOR ANCHOR BOLT

locations see FtSOR
PLAN OAAWINAS
FUANISMEII KITH REOUISITIOH

VIEW *X"
SHOaiNS AHCMOAIHe OP UNIT*
WITH CHANNEL MtC

HEATHi
-SCREENS TO BE BOITCO ON
EACH ENO AT INSTALLATION. RCHOVABLE PLATES TO BE CUT
must be kept clean for TO SUIT COHOUITS BY PURCHASER
VENTIiATION
FOUNDATION DATA
Without Hear Enclosure
AREA AND DEPTH Of SOIL DEAAING SURfACES OF EACH
r-*C FOUNDATION MUST BE ALTERED TO SUIT SOIL CONDITIONS.
bottom surfaces of
frost action or BACKFILLED *ITH PERUIOUS MATEHIAL
AND AOeeUATCLT DRAINED.
SURFACE -B'SHOULD BE LEVEL OVER ITS ""I®™
TO INSURE EAST MANOLIHS OF REMOVABH ,
w CONCRETE PAD SHOULD BE HEIHPORCEO IN ACCOROAHCE
WITH STAHOARO PRACTICE.

TO CUANOE HCISHT OF TRUCK FLOOR

UeSEM NUT If. POJUST LEVER'D* TO
LIVE DESIRED UtlCNT AND LACK 8T
tiehteninc hut 'a'.

adjustable platform VIEW A*

HEATER

V.5CREtNS TO BE BOLTED ON
eoCM END AT tNLTALlATION. AEKOVABLC PLATES TO 0£ CUT
MUST UE kept clean for TO SUIT CONDUITS SY PUACHASEA
VCNTIlAriOH

With Rear Enclosure

for Outdoor Hetal-clad Swltchsear

 GEH-1802 Metal-clad Swltchgear

CftlfCRS
TO 9L

RCmVABLC
001 TIP scxecN
COVtRS
FOk A>:ci.»5
TO c r. >
PHI> in FOR FINCMOR BOIT flWCHOR
BOtT
PKiKfiKt lOCRTIONS SCr FUSR
Cr<KLE PIRW PRRWINqs
BREARCR COWPARf^'CKT ruRNISHtP WITH RtOtllSITlON
ftUO TYPICAL
COMTROL
VIEW "Y"
EHP
i WOWINfi ANCMORtNB OF UNITS
WITH CHDNNCl BASE

o
oe
CO
PROTFCTCD JJETAI ClAU
flISLC AREA
AREA
[^DEVICE PANEL JjC
OR (iae*;i(IN«EO C*V. «5
PURCHASER
BOLTIMO j unit
UNC

SCCONPART NETAL clad

screens to be BOITCO OM REMOVASLE PLATES TO BE CUT
TO SUIT COKOUITS BT PURCHASER END section
EACH END AT INSrAURTION protected AISLE apapter
MOST BE KEPT CLEAN FOR emd sheet
anqle
VENTILATION FOUNDATION DATA
rubber 1 APPIT STSjet/*/!}
qASRET f U-3/0
SNIPPED LOOSCj TO BOTH SIDES
OF CRSKET

TYPICAL SECTION A-A

SEALINB casket at t •loiNT(^,'li)

vent sHippeo loose f ptf«c<i/)srp
PURCHASER TO cur TO ifMQTN.
vCAP
AISLE 8®"""! /• HETQL CLRO
ROOF CAP HOOf CRP

PROTfCTrP
RISLE
KIHCED I I *NerRL CLRD
device I I ROOF
PANEL I
AISLE f»tp
I metal clad SUPT PURCMRSER
lH BOLTING

ICONAteLl AISLE ROOF

HINCED ! TRUSS AMBLE SHIPPINQ
BRR BRRCt
COVER ' <
METAL CLAD
AISLE

VIEW *X"
ENIARCED IHTERIOR SECTION
SHOWINC AISLE TO NETAL CLAD BOLTMB t
venhiator cap assenblt

PRC'tCTiD AI5LL

FIgi 9 Installation Details for Outdoor Metal-clad Swltchgear with Protected Aisle

10
 Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802

RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE

RECEIVING
Every case or crate leaving the factory
Is plainly marked at convenient places with
case number. regutsUlon number, custom
er's order, front or rear, and whenforslze
and other reasons It is necessary to divide
the equipment for shipment, with the unit
number of the portion of equipment enclosed
in each shipping case.
The contents of each package of the
shipment are listed in the Packing Details.
This list is forwarded with the shipment,
packed in one of the cases. The case is
especially marked and Us number can also
be obtained from the Memorandum of Ship
ment. To avoid thelossof smallparts when
unpacking, the contents of each case should
be carefully checked against the Packing
Details before discarding the packing ma
terial. Notify the nearest General Electric
Company representative at once if any
shortage of material is discovered.
All elements before leaving the factory
are carefully inspected and packed by work
men e)q>erienced In the proper handlingand
packing of electrical equipment. Upon re
ceipt of any apparatusanimmediate inspec
tion should be madefor any damage sustain
ed while enroute. If injury is evident or an
Indication of rough handling is visible, a
claim for damage should be filed at once
with the transportation company and the
General Electric Company notlfledprompt-
ly. Information as to damaged parts, part
number, case number, requisition number,
etc., should accompany the claim.
HANDLING
Before uncrating, indoor equipment
may be moved by a crane with slings under
the sktds. If crane facllttles are not avail
able, rollers under the skids may be used.
Fig. 7 shows suggested method of handling
the switchgear alter it Is removed from
the skids.
Methods of handling outdoor equipment
are shown in Fig. 8. After the equipment
is In place the lifting plates should be re
moved and reassembled, "turned In" so
that passageway at the ends of the equip
ment will not be obstructed.
STORAGE
If It Is necessary to store the equip
ment for any length of time, the following
precautions should be taken to prevent
corrosion;
1. Uncrale the equipment.
2. Cover Important parts such as jack
screws, gears and chain of lifting mechan
ism, linkage and moving machine-finished
parts with a heavy oil or grease.
3. Store in a clean, dry place with a
moderate temperature and cover with a
suitable canvas to prevent deposit of dirt
or other foreign substances tqjon movable
parts and electrical contact surfaces.
4. Batteries should be uncratedandput
on trickle charge immediately on receipt.
5. If dampness or condensation may be
encountered In the storage location, heaters
should be placed Inside the units to prevent
moisture damage. Approximately 500watts
of heaters per unit will be required. Re
move all cartons and other miscellaneous
material packed inside units before energiz
ing any heaters. If the equipment has been
subjected to moisture it should be tested
with a lOOOv or 2500v meggar. A reading of
at least 200 megohms should be obtained.
6. Breakers should l>e prepared for
storage separately. Refer to appropriate
breaker instruction book.

DESCRIPTION
Each unit is made iqi of a secondary
enclosure and a primary enclosure, as
,0^ shown In Figure 10.
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE

The secondary enclosure Is usually

located at the breaker withdrawal side of
the unit, although in certain units it may be
on the side opposite to the breaker with
drawal area. It consists of a compartment
with a hinged door or panel upon which are
mounted the necessary instruments, control
and protective devices. The terminal
blocks, fuse blocks, and some control de
vices are mounted inside the enclosure on
;jni
the side sheets and a trough Is provided at
the top to carry wiring between units.
PRIMARY ENCLOSURE

The primary enclosure contains the ItMU • '

high voltage equipment and connections ar
ranged in compartments to confine the
effects of faults and so minimize the damage.
_ _ —tr - iSSis
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT

The removable element consists of a

circuit breaker with trip-free operating ^llj il
mechMlsm mounted directly on the breaker
frame, interlock mechanism, the removable
portion of the primary and secondary dis
II
connecting devices, the operating mech
anism control device, and necessary con
trol wiring. The magne-blast breakersare
equipped with wheels for easy removal and
Insertion. Refer to Figs. 4, 5 and 6.
The circuit breaker Interlock mechan
ism is designed to obstruct the operator
from lowering the breaker from the con-
nected position or raising it from the dis-
connected position unless the breaker is in
the open position. This interlock is also Fig. 10 Hetal-clad Sxitchgear
GBH-lBOe MeUl-cUd Swltchgear

desired to keep the breaker in the open CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABI.E
position while it is being elevatedor lower COMPARTMENT
ed. With this arrangement it is imperative
that the circuit breaker be tripped prior The current transformers are mounted
to any vertical travel o( the removable in a compartment isolated from the other
element. Obviously if the mechanism is equipment. Provision is made in this com
forced, it cannot perform its proper func partment for connecting the purchaser's
tions. A positive stop prevents overtravel primary cable by means of potheads or
of the removable element when raised to its clamp type terminals.
connected position. The secondary dis TI»e IM&ULATION

connecting device coupler is used for con
necting outside control circuits to the circuit
breaker, operating mechanism, trip coil and
auxiliary switches. This coupler makes
contact automatically when the removable
element is raised to the connectedposition.
A control test jumper Is furnished which is
plumed into the coupler on the stationary
and removable elements when it is desired
to operate the breaker in the test position.
All removable elements furnished on a
particular requisition and of like design
and ratings are completely Interchangeable
one with the other. The removable as well
as the stationary elements are built with
factory Jigs and fixtures thus insuring
interchangeabiUty.
BREAKER ELEVATING MECHANISM
The elevating mechanism for elevating
or lowering the removable element to or
from its connected position supports the
removable element In the operating posi
tion. In the test position the breaker is
lowered to the guide rails. This mech
anism consists of heavy-duty steel jack
screws on which are carried nuts to sup
port the elevating carriage. The carriage
is 80 designed tlut the removable element
can oe readily Inserted or withdrawn alter
the carriage has been lowered to the dis
connected position without necessitatingthe
removal of any bolts, nuts or screws. The
breaker cannot be lowered or raised until
It has been tripped. The breaker cannot
be closed except with the breaker in either
the operating or test position.
IN&ULATICN COMPOUND POTENTUL TRANSFORMER
COMPARTMENT
Potential transformers are located In
a compartment above the current trans
flEUOVABLE STUD formers or in a separate unit adjacent to
POACCLAIN euSHINfi Uie breaker units.
The transformers are mounted on a
movable support equipped with primary and
secondary disconnecting devices. When the
potential transformers are disconnected,
they are at a safe striking distance from
all live parts of the swltchgear. In addi
tion a grouitding device is provided which
POUtB CIKCUIT
contacts the fuses when the potential trans
mcuc* formers arc disconnected, effectively
charging the transformers, fo thin posi
tion the transformer fuses may be safely
removed and replaced. When &e carriage
is drawn out tt moves a barrier In front ot
the stationary part of the primary discon
r
_jn:i=.-.='uTr necting device. See Figure 12.
* PQWtH CKCUIT
I •KeARCH DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT
I TCBT RO^kTION
Dummy removable elements, Fig. 13,
are used as a means of isolating circuits
or bus sections, where operation is infre
quent and a circuit breaker cannot be
economically Justified. The device con
Fig. II Heasurenent of Adjustaenl of sists of a framework to simulate the cir
Prinary Diaconnecting Devices cuit breaker removable element with a set

Guide rails are built Into the metal-

clad frame to guide the removable breaker
element Into correct position before the
breaker Is raised into the operating posi
tion by means of the elevating mechanism
which is motor operated.

PRIMARY DISCONNECTING DEVICE

The primary disconnectingdevicesuti

lize sliver to silver contacU to insure
against reduction of current carrying ed
acity due to oxidation of the contact sur
faces. These contacts are of the hlghpres-
sure line contact tube and socket design,
the tube being backed up by heavy garter
springs to Insure contact pressure. Refei
to Figure 11.

BUS COMPARTMENT

The main buses are enclosedinametal

compartment with removable front covers
to provide accessibility.
The bus is supported by an insulating
material which is practically Impervious to
moisture, and an excellent dielectric.
The bus Insulation Is molded on the
bars except at the joints where the insula
tion Is completed by means of compound
filled boxes, molded boots or tape. Fig. 12 Potential Transforitier Rollout SIiomo in Withdrawn Position
 Metal-Clad Swltchgear GEH-1802

breakers cannot be economically or func

tionally Juatified.
V

The fuses are mounted on a movable

support equipped with disconnecting de
vices. Control power transformers of 15
leva and smaller may be mounted on the
rollout with the fuses. See Figure 16.

When the fuses are disconnected, they

are at a safe striking distance from all
live parts ot the awitchgear. In addition
a grounding device is provided which con
tacts the fuses after they are disconnected,
effectively removlngany static charge from
the fuses. In this position the fuses may
be safely removed and replaced. The dis
connecting devices arc capable of Inter
rupting transformer magnetizing current,
but should not be used to Interrupt load
current. Mechanical or key interlocks
are applied to prevent operating, the dis
connecting device while the load Is con
nected. This Is gencarally accomplished
by interlocking so that the transformer
secondary breaker must be locked in the
open position before the disconnecting de
vice can be opened or closed.

GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICE

The grounding and test device, Figure

14, provides a convenient means ofground
ing the cables or the bus In order to safe
guard personnel who may be working on the
cables or the equipment. The device can
also be used for applying power for high
potential tests or for fault location, to
measure insulation resistance (Megger).
Dunniy Renovable Element By using potential transformers, It can
also be used for phasing out cables.

of six studs similar to those on the magne- The three studs of the device are sim
blast breakers. The lower end of the studs ilar to those of the magne-blast circuit
are connected, front to back, by copper breakers. The studs are mounted on a re
bars which are fully Insulated and metal- movable plate which can l>e placed in either
enclosed. The stationary structure is the of two positions. In one position the studs
same as for a circuit breaker. When the will engage the front (Bus) contacts only
device is elevated Into position, it con and in the other position the studs will en
nects the front set of melal-clad discon gage the rear (Line) contacts only of a
necting devices to the rear set metal-clad unit.

Under no conditions must the dummy To Indicate the proper placementofthe

element be elevated or lowered when the kius studs on the device, opposite sides of the
or the unit Is energized. Key interlocks assembly are marked "Line" and "Bus".
are applied to Insure that all source of The word corresponding to the desired
power are disconnected before the dummy position must be toward the operator.
element can be operated. Refer to Figure
15.
To use, the device Is rolled Into the
metal-clad housing In place of the circuit
ROLLOUT -FUSE-SWITCH UNITS
breaker, and raised Into or lowered from
Rollout load-break disconnect switch
the connected position by means of the
circuit breaker elevating mechanism.
es, with or without current limiting fuses
ol high interrupting capacity, are some
times used In metal-clad swltchgear to In addition to the device described
protect and switch small transformers and above, there Is available a form of groimd-
circuits where circuit breakers cannot be ing and testing device equipped with both
economically or functionally justified. bus and line side buildings, power operated
grounding contacts, phasing receptacles,
The rollout switch is designated as and a complete safety Interlocking system.
type SE-8, and the units In which they are For details of construction and operation
used are designated as type SEM-26 or of this device, refer to GEI-38957 lor 4.16
SEM-36. For additional information on kv equipment, or GEI-50114 for 7.2 kv and
these equtpmenta, refer to the supplement 13.8 kv equipment.
ary Instructions nimlshed.
TANDEM LOCK (WHEN FURNISHED)
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE FOR OUTDOOR UNITS

Current limiting fuses with high in Outdoor metal-clad equipments with

terrupting rating are sometimes used in more than one unit may be provided with a
metal-clad swltchgear to protect small Fig. IV firound and Test Device tandem locking arrangement which makes it
transformers or circuits where circuit (Cable shown not (urniihed by G, E. Co.) necessary to padlock only one door on each
 GEH-1802 Metal-ciad Swltchgear

RIGHT HAND SDC SHgFT BKR COMPT

RIGHT HflUT Gify <^yFT RKR r<Y.tP'T

' "ft
/ nnTfmfMTn
HOif^PR Pflninrx •2^ / MtgwaiMt

D"^

-/ MOTOR
TOP PLATE [
\ h / In-
A 1

TgCbJ >

+ c

-\—

POTOGKHn ARRflwr-FMPHT
«»rvrwre BU9HI-. ea irmeUMr, Pr « « hmuy KEY M^ftuxK foft p_ca
ERYEH'5 .<WW («»«»

WF^?NT OK
-r.t
ifiTuaw;

J EUW^Shei) by
BjRCH^fR
4* W" >\AOTLA5W,ATl'ii53q.'!T GB 4>-a.> ouicoiw a •.xoi

•cffiffiECTaNjeoxES
RIGHT HflMT RIGF 9HFET &sR COM|YT. /
BUS
BflRRFR

•KCP

Ij KItilLJ.C£A METHOD FqaFWWB cparjpyrw BOffiS

KtT ROWfeftC

ESPtCE. I

BEiJiiEaQ^.CTiiifiiiLSwvaE j 11
osrvrwK AaKrjr. m irwrcAr* rtuniv Rriawftf^r F< fvfni

Fig. 15 Padlocking Arrangement, Key Interlocking and Method for Pouring Connection Boxes
14

[ItiFMHIi.T f •
Fig. i6 Control Power Transforser Rollout Shown in
Open Position
side. (In exceptionally long installations
two or more locks may be required on each
side). The unltcontainlngtheoperatingarin
Before any installation work is done,
consult and study all drawings furnished
by the General Electric Company for the
particular requisition.
These drawings Include arrangement
drawings, wiring and elementary diagrams
and a summary of the equipment. Mats,
screens, railings, etc., which are external
to the swltchgear, but which may be re
quired to meet any local codes, must be
furnished by the purchaser.
LOCATION
The recommended aisle space required
at the front and at the rear of the equipment
is shown on the floor plan drawing furnished
for the particular requisition. The space at
the front must be sufficient to permit the
iimertion and withdrawal of the circuit
breakers, and their transfer to other units.
of the tandem lock is clearly marked on
the drawings and also by nameplate on the
equipment itself. Refer to Figure 17.
INSTALLATION
The space at the rear must besulficlentfor
installation of cables, for inspection and
maintenance, and on some equipments to
draw out potential transformers.
PREPARATION OF FLOOR - ANCHORING
Indoor Equipment
The station floor mustbe strong enough
to prevent sagging due to weight of the
swltchgear structure and to withstand the
impact slresa caused by the opening of the
circuit breakers under short circuit con
ditions. The impact loading is approxi
mately 1-1/2 times the static load.
Suitable means must be provided by
the purchaser for anchoring the equipment
to the floor. It is essential that the floor
be level to avoid distortion of the switch-
Metal-clad SwLtchgear GEH-1602
Fig. 17 Tanden Lack for Outdoor 13.6 Units
Betore any door Intheequipmentcanbe
opened, It is necessary to open the padlocked
door and operate the tandem locking arm to
the open position. In locking the equipment
the reverse procedure should be used.
Where it is desired to separately lock
any particular door, the tandem lo^ can
be disconnected In that unit by unbolting a
connecting clip between the tandem bar and
the locking bar, and aseparate padlock used
on that door.
The light switches, front and rear,
will be located in the units with the tandem
lock.
gear structure and the equipment be com
pletely aligned prior to final anchoring.
The recommended floor construction is
shown In Figure 7. The floor channels
must be level and straight with respect to
each other. Steel shims should be used
for final leveling of the swltchgear If nec
essary. Care should be taken to provide a
smooth, hard, and level floor under and in
front of the units to facilitate installation
and removal of the breaker. If the floor is
not level and flush with the floor channels,
it will be difficult to handle the breaker
because It will not be level with respect to
^e stationary element.
Recommended practice Is to weld the
swltchgear structure to the floor channels,
using a tack weld at points Indicated for
anchoring on the drawing. If welding fac
ilities are not available the gear should
be bolted to the floor channels.
 GBH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear

Id .

•f •W

I
il

•r_v.viJ .Jl
*oceonTi^fir et*» vMfrs fffW twv/y A»DCO AT RtS»*T

ffiOrtT v/X«/
(i^MCL CM)

ntest ^ttrtn m»nf icrr g t e

tHo oHvr t —^
=3i
rli .-J s

I I-

^ Moi^n
'^ro«cnr«« 4tt
srKtftH'r'r*

' VSft^ M
^ Crw<cr/flv
|0t«
a49iM«
svismjcf
I
')
1
i:
AS5EM0LY *e* Vm'A-
^0lXIVM9 or TO«#riWi*; (fNO 9^*iiarm* vMtr)

WITH REAR ENCLOSURE

/•RCMove TWS ateir wit* tieer

ROOF Mrs f CKO SlCTMN MIIV

A. r*
U

!/
PffQCCDUftC
oio secffdN
I 0oc^ ifte Sf^uet, ^fto^to 6*fs co^fteencff, A*to
r 1 £f*p seerfOff. ate VIEW V C VIEW "0*
y y
m
2. i e r Mtvt ttt mo ooi.r ro^n/t^i as Sm^*^
"^KOUS MR OMtWC
ro«cr«CK i» ASStMOLT *C' r OSSEIfBir *C*
we «eTr#**r-r*
J. ASStAfOSf trgms USTS0 Of ho.i

4R00NP eu» *. Asstftete otw ^oor caps as sovftof m 'a' $ ntwV,

COttNfCnoM S ASS€MSLC &O0VHO aus SAtKC OfrmfAAAt £*»*7«ftO AffO
n^etsictT ffeAf G/wtofff COS. AS sffOfM Av AssMoir 'a'lissiRturV
ASSSMOIC COS CAAS AAO INSUIATC TCR
(c»vtA fftSTAoerton cswf.

EMO URfllf
ASSCHOLT *c' Mf cir* nrffRreo view '0
(w(n«4 f (Mrr» »«frNctO (tMD VIEW cr £jruntf« Mti)
WITHOUT REAR ENCLQ.SURf
Fig. 18 Outdoor Hetal-clad SHitchgear - Addition of Units to Line-up
16
 Metal-clad Switchgear GEB-1802

r-T>- -f];
• I \
^1^
•• I
I
rt
I )•
I ll
I ll
> ll

I 11

stc <icw c i 11
II Sf

NtW UNIT9 ftOMA nr Kfr fwo ElllSTtN4 new UNIT! «»oEe n end

FRONT VIEW

vmr
CKD HUT MTTCM /•tMrCKKCOMU
— ' VINT CftP

noof c«f
(MSIceT
Nieer
CMD cur— Nte HMfTO Ctif
ti64f ittpr
AISU TIMIU AHQIC

CNO —•
Mccr
ItCrHL CUD msix A

a««iiM(P tot r TO REIUEC eilSTW^ END SHEET (llf)

cMofrcnwi 8 A. REHSye THE feiEflwias itews E«MI AISU jeciwm
I. VENT MTTEN
E. END VENT CAP
/ItMrfU A J. AOOT CAPS
^cotm furr 4. tup SECTtM C4KSISTIN; CP ITEMS KAAEEO A
•IK ruM nufK
ILMII IMMC
5. nwMT eOTEB (M«E TO HEW UKIIJ
c
8.
screens U)
AEHaTC AMP CAP, ENC SCREEN, «A«IMS BUS
CCKNECTMN ««B EBB SECTIBH fOIT HETAl CUB SECTION

SgCTlON />>>^ TO INSTALL NEW METAL CLAD UNITS (lEPTJ

I. SET NEW UNIT(J) IN PLACE ANB BOLT TOStTMU
E. ASSEMSLE ITEMS LISTED IN 8
S. ASSEMBLE NEW ROOT CAPS
tttTAL CMD 4. ASSEMBLE CAOUND SUS SPLICE BETWEEN EEISSINB
ANB NEW EAODAO BUS
own—
Hie toufftn S ASSEMBLE BOS BAAS AND IHSBLATE PEN
$uah f («ucr INSTAUCTMN BOOK
A

APAPTCR
TD INSTALL NEW PAOTECTED AISLE UNITSfLEPt)
CNO werr I. INSTALL NEW PLOOA FRAMES ANB FLOOA PLATE
A TIC DOWN AMBLE
E. REPLACE PIBOA FAAME AMBLE AT NEW ENB PBSITUN
I'lEdj «'L. gtiT J. install new FIBOA PLATES
4. ERECT NEW CORNER COLUMN
3. ADO NEW AISLE TRUSS ANSLC ANB NETAL CLAB
MINIt AMU < adapter clip to eristinb enb roof truss
T»r CUP A AND SUPPORT
4. INSTALL NEW ENB AISLE TRUSS SUB- ASSEHBLT
CONSISriNB OF ROOF TRASS AN«LE,B0OF SUPT,
T»P CUP A -SFCTION E- COLUMN CLIP, NETAL CLAB ABAPTER CLIP AND
ruM eMctccTA ROOF SUPT CLIPS
MTCtnfOim T RCINSTRLL TAE IFENS REHOTEB IN A-4
CM.UMI -riCM
r PIATC
^ Tie Jim
MirNfggfif
AMCU J» note:-use new basnets rnbalso ihstau-
PRETIOUS END FRONT COVER ON FRONT
vencifp OF NEW END "UNIT
rcMT c**n a. INSTALL HIRINB OHO UBBTINB TAOUBN

srcTroM B>B HSTE'.-A SINILRR PRBCEBURC IS USEO NOR

IMTFKMai VlfW C RIBNT ENB RSBITIBNS

Fig. 19 Outdoor Metal-clad Switchgear with Protected Aisle

17
GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
.jSLtacv Moy
rssrass.
•Wkw
iMtC MOUMB
fiP 4UQWiWCO
'aisss»ff^
as»&"W.v
Fig* 20
Provision should be made In the floor
for conduits for primary and secondary
cables, located as shovm on the floor plan
drawing furnished for the particular requi
sition. If desired, the conduits may be in
stalled before the switchgear. Consider
ation should be tdven to conduits which
might be requiredf for future connections.
Outdoor Equipment
Outdoor equipments are furnished both
with and without rear enclosures. Recom
mendations for fotindations for both types
are given in Fig. 8. Primary and secondary
conduits should be Installed In accordance
with the requisition drawings, before the
equipment is put into place.
Since outdoor equipments are provided
with a 6" base, a transfer truck is required
to place the breaker In the housing. The
level ad]ustment on the truck is shown
on Fig. 8.
When outdoor equipments are shipped
in more than one section, the Joint in the
roof between sections must t>e weather-
proofed. Assemble the gasket between the
roof sections and bolt together. See Fig. 8.
Ouidoor Equipment wiih Protected Aisle
When specified by the purchaser, out
door equipment is furnished with an en
closed, weatherproof operating aisle. See
Fig. 3. The aisle enclosure is shipped
separately from the switchgear.
The following procedure ouilines the
steps necessary to install outdoor equip
ment with a protected aisle:
(1) Install ihe switchgear in accordance
wiih ihe procedure given above for outdoor
equipment.
(2) Remove the shipping covers from
ihe control panels. Since ihe relay and
instrument cases are not weather-proof,
the control panels should be protected
from inclement weather until the installa-
lion of the aisle enclosure Is completed.
18
@h-
(©-
Outdoor Transition Compartment
(3) Apply SterlingU-SlOvarnlshtoboth
sides of ihe gaskets furnished for the Joint
between ihe ends of the switchgear and the
aisle enclosure and to the surfaces against
which the gasket presses and bang the
gaskets on the projecting studs at the ends
of the switchgear lineup. See Fig. 9,
section A-A.
(4) Move the aisle enclosure into posi
tion, guiding the holes in the end sheets
over the studs on the switchgear lineup
and guiding the roof sills between the
support cl^s tolled to the upper front
of the switchgear units atove the control
panels. This operation may be simplified
by temporarily loosening the support clips.
The floor of the aisle enclosure must fit
under the hinged breaker cover of the metal-
clad, so the aisle enclosure must be moved
into position on a level wiih the switch-
gear units. If desired, this Job may be
simplified by removing the dtors over the
circuit breaker compartment. To remove
these doors, loosen the two bolts holding
the lower hinge, remove the hinge, and
lower the door to remove the hinge pin
from the upper hinge.
(5) Bolt the aisle enclosure in place
at both ends, and bolt the roof sills to
the support clips, tightening any support
clips loosened in the previous operation.
Replace any breaker compartment doors
previously removed.
(6) If the aisle enclosure was shipped
in more than one section, bolt the sections
together and assemble the roof caps In the
manner described atove for roof Joints in
outdoor switchgear.
(7) Anchor the outside floor sill of
the atsle enclosure wiih anchor tolls placed
in accordance wiih the requisition drawing.
See Fig. 9, view Y.
(8) Assemble the dome over the roof
opening between the switchgear and the
aisle enclosure. See Fig. 9, view X.
(9) Remove shipping braces from aisle
enclosure. These braces should be left
_J-<D
COVfffS
Hg)
Fig. 2!
in place until the aisle enclosure is as
sembled in order to maintain alignment
of the enclosure.
(10) Connect secondary wiring to lights,
convenience outlets, etc., in accordance
with the wiring diagrams furnished for
the equipment.
Since the aisle floor is level with
the floor of the switchgear units, no trans
fer truck is required for outdoor equipment
with a protected aisle.
The above procedure describes In
stallation of a protected aisle enclosure
with switchgear on one side of the aisle
only. If the aisle Is common to two line
ups of switchgear, the procedure will re
quire slight modification. See thedrawings
furnished with the requisition for specUic
instructions.
Transition Compartments
Transition compartments for outdoor
unit substations may to one of two types
(Figs. 20 and 21). These compartments
are normally shipped assembled. The
full height compartment (Fig. 20) cannot
to disassembled for installation. The
throat type compartment (Fig. 21) can be
Installed In any of three ways, in accord
ance with the following instructions:
(a) Should the switchgear be position
ed on its foundation prior to the power
4
transformer, the complete transmon can
be mounted on the metal-clad as assenabled.
Remove covers #8. Apply Sterling u 310
varnish to toth sides of gasket 2A, and
to the surfaces against which the ga^et
presses. Bolt transition compartment to
throat on metal-clad switchgear.
Jacking the power transformer into its
fln^ location,apply Sterling U310varnish
to toth sides of gasket lA and to the sur
faces against which the gasket presMS,
and place the gasket over the mounting
studs on the transformer tank wall. Slide
transformer in place, guiding the fraM-
former mounting studs throughthe mooting
holes In #1. Center rubber seal between
 Metal-Clad Swltchgear GEH-1802

#1 and »3 before tightening nuts, mai;.- (d) If proper contacting cannot be at

taining 24" between transformer tank wall tained by the above methods, U is necessary
and end of metal-clad. Do not apply var to adjust the stationary dlsconneciL-.g device
nish to the rubber seal between •! and "3. tube. DO NOT MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENT.
Cut secondary conduit *10 to length a;.': COMMUNICATE WITH THE NE.AREST
assemble under the transition. GENERAL ELECTRIC CO. OFHCE FOR
ADDITIONAL INFORMATIGN.
(b) Should the power transformer (*• The trip interlock should be checked to
positioned on its foundation ttrior to tt. •;
see that the removable element is obstructed
switcheear. follow the procedure of para- from being raised to or lowered from the
graph (a) above, except move the switc.'.-
gear up to the power transformer aiti:.-
assembllng the transition compartmtr,'
= fl operating position. Using the manual closing
device, close the breaker and then push it
into place for elevating. Snap the selector
to the switchgear. switch to the "Raise" position and .ouU the
clutch handle forward. A defi.-.ite stop
(c) If the power transformer and metai •
clad switcheey are in place, disassemhi-j should be encountered preventing thetnotor
transition as follows: Remove covers
circuit limit switch from energtzing the
and adapter »1, dome braces "4. circuit. Then trip the breaker manually
Apply Sterling U 310 varnish to both sld'.-, and elevate to the raised position. Elec
of gasket #2A, and to the surfaces again.s- trically close the breaker. Snap the selector
which the gasket presses, before boliir..-
112 to melal-clad throat. Applv Sterling
i_J switch to the "Lower" position and pull the
clutch handle forward. Again, a definite
U 310 varnish to both sides of gasket "l A. stop should be encountered preventing the
motor circuit limit switch from energizing
and to the surfaces against which die gaskv the circuit.
presses, and loosely fasten -l andKlA t.
transformer tank. Slide throat of #3 Inf. . ^ .ve Inte' ^ If the Interlock does not function as in
#1 and maintain approximately 4 1/2' • ercnce b , dicated at>ove DO NOT MAKE .ANY AD
from #3 to tank. Assemble braces •4 JUSTMENTS. COMMUNICATE WITH THE
top and bottom to maintain size and prope.- -y 'iilact suir... NEAREST GENERAL ELECTRIC CO. OF
alignment, then tighten 41 to iranswrme.- '•-.'aIv ' • .'.d the su>-car} ;;scon- FICE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORM-ATION.
tank. Assemble connections, terminals, 5 . ' U'.,
supports and complete all joi.-.ts. Assemble On units equipped with slatior.ary aux
dome »7, side covers "8 and bottom cove,- K'A V »• - ;'-.;;iient of ti„ .••ac-lona.-v dis- iliary switches (Fig. 45A, reference -69),
#9. Cut secondary conduit 'IQ lo lengt.-. /'.I'.ir,' !«u • •• should CiA-.-* a hi-d'v im- the clearance between the end of the switch
and assemble under the transition. . ontact lu.^ •-•i-: r50H47 mechanism operating rod and the operating
•. 'Mr 1'-^ ..irfr .:LjdS. Ccitlw- • wipt s.tould plunger on the circuit breaker should be 0 to
Connect healers located Ir. 13,8 k-. • —i \ ju* • = !..• 1/8" fro.. r-p o; ; -"ntact 1/8" with the circuit breaker in ir.e raised
class transition compartment. V-.- alUh -.1. contact .i. n.v surt at and open position. Any adjustmen-. in this
• in. dimension must be made on tl-.e circuit
Indoor transition compartments are •••••.- if the brr.i-'.^r sfj; --.side breaker. See Instruction book furnished with
shipped assembled together wich the ad *"*
circuit breaker for method of adjustment.
•I- • • I'Onneciui. '«vicf iS in-
jacent metal-clad switchgear unl-.s. Care should be taken to prevent destroying
••••• • intact luu- -ar.l r-0H47,
7 8". Tn,
interchangeablllty of circuit breakers by
ndicati# that excessive adjustment on one breaker.
T'. '.M « .-ontactec j' hefu'.lcres-
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT • -* r t'ft'** . •- ^--silverbcj-.• -T ihcszition-
:ii ,• device, i.. TESTING CABINET
^ Fig.
Before installing or operating the re .-...ui r- inspect....• f thec.-dtacts The testing cabinet. Fig. 23, should be
movable element consult the circuit breaker
llu- .xer is no .
•»ing ra'.sedto installed on the wall at a location where
instructions for directions on installatior.
and inspection. The operation of die inter rr pf.n*'- • readju: ••e uK^rstop maintenance and testing of the breaker can
lock device is given below. jnr -itches I- -•'se
- or lower be convlently done. Conduits must be in
• -r proper •.••stioii. Lock stalled to carry cables to supply control
The elevating mechanism is accurately :.1oi >• . • • ne new p-j; 'on. power for testing.
leveled and checked at the faciorv a.-,dshould
need no adjustmenL Do not install or re
move the breaker or make anv ad'ustmenis f-lj— i
unless the breaker is open.
Rub a small amount of contact lubri
cant D50H47 on the silvered portion of the
breaker studs to form a thin ccating for
contacting purposes.
Lower the elevating mechanism llftins
brackets until the lifting brackets are in the
fully lowered or test position. Tkebreake.-
should then enter the housing freeiv. Pusr.
the breaker into the housing until the wide ) t sr
part of the breaker supporting plate rests
against the front pan of the lifting bracket
of the elevating mechanism. Theclearance
between the interferenceblockonth.ebreak
er and the interference block on the Inter
lock mechanism (dimension "X", Fig. 22
should be from 1/16" to 1 '8".
Carefully raise the breaker to the con i il 2>A KHGCKOvr<» •-ii
nected position. The clearance between the
breaker supporting plate and the stop bolts
—-j ^WOLt FOR jMTfe. fra.-
should be not more than 1/32", Tr.en lower
i'|- Ivr 7 -J
and remove Itfrom the unit. Whenelevating, rftOHTVlCW COVCR RCMOVCO
note that breaker studs center wiuh respect
lo the stationary disconnectlngdev.ee or in
jury to the contacts may result. Box for 13*6 KV HeU1*c1atf SwUchgear
Metal-clad Swltchgear GEH-1802
ADDITION OF UNITS TO EXISTING
EQUIPMENT
Before adding units to existing equip
ment, consult and study all drawings fur
nished with the equipment. In addition
to the usual drawings furnished with new
equipment, special drawings may be fur
nished covering complicated or special
assembly work. Also, check to make sure
all necessary parts are on hand.
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE REMOV
ED OR ANY DOORS OPENED WHICH PER
MIT ACCESS TOTHEPRIMARYCIRCUII^
rr IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE CIRCUTT
BE DE-ENERGIZED.
Figure 18 indicates the special pro
cedures required to add new metal-clad
units to outdoor equipment without protected
aisle, and Figure 19 indicates the special
procedures required to add new metal-
clad units to outdoor equipment with pro
tected aisle. For indoor equipment, it
is usually necessary only to remove the
end cover sheets and to re-assemble them
on the new units after these are located
and bolted to the existing units. Other
wise, the installation procedure is the
same as described above.
When the units are in place and mech
anical assembly is completed, assemble
the main bus and other primary connec
tions per the instructions below. (Removal
^ existing compound-filled connectionbox
es can be easily accomplished by Peking
the box -in dry ice for 2 - 3 hours. Remove
the dry ice and the cord tying the box in
place, and strike the box with a hammer.
The hardened box and compound will crack
away from the Joint.)
Secondary wiring and control bus con
nections should be made in accordance
with the wiring diagrams furnished with
the equipment.
CfRfNECTIONS
The main bus bars and other connection
bars may be either c<9per or aluminum. In
either case, the connection stirfaces will be
silver plated.
All field assembled Joints in conduct
ors, regardless of material or method of
insulation, should be made as follows:
(1) Wipe silver clean. Do not use
sandpaper or any abrasive on the
silvered surface. Avoid handling
of cleaned surface as much as
possible.
(2) A sufficient quantity of DS0H47
grease shotild be applied to the
Joint at each contact area so that
me complete contact area will be
thoroughly sealed with excess
grease squeezed out of the Joint
when tightened.
(3) Brush a thin coat of D50H47 over
the outside surfaces of the Joint
area and hardware covering the
silvered area.
(4) In some cases external connections
are made to metal-clad bus by
bars. The metal-clad bars are
normally silver plated. Unplated
bars, either cqiper or aluminum,
should not be used to connect to
silver plated bars.
20
MAIN BUS ASSEMBLY
(1) For 13.8 kv or 7.2 kv equipment-
(a) Remove compartment covers.
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars
together, follonring assembly instructions
above. SeealsoFig.2SandTableA, Fig. 24.
TABLE A
Torque Values for Metal-clad Swltchgear
(Torque in Inch-Pounds)
Bolt Copper Aluminum
or Steel or Compound
Size
3/8"-16 lSO-300 180-240
l/2"-I3 360-540 360-480
5/8"-11 420-600 420-540
Fig. 24
(c) Complete the taping of the vertical
riser- bars using insulating tape furnished
(2/3 lap) stepping the tape at the bus bar.
If the riser bars connect to the bus from
below, sufficient tape should be added to
prevent compound lealo^e when filling.
Apply a layer of cotton tape (1/2 lap) over
the insulating tape, stopping the cotton tape
Just inside molded splice cover.
(d) Place molded covers around the
bolted splice Joints. Note that compound
filling space is at top of joint, and add filler
pieces furnished for the purpose to the
bottom of box and around bus bar lamina
tions (Fig. 20) to prevent conspound leakage
while filling. Duxseal shm^ be placed
over ihe joints to make the box free of
leaks while filling. The Duxseal should be
removed after the compound has set. G.E.
#860 cord should be us^ to hold the molded
parts securely in place.
(e) Heat G.E. D50H49 compound (fur
nish^) to minimum 200OC and maximum
of 220OC. Avoid overheating the compound
for Uie dielectric strength may be seriously
aUected. Pour the compound into the molded
covers intermittently, allowing an interval
of cooling to prevent formation of gas or
air pockets. The final pouring should be
level with the top Of the box and should be
done only alter due allowance for shrinkage
is made. Refer to Fig. IS.
(f) Paint the e:qiosed cotton tape on
vertical riser bars with U310 or U311
varnish fumishe<L
(g) Taped Joints may be used instead
of boxed Joints. If they are, insulate as
follows:
(1) Fill all cavities around bolts and
nuts with Duxseal compound to
form smooth surface for taping,
thus preventing air voids. This
compound is not an insulating med
ium and should not be usedfor that
purpose.
(2) Place 4" wide Irrathene tape over
the Duxseal, as shown in Fig. 26.
(3) Wrap with insulating t^eprovided,
as shown in Fig. 39. Where there
are sharp angles, apply additional
layers to obtain the equivalent of
the insulation of the flat surfaces.
(4) Over the insulating tape, apply one
layer of white cotton hqie, hall lap,
as a binder.
(5) Over the white cotton tape, brush
a good coat of U 310 varnish.
Varnish may be thinned if neces
sary, with Xylene, DSB9.
(h) Replace all covers previously re
moved.
(2) For 4.16 kv equipment:
(a) Remove compartment covers.
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars
together, following assembly instructions.
See Fig. 25 and Table A, Fig. 24.
(c) Place Hexlble molded cover over
Joint, as shown in Fig. 15. Note that on
Joints where no tap is made from bus the
opening in the molded cover should be at
the top.
(d) Secure flexible cover with self-
locking fasteners furnished. Joint insula
tion is now completed.
(e) Replace all covers previously re
moved.
(3) In unit substations, the connection bars
should be assembled in the transition com
partment (Fig. 20 and 21) and the connec
tions at the transformer terminals greased,
taped and painted as indicated above. The
conduit for secondary circuits should also
be assembled in or below the transition
compartment.
BUS DUCT
Bus ducts connecting between groups of
metal-clad swltchgear, or between metal-
clad swltchgear and other apparatus, should
be installed as shown on the arrangement
drawings furnished with the ducts. Sup
ports should be provided as indicated on
the drawings.
All Joints in the bus, including adjust
able Joints, should be assembled and in
sulated as described above for main buses.
Adjustable Joints are provided in long runs
of bus duct to allow for variations in
building construction, etc. These Joints
should M loosened before installation of the
duct, then ti^tened after being set in the
position retted by the fixed points at the
ends ot the ducL
Outdoor bus ducts must be gasketed at
the Joints between shipping sections. Coat
both sides of the gasket and the flanges of
both duct sections with Sterling U310 var
nish before assembly. Bolt the two duct
sections together, then fasten roof cap in
place over the Joint.
Outdoor bus ducts of the 13.8 kv class
are provided with heaters. Connect these
heaters in accordance with the wiring
diagrams furnished with the equipment
before energizing the bus duct.
PRIMARY CABLES
The primary cable connections in lu-
door swltchgear are reached by removing
the rear bolted covers. In outdoor switch-
gear the hinged Instrument panel, if present,
must be swung open and the bolted covers
behind it removed.
Before any primary cable connections
are made, the cables should be identified
to indicate their phase relationship with the
swltchgear connections. This is necessary
to insure that motors will rotate in the
proper direction and that the phaserotation
is the same when interconnecting two differ
ent sources of power.
 Metal-cladSwltchgear GEH-1802

There are two common methods of PiriMAL AB0WI19 JOtHTS

maldng primary cable connections: TO MANC iCA' VtiMtf
IVKliC FtkUnawfTMCOMPOVMb.
JC 9CMwrPl
(a) Potfaeads (see Figures 40 and 41) ^vfrrtcAL Met
are used when It is desirra to hermetically
seal the end of the cable to make a moist
ure-proof connection between the cable and
the switchgear bus. A pothead also pre
vents seeping of oil from the end of oil
impregnated varnish cambric or paper in BUS OAK

sulted cable. J . c
bus AA»'

(b) Clamp type terminals and wiping VftTKAl

reto VHDC*
4NSUiATU(6
sleeve or cable clamp. C0MHcaAi4 > r - VAtr ftarrcH
tiijA.—' J TA^-C
Acnfru
In all cases carefully follow the cable > Mrs 04*4
manufocturer's recommendations for in SawiCI SAvicr

stallation of the tj^e of cable being used, riLiCB

as well as the instructions contained here etmcH
BA«4
in. See Figs. 43 and 44. If the cable is
aluminum, the conductor surface must be
carefully abraided and the cable covered
liberally with a Joint compound recom I
mended by the cable manufacturer.
OOTTOM rtre rtoTR3N
.TAft
_ POTHEADS SCCTIOh AA SCCTIOH'AA'
CO
BW OA
3 Potbeads are mounted on an adapter
3 plate extending across the width of the ewinA«»

<f metal-clad unit as shown in Fig. 10. Where

^ necessary the adapter plate is split into
two parts to facilitate the installation of the
£ potheads.

" ClAM V/Ol'tf

Three-Conductor Potheads

nCTIOHAA'
The following description applies to the rvcATICAk AtlKS
CND COttMCCTiON
installation of a three-conductor lead-
sheathed cable with a wiping sleeve cable
entrance fitting on the pothead. This is the
t^e most generally used. Instructions for Fig. 25 Method of Making Bus Bar Connections
installation of other ^es are included in
the text following:
(a) Remove the wiping sleeve and cut
the tapered end at a point where the cable
will enter it freely, and file off sharp edges.
Temporarily reassemble on the pothead.
(b) Train the cable In front of the TAP£D
pothead allowing it to extend about two S/feui.o e>v£^
inches above the top of the porcelain bush 3 ' BA/f
ings. Handle with care and avoid sharp
bending which might damage the insulation.
Mark a point on the lead sheath of the
cable about 1-1/2 inch above the bottom of
the wiping sleeve. /f£/rwL ir£ baa

(c) Remove the pothead from the unit,

disassemble the wiping sleeve and sl4> it OUXSBAL
and its misket over 'the cable as shown in
Figure 27.
''fv.

(d) Remove the lead sheath from the

cable to the point marked in operation "b"
as shown in Figures 28 and 29 proceeding Jf.'w/0£ /O AO/a X ZOZ AABB£0
as follows: £0A y St/S
BA/tS e/S£ A ^ jOOC/BAB 77//C/f/^£SS Oy£B BOAT
First, make a cut around the cable TZOZ . BOB 6 'BBBS fse B/T£A A/ZO OVS/tAAfB/r/B Af/SBAf
half through the sheath at the reference yo Af/L. MB-' X Z9 ' .r zoz BAB / ' -riASB BBOCBBO
point. Second, split the sheath iengthwise
/////OA/Y/AL AfA/Z/yeB. BOuAf"' £*•)
tietween the cut and the cable, holding the 7-aP£ boa 4-'BAAS AAB Ca AOAaS BOA
cutting tool at an angle to the cable radius & ' SAAS.)
to avoid damaging the insulation. Third,
remove the sheath by catching the split
edge with pliers and pulling directly away
from the cable axis.

Clean and tin the outside of the

lead sheath for about 3 inches and bell out
the end of the lead sheath. Fig. 26 i3.8 KV Taped Joints

21
 ¥
VI
(e) Remove the belt and interphase in
sulation down to within 1-1/2 inches of the
lead sheath as shown in Figure 30. The
last few layers should be torn off to avoid
damaging the individual conductor insula
tion. To reinforceandprotecttheconductor
insulation, wrap two layers of half lapped
varnished cambric or irrathene tape over
the factory insulation.
(f) Disassemble insulator support plate
from pothead body. The insulators should
not be removed from the support plate
t>ecause they are factory assembled for
proper compression of their gaskets. Place
pothead t>ody over cable and then fan out the
conductors into iq)proximately the final
position, as shown in Figs. 31, 32. The
middle conductor should be bowed slightly
for final adjustment of length. Avoid
sharp bends and damage to the insulation,
particularly at the crotch.
(g) For system voltage above 7500
volts it is recommended that stress relief
cones be built up when single-conductor or
three-conductor shielded cable Is used.
Construct stress relief cones in accordance
with the recommendations of the cable
manufacturer, SeeFiguredlforonerecoffl-
mended method. On lower voltage cables,
belling out the end of the lead sheath ordi
narily provides sufficient stress relief.
(Stress cone material will not be furnished
with pothead).
(h) Bolt pothead body to metal-clad
adapter plate. Shape conductors into final
position, then cut off each conductor to fit
its terminal.
(i) Remove pothead terminals from
Insulators. Remove two Inches of insulation
from the endofeachconductor and assemble
pothead terminals to c^les.
(j) Assemble gaskets where shown in
Fig. 41 and t»lt insulator support plate and
wiping sleeve to pothead body. Compress
gaskets by a partial turn on each bolt suc
cessively until the gasketls uniformly com-
preesed to dimensions shown In Fig. 41.
Check to be sure the terminal studs are
seated properly on their gaskets, then
&
screw contact nut in place after asMoahil
top gaskets and washers. See FtgurM
33 and 34.
(k) Make a plumber's wiped joist
tween the wiping sleeve and the lead sbia
of the cable, as shown in FlguresSSaad
(I) Remove the 3/4"filling plug ta M. j?f
pothead body, the pipe plugs in the
the studs and In the insulator supportPiaWj -
Insert a stand pipeand ftmnel in the fUIttJ ,
hole of suXficlent height to extend abcjf*
top of the studs as shown In Figure Jj* •
Heat #227 or ll332compousdtO^.;: T
pouring temperature, 165 C. Do nworw^ -
heat compound as htgher tcmperalurW rfl v
injure cable insulation and aiso rw« •
excessive shrinkage of the comp^
cooling. Before and while SS--
pothead body and stand pipe to prevent
den chiUing of compound which mayp^2
in the formation ofair voids, "rae pwaj^
may be warmed by playing ablowtor ,
the body, taking care that no V
reaches the porcelains or gaskets.
 Metal-Clad Swltchgear GEH-1802

IMO Of COTTON TAPE oy^'C /'MCg-t.Af^ AS SAcWM

snp Of i-sc: OR v.c.
^ \ COnoN TPPC
I ?02ORy,C.
Lrp~Topf ««ojt«p
eoKTihCT wrr |
✓: cflfffR «
/j»iwH(Wf V¥ASHMn\
^ //^e»p ptfKftuitn
^IMSUtJkTM
f f I- T«?

L?lllii.'4:+.'H f F«Cft«U*C
rCUAM^

9*tiii N'
^tnPt Ui

ItM3UUn^LA«RS(W01B 1) I PAIKT
IMS9WTI0K 1-202 ICOTTOH V.C. I APPLt OKE Komntin^f
1£V1L WOTE 2 WOTK S MOTE 0 COAT LIBERALLY SUAffXC.-*
' .inish v<tm le Hik tnsuLOTin; roPE
•>z.fr£r.s ii-Afi. u/.,/» Er£«Li»i?
U3I0 k»*4'/.S/T'
P
_#ui.o u» wr™ WMii. Ikc,'-•»*•. ncj^sn.
OF .LNLO UP TO NOV. TETiMOFK TAP&
THAK ORiaiHAk INSULATION.
I *202 ft V-C. • Om Uyof. wound 2/3 Up requires 3 tumo around Oar
|A em vtdch of Upe. On« layer thtckneas le 3 tlviea t«pe thickness. i COPnm BRNO TO Rl, CUT iTT AN ANSLS
COTTOK • One layer, wound 1/2 lap requiree 2 turns around bar in . « IS« C SoLOCRtO TO eopPCROHlKLO
^ wUih of Upe. One layer thleloieas is 2 tlses tape thlckneea. "•TAPC ON CASLl. BRAIO TO B. WOUNB
TI.NT ANO Cuoei. All TURN. OP _
9on fi OAAIO TO SC .OLDCRCO ALONO TWO
Imthene 1202, width 1 1/2 thickness O.OlO". Keep tension on LINC. PARALLEL TO CABLC TO
ae#e St all tlaes while applying. PR.VCNT aCPARATION.

•PB 5i
cotton ABAIPIO (#63Q-ll6) width 1 1/2" thickness 0.007". CtfT WI.IM.y ^^OPPCA BNAIO To O. WOUNO AAOUNO
.lO.^ To/ M.TALLIC BINO.K AND SOLOERCO
M l fti a« e*/ SOTN TO BINO&R AND LtAD SHEATH*
famished esabrlo A22A11A (#992) width 1 1/2*, thickness /
PtOlf*.
usci.AL...E.ee>iPou<o,As furrismu.
TO FILL POTHCAO AFTCP. HAKINa
kCAC SKCATH eONNECTIONS.

Fig. 39 Inaulation of Connectioo Bars Fig. HO Single-Conductor Fothead Kith Stress Cone

Pour until the compound ^ipears ply one layer of white cotton Upe, hall ing nut. This requires that the packing nut
•I Ah lasttlator support plate plug holes. lap, as a binder. and armor clamp be listened on the cable
Wssrt plugs and continue lUling until It before the assembly of the pothead is com
9A*>n •( holes at the top of terminal (4) Over the white cotton Upe, pleted.
Mm. Insert plugs and continue pouring brush a good coat of varnish (11-310 for
. vWls the pothead and compound cools to 15 lev and U-311 for 5 kv). Varnish may Cable Sheath or Conduit Grounding
on air Tolas which might form. be thinned if necessary, with Xylene, DSB9.
Where three-conductor conducting
_ When the pothead has coole^ re- Single-Conductor Potheads sheath or shielded cables are used, or
•MW filling pipe and Insert plug. Clean where non-conducting sheath cable is car
• .f. Ml compound which might have overflowed The procedure for insUUatlon of sin ried in meUlllc ducts or conduits, it is
M tbe outside of the porcelains. gle-conductor potheads ts In general the usually desirable that both ends ofthecable
same as described for three-conductor shcatn or conduit be grounded directly to
• ' OM^Tlhige
Wwtaf^case as outlined under"Connec-
. .(m) Assemble potheadconnectlonbars.
18). See Pig. 38. Insulate
potheads.
Cable Entrances Other Than Wiping Sleeves
the awitchgear ground bus or structure or
other apparatus. In some cases this may be
•"••etloos as lollows:
accomplished by the mounting of potheads
Stuffing box cable entrance fittings are
or terminating fittings on a grounded sup
(1) Fill all cavities around bolts used for cables other than lead sheathed.
port. When such mounting cannot be ar
*''h Duxseal compound to form These fittings may be provided with or ranged, a separate ground wire should be
connected between the cable eheath or con
25^Sli*''i^"^'"Bipreventing without armor clamps as necessary.
duit and the swltchgear ground bus.
i ^leeompoundlsnotanlnsulatlnB
222 should not be used lor that The fitting consists of acastandmach
ined base, one or more rubber or neoprene Where single conductor conducting
washers, and apacklngnutwhichcompress- sheath cables are used, the same procedure
Wrap with 1202 Irrathene tapepro- es the washers around the cable. These should be observed, except that only one
WMA. as shown In Pigs. 30, 40 and il, the parts should be assembled on the cable In the end of the sheath should be grounded. This
S5? ,I, .layers depending on the voltage above order, with the base nearest to the also applies to single conductor non-con-
•Cn
Sfl .ywlea, ^^"'P^ent. Where layers
apply additional there a?e
to
pothead. The packing nut should be tightened
alter the cable is located In the potheadand
ducting sheath cables in separate metallic
conduits. Where three phases are carried
by single conductors In a common metallic
Sf^cta. Insulation of the before any compound is poured.
conduit, grounding procedure should be the
'S) Over the Insulating Upe, ap Where an armor clamp is required, it same as that described (or three conductor
ts usually made an integralpartof the pack cables.
 GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
t ut4VLXti*nTmtm
tw I* <*£ #w*«# »n#*w*
nwO«*«#UlWE\
•
- T""
llMMtfan \ .1
• rituKA wl** #•••«*«
fvctatc-
»M« if«
\\
••••«»«"-•««
TERMINATION WITHOUT POTHEAD
SINGLE-CONDUCTOR
1. Cut cable to proper length.
2. Remove jacket and cable tape for
distance of A plus B plus 3 Inches, plus
length to be inserted into terminal lug,
3. Unwrap shielding tape to point M,
cut and solder it in place avoiding exces
sive heat on insulation. Remove outer
semi-conducttog tane for game dintMce.
Thoroughly clean surface from which the
semi-conducting tape was removed.
4. Remove insulation and inner semi
conducting tape to expose conductor for
distance of one inch plus length to be in
serted into terminal lug.
5. Attach terminal lug to conductor.
If the cable is aluminum, the conductor
surface must be carefuUy abraided and the
cable covered liberally with a joint com
pound recommended by the cable manu
facturer.
6. Taper insulation for one inch as
shown.
7. Apply end seaL Clean surface over
which splicing tape Is to be applied and
f \ coat with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive cement
24
#*ni^er«**yeWF»<«i*ii^W4»»i«W w w ^ <
fX <ma» flPiX CMtA-OkfOiM tOfCAfta O*X 0«—II'^ *
iwpewwnuy ftKT e-fxiwetMit <
«TC« eRM<««nM fll*MMBiPMMIk MM
OMC OM M m«S MNCCD IVMAM 4M M CMOVGM
TT" avrwuiv u v
'tanw
TS^
VC ,ij : /
^' /A
" Tr/ .'Sc—
ii;
AHMiewfW rPMCi
tfi;' •
jgvrAi*
\../
Fig. 41 Triple-Conductor Pothead
or equivalent When solvent evaporates, lap wrappings to point N and spot solder.
build up with splicing tape GB8380 or Terminate the braid by cutting 1/2 inch
equivalent, as shown. beyond soldering point. Turn down and
solder loose ends to preceding turns. Wrap
four to six turns m No. 19 AWG tinned
Dimensions in Inches copper wire around shielding braid and
solder. Solder all turns of braid together
Rated
kv
A along three lengthwise lines equally spaced
around braided surface.
Phase to Phase
Indoors
Dry Locations B 10. Solder ground strip over shielding
tape near cable covering. Cover stress
2 to 5 5 2 cone with one layer No. 33 Scotch tape,
6 to 10 9 3 half lapped. Obtain a smooth wrapping
11 to IS U 4 but do not stretch t ^ more than neces
sary. Add two layers of splicing tape.
8. Build stress cone. Clean cable sur 11. Pencil jacket for 1/2 inch as shown.
face and coat with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive Clean surface. Take particular care in
cement or equivalent When solvent evi cleaning outside jacket surface in order to
rates, build up cone with splicing tape GE- entirely remove black wax finish. Coat
8380 or equivalent, for length B plus B. with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive cement
Between points M and P, tape is applied so or equivalent. When solvent evaporates,
that wrapped thickness at N is equal to 75% apply splicing tape GE8380 or equivalent
of the original insulation thickness - and and make sheath seal as shown on drawing.
so that the cone tapers to zero thickness at Apply one layer No. 33 Scotch tape or
points M and P. Apply one layer No. 33 equivalent, h^ lapped. Obtain a smooth
Scotch tape or equivalent, half lapped. Ob wrapping but do not stretch tape more than
tain a smooth wrapping but do not stretch necessary.
tape more than necessary.
12. Over entire termination, apply two
9. Pass a turn of ti^tly drawn braid layers of No. 33 Scotch tape or equivalent,
around eiqiosed portion of shielding tape at half lapped, in manner to shed water. Ob
point M and solder in place. Then apply tain a smooth wrapping but do not stretch
shielding braid in tightly dniwn 1/6 inch tape more than necessary.
 Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802

TVC M ftCMBWCt
vmtna))

MULE WMunON

NO. aa SCOTCH tanc

OH COUIV.

SHLICIM TlHE«.e.(SSO
OH COUN

SHIELDINO BHAlO
(HAND HHPI.IEDI

.NO.lt UO T»*CO
caNNtn NiNc

•0 1) teolCN
+.-J
•( \ \
1Nf< ON lOVIV
casce iMELOiNO
Tare

NO. aa SCOTCH thhe

OR CQUfV

tNLlCiNO INNfOCtMO
•MOt
ON levn
OeOTCM TMf
l-f, SHiiciNO TARE oasaso
OH EOUIV
' ON l»NV.

SHOVNOatAMWCNT
rftaitt HEHSCH

Fig. 13 Teralnation Witheut Pothaad

Fig. U Rear View of Unit Showing
Through-Type Current Transforsers
TERMINATION WITHOUT POTHEAD
MULTI-CONDUCTOR
Malce termtnatlon aa indicated lor sin
gle-conductor except • substitute the loUow-
ing for paragraphs 10, 11 and 12;
Pencil Jacket 1/2 inch. Clean sur
face over which sheath moisture seal Is
to be applied. Take particular care In
cleaning outside jacket surface In order
to entirely remove black wax finish. Coat
with G.B, No. ASOPeS adhesive cement or
equivalent Allow to dry. Apply splicing
tape GE8360 or equivalent to make moisture
seal as shown. This Is done by starting
wrapping tape near end of jacket and wrap
ping over pound wires for 1-1/2 inches.
Bend pound wires out and back over taping
just applied and continue applying lapped
layers of tape to completion of moisture
seal Including a complete tape seal in
crotch formed between the three conductors.
Bond and pound the ground wires.
For a multi-conductor cable nothaving
ground wires, the individual terminations
should have pounding strips applied as for
^a single-conductor termination. These
Single-Conductor
grounding strips are to be joined together
to a common ground. This common pound
must ^en be pounded.
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORM
ERS (THROUGH-TYPE)
Through-type current transformers
(see Fig. 42) are furnished where specified
for sensitive protection against pound
faults. These transformers are normally
Installed in a horizontal position directly
above or below theprimary cable terminals,
so that the primary cable or cablescanpass
through them. One transformer Isrequired
for each three-phase circuit.
Where armored cable isused.thearm-
or must be terminated and pounded before
the cable passes Uirough the transformer.
Armor clamps are furnished for this pur
pose when specified.
When lead or other conducting sheath
cable, or cable with shielding tape or braid
Is used, it is recommended that the sheath or
shield be pounded solidly to the switchgear
pound bus. The pound lead should be bond
ed to the sheath or shield on the side of the
current transformer awayfromtheprimary
terminals. In cases where the pound cannot
be applied before the cable passes throu^
the transformer, bond the lead to the sheath
or shield between the transformer and the
primary terminals. The pound conductor
must then be passed back along the cable
path through the current transformer before
being connnected to the ground bus.
Where potheads are used in units pro
vided with pound fault current transform
ers, the potbead mountings must be insulated
from pound.
CA8I.E
^OACNET
Fig. Id Termination Without Pothead
Hvlti-Conductor
CONTROLCABLES
When control conduits enter the unit
from below, the conduit should not ex
tend more than 4 Inches above the floor.
The control cables may be pulled through
the conduits before or after the switch-
gear Is Installed, whichever is more con
venient
Connect the cables to the terminal
blocks In accordance with the wiring dia-
pams furnished for the requisition.
If the control conduits enter from
above, drill the top and bottom covers
of the frmt enclosure wiring trough to
suit the conduits. Fasten the conduits
to Uie t»ttom cover with locknuts.
The cables from the control power
source to the switchgear should be large
enough to avoid excessive voltage drop
when the circuit breakers are operated.
See testing Instructions.
Where units have been split for ship
ment, any control or other secondary leads
which must connect across the split will
be arranged with terminal blocks in the
cross trough or convenient side sheet
80 that the wires can be reconnected.
The wires will be cut to length and form
ed before being folded back so that a
minimum of time will be required lor
reconnecting them.
 GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear
GROUND BUS
The ground bus Is bolted to the rear
or the frame near the bottom. It is ar
ranged so that connections to the station
ground can be made in any unit. Where the
equipment is shipped in more than one group,
the sections of »ound bus must be con
nected by using the splice plates furnished
-witt the equipment. Apply grease and as
semble joints as outlined under "Connec
tions" (Page 20). Ground bus connections
are made in the lower portion of the cable
entrance compartment. The switchgear
ground bus must be connected to the station
ground bus by a conductor having a current
carrying capacity equal to that of the
switchgear ground bus. It is very important
that the equipment be adequately grounded
to protect the operator from Injury when
short circuits or other abnormal occur
rences take place and to insure that all
parts of the equipment, other than live
parts, are at ground potential.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
It will be the responsibility of the pur
chaser to provide suitable lightning ar
After the equipment has been installed
and all connections made, it should be
tested and inspected before putting in ser
vice. Although the equipment and devices
have been completely tested at the factory,
a final field test should be made to be sure
that the equipment has been properly in-
' ^ stalled and that all connections are correct
and have not become loose in transporta
tion. The primary equipment should be
completely de-energized while the tests
are in progress.
Directions for testing devices such as
relays, instruments and meters are given
in the instruction book furnished for each
device. The settings of the protective re
lays must be coordinated with the other
relays on the system and therefore these
relays must be set by the purchaser. Gen
eral instructions on setting the relays are
The operation of metal-clad switch
gear is similar to that of other types
except that it provides maximum safety
to toe operator and the feature of easy
removal and replacement of toe circuit
breaker.
All circuit breaker removable ele
ments of toe same type and rating which
have duplicate wiring may be interchanged.
BREAKER POSITIONING
To place toe circuit breaker in oper
ating position, proceed as given below:
Clean contacts and cover with a very
thin coating of Contact Lubricant D50H47.
Push the breaker into the unit until it
rests against the stop.
26
resters to protect the switchgear from
damage due to lightning. The General
Electric Company's recommendations as
to the types of circuits requiring lightning
protection, and a list of recommended
lightning arresters, are contained in Bul
letin GER-141. copies of which are avail
able upon request.
DOOR ALIGNMENT
If for any reason it is necessary to
realign the doors of metal-clad switch-
gear during installation the procedure given
in the following paragraphs should be fol
lowed.
After checking that the switchgear
is level and plumb as described above,
start at either end of the switchgear line
up and realign each door individually as
required.
The top of each door should be level
with the adjacent doors; the sides of each
door plumb; the surface of each door flush
with the adjacent doors; and the space
TESTING AND INSPECTION
given in the relay instruction books. Spec
ial Instruction books are furnished for
complicated automatic equipments, des
cribing the sequence of operation of the
devices required to perform the desired
function.
When transformers are furnished to
supply the control power, the primary
taps should be selected so that the control
voltage indicated on the wiring diagram
is obtained on the secondary of the trans
former. When a battery is used to supply
the control power, the cables from the
battery to the switchgear should be large
enough to avoid excessive voltage drop.
The voltage at the terminals of the breaker
closing coils, when the breaker is being
closed, should not be less than 112.5 volts
for 125 volt coils and 225 volts for 250
volt coils.
OPERATION
To raise toe breaker, operate toe
elevating control selector switch just in
side the door on toe right hand side to
"Raise". A clutch handle just above toe
elevating motor is then pulled forward
until it closes the clutch limit switch and
engages the motor to raise toe breaker
in toe housing. The clutch handle is held
in this position until a limit switch on toe
structure opens to stop the motor at toe
end of toe iq>ward travel of the breaker.
The selector switch must not be used to
energize or interrupt toe motor circuit
at any time. See Fig. 22.
To lower the breaker, proceed the
same as for raising except operate selector
switch to "Lower".
The clutch must be held in toe en
gaged position; otherwise, a spring wiU
between adjacent doors equalized to per
mit their free swing and present a neat
appearance. The door stops should be ad
justed to permit a door swing of approx
imately 1050.
Doors may be raised or lowered ver
tically, or moved forward or backward
horizontally, by loosening the hinge mount-
ting nuts on the left side sheet and shifting
the hinge and door assembly as allowed
by the slotted holes in the hinge.
Doors may be shifted to the right or
left by adding or removing washers or
shims from between the hinge and side
sheet.
Doors may be plumbed by slightly
bending the appropriate hinges. To do
this, open the door and insert a drift
pin in either of the two holes in the
hinge. Pulling forward on the drift pin
will move the door to the right, and push
ing back will move the door to the left.
Adjust each hinge individually as required
to plum the door.
The operation of the breaker with its
associated devices may be tested in the
unit while the equipment is energized by
use of the test coupler which is furnished.
Lower toe breaker to the test or down
position. Attach the test coupler to con
nect the breaker secondary disconnecting
device to that on toe structure.
High potential tests to check the in-
tegrify of toe Insulation are not necessary
if the installation Instructions in this book
are carefully foUowed. If toe purchaser
wishes to make high potential tests the
voltage should not exceed 75% of toe AIEE
factory test voltages.
Potential transformers and control
power transformers must be disconnected
during high voltage testing.
return it to its normal position opening
the electrical circuit to the motor.
The breaker may be raised and low-
ered by an emergency hand wrench which
can be inserted after removing the motor.
The motor is removed by unlatching
the motor assembly from toe support and
disconnecting toe motor lead plug<
After removing toe motor, pull the
clutch forward and insert the manual wrench
into the end of toe clutch coupling. The
breaker must be tripped before the wrench
can be inserted and held in toe clutch
coupling.
TRANSFER TRUCKS
Circuit breaker transfer trucks are
furnished with outdoor metal-clad switch-

gear to facilitate moving of circuit break
ers from unit to unit or to maintenance
,areas. The platform at the front end of
'the transfer truck is adjustable in height.
See Fig. 8, view A, for instructions for
adjustment. The truck is equipped with
two latches, one to hold the breaker on
the truck and one to hold the truck to the
met^-clad swltchgear unit. Both latches
engage automatically, and both are re-
leas^ by a single T-shaped foot pedal
on the rear of the truck. Depressing the
left side of the pedal unlatches the truck
from the swltchgear tmlt, and depressing
the ri^t side of the pedal unlatches the
breaker from the truck.
SPACE HEATERS
Space heaters are provided in all
outdoor equipment in order to keep the
inside iemperature several degrees higher
than that outside. Heaters are also fur
nished for indoor equipment when it is
known that abnormal atmospheric condi
A regular maintenance schedule should
be established to obtain thebestserviceand
reliability from the swltchgear. Plant
operating and local conditions will dictate
the frequency of inspection required. For
specific information regarding the mainten
ance of devices, such as circuit breakers,
relays, meters, etc., refer to the separate
instruction book furnished for each device.
The inspection cabinet, which is furnished,
provides a convenient means for maintaining
the circuit breakers. Under normal condi
tions the protective relays do not operate,
therefore, it is important to check the oper
ation of these devices regularly.
A permanent record of all maintenance
work should be kept, the degree of detail
depending on the operating conditions. In
any event, it will be a valuable reference
for subsequent maintenance work and for
station operation. It is recommended that
the record include reports of tests made,
the condition of equipment and repairs and
adjustments that were made.
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE RE
MOVED OR ANY DOORS OPENED WHICH
PERMIT ACCESS TO THE PRIMARY CIR
CUITS, IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE CIR
CUIT BE DE-ENERGIZED.
The primary circuits of metal-clad
swltchgear are insulated in order to reduce
the size of the equipment. However, this
insulation, except in one or two instances.
1. RENEWAL PARTSSHOULD BE ORDEREDFROMTHE MEDIUM VOLTAGESWITCHGEAR DEPARTMENT.
2. ALWAYS SPECIFY THE REQUISITION NUMBER ON WHICH THE EQUIPMENTWAS ORIGINALLY
FURNISHED.
3. SPECIFY THE QUANTITY, REFERENCE NUMBER, DESCRIPTION AND THIS BULLETIN NUMB^
4. STANDARD HARDWARE, SUCH AS SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, ETC., ISNOT LISTED. SUCH
ITEMS SHOULD BE PURCHASED LOCALLY.
5. FOR PRICES, REFER TO THE NEAREST OFFICE OF THE GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY.
6. IF INSULATING MATERIAL, SUCH AS TAPE, VARNISH, COMPOUND, ETC., IS REQUIRED, IT MUST
BE SPECIFIED SEPARATELY.
tions exist at the installation, or when
specified by the purchaser.
By maintaining a slight temperature
differential, the heaters help facilitate dry
ing and prevent condensation and the re
sulting corrosion and insulation deter
ioration which might occur.
Heaters are normally located at the
stdes of the breaker units, a few inches
above the floor. In auxiliary compart
ments with a single rollout, the heaters
will be in the space above the rollout.
In auxiliary compartments with two roll
outs, the heater will be on one of the
rollouts, for greater accessibility. Heat
ers may also be located in superstructure
compartments, transition compartments,
and in bus ducts, if the operating con
ditions require them.
Before energizing the heaters, be sure
the power source is of the proper voltage,
frequency, and phase arrangement, and
MAINTENANCE
requires a certain amount of air gap be
tween phases and to ground to complete the
Insulation. Inserting any object in this air
space, when equipment is energized, wheth
er it be a tool or a part of the body, may
under certain conditions, in effect, short
circuit this air gap and may cause a break
down in the primary circuit to ground and
cause serious damage or injury or both.
Care should be exercised in the main
tenance and checking procedures that acci
dental tripping or operation is not initiated.
The swltchgear structure and connec
tions should be given the following overall
maintenance at least annually.
1. Thoroughly clean the equipment, re
moving all dust and other accumulations.
Wipe clean ihe buses and supports. Inspect
the buses and connections carefully for
evidence of overheating or weakening of
the insulation.
2. Measure the resistance to ground
and between phases of the insulation of
buses and connections. Since definite
limits cannot be given for satisfactory in
sulation resistance values, a record must
be kept of the reading, weakening of the
insulation from one maintenance period
to the next can be recognized from the re
corded readings. The readings should be
taken under similar conditions each time if
possible, and the record should include the
temperature and humidity.
RENEWAL PARTS
ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
Metal-Clad Swltchgear GEH-1802
is connected in accordance with the wiring
diagrams furnished wiih the equipment.
Also, be sure to remove all cartons and
miscellaneous material packed inside the
units before energizing the heaters.
Heaters should be visually inspected
several times a year to make sure they
are operating properly.
It' is recommended that the heaters
be energized at aU times and that ther-
mostatic control not be used. If thermo-
static control is used, the contacts of
the thermostat should be set to close be
tween 95 F and 100 F on falling temper
ature, de-energizing the heaters only when
strong sunli^t beats on the swltchgear.
Under no condition should a differential
thermostet be used to control the heaters
because under conditions of extremely high
humidity this type of thermostat will not
operate at all times to keep the beaters on
enough to prevent condensation in the
swltchgear.
High poteniial tests are not required,
but if it seems advisable, based on the
insulation resistance tests or after repairs,
the test voltage should not exceed 75% of
the AIEE factory test voltage. Potential
transformers and control power transform
ers must be disconnected cfuringhi^ voltage
testing.
3. Clean elevating mechanism and lub
ricate jack screws and gears with lubri
cant G. E. Co. #D50H15 (Atlantic Ref. Co.
#52 or equal).
4. Check primary disconnectingdevice
contacts for signs of abnormal wear or over
heating. Clean contacts with silver polish.
Discoloration of the silvered surfaces is not
ordinarily harmful unless atmospheric con
ditions cause deposits such as sulphides on
the contacts. If necessary the deposits can
be removed with a good grade of silver polish.
Before replacing breaker, apply a thin
coat of contact lubricant D50H47 to breaker
studs for lubrication.
5. Check to see that all anchor bolts
and bolts in the structure are tight. Check
tightness and continuity of all control con
nections and wiring.
6. If the swltchgear is equipped with
heaters, check to see that all heaters are
energized and operating.
27
GEH-1802 Metal-Clad Swltchgear

PRlMAftY DISCONNECT DEVICES

(SEE FIG. NO. 10)

DESCRIPTION

Front Primary Disconnect Device

Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
Connections
Rear Primary Disconnect Device
lAssembly, 3 Pole, C
Connections '..J L_ 1 l» - \

u
ti 1 rI •
\\
NOTE: Insulating material required for
Ref. Nos. 5 and 6 will be furnished
with order.

I -*.v,

.T

\J_I8
lI

Fig. ilSA View Showing Elevating Hech- Conplete Left Hand (Ref. Ko. ll Complete Right Hand (Ref. No. 2)
anisn Motor and Control Unit
Fig. 15 Elevating Mechanism for H-26 Eguipments Rated 250 »va or less
POSITIVE MECHANICAL INTERLOCK and H-36 Equipments Rated I2O0A 500 nva or less
(FIG. NO. 45A)
REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

3 Complete positive mechanical

Interlock assembly
Elevating mechanism motor
(I15-V d-c)
Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-c)
Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-cj
Spring only
 —I

111

Fi9> •>< Ingle Bracket end Chain Drive

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

Bracket
Roller
Retainer
Chain

?-^l

Fig. SO Bus Supports

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

laolaling barrier support angle

Rear isolating barrier
Intermediate isolating barrier
111 Front isolating larrier
Isolating barrier clip
Isolating barrier support
Front support clip (not shown)
Front intermediate support
Intermediate support
Rear intermediate support
Rear support clip (not shown)
Lower intermediate support
Lower Intermediate support clip
Intermediate clamp assembly
Fig. US Shutter Mechanism Assembly H-2S (supersedes but does not replace
Rel. Nos. 31 - 35)

Fig. SI Door Handles and Locks

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

P^l
Panel locking handle
Panel handle
Door locking handle
Door handle
Socket
Fig. 19 Shutter Mechanism Assembly H-36
GEH-1802 Metel-clad Swltchgear

LOCATION RATINC DESCRIPTION

38 Int. X200A. 1 connection bar, down

39 Int. • 1200A. 1 connection bar, up
40 end 1200A. 1 connection bar, down
41 end 1200A. 1 connection bar, up
42 int. 1200A. no connection bar
43 end 1200A. no connection bar
44 int. 1600A. 1 connection bar, down
45 int. 1600A. 1 connection bar, up
46 end 1600A. 1 connection bar, down
47 end 1600A. 1 connection bar, up
48 int. 1600A. no connection bar
49 end 1600A. no connection bar
50 Int. 2000A. 1 connection liar, down
51 int. 2000A. 1 connection bar, up
52 end 2000A. 1 connection bar, down
53 end 2000A. 1 connection bar, up
54 Int. 2000A. no connection bar
55 end 2000A. no connection bar
56 int. 2000A. 2 connection bars, dowi
57 int. 2000A. 2 connection bars, up
58 end 2000A. 2 connection bars, dowi
59 end 2000A. 2 connection bars, up
59A specify Insulating boot
59B Plastic rivet for boot

Fio. S2 Bus Connection Box

[<I.I6 or 13.8 kv Units]

60 64

FI9. S3 Bus Connection Boot

(V.IS kv Units Only)

REF.NO. DESCRIPTION

Limit Switch SBl type (upper)

Limit switch SBl type (lower)
Light switch
Keyless receptacle
Duplex receptacle
Strip heater
Fuse block, open type
Fuse block, dead front
Limit switch, mercury type
Complete secondary disconnect device
FtB.45A Complete stationary auxiliary
switch and mectonism

Fig. SI Wiring Devices end Hiscellsneous Parts

 GEB-ian
«fip.wo
—-~._^scRin
tmiT

^rrler
J^rrier
Contact
Shutter support
G'-ound 8h^
9-55 F«.e«olia„t„„,j Ground conuct
F"raine
Support
Support
Support
Carriage
92 Arc .Quencher
Quencher
I Insulator

B^rr,^'^ support
support
""^LOUT wj
Barrier
^.T. barrier
Gutter
gutter support
Sfte=><
£Ssssta;^,
Contact
Ground shoe
Support

'• Tr.nsfor„,ar Ronout Unit Si^pport

Support
Cover
Carriage
CONTROL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT IRJIT
176 Sf®® <"PPor;
"7 autter*'^®'''
Transformer
Contact
•"NtCTJ
Contact
Contact
Shutter support
Ground shoe
Ground contact
Cover
Frame
Support
Support

/f
2S1AS- Support
Carriage
Barrier
TfMjfomer Rollout Unit SINGLE & TRIPLE-CONDUCTtW POTHEADS
Triple-conductor pofMaul assembly
Body
Insulators and support
Wiping sleeve .. .
IM
Gaskete for trlple-csvfcsnor pothead
Terminal
Contact nul
Washer
Palnut (3/4 In. - 12)
Pipe plug |3/^4 In. sW-;
f A i n u b vv/-s ^

Pipe plug (1/8 in Btd-J assembly

Single-conductor potb«»'
Body and insi^tor pothead
Gaskets for 8lngle-c"«w»»
»s«« -

Wiping Sleeve entrance

Adapter for mechan1o-l e»
tlttings

7"^
uV
 Metal-clad Swltchtl"l' r GEH-1802

REF,NO. DESCRIPTION
85 FUSE ROLLOUT UNIT
\,(.."'l.'\.,Y"-!-rii>.H--+-14------1-7'i" 75 Fuse support (upper)
89 r.1--1.......11---4-92 67 Fuse support (lower)

1u..-l���r
82 7 7
78
Shutter
Transformer
79 Barrier
80 Barrier
81 Contact
l-4-+4-,1.\..\-87 82 Shutter support
BB
83 Ground shoe
86 84 Ground contact
85 Cover
86 Frame
87 Support
fig, 55 Fuse Rollout Unit 88 Support
89 Support
90 Carriage
91 Arc Quencher
92 Insulator
�
106

...
.....
...
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER HOLLOUT UNIT

k:fJ: '"
94 Barrier support
... 95
96
Barrier support
P.T. barrier
� 97 Shutter
98 Shutter support
�IOI
99 Contact (movable)
100 Contact (statioruµy)
e=J 101 Sec. disconnect (movable)
Jl02 102 Sec. disconnect (stationary)
103 Barrier
104 Contact
v,� ..... -:....-a· 106 Ground shoe
(d�C. o,•cON#V6�rJ 107 Support
108 Frame and carriage
109 P. T. braid (specUy JMgtb)
111 Support
Fl g, 56 Potential Transfonner Roi lout Unit 112 Support
Ir 113 Cover
114 Carriage
-------177 CONTROL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT UNIT
175 Fuse support (upper)
176 Fuse support (lower)
177 Shutter
1\1--1--1--- 17� 178 Transformer
co 187 179 179 Contact
180 Contact
181 Contact
182 Shutter support
�18 183 Ground shoe

I
3
184 Ground contact
.;. 185 Cover
u: 186 Frame
Support
'"
187
� 188 Support
189 Support
T1PIC."L "'Cc.T10hlAL s,oe y,ow CNI A!EtlP "'lw t:a• 190 Carriage
(GltO,U,,,D .....OU)
191 Barrier

e Fig, 57 Control Transformer Rollout Unit

SINGLE & TRIPLE-CONDUCTClll POTHEADS
201
202
2 034
20
Triple-conductor p� asaembly
Body
Insulators and support
Wiping sleeve
� 205 Gaskets for triple-ct� pothead
206 Terminal
207 Contact nut
208 Washer
....
co 209 Palnut (3/4 ln. - 12)
Pipe plug (3/4 in. std,)
...
210

\ ;.:
211
212
213
Pipe plug (1/8 in std,)
Single-conductor � assembly
Body and insulator
214 Gaskets for single-�r pothead
215 Wiping sleeve

;_et
216 Adapter for mechan1� eatrance
fittings
Fig, 58 Single and Triple-Conductor Potheads
,. ·. . .
 Jt''"' 't
INSTRUCTOOSVSS GEH-1802H
:f >
t^sfn: :h •\ AND (SUPERSEDES GEK.SeOS-sS
AND GEF-3837 /
RENEWAL ^ARTS

; • ;v^v/

Clfa.!
4 la®®' ^ ^ UH

Types ^"26 csnd ^-36

For Magne-bSost Air Circuit Breakaj
i.16 snd Ai^i-13.£

CONTENTS

RECEIVING, HANDLING
AND STORAGE 3
DESCRIPTION 8
INSTALLATION 11
OPERATION 19
TESTING AND INSPECTION ... 19
maintenance 20
RENEWAL PARTS 20

•I Mwm :fc.tfwno"rfiMiirt

MEOiUM VOLTAGE S^iTSHGEAR OEPARTMEHT

^ "F H i
^ Is? i i ^

FHILAOElPHiA. PA.
 J/» -«

f
/ "

\ • V
Wi m** - _ . . . .. i. 1
.i
Flfl. 3 (S03WS) 2 (•010211)) fiB, I (ftoanisi
 tISETAL-CLAD SWITCH6EAR
TYPES RS26 AND P«136
FOR MAGNE-BLAST AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
TYPES Aftfi-4.16 ANO AfVl-13.8

Mctal-clad switchgear is equipment to

control and protect various types ot elec TYPE M26 1
trical apparatus and power circuits.
CIRCUIT TYPE fNTERRUPT CURRENT FIGURE
The switchgear consists of one or more BREAKER CAPACITY
units which are mounted side by side and KVA
connected mechanically and electrically to
gether to form a complete switching equip AM-4.16-150 Magne-bl.>st 150,000 1200 • 2000 4
ment. Typical equipments are shown in
Figures 1, 2 and 3. AM-4.16-250 Magne-blast j 230,000 1200 - 2000 4
m The circuit breakers are easily re TYPE M36
movable to provide maximum accessibility
for maintenance with minimum interrup
tion of services. The switchgear is designed CIRCUIT TYPE INTERRUPT CURRENT FIGURE
to provide maximum safety to the operator. BREAKER CAPACITY
All equipment is enclosed in grounded metal KVA
compartments.
n AM-13.8-150 Magne-blast 150,000 1200 - 2000 4
The equipment is available in the rat
ings listed in the following table. The ratings AM-13.8-250 Magne-blast 250,000 1200 - 2000 4
of the equipment and devices are based on
usual service conditions as covered in AM-13.8-S00 Magne-blast 500,000 1200 - 2000 4
AIEE and NEMA standards. Operation at
currents above the equipment rating will AM-i3.8-750 Magne-blast 750,000 1200 - 2000 4
result in temperature rises in excess of
NEMA standards, and is not recommended. AM-7.2-250 Magne-blast 250,000 1200 - 2000 4
For outdoor installation the same basic
equipment is built into a weatherproof AM-7.2-500 Magne-blast 500,000 1200 - 2000 4
housing as in Figures 2 and 3.

RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE

RECEIVING
•il i
Every case or crate leaving the factory
is plainly marked at convenient places with
case number, requisition number, custom
fw-tiij
er's order. tronTor rear, and when for size -Jt
5.:
and other reasons it is necessary to divide
the equipment for shipment, with the unit
number of the portion of equipment enclosed
in each shipping case. rs]

The contents of each package of the

shipment are listed in the Packing Details.
This list Is forwarded with the shipment,
packed in one of the cases. The case is
especially marked and its number can also
be obtained from the Memorandum of Ship
ment. To avoid the loss of small parts
when unpacking, the contents of each case,
should be carefully checked against the
Packing Details before discarding the pack
ing material. Notify the nearest General
Electric Company representative at once
If any shortage of material is discovered.

All elements before leaving the factory

are carefully inspected and packed by work
men experienced in the proper handling
iiRd packing of electrical equipment. Upon Fig. 4 Hagne-bUst Breaker Fi» 5 DuBBy Reaovable Elonent

Theta intlntdiont do not purport to cover oil dafailt or varioliont in equipmanl nor lo provide tor every pouSJa
confingency lo be met in eottneelion with imialhlion, operation or maialemrKe. Should further informalion be deiircd
or thould portieuhr problemi arise whkh ore not covered tuffidentif for the purthaier't purposet, the matter dtould
be referred to the General Sledrie Company.

•w
 GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear

RCMOVAUe COVE« rOR Access

/TO WIRCS IN WmiNS TROUGH

-sslri

C]

ALL FLOOR STEEL TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER

CHANNELS SHOULD BE SET LEVEL WITH EACH OTHER

AND SHOULD BE LEVEL OVER THEIR FULL LENGTH

ROUGH FLOOR THICKNESS AND REINFORCING DEPENDS S

ON LOADING AND OTHER NORMAL FACTORS. AND SHOULD te
CH

BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH RECOMMENDED PRACTICE X

3-
lO

t:
RCA RUIOVABU
SlOe

1
t

1
!

FihiSKCO FLOOR UNt

{
wS • ••

i _ - i
s-r-'-rVrr—
*. .r?5v.! =
' • ' BOUSM fLOOR
• »
RECOMMENDED METHOD

flNtSHCO FLOOR LINC

J—
-nOVSH FLOOR

" — KOTt! IT IS IMReRATIVE THAT ALTERNATE METHOD

FLOOR STEEL BE EVEN
' WITH FINISHEO floor
AND THAT BOTH BE LEVEL
Fig. 6 InstalUtton OoUils
 Metal-clad Swltchgear OEH-1802

IT UKt et KtelTlMT to HtHOlrt

fOTKIAO OA CAOte SUAMAT FOft
MHOCK 0

Dooa
OFCN

SCAOUITS

METHOD OF LIFTING
mehbcrs A-a c -TO BE furnished BY PURCHASER
A-RAISINS HEMBER - CHANNEL OR WOOD BEAN
S-3* CHANNEL fURNSKEO WITH SEAR

C- LIFTmC JACKS
D- COVER to BE REXDVEO AND REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS ARE IN PLACE

note; W€N lifting M-26 SWITCHOEAR

UXATE SEAM V ABOVE LIFTING
CHAWiEES'.rB"

9
<0

-DOOR open

ALTERNATE METHOD OF LIFTING

MEMBERS ABE TO BE FURNISHED BY PURCHASER
B - 3" CHANNEL FURNISHED MITH GEAR
0 - COVER TO BE REMOVED AND REASSEMBLED
AFTER UNITS AAC IN PLACE
e - sppEAoed

For Indoor Ketal-clcd Sultehgaar

GEH-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear I i

CADLE CONNCCTiOW

|1 ^—n n ft,

r
TAACK JACK

*000 StAII

ifF^
METHODS OF LIFTING

9
«0

I:

tmiuAMt scconqahv
COMOUtT COMOtftTS

ACKOvAfUE ruATC$ TO 8£ Cut

TO lUlT CONDUITS DV PUflCHASCPI

Fig. 7 Inatallation Oetaila

 Mctal-clad Swltchgear GEH-1802

TO CM**!! HIItNT ortiive« fioo». "JiV*'

•nmo eri<i>»4 m T«ue« IhSIIJ
tcnm "»• r'TH lt«l» TO sivc.«si«l0
mciomt ano loo< §t ticwtcn'no not a .
,1 .TAUC* fLOCN

AOAlSTAtU VNfCk V(C«*A*

KAUM TO ic loctee on
CACH CM AT IN4TAUAT10H

ftQ.)U9fA9LC VNCCW
VtCW *A
r

VIEW 'X*
VIEW OF BREAKER END
iNOoiac ucMRino or wim
•itn I lEui w>t

FOUNDATION DATA
ME* *H0 ooriH or jon. bemitc su«rACE» or uck
rouasino* MUST it altebeo to svit s04l cohoitions.
aoTTOH TuorACEi or rcoBO«tio*» iboolo be oelo»
r«OBT AOTIO* OS SACKriULED W>T» rtRV'OOS MATEBIAC
ABO AOCOUATEiY OBAIBtO.
BUBTASE 'O'EBOUIO BE EEVEI. OTEB ITS rULL (.EBOTh
TO mSURE EAST HAKOLIBG Or BEBOVABLE ELEBEBTJ.
COBCBCTE fBO SnOUUO BE BEinrOBCED IB aCCOBOABCE
•ITH BTABOARO rRACTICE.

For Outdoor Hetal-cUd Swltchgear

 1802 Metal-clad Swltchgear

the swltchgear after it is removed from screws, gears and chain of

i^k.eipt of any apparatus an immediate the skids.
nism, linkage and moving machine-finished
inspection should be made lor any damage parts with a heavy oil or grease.
sustained while enroute. U injury is Methods of handling outdoor equipment 3. Store in a clean, dry place with a
evident or an indication of rough handling are shown In Fig. 7. After the equipment moderate temperature and cover with a
is visible, a claim for damage should be is in place the lifting plates shouUt be suitable canvas to prevent depos.t of mrt
filed at once with the the transportation removed and reassembled, "turned in so or other foreign substances upon movable
company and the General Electric Company that passageway at theendsoftheequipment
notified promptly. Information as to parts and electrical cont.T". surfaces.
damaged parts, part number, case number, will not be obstructed. 4. Batteries should be uncrated andput
requisition number, etc., should accompany STORAGE on trickle charge immediately on receipt.
the claim. 5. If dampness or condensation may be
If it is necessary to store the equip- encountered In the storage location, heaters
HANDLING should be placed inside tne units to prevent
men! for any length of time, the following moisture damage. Approximately 500watts
Before uncrating, indoor equipment precautions should be taken to prevent
corrosion; of heaters per unit will be required.
may be moved by a crane with slings under Remove all cartons andother miscellaneous
the skids. H crane facilities are not avail 1. Uncrate the equipment, material packed inside units before ener
able, rollers under the skids may be used. 2. Cover ImporUnt parts such as jack gizing any heaters.
Fig. 6 shows suggested method of handling I i
description
A control test jumper Is furnished which Is can be readliy Inserted or withdravm after
Each unit is made up of a secondary plugged into the coupler on the stationary the carriage has been lowered to the dis
enclosure and a primary enclosure, as and removable elements when It Is desired connected positionwithout necessitatingthe
shown in Figure 8. to operate the breaker in the test position. removal of any bolts, nuts or screws. The
breaker cannot be lowered or raised until
SECONDARY ENCLOSURE It has been tripped. The breaker cannot
All removable elements iurnlshed on a be closed except with the breaker in either
The secondary enclosure is us^ly particular requisition and of like desl^ the operating or test position.
located at the breaker withdrawal side of andratings are completely interchangeable
the unit, alUiough incertain units It ^e one with the other. The removable as
as the stationary elements are built with
Guide rails are built into the metal-
on the side opposite to the breaker factory jigs and fixtures thus Insuring clad frame to guide the removable breaker
drawal area. It consists of a compartment Interchangeabllity. element into correct position before the
with a hinged door or panel upon which are breaker is raUed into the operating posi
mounted the necessary instruments, BREAKER-RLEVATING MF.CH.^S!SM tion bv means of the elevating mechaiUsm
and protective devices. The termlral which is motor operated,
^^ocks, fuse blocks, and some controlde- The elevating mechanism for elevating
Hes are mount^ Inside the enclosure on or lowering the removable element to or
PRIMARY DISCONNECTING DEVICE
' islde sheete and a trough is provided at from its connected position supports the
top to carry wiring between units. removable element in the operating posi Theprimary discor,nectingdevices uti A
tion. In the test position the breaker is lize silver to silver contacts to Insure
PRIMARY ENCLOSURE against reduction of current carrying cap
lowered to the guide rails. This mech acity due to oxidation of the contact sur
anism consists of heavy-duty steel Jack
The primary enclosure contains the screws on which are carried nuts to sup faces. These contacts are of thehlghpres-
hieh voltage equipment and connections ar sure line contact tube and socket aesign,
ranged in compartments to confine the port the elevating carriage. The carriage the tube being backed up by heavy garter
effects offaulU andso mlnimiae the damage. is so designed thai the removable element
breaker removable element
The removable element consists of a ✓ I:
circuit breaker with trip-free operating
mechanism mounted directly onthebreaker I i I
frame, interlock mechanism, theremovable
portion of the primary and secondary dis
connecting devices, the operating mech C / '
anism control device, and necessary con a

trol wiring. The magne-blast breakers are i

equipped with wheels for easy removal and
insertion. Refer to Fig. 4.
The circuit breaker interlock mechan
fzn &as w

ism U designed to obstruct the operator

from lowering the breaker from the con
nected position or raising it from the dis
connected positionunless the breaker is in
the open position. This interlock is also
designed to keep the breaker in the open
position while it is being elevated or lower
pn n i, t I

ed. With this arrangement It is Imperative

that Oie circuit breaker be tripped prior
to any vertical travel of the removable
Tt n I {
element. Obviously if the mechanism is
forced, it cannot perform its proper func
tions. A positive stop prevents oyerUavel
of the removable element when raised to its
>ns£onnected position. The secondary dis-
J^^t«mecting device coupler Is used for con
necting ouUide control circuits tothecircuit
breaker, operating mechanism, trip coll and
auxilUry switches. This coupler makes
contact automatically when the removable Fig. 8 Hetsl-cUd Swltchgear
element is raised to the connected position.
 Uetal-clad Swltchgear CEH-1802

springs to insure contact pressure. Refer

to Figure 9.

BOS COMPARTMENT

The main buses are enclosedina metal

compartment with removable front covers
to provide accessibility.
T»Pt lll«ltAT«N
The bus Is supported by an Instdatlng mtuuTiCN ooiirowe
material which Is practically Impervious to
moisture, and an excellent dielectric.
..FIUCI KCTBI.
The bus insulation is molded on the
.•ciievme tnie
tKirs except at the Joints where the Insula 1
tion is completed by means of compound .PCffCCLBUI tuVIM

filled boxes or mold^ boots.

CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND CABLE I:
COMPARTMENT

The current transformers are mounted

8 in a compartment Isolated from the other
cn
tfk
C4 equipment. Provision is made in this com
partment for connecting the purchaser's PO«eM CIRCUIT
> & rf
primary cable by means of potheads or 1-
clamp type terminals. POSIT ON

POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
COMPARTMENT
\
Potential transformers are located In
a compartment above the current trans
formers or in a separate unit adjacent to (.oaUEO
the breaker units. post TION

The transformers are mounted on a

movable support equipped with primary and
secondary disconnecting devices. When the
potential transformers arc disconnected,
they are at a safe striking distance from Fig. 9 Heasureaent of Adjustaent of Fig. 10 Potential Transforoer Rollout
all live parts of the switchgear. In addl- Priaary Disccnnecting Devices Sham In wlthdraun position
*Uon a grounding device is provided which
contacts the fuses when the potential trans
formers are disconnected, effectively dis
charging the transformers. In this posi
tion the transformer fuses may be safely
removed and replaced. When the carriage
is drawn out it moves a barrier In front of
the stationary part of the primary discon
necting device. See Figure 10.

DUMMY REMOVABLE ELEMENT

8 Dummy removable elements, Fig. 5,

are used as a means of isolating circuits
O or bus sections, where operation is infre
quent and a circuit breaker cannot be
economically justified. The device con
sists of a framework to simulate the cir
cuit breaker removable element with a set
of six studs similar to those on the metal-
clad breakers. The lower end of the studs
are connected, front to back, by copper
bars which are fully insulated and metal-
enclosed. The stationary structure is the
same as for a circuit breaker. When the
device is elevated Into position, it con
nects the front set of metal-clad discon
necting devices to the rear seL
lA
r>
C>4
Under no conditions must the dummy
s element t>e elevated or lowered when the bus
or the unit is energized. Key Interlocks
are applied to Insure that all sources of
power are disconnected before the dummy
element can be operated. Refer to Figure
12.
\
FUSE DISCONNECTING DEVICE

Current limiting fuses with high In-

'srrupting rating are sometimes used in
metal-clad switchgear to protect small
transformers or circuits where circuit Fig. II Potential Transforssr and Fuse Rollout Unit
 GEH-1802 Metal-clad Swttchg^ar

Rl^^T HflfjD snf Pub rrwPT

) !
TT
P • K, i- 1 :ry

P I /
TOP P»-flTE T2£LS^ ,i f
j- -;.V' .zr
»' 4
•
1
j

I '9
i
l±
J •V-

wifvfNK acw. .n-f- vi or p « r.«/v

f JLS-
WSMVtar r,w.r

l e n r , cnn

O O

o
i : o
( 1

01R5!
1 I' I

jGljOl
Q:?-'iS^.0y

sajaj5jiffit£upsi!CJ.a.wT£^j3Si2i J j ;%:cec« i ».»-;>

raOEMt^O'iS

sd5[:.

'KT-rx i orn
MEiaai Tflg-pgyfc cp/tcTcw boxes
/8SSL£*:i'«C

KEY NTFRif,y FOR rt/.". CFV<-^ f H F^.ct.r

fLStySift&iJtLtSESJ

Fiji 12 Padlockiag Arrangeacnt, Key Interlodilng And Method For Pouring Connection Boxes

10

\
,'8akers cannot be economically or func-
jnally justified.
The fuses are mounted on a movable
support equipped with disconnecting de
vices. When the fuses are disconnecied
they are at a safe striking distancefroroall
live parts of the swilchgear. In addition a
grounding device is provided which contacts
the fuses after they are disconnected, ef
fectively removing any static charge from
the fuses. In this position the fuses may
be safely removed and replaced. The dis
connecting devices are capable of inter
rupting transformer magnetizing current,
but should not be used to interrupt load
current. For larger transformers arc
quenchers are furnished to assist the dis
connecting devices in interrupting the mag
netizing current. Mechanical or key inter
locks are applied to prevent operating the
disconnecting device while the load is con
nected. This is generally accomplished by
interlocking so that the transformer sec
s ondary breaker must be locked in the open
position before the disconnecting device can
be opened or closed.
GROUNDING AND TEST DEVICE
The grounding and test device, Figure
13, provides a convenient means of ground
ing the cables or the bus in order to safe
guard personnel who may be working on the
cables or the equipment. The device can
also be used for applying power for high
potential tests or tor fault location, to
measure insulation resistance (Megger).
By ""using-"potential transformers, it cam-
also tie used for phasing out cables.
The three studs of the device are sim
ilar to those of the metal-clad circuit
breakers. The studs are mounted on a re-
movable.plate which can be placed in cither
of two positions. In one position the studs
will engage the front (Bus) contacts only
and In the other position the studs will en
gage the rear (Line) contacts only of a
metal-clad uniL
To Indicate the proper placement of the
studs on the device, opposite sides of the
assembly are marked "Line" and "Bus".
The word corresponding to the desired
position must be toward the operator.
Before any Installation work is done,
consult and study all drawings furnished
by the General Electric Company lor the
particul^ requisition.
These drawings include arrangement
drawings, wiring and'elementary diagrams
and a summary of the equipmenL Mats,
screens, railings, etc., which are external
to the switchgear, but which may be t6-
qulr^ to meet any local codes, must be
furnished by the purchaser.
LOCATION
The recommended aisle space required
at the front and at the rear of the equipment
Is shown on the floor plan drawing furnished
for toe particular requisition. The space at
:toe front must be sufficient to permit the
insertion and withdrawal of the circuit
breakers, and their transfer to other units.
fig. 14
necessary to padlockonly one door on each
si(je. (In exceptionally long installations
fig. 13 Ground And Tejt Device
(Cable shorn not fumiilied by C. E. Co.)
To use, the device is rolled into the
metal-clad housing in place of the circuit
breaker, and raised into or lowered from
the connected position by means of the
circuit breaker elevating mechanism.
In addition to the device described
above, there is available a form of ground
ing and testing device equipped with both
bus and line side buildings, power operated
grounding contacts, phasing receptacles,
and a complete safety interlocking system.
For details of construction and operation
of this device, refer to CEI-38957 for 4.16
kv equipment, or GEI-50114 for 7.2 kv and
13.8 kv equipment.
INSTALLATION
The space at the rear must be sufficient lot
installation of cables, for inspection and
maintenance, and on some equipments to
draw out potential transformers.
PREPARATION OF FLOOR - ANCHORING
Indoor Equipment
The station floor must be strong enough
to prevent sagging due to weight of the
switchgear structure and to withstand the
impact stress caused by the opening of the
circuit breakers under short circuit con
ditions. The impact loading is approxi
mately 1-1/2 times the static load.
Suitable means must be provided by
the purchaser for anchoring the equipment
to the floor. It is essential that the floor
be level to avoid distortion of the switch-
w MUSB H. oag
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
Tandea Lock For Outdoor 13.8 Units
TANDEM LOCK (WHEN FURNISHED)
FOR OUTDOOR UNITS
Outdoor metal-clad equipments with
more than one unit may be provided with a
tandem locking arrangement which makes it
two or more locks may be required on each
side). The unit containing the operating arm
of toe tandem lock is clearly marked on
the drawings and also by nameplate on the
equipment itself. Refer to Figure 14.
Before any door in the equipment can be
opened, it is necessary to openthe padlocked
door and operate the tandem locking arm to
toe open position. In locking the equipment
the reverse procedure should be used.
Where it is desired to separately lock
any particular door, the tandem lock can
lie disconnected in that unit by unbolting a
connecting clip between the tandem bar and
the locking bar, and a separate padlockused
on that door.
The light switch, front and rear, will
be located in the units with the tandem
lock.
gear structure and the equipment be com
pletely aligned prior to final anchoring.
The recommended floor construction is
shown in Figure 6. The floor channels
must be level and straight with respect to
each other. Steel shims should be used
for final leveling of the switchgear if nec
essary. Care should be taken to provide a
smooth, hard, and level floor under and in
front of toe uniLs to faciliute insuliatton
and removal of the breaker. If the floor is
not level and flush with the floor channels,
it will be difficult to handle the breaker
because it will not be level with respect to
toe stationary clement.
Recommended practice is to weld the
switchgear structure to the floor channels,
using a tack weld at points indicated for
anchoring on the drawing. If welding fac
ulties are not available the gear should
be bolted to the floor channels.
11
A WW '•' *
 »iafr-;-v «^:s^-J.~a;'a.t«g=: jt^j^HMtit Jiy,'; •

-1802 Metal-clad Swltchgear

i -I-.
-i

s r*: I
__ '»4.
I
-ffn. _
-»r- if fi •J
fft!

.1
!
I

i: I
0
f
•f 4-!^ iW ir t I V|

;i
i|
I 'b
1'^
ii
II
i| 0
LJi
-J ...

Mw K»/rJ neoeB *r LCrr r«ra ExisTinb uM.-rj AiTk* i/f^fTTf Aceeo AT

•fA's/r "yrsi A.9J»r

A—* fi^AS C/*ff i £ i r i ^ f:'i.r f-y-

f
\
(t ill
I r £N0 £eC7lo/4
V
.1

1
r i
i
rMcrwd* MT
Sn^rtsu -f-v'

0/Vp«/W^

Bvssf^/er

"!
ti-
.L-.
t: *^0*0Z<A€4A
vrew A
assembly *©' -VaoX
(b0kt9t9 umlTJ rO«#7>c#w) (£t*G f cAfAisr/ta tAf/r}

PRocrctz/rr
A A£MO^ iWW CAP, €"0 4CA££N^ OPS-J'^9 et/S C^uPCCTtON^ ANO
ff£f<90V£ niAC ^t7H CAC^utft TMMMtA
£/^0 S£Cr/t>JV fCCMPAPTMC^r 5/<V S^STt
A fWSTf^f c^/*xeMr CAct w/rw J-Af
L£rr s\'o c-fixY). icc v/Ety'a*
CAAt£**r ^e< 'SZA
2. SET u*/fr^) tfi PiACe ***o rassrhSP AS S*tO»ft^
*y ASSC'^Oj.Y ' 6 '

X ASS£M3L£ ^T£f-7S UST£0 tP P'fCC£OuP£ NO-/

Noor CAA ^ ASSt-'^3t.€ Ya»v' P.9CP CAPS AS SA9t^f^ •'•* '/fSlA/ *A .
^ 5 AsscMaiS '^pc-j'*o SJS SPtfcr strt^es^ a^o
.\£yy cpot/r,s a</s PS sacmm //v Aisc/^st-Y'a'
^ ASSSfASce aus OAPS Amo cp/^ccrto^ 3q*£S
"I ! /JvSTPUCn9N 4S9^ Pfd /2 1 ZO

I—'i- - . . . P09P OP I'PO Sxcrrc^

%
£f4LAfiCE0 SECTION Y-Y •5

r\ ENLANCSO StCr/OA/ A'A

1

FIj. IS Outdoor Metal-clad Swltchgear - Addition of Units to Llne-#p

12
I

— 1
CCn^lfT
^^•wVca
r-;.'tV.st«
Fig. 16
Provision should be made in the floor
for conduits for primary and secondary
cabies, iocated as shown on the floor plan
drawing furnished for the particular requi
sition. If desired, the co.ndults may be in-
stalied before the switchgear. Consider-
ction should be given to conduits which
night be required for future connections.
Outdoor Equipment
Recommendations for the foundations
for outdoor equipment are given in Fig. 7.
Primary and secondary conduits should be
installed in accordance with the requisition
drawings, before the equipment is put into
place.
Since outdoor equipments are provided
with a 6" base, a transfer truck is required
to place the breaker in the housing. The
level adjustment on the truck is sliown on
Fig. 7.
^Iten outdoor equipments are shipped
in more than one section, the joint in the
roof between sections must be weather-
proofed. Apply G.E. *1201 Glyplai* varnish
to the gaskets which arc furnished and as
semble the gasket between the roof sec
tions and bolt together. See Figure 15.
Joints between transformer throats and the
switchgear should be weatherproofcd in the
same manner. Refer to Figures 16 and 16A.
Transition Compartments
Transition compartments for outdoor
unit substations may be one of two types
(Fig. 16 and 16A). These compartments are
normally shipped assembled. The full
height compartment (Fig. 16) cannot be
disassembled for in.>;iallation. The throat
type compartment (Fig. 16A) can lx< in-
stalied in eitlier of two ways, in accordance
/^^swith the following instructions:
(a) Should the switchear be positioned
sa. on its foundation prior to the powerlrans-
WS former, the complete transition can iw
^ mounted on the metal-ciad as assembled.
* Registered trade-mark of General Cicctric
Company.
0
0~
Outdoor Transition Coirparttient
Re:nove covers *8 ana apply Giypiai* var
nish 'riiOi to g.isk6t 2A before bolting tran
sition to metal-clad throat. Before jacking
the power transformer into its final loca
tion, apply Clypfil * varnish "1201 to easKOt
lA and place over mounting studs on trans
former tank wall. Slide transformer in plare
guiding the transformer mounting stuns
through t.he mounting holes in "i. Cci.tor
rubber seal between •! .and «3 before lur.i-
ening nuts, maintaining 24" between trans
former tarJt wall and end of metal-clad.
(b) If the power transformer and metal-
clad swftchgear are in place, disassembTe
transition as tollows: Remove covers "8
and fO, adapter "1, dome ?7, braces »4.
Apply Glyptal* varnish «120I to gasket •2A
before bolting *2 to m'eial-clad throat.
.4pply Glyptal* varnish "1201 to gasket "lA
and loosely fasten "1 and "lA to transformer
tank. .Slide throat of "3 into •! and main
tain approximately 4 1/2" from *3 to tank.
Assemble braces "4 top and bottom to main-
lain size and proper alignment, then tighten
>il to transformer tank. Assemble copper,
terminals, supports and complete ail juinUs.
Assemble dome side covers -iS and bot
tom cover #9. Cut secondary conduit *10
to length and assemble under tlie transi
tion.
Indoor transition compartments are
shipped assembled together with the ad
jacent metal-clad switchgear units.
BREAKER REMOVABLE ELEMENT
Before installing or operating the re
movable clement consult the circuit break
er instructions for directions on inslal-
ation, adjustments and inspection. The
operation of tlie interlock device is given
below.
The elevating mech.inism is accurately
leveled and checked at the factory and should
need no adjustment. 1X> not install or re
move the breaker or make any .tdjustments
unless the breaker is open.
EEi^
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
ZZZZj-0
0 -0
C0v£-P5
0- (2^
(3)
:C!
Fig. I6A
Rub a small amount of contact lubri
cant DoOH47 on the silvered portion of the
l)reai-;er studs to form a thin coating for
contacting purposes.
Lower the eievating mechanism lift
ing brackets uniil the lifting brackets are
in the fully lowered or test position. The
breaker should thc-r. enter the h vaslng free
ly. The iowor limit switch can be adjusted,
if necessary, to allow the brc.tker to enter
the housing. Push the breaker into the
housing until it rests against the stop at the
rear of the elevating mechanism frame.
The Slop has been .adjusted at the factory
so that the breaker will be in the correct
position relative to the lifting brackets.
Raise the lifting brackets until the breaker
is lifted clear.of the floor. Check to see
that the bre.aker is properly seated on the
lifting brackets.
Carefully raise the breaker to the con
nected position where the breaker plate or
sujjport solidly meets the upper stop bolts
on the frame and then lower and remove it
from the unit. When elevating, note that
brc.iker studs center with respect to the
stationary disconnecting device or injury
lo the contacts may result.
Inspect the contact surfaces of both
the breaker studs and the stationary dis
connecting devices,
(a) Each segment of the stationary
disconnecting device should make a heav7
impression in the contact lubricant D50H47
on the breaker studs.
(b) The wipe of the breaker stud inside
the stationary disconnecting device, as in
dicated by the contact lubricant D50H47,
should bo 7/8". This indicates tliat the
breaker studs conlticled at the full pres
sure center of the silver band on the
st;iHonary disconnecting device. The max
imum permissible variation in the wipe is
3, 32".
(c) Should the inspection of the con
tacts show that the breaker is not being
!3

GEH-1802 Metal-clad Swltchgear
' ' -.••*- CONNECTIONS
The main bus borsandotheruonncrtion
bars may be either copper or aluminum. In
either case, the connnectionsurfaces'.vill be
silver plated.
All field assembled joints in conduct
ors, regardless of material or methc/d of
insulaticrt, should be made as follows:
(1) Wipe silver clean. Do not use
sandpaper or any abrasive on the
silvered surface. Avoid handling
of cleaned
possible.
(2) A sufficient quantity of D50H47
grease should be applied to the
Joint at each contact area so that
the complete contact area will be
thoroughly scaled with excess
grease squeezed out of the joint
when tightened.
4II.VU- (3) Brush a thin coat of DS0H47 over
the outside surfaces of the joint
ZA- area and hardware covering the
silvered area.
MAIN BUS ASSEMBLY
Fig. 17 View Showing Elevating Hechaniso (1) For 13.8 kv or 7.2 kv equipment:
Motor and Control Unit (a) Remove compartment covers.
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars
raised to the proper position, readjust the together, following assembly instructions
above. &e also Fig. 20 and Table A, Fig. 18.
upper stop bolts and limit switches to raise
or lower the breaker to the proper location.
Lock the stop bolts in the new position, Torque Values for Metal-clad Switchgear
(d) If proper contacting cannot be at Torque in Inch-Pounds)
tained by- the above methods," it is neces
sary to adjust the stationary disconnecting Dolt Copper
Size or Steel
d/*^ tube. DO NOT MAKE ANY AD-
/ ^lENT. COMMUNICATE WITH THE 3/8"-16 180-300
1 EST GENERAL ELECTRIC CO.
Or r ICE FOR ADDITIONAL IN FORhUTION.
l/2"-13
S/8--11
360-540
420-600
The trip interlock should be checked to
see that the removable element is obstruct Fig. 18
ed from being raised to or lowered from the
operating position unless the breaker has (c) Complete the taping of the vertical
Iwen tripped open. The breaker is provided riser bars using insulating tape furnished
with an arm which is pushed forward or (2/3 lap) stopping the tape at the bus bar.
pulled back when the breaker is open or If the riser bars connect to the bus from
closed. This arm engages and holds a ver below, sufficient tape should be added to
tical bar when pulled back (breaker closed) prevent compound leakage when filling.
and prevents the clutch from being pulied Apply a layer of cotton tape (1/2 lap) over
forward to engage the motor. When the
breaker has been tripped,, the clutch can
raise the vertical bar and engage the motor.
A limit switch on the verticai bar closes
the electrical circuit to the motor, if the
elevating control selector switch has been
moved to either "raise" or "lower". Refer
to Figure 17.
TESTING CABINET
The testing cabinet. Figure 19, should
be installed on the wall at a location where
maintenance and testing of the breaker can
be conviently done. Conduits must be in
stalled to carry cables to supply control
power for testing.
ADDITION OF UNITS TO EXISTING
EQUIPMENT
rpii
I
1
I
«
•
• » • •
«
«
»
•
A
Figure 15 indicates the special proced
ures involved to add new metal-clad units to
Li.
an existing outdoor equipment. For Indoor
ejMltefnent, it is usually necessary only to
f' ^ the end cover sheets and to re-as- "i
i i them on the new units after these
Si^evtcw
a; . .ocated and bolted to the existing units.
Ot^erwise, the installation procedure is the
same as described above. Fig. 19
14
sr»-7.".37' irT?^T-7-^^ "jTrT^
^•waiTrgv>ti^^
the insulating tape, stopping the cotton tape
just inside molded splice cover.
(d) Place molded covers around the
bolted splice joints. Note that compound
filling space is at top of joint, and add filler
pieces furnished for the purpose to the
bottom of box and around bus bar lami
nations (Fig. 20) to prevent compound leak
age while filling. Duxseal shotild be placed
over the joints to make the box free of
leaks while filling. The ITuxseal should be
surface as much as removed after the compound has set. G. E.
#860 cord should be used to hold the molded
parts securely in place.
(e) Heat G. E. D50H49 compound (fur
nished) to minimum 200OC. and maximum
of 220''C. Avoid overheating the compound
for the dielectric strength may be seriously
affected. Pour the compound into the molded
ewers intermittently, allowing an interval
of cooling to prevent formation of gas or
air pockets. The final pouring should be
level with the top of the box and shoiUd be
done only after due allowance for shrinkage
is made. Refer to Figure 12.
(f) Paint the exposed cotton tape on
vertical riser bars with U310 or U311
varnish furnished.
(g) Replace all covers previously re
moved.
TABLE A
(2) For 4.16 kv equipment:
(a) Remove compartment covers.
(b) Bolt splice plates and bus bars
Aluminum
or Compound together, following assembly instructions
above. See also Fig. 20 and Ta^le A, Fig. 18.
180-240
(c) Place flexible molded cover over
360-480
420-540
joint, as shown in Fig. 12. Note that on joints
where no tap is made from bus the opening in •s , i
the molded cover should be at the top.
(d) Secure flexible cover with self-
locking rivets furnished. Joint insulation is
now completed.
(e) Replace all covers previously re
move.
(3) In unit substations, the connection bars
should be assembled in the transition com-
Het.E RtK eoiT
CZ9
fUMf C
rro^ —<
y
£
si4
''i
i
•J
rvftT CLOcn
9
JL'
f
r
16 - 7 -'"J
^ * I AC
rffONTVie'M CtNtM RCHO^eO
Inspection Box for 13.8 KV Met«l-cl«d Switchgear
•i
 Metal-Clad Switchgcar CEH-1802

*|artflient (Fig. 16) and the connections at t!ie
^nnstormer terminals greased, taped and
-inted as Indicated above. The conduitfor
secondary circuits should alsobe assembled
in or below the transition compartment.
PRIMARY CABLES
The primary cable connections in in
door switc'hgoar are reached by removing
the rear bolted covers. In outdoor switch-
gear the hinged instrument p.incl, Uprcsent,
must be swung open and the bolted covers
behind it removed.
Before any primary cable connections
are made, the cables should be identified
to indicate their phase relationship with the
switchgcar connections. This is necessary
to insure that motors will rotate in the
proper direction and that the phaseroutloii
is the samewhen interconnecting two differ
ent sources of power.
There aretwo common methods of mak
ing primary cable connections:
(a) Potheads (see Figures 34 and 35)
are used when it is desired to hermatlcaliy
seal the end of the cable to make a moist
ure-proof connection between the cable and
the switchgcar bus. A pothead also pre
vents seeping of oil from the end of oil
Impregnated varnish cambric or paper In
sulated cable.
(b) Clamp type terminals and wiping
sleeve or cable clamp. In all cases care
fully follow the cable manufacturer's rec
ommendations for installation of the h.-oe
of cable being used, as well as l.he insiru'c-
.djons contained herein. See Figs. 37and38.
POTHEA13S
Potheads are mounted on :n aduiUer
plate e.vtendir.g across the wiail' of uhe
metal-clad unit as shown in Figure 8. The
adapter plate is split into two parts to
facUitate the installation of Uie pothe.uls.
The polhettds will usiuUy lie sr.ipped .ir-
ranged for cables to enter from' below;
however, the steel and copper arc usu.illv
interchangeable for the potheads arran.jei
for cable entrance from above.
Three-Conductor Potheads
The following description applies to the
installation of a three-conductor Ic.iJ-
sheathcd cable with a wiping sleeve cable
entrance fitting on the poihead. This is the
type most generally used. Instructions for
installation of other types are included in
the text following:
(a) Remove the wiping sleeve and cut
the tapered end at a point where the cable
will enter It freely, and file off sharp edces.
Temporarily reassemble on the pathe.ifl.
(b) Train the cable In front of the
pothead allowing it to e.xtend about two
inches above the top of the porcelain bush
ings. Handle with caie and avoid sharp
bending which might caniairv the insulaiK.n.
Mark a point on the load sheath of the
cable about 1-1/2 inch above the bottom of
the wiping sleeve.
(n) Remove the pothead from the unit,
disa-ssemble the wiping .sIppvp and slip it
and its gasket over the table as shown i:i
Figure 21.
(d) Remove the lead sheath from the
cable to the point marked m operation "b"
as shown in Figures 22 and 23 proceeding
as follows:
First, make a cut around the cable
half through the sheath at the reference
point. Second, split the sheath lengthw ise
between the cut and the cable, hoidim: the
cutting tool at an angle to the cable radius
to avoid damagi.-.g the insulation. Third,
remove the shocta by catching the split
edge with pliers and pulling direcily away
from the cable axis.
Clean and itn the outside of the
lead sheath for .ibi.ut 3 incncs and bell out
Che end of the lead sheath.
(e) Remove the belt and Interphase In
sulation down to within l-l. 2 inches of the
lead sheath as shown in Figure 24. The
last few layers should be torn off to avoid
damaging the individu.il conductor insula
tion. To reinforceandprolectiheconducior
insulation, wrap two layers of h.ill lapped
v.-inilshed cambric or irraihene tape over
the factory insulation.
(f) Disassemble insulator supportplate
from pothead body. The insulators should
not be removed from the suopori plate
because they are factory assembled for
proper compression of the ir gaskets. Place
jjothead body over cable and then fan nut the
conductors into approximately the final
position, as shown i.n Figs. 25. 26. The
middle conductor should be bowed slightly
for final adjustmeri of length. Avoid
sharp bend--, and aam.tge to the insulation,
particularly at the crotch.

I- Y- jrr

"• s
3 ^ - r 4-1 — W»rf K'-

* I
I
18. 1 . r J •
•bl 'iOJOc
•• • .
. ;'3
" t*»c •1 n
J »
- St

£SU,n ' P Fl}. 21 Fig. 22

, j I ".v. i : '•
?• 'xl. rf )< :-<!!? 3 1, I

'.i
^ y W
u T#pe
' 'I? ii f. ^
(W «- I "t. -
-j-
h'7'' s
K.X-.-V''
rF'"
f Y
1-3 [I: M
i
' ^4«>7tw*t6 --
^tCtiOUAA*

Fig. 20 Method of Hiking Odi Sar Connections Fig. 23 Fig. 2it

 CEM-1802 McUl-eUdSwltchgear
1^
• art • 1,-

. w-
tLS-
!S
in.iiW
i
.M

r-T^-W
1 . /1' ^ 1^ f
U •. -AI
to 10
1^
'•4 •--'•A' CiDi
CO

01 9

U. w
fit. 25 Fie. 26 Fig. 27 Fig. 28

*0 V

CtD;
op Q
Vv' '

K'i'' 735
if ** *

558
a ^
Si^
rig. 29 Fig. 30 Fig. 31 Fig. 32

(e) For syntem voltage above 7500 injure cable insulation and also result in (4) Over the white cotton tape,
•niu It Is recommended that stress relief excessive shrinkage of the compound while brush a good coat of varnish (U-310 for
i-.n.i-a he batlt uii when single-conductor or cooling. Before and while filling, warm 15 KV and U-311 for 5KV). Varnish may
lAfec-cociijctor shielded cable is used. pothead body and stand pipe to prevent sud be thinned if necessary, with Xylene, 0589.
t.l'>^truct stress relief cones in accordance den chilling of compound which may result
•»«h -the recommendations of the cable in the formation of air voids. The pothead Single-Conductor Potheads
3sa.-.uf4cturer. See Figure 35for one recom- may be warmed by playing a blowtorch over
c.«raic<l raeUod. On lower voltage cables, the body, taking care that no direct heat The procedure for Installation of sin
out the end of the lead sheath ordl- reaches the porcelains or gaskets. gle-conductor potheads is in general the
Mriif provides sufficient stress relief.
same as described for three-conductor
;Hn«s cose material will not be furnished potheads.
o'.Ui (Kstbrad). Pour until the compound appears
at the insulator support plate plug iioles. Cable Entrances Other Than Wiping Sleeves
(h) Bolt pothead body to metal-clad Insert plugs and continue filling until it
plate. Shape conductors into final appears at holes at the top of terminal Stuffing box cable entrance fittings are
thea cut Off each conductor to fit studs. Insert plugs and continue pouring used for cables other than lead sheathed. <» 9
tersilRil. while the pothead and compound cools to These fittings may be provided with or O
U> O
O

fill air voids which might form. without armor clamps as necessary.
'U Resoe pothead terminals from oa «i

Reamve two inches of insulation When the pothead has cooled, re The fitting consists of a cast and mach
»IJ» cad of each conductor and assemble move filling pipe and insert plug. Clean ined base, one or more rubber or neoprene
Uf KAsals to cables. off compound which might have overflowed washers, and a packing nut which compress
on the outside of the porcelains. es the washers around the cable. These
f, ti gaskets where shown in parts should be assembled on tlie cable in the
*• •* «ad sci: Insulator support plate and above order, with the base nearest to tlie
!»t''ead body. (m) Assemble pothead connection bars,
61^^^ • S«rtlal turn on eachCompress
bolt suc- applying grease as outlined under "Connec pothead. The packing nut should be tightened
tions" (Page 14). See Fig. 32. Insulate after the cable is located in the pothead and
,, —;• Basket Is uniformly com- connections as follows: before any compound is poured.
^ ions shown in Fig. 35.
^ ^re the terminal studs arc Where an armor clamp is required, it
on their gaskeU, then (1) Fill all cavities around bolts is usually made an integral part of the pack
•r -,6»-.T' place after assembling and nuts with Duxseal compound to form ing nut. This requires that the packing nut
•J • t-U is. washers. See Figures 26, smooth surface for taping, thus preventing and armor clamp be tightened on the cable
air voids. This compound Is not an Insulatmg before the assembly of the pothead is com
medium and should not be used for that pleted.
- ' P'omber's wiped joint be- purpose. ss
4 ?Na ^ ciw/wn
. «3 'lecveInand the lead
Figures sheath
29 and 30. Cable Sheath or Conduit Grounding
(2) Wrap with insulating tape pro flO »

vided, as shown In Figures33,34and35, the Where three-conductor conducting

mUng plug in the number of layers depending on the voltage sheath or shielded cables are used, or
"t P'"es In the top of rating of the equipment. Where there are where non-conducting sheath cable is car
4 4- T insulator supportplate. sharp angles, apply additional layers to ried In metallic ducts or conduits, it is
-r 4.,f .'*'1^ {"nnel In the filling obtain the equivalent of the insulation of the usually desirable that both ends of the cable
"0 '* "iv a ^ "eight to extend
an shown above 31.
In Figure the flat surfaces. sheath or conduit be grounded directly to
the swltchgear ground bus or structure or
other apparatus. In some cases this may be
' — c o m p o u n d to the (3) Over the insulating tape, ap accomplished by tlie mounting of potheads
:^'""'».,1650c. Oonotovcr- ply one layer of white cotton tape, half or terminating fittings on a grounded sup
^ to higher temperatures may lap, as a binder. port. When such mounting cannot l>e ar-
 Metal-Clad Switchgear GEH-1802

joopv-c;
SACk? COAT I «C O* tf^T70S TAPt
C*3Tf^ttNO
VARNl^M — , e»«c* i-*ot OR v.c.
<?Kr-e ^^JTLS/A/
l-ies cere
f T*#* W> NCI tip J-ltTuVt

s
<o
I «*ae •sco^V'Cowfst
wi^»-a^wHrco'T e
^'i<'Ltt«4 v«R>«i4 9(d«ew.y^

«OV»* TAfy I A *
— t.j

insuiATiON I^SWATlCR urtRS

LCVCL v.c.
IW !:-^o2
9000 V. 4
I 1 1 2
tSOOO V.
7 1114-
yrTw to Htv V.C. r^TS
V.C. IS CUCr vaR^jS^C) cloth {Ci»^Ic;*TAsr©92 »iC^ Ji* jiAT «v.,, w.//^
IXlOOiCSS 0.9X2 COn:^ TAPt IS BMiTE C.C.A.2A<pHJ VXSTK 1 l/H'
•i5N£ UrtR HOUSJl ^l^ LWJ RECWIRES 3 T^^VS ASOuSO BAR IR 0N£ (kPwtt V* WttM 10 Mtw Jw.e."«»4*.
er ftiHwo •e mavI ts x; tai^c
THAM eO'dlHAI. INVOCATION.
•lOTH OF TifCi T>iE ThlCKNESS Cf OftC lATW is 3 TH<S Tkt
THICWKS OF TH£ fAPt. i eAMO "V Oft Cl/r At AM AMOCX
jS'OTg' jcr^a •,.• ^ « oowocAta TO eoAACAAA'tcb
TAAC On CAOiyC. OAAIO TO OC w»OwN0
/^£tp^THe^4C T/*^C f'/z riOAT A*|0 Ci^OCC.AwC TUd^S o«
-'O'-Taw .— -ff ««• OdAlO TO At. ftOwC<ACO A»A*sa TVVO
CtNCO •AMAbk&W To CAVkC TO
ddCVCltr VCRAdATlON.
♦ fiPfit iiae^jnef
<O^ACA VlA'O TO e& V/OUNO AAOoND
MCTAbWiC OINOVA and OOt^OCACO
OOTm to OiNOftft AND ktAO VMCAtit.

M-30wip>« / wMzoau.«.t.ceNAoto«o,As rudtuoNCO.

TO riUb OOTACAO aRTCa T»AMrM9
\MJ>0 ShmTN

Flj. 33 Insulation of Ccnnecticn Bars Fig. 3<t Single-Conductor Potliead-With Stress Cone-
/ON Ma/to CA^
t TAAlAsAWMt^ JAMMX MkAAoMS P. CAO* CI>Wi,<M» a/
0^/XC<<akC<«erc»A3<AO>c<i*co oe »<
AsPt »*c^oaMo AJA •*< «t>Ary>cK>«««- «*««o.ca*u r».«
**«'•»•* O^I«<aAAU££ fv* OnCteP tSwAt
^*Aa*Aw*4.* />«r OA r»»« OHa5<>s#«t cosmvcnm^Ai«u^r<w.
"T '*« a»aPm«4. eUMAACAMAwrs, a'aiOPM
m* Ac« AC rMcA co««tt<FaHo a»*c<0 nsota«a ih m cj^ctkm
AKO'St
TAfir>i Arwrraoe ^acocasma AeA^aafAaa<*.pay..^a<;a*eo. /w w
asC«AC<yA.«CO—
4Av /roe Phi 3«e«A»^v»a«,n»p»cor*AWie •:•**«» •*<»c4rv ouu>«t«i.
C4 /r/SA* ^«AF»-. fi«^c»t»A«>CA'»jni^£ocxaiSi,'Af*AA'W*««ftC
r»
m Aft»*Aay»A^tAiPA-Mn«aPAeAifc4. «c/%A»A:A««.r
s or/liM/tr aew* A-7rwiw*»,os <yoei«e AS »ow o*x*A
«o 'WF'<A AAPVenfl «*-<!»•>»»* AOCS *-.£> 'X^a.a.^ix
j A« 0«AiOO» dTf»«d
OAAOAoAOM AAAOOdWANO^t^MttOfSAc -AACCOr/yi* /|AAS
>• m f—T.
. r. ?f scn«/rA«}AATAp c«J er«amc* crr^vo c«*a r»c -^—-p.^p,
w -o—v•****'
/ -2.
- •!

"f- =/
> •. / / / / 'wR'"*

»^~crr2CT' \V•.,^,5, _i|r"7^' // ^ "" "/

_sr%V^' '
Of^Ai^AAMAMl - -.V-^
^OAA
M\ '

/O Fig. 35 Triple-Conductor Pothead

17
GEH-ie02 Metal-ci2d Switcbgeir

3. Unvrip shielding Upe to point M,

cut and scKer it In place avoiding exces
sive heat on Insulailon. Remove outer
scnii-conductina tape for same distance.
Thoroughly cie.m suriace Irom which the
Bemi-conductjng tape was removed.

4. Remove insulation and inner semi

h ^r- ». r^'-^a conducting tape to expose conductor for
distance of one inch plus length to be in
••" *^ • >--
•Jl
i serted into terminal lug. r~is=N
5. Attach terminal lug to conductor.

6. Taper Insulation for one inch as CAScC

shown.
Has> scoTcx T«^e

,-^ • 7. Apply end seal. Clean surface over

which splicing tape is to be applied and
ccatwith G. £. No. A50PC3 adhesive cement ITli - ac iisd
or equivalent. When solvent evaporates,
build up with splicing tape GE8380 or
equivalent, as shown.
I+.J OA e9u(v

- smcboiwo eAAie

8. Build stress cone. Clean cable sur

f, 1 ml 4 face and coat with G.E. No. A30P68 adhesive
CA6kt SHELCiaO
TAPE
f'iBBr,r..-.5»>^:'-"«» •••*£?»:: _
<•0 SMUH TAAC
ON CO^IV
I irrsr-
M0r9T\>NC HAL

oeulo
Off CQUIV

— M -Avj
^ ii^4
swovwoiTuiia-r
> V , ' u u r wswtcw

Fig. 38 Terwinetion Hon-Leaded Cable

T Hulti-^onductor
1
1
1
B
cement or equivalenL When solvenievapo-
Fig. 36 Rear View of Unit Showing Through
Type Current Trensforaeri
'H 1
. ^ I* *•« *Mce
C0*>4a VrCi

' *0 >1 scdtt*

rates, build up cone with splicing tape GE-
8380 or equivalent, for length B plus B.
1
1 7«*t cu»v Between points M and P, tape is applied so
1
that wrapped thickness at N Is equal to 75t
ranged, a separate ground wire should be -f J of the original insulation thickness - and
so that the cone tapers to zero thickness at
connected between the cable sheath or con j"
1 points M and P. Apply one layer No. 33
duit and the switchgear ground bus. Scotch tape or equivalent, half lapped. Ob
.W3•M tain a smooth wrapping but do not stretch
Where single conductor conducting 9* COuiV tape more than necessary.
sheath cables are used, the same procedure ^
M)i les't" T««(
4« I4vi«
should be observed, except that only one
MOWWft Rr 42.*C<hT
end of the sheath should be grounded. This *«*•« wi«Bca
9. Pass a turn of tightly drawn braid
also applies to single conductor non-con around exposed portion of shieldi-ng tape at
ducting sheath cables In separate metallic point M and solder in place. Tnen .ipply -
conduits. Where three phases are carried shielding braid in tightly drawn 1/16 Inch
by single conductors in a common metallic lap wrappings to point N and spot solder.
conduit, grounding procedure should be the Dimer^stons In Inches '
Terminate the braid by cutting 1/2 Inch
same as that described for three conductor Rated
cables. kv
beyond soldering point. Turn down and
Phase to Phase
solder loose ends to preceding turns. Wrap
Indoors four to six turns of No. 19 AWG tinned
Dry Locations copper wire around shielding braid and
TERMINATION NONLEADED CABLE solder. Solder all turns of braid together
SINGLE-CONDUCTOR 2 to 5 along three lengthwise lines equally spaced
6 to 10 around braided surface.
1. Cut cable to proper length. 11 to IS

^ 2. Remove Jacket and cable tape for 10. Solder ground strip over shielding
distance of A pltis 8 plus 3 inches, plus Fig. 37 Terwinetlon Kon-Lsaded Cable tape near cable covering. Cover stress
length to be inserted into terminal lug. Single-Conductor cone with one layer No. 33 Scotch upe,

lapped. Obtain a smcwth wrapping
.-do not stretch tape more than neces
sary. Add two layers of splicing tape.
11. Pencil jacket (or 1/2 inch as shown.
Clean surface. Take particular care in
cleaning outside jacket surface in order to
entirely remove black wax finish. Coat
with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive cement
or equivalent. When solvent evaporates,
apply splicing tape CE8380 or equivalent
and make sheath seal as shown on drawing.
Apply one layer No. 33 Scotch taps or
equivalent, half lapped. Obtain a smooth
wrapping but do not stretch tape more than
necessary.
12. Over entire termination, apply two
layers of No. 33 Scotch tape or equivalent,
h^ lapped, in manner to shed water. Ob
tain a smooth wrapping but oo not stretch
tape more than necessary.
TERMINATION NONLEADED CABLE
MULTI-CONDUCTOR
Make termination as indicated for sin
gle-conductor except - substitute the follow
ing lor paragraphs 10, 11 and 12;
Pencil Geoprene jacket 1/2 inch. Clean
surface over which sheath moisture seal is
to be applied. Take particular care in
cleaning outside jacket surface in order to
entirely remove black wax finish. Coat
with G.E. No. A50P68 adhesive cement or
equivalent. Allow to dry. Apply splicing
tj^e GE8380 or equivalent to m;ikc moisture
as shown. This is done by sUrting
/ apping tape near end of jacket and wrap-
gj, .;g over ground wires lor 1-1/2 inches,
p xiend ground wires out and back over taping
just applied and continue applying lapped
layers of tape to completion of moisture
seal including a complete tape seal in crotch
formed lietween the three conductors. Bond
and ground the ground wires.
For a multi-conductor cable not having
ground, wires, the individual terminations
should have grounding strips applied as for
a single-conductor termination. These
grounding strips are to be joined together
to a common ground. This common ground
must then be grounded.
The operation of metal-cladswitchgear
is similar to that of other types except that
it provides maximum safety to the operator
and the feature of easy removal and re
placement of the circuit breaker.
All cjrcuitbreaker removable elements
of the same type and rating which have
diqilicatc wiring may be interchanged. .
BREAKER POSITIONING
To place the circuit breaker In oper
ating position, proceed as given below:
Clean contacts and cover with a very
thin coating of Contact Lubricant D50H28.
Push the breaker into the unit until it
.sts against the stop.
To raise the breaker, operate the
GROUND FAULT CURRENTTRANSFORM-
ERS (THROUGH TYPE)
Through type current transformers
(see Fig. 38) arc furnished where sn-cified
for sensitive protection agau-st [.round
faults. These transformers art- rormally
installed in a horizontai po.sitio!i directly
above or belowtlieprinuarycablelormir.als,
so that the primary cable or cables tan pass
through them. One transformer is required
for each three-phase circuit.
Where armored cable is used, the arm
or must be terminated and grounded before
the cable passes through the transformer.
Armor clamps are furnished for this pur
pose when specified.
When lead or other conducting sheath
cable, or cable with shieiding tape or braid
is used, it is recommended that the sheath or
shield^ grounded solidly tothcswitchgear
ground bus. The ground lead should be bond
ed to the sheath or shield on the side of the
current transformer away from the primary
terminals. In cases where the ground cannot
be applied before the cable passes through
the transformer, bond the lead to the sheath
or shield between -the transformer and the
primary terminals. The ground conductor
must then be passed back along the cable
path through the current transformer before
being connnected to the ground bus.
Where potheads are used in units pro
vided with ground fault current transform
ers, the pothead mountings must be insulated
from ground.
CONTROL CABLES
When control conduits enter the unit
from below, the conduit should not extend
more than 4 inches above the floor. The
control cables may be pulled through the
conduits before or after the switchgear is
installed, whichever is more convenient.
Connect the cables to the terminal
blocks in accordance with the wiring dia
grams furnished for the requisition.
If the control conduits enter from above,
drill the top and bottom covers of the front
enclosure wiring trough to suit the conduits.
OPERATION
elevating control selector switch just in
side the door on the right lund side to
"Raise". A clutch handle just above the
elevating motor is then pulled until it
engages the motor at which time it closes
the clutch limit switch to start the motor
and raise the breaker in the hou.sing. At
the end of the upward travel, a limit switch
on the structure opens to stop the motor.
See Figure 17.
To lower the breaker,proceed the same
as for raising except operate selector
switch to "Lower".
The clutch must be held in the engaged
position; otherwise, a spring will return
it to its normal position opening the elec
trical circuit to the motor.
The breaker may be raised and low
ered by an emergency hand wrench which
can be inserted :Uter removing the motor.
Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1802
Fasten the conduits to the bottom cover
With locknuts.
The cables from the control power
source to the switchgear should be large
enough to avoid excessive voltage drop
when the circuit breakers are operated.
See testing instructions.
Check over all screws and nuts con-
nectUig the control wiring to make sure that
none have been loosened in shipment.
Where units have been split for ship
ment, any control or other secondary leads
which must connect across the split will be
arranged with terminal blocks in the cross
trough or convenient side sheet so that the
wires can be reconnected. The wires will be
cut to length and formed before being folded
back so that a minimum of time will be re
quired for reconnecting them.
GROUND BUS
The ground bus is bolted to the rear or
the frame near the bottom. It Is arranged so
that connections to the station ground can be
made in any unit. Where the equipment is
shippetl in more than one group, the sections
of ground bus must be connected by using
the splice plates furnished with the equip
ment. Apply grease and assemble joints as
outlined under "Connections" (Page 14).
Grotuid bus connections are made in the
lower portion of the cable entrance com
partment. The switchgear ground bus must
be connected to the station ground bus by a
conductor havinga current carrying capacity
equal to that of the switchgear ground bus.
It is very important that tlie equipment be
adequately grounded to protect the operator
from injury when short circuits or other
abnormal occurrences take place and to
insure that all parts of the equipment, other
than live parts, are at ground potential.
LIGHTNING PROTECTTON
It will be the responsibility of the pur
chaser to provide suitable lightningarrest-
ers to protect the switchgear from damage
due to lightning. The General Electric
Company's recommendations as to the types
of circuits requiring lightning protection,
and a list of recommended lightning arrest
ers, is contained in Bulletin GER-141,
copies of which are available upon request.
The motor is removed by unlatching
the motor assembly from the support and
disconnecting the motor lead plug.
After removing the motor, pull the
clutch forward and insert the wrench over
tlie end of the clutch shaft. The breaker
must- be tripped Itefore the clutch can be
engaged with the wrench.
SPACE HEATERS
Space heaters are provided in all out
door equipment in order to keep the inside
temperature several degrees higher than
that outside. This helps prevent condensa
tion and the resultant corrosion which might
occur. The heaters should be turned on at
all times. Healers are also furnished for
indoor equipments when it is knou-n that ab
normal atmospheric conditions exist at the
installation.
19
 .^i-'-iili' -', Vi-i'l-l^ —

/*^*N^-1802 Metal-clad Switchgear

TESTING AND INSPECTION
Alter the equipment has been Installed
and all connections made, it should be
tested and Inspected Ijetore putting in ser
vice Allhouuh the equipment and devices
have' been completely tested at the
a final field test should be made to be sure
that the equipment has been properly In
stalledand that all connection are correct
and have not become loose in
tion. The primary equipment should be
completely de-energized while the tests
are in progress.
Directions for testing devices such as
relays, instruments and meters are given
in the instruction book furnished for ea^h
device. The settings of the protective re
lays must be coordinated _^th the oUier
relays on the system and therefore these
relays must be set by the purchaser. Gen
eral instructions on setting the relays are
given inthe relay instruction boote. spec
ial insUucUon books are furnished for
complicated automaUc
cribing the sequence of operation of the
closing coils, when the breaker is being
devices required to perform the desired closed, should not be less than 112.5 volte
function. for 125 volt coils and 225 volte for 2j0'
volt coils.
The Ccaeral Electric Company willnot.,
be re.sponslble for defects in devices not The operation of the breaker with ite
manufactured by the Company ^^en such associated devices may be tested In the
devices are specified by tne purcl^^!>er. All unit while the equipment te energized by
questions relative to such devices shoaid use of the test coupler which is furnished.
be referred to the manui-icturer. Lower the breaker to the lest or down posi
tion. Atuch the test coupler to connect
The extent of the tests on the equip the breaker secondary disconnectmgdevice
ment as a whole will depend on the type and to that on the structure.
function of the equipment.
Hi^ potential tests to check the in-
When transformers are furnished to territy of the Insulation are not necess^
supply the control power, the primary taps if the installation instructions in ihis book
should be selected so Ui.at ^ Hg are carefully followed. If the purchaser
age indicated on the ^ wishes to make high *.re
obtained on the secondary of the trans voltage should not exceed 75% ofthe AILb
formed When a battery is used to supply factory test voltages.
the conUol power, the cables
terv to the switchgear should be larc.e Potential transformers must be dis
SiouRh to avoid excessive voltage arop. connected during high voltage testing.
The voltage at the terminals of the breaker

The readings should be taken under similar

Aregular maintenance schedule should the size of the equipment. However, thisin
sulation, except in one o*" instances, re
conditions each time if possible, Md Uie
record should Include the temperature and
be established to obtain thebestserviceand quires a certain amount of
reliability from- the switchgear. Plant, ohases andto ground tocompletegap humidity.
Meratlng and local conditions wUldlctete ?ten Insertlnlany object m thein..ula-
/^*^the frequency of inspection retwired. For when equipment Ise?®reized, wheteer it^a High potential tests are not re^dlr^,
I'^^'saeclfic information regarding Uie mainten tool or a part ofthebody, may under "f n but if it seems advisable, bas^ onU|® I®*
ance of devices, such as dfc"" ' conditions, in effect, short®'rcuit teis air sulation resistance tests or
relays, meters, etc., refer tothe separate eap and may cause a breakdown ofthep. im- the test voltage shouldnot exceed75% ofthe
instruction book furnished for each <levi«. ary circuit to ground and cause serious AIEE factory test voltage. The
The Inspection cabinet, which is iurnlsh^, damage or injury or both. transformer must be disconnected during
DFOvides a convenient means for maintaining the high voltage testing.
the circuit breakers. Under nori^l condi Care should be e.xerclsed in the main
tions the protective relays do not operate, tenance and checking 3. Clean elevating mechantem and ^
therefore, it is important tocheck theopera dentaltripping or operation is notinltiatea. rlcate jack screws and 6®^®
tion of these devices regularly.- O.E. Co. #D50H15 (Atlantic Ref. Co. «52 or
The switchgear structure and connec equal).
~Apermanent record of all maintenance tions should be given the following overaU 4, Check primary disconnectingdevice
workshould be kept, thedegreeofdetailde maintenance at least annually. contacts for signsofabnormal wrar o'®'"
pending on the operating conditions, in any
I Thoroughly clean the equipment, heating. Clean contacts with siteer polish.
CTcnt. itwUl beavaluable reference forsub Discoloration of the silvered surfaces isnot
sequent maintenance removing all dust and other
operation. It is recommended that therec Wipe clean the buses and supports, ^spect
ord Include reports oftests made, thecondi the busesand connections carefully forevi
tion of equipment and repairs andadjust dence of overheating or weakening of the
ments that were made. insulation.
. . M thin

2. Measure the resistance to^ound Before replacing breaker, apply a Aln

BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE RE
MOVED OR ANY DOORS
PERMIT ACCESS TO THE PRIMARY CW-
CUITS, IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE CIR
CUIT BE de-energized.
The primary circuits of metal-clad
switchgear are- insulated Inorder toreduce
and between phases of the tasulation trf coat of contact lubricant A50H47 tobreaker
buses and connections. Sincedefinite studs for lubrication.
cannot be given for satisfactory insulation 5. Check to see that aU fneh®®
reslsUnce values, a record mimt be kept£ and bolts in the structure are tight Checx
the reading. Weakening of the Insulation
from one maintenance period
tightness and continuity bf all contro
nections and wiring.
be recognized from the recorded readings.

RENEWAL PARTS
ordering INSTRUCTIONS

' BE SPECIFIED SEPARATELY.

20
 Metal-clad Switchgear GEH-1B02

PRIMARY DISCONNECT DEVICES

(SEE FIG. NO. 8)
REF.
DESCRIPTION
NO.

S Front Primary Disconnect Device

Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
Connections

6 Rear Primary Disconnect Device

Assembly, 3 Pole, Complete with
Connections

NOTE: Insulating material required for

Rcf. Nos. S and 6 will be furnished
with order.

POSITIVE MECHANICAL INTERLOCK

(FIG. NO. 17J
REF. NO.

3
DESCRIPTION

Complete positive mechanical

interlock assembly
L_
4 Elevating mechanism motor
(I15-V d-c)
4 Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-c)
4 Elevating mechanism motor
(230-v d-c)
18 Spring only

Cooplete-Left Hand (Ref. Ko. I) Coeplete Right Hand (Ref. Ho. 2)

Fig. 39 elevating Mechanism tor •i-26 Equipments Rated 250 nva or less
and M-33 Equip'ents Rated I200A SCO aiva or Less

10

1 I[ ; • jj'
I4A

ELEVATING MECHANISMS

ref.no. DESCRIPTION

7 Miter gears, pair

7A Groov pin lor miter gear
8 Shaft, right
8A Shaft, left
9 Sprocket
9A Groov pin for sprocket
10 Spur gear
10 Pinion gear and rod
lOA Groov pin for spur gear
11 Stop stud
lU
12
12
12A
Stop bolt
Pinion gear and rod
Spur gear
Groov pin for spur gear
L
13 Locking spring
14 Stop shaft
14A Groov pin for stop shaft
I4B Stop shaft bracket
IS Clutch spring
ISA Groov pin for clutch spring
16
17
Slide clutch
Jack screw
i

CoBplete Left Hand (Ref. Ho. 3) Cooplete Right Hand (Ref. Ko. H)
Fin. hO Elevating Mechanism for H-36H Equlpaents Rated 750 nva,
H-26 Equipirents Rated 350 r.va and H-3S Equipments Rated 2000A

21
 .Stnf^'?rfr^'UT* .•i' •

33 54
25 3' 32 •
./«S^SH-1802 Metal-clad Svitchgear
£-.
I

I
V

19 20 21 22 -
i ••^-26 •
41
f
I
;1

L:.
! ^ ^ 2^
I 't
.•rrJs.2e
1 • J

f -1 •^••3-36
4

/
«-29 V '/J 37
t
-i
Fig. 41 Angle Bracket and Chain Drive tss 30

REF. NO. DESCRIPTtON

19 Bracket 37a
20 Roller
W »-
21 Retainer
22 Chain

«
'I

' if Fig. >14 Bus Supports

' -'-An r •-•

rJ DESCRIPTION
t~ REF. NO

Isolating barrier support angle

Rear isolating barrier
Intermediate isolating barrier
Front isolating barrier
Isolating liai rier clip
Isolating barrier support
Front support clip (not shown)
- .."^g
Front Intermediate support c
Intermediate support
Rear intermediate support
Rear support clip 'not shown)
lower Uitermediate support
Lower intermediate support dtp
Intermediate clamp assembly
Fig. W Shutter Mechaniso Assembly H-26 (supersedes but does not replace
Rel. Nos. 31 - 35)

72 74
70 21 •

.;

Fig.' 45 Doer Handles and Locks

REF. NO. i description

."3 Panel locking handle
70
71 Panel handle
72 . i Door locking handle
73 1 ' Door handle
74 Socket

Fig. 43 • Shutter Hechanisa Asaesbty M-36

32
 Metal-c^d Switchgear CEH-1802

REF.
IXJCATION RATING DESCREPTiON
NO.

38 int. 1200A. 1 connection bar, down

39 int. 1200A. 1 connection tiar, up
40 end 1200A. 1 connection bar, down
41 end 1200A. 1 connection bar, up
42 int. 1200A. no connection bar
43 end 1200A. no connection bar
44 int. 1600A. 1 connection bar, down
45 int. 1600A. 1 connection tnr, up
46 end 1600A. 1 connection bar, down
47 end 1600A. 1 connection tiar, up
48 int. 1600A. no connection bar
49 end 1600A. no connection bar
50 int. 2000A. 1 connection tiar, down
51 int. 2000A. 1 connection bar, up
52 end 2000A. 1 connection bar, down
53 end 2000A. 1 connection i>ar, up
54 int. 2000A. no connection bar
rid 55 end 2000A. no connection bar
56 int. 2000A. 2 connection tars, dowi
r 57 int. 2000A. 2 connection bars, up
53 end 2000A. 2 connection bars, dowr
59 end 2000A. 2 connection bars, up
59A —' specify Insulating boot
59B Plastic rivet for boot
fe

i. ;

Fig. 46 Bus Connection Box

(•i.lB or 13.8 KV Units) f ; JA

if l

<
598

Fig. 47 Bus Connection Boot

(4.16 KV Units Only)

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION

3
m
rr
60A Limit Switch SBl type (upper)
s 60B. Limit switch SBl type (lower)
61 Light switch
62 Keyiess receptacle
63 Duplex receptacle
64 Strip heater
65 Fuse block, open type
66 Fuse block, dead front
67 i Limit switch, mercury type
See (68 Complete secondary disconnect device
Fig.l7l69 Complete stationary auxiliary
switch and mechanism
Fig. 48 Wiring Deviges and Miscallaneous Parts
GEH-1802 Metal-cUd Swltchgcar
77 79 76 92 83 78 81 9t 80
- I ! i i ref.no. DESCRIPTION

FUSE ROLLOUT UNIT

75 Fuse support iupper)
-79
76 Fuse support (lower)
77 Shutter
-92
78 Transformer
r , 82 79 Barrier
80 Barrier
81 Contact

ri-'M 82
83
Shutter support
Ground shoe
trn^ee 84 Ground contact
85 Cover
86 Frame
87 Support
Fig. 49 Fuse Rollout Unit 88 Support
89 Support
90 Carriage
91 Arc Quencher
92 Insulator

POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT UNIT

94 Barrier support
0
95 Barrier support 01
GO
96 P.T. barrier 0
CM
97 Shutter «o

98 Shutter support
99 Contact (movable)
0
100 Contact (stationary) \n
101 Sec. disconnect (movable)
c*
102 Sec. disconnect (stationary)
103 Barrier
104 Conttct
106 Ground shoe
T^mCJkL SeCTtpt^L t/fSLy
rcee.
107 Support
108 Frame and carriage
109-i p; T. bratd (specify length)
111 Support
112 Support
Fig. SO Potential Transfomer Rollout Unit 113 Cover
114 Carriage

CONTROL TRANSFORMER ROLLOUT UNIT

175 Fuse support (upper)
176 Fuse support (loiver)
LT.! 177
178
Shutter
Transformer
Contact
179
180 Contact
lA Contact
182 Shutter support
183 Ground shoe
184 Ground contact
185 Cover
186 Frame
187 Support
188 Support
189 Support
ga«-*<atQ v tv.>ft 190 Carriage
191 Barrier

SINGLE & TRIPLE-CONDUCTOR POTHEADS

Fig. 51 Control Transforaer Rollout Unit
201 Triple-conductor pothead assembly
202 Body
203 Insulators and support
204 : Wiping sleeve
2QT.{C
205 -Caskets for tripic-conductor pothead
?"i 206 Terminal
5—:0r.208.209 207 Contact nut
208 Washer
'iiL-"' 209 Palnut (3/4 in. - 12)
210 . Pipe plug (3/4 in. std.)
211 Pipe plug (1/8 in std.)
212 Singie-conductor pothead assembly
213 'Body and insulator
214 Gaskets for single-conductor pothead
215 Wiping sleeve
216 , Adapter for mechanical entrance
fittings
Fig. 52 Single and Triple-Conductor Fatheads

12.58 GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA, PA.

 GEFwt351B
RENEWAL PARTS Supenetitt Gt£F-43SlA

METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
TYPES M-26 AND M-36

II

GENERAL ELECTRIC
i W I 1 6 I A a

ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS

1. Always specify the complete nameplate data of the equipment.

2. Specify the quantity, catalog number (if listed), reference number (if listed), description, and this
bulletin number.

3. Standard hardware, such as screws, bolts, nuts, washers, etc., is not listed in this bulletin. Such
items should be purchased locally.

4. For prices, refer to the nearest office of the General Electric Company.

GENERALS ELECTRIC
Goto svbjoct to ehongi wIthoMi notleo,
 GENERAL ^ ELECTRIC
SWiTCHGIAfi

»HtlA0CL»H1A. 9k M«0| tM U s A

Ordering Number Description

733-328X600 Front primary disconnect

328X601 Front primary disconnect
328X602 Front primary disconnect
328X603 Front primary disconnect
328X604 Front primary disconnect
328X605 Front primary disconnect
328X606 Front primary disconnect
328X607 Rear primary disconnect
328X608 Rear primary disconnect
328X609 Rear primary disconnect
328X610 Rear primary disconnect
328X611 Rear primary disconnect
328X612 Rear primary disconnect
328X613 Rear primary disconnect
328X614 Front installation accessories
328X615 Front installation accessories
328X616 Front Installation accessories
328X617 Front installation accessories
328X618 Front Installation accessories
328X619 Front installation accessories
328X620 Front installation accessories
328X621 Rear installation accessories
328X622 Rear Installation accessories
328X623 Hear Installation accessories
328X624 Rear installation accessories
328X625 Rear installation accessories
328X626 Rear installation accessories
328X627 Rear installation accessories
 GEF-4351B
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR

^ 28

-t-l

t"9 '^13®.

Elevating mechanism for M-26 equipments 4 Elevating mechanism for M-36H equipments
rated 250 mvo and M-36 rated rated 750, M-26H rated 350 mva and
1200A 500 mvo M-36 rated 500 mva 2000A

I 10 n 17,19 19 27 29

Fig. 5 Elevating mechanism for M-36HH equipments rated 1000 mva

Ref. No. Orderli^ Number Description

733-328X628 Positive mechanical interlock assembly, complete

328X629 Elevating mechanism motor
328X630 Spring
328X631 Complete secondary disconnect device
328X632 Complete stationary auxiliary switch mechanism
328X633 t Miter gears, pair
328X634 Roll pin for miter gears
326X635 Shaft, right
328X636 Shaft, left
328X637 Sprocket
328X638 Roll pin for sprocket
328X639 Bearing block
328X640 Spur gear
328X641 Pinion gear and rod
328X642 Roll pin for spur gear
328X643 Stop stud
328X644 Stop bolt
328X645 Pinion gear and rod
328X646 Spur gear
328X647 Roll pin for spur gear
328X648 Locking sprii^
328X649 Stop shaft
328X650 Roll pin for stop shaft
328X651 Bracket for stop shaft
328X652 Clutch spring
328X653 Roll pin for clutch sprii^
328X654 Slide clutch
328X655 Jack screw

tWhenever gears mesh, they must be ordered as a pair.

GEF-4351B METAL-CLAD 5WITCHGEAR

35 36

Fig. 6 Angle bracket and chain Fig. 10 Bus support, molded

Fig. 7 Shutter mechanism M-26 (Ref. 37) Fig. 11 Bus connection boot (4.16 KV and 13.8 KV)
Specify unit No. and phase on which boot is to be used

Fig. 8 Shutter mechanism M-36 (Ref. 38)

f I f
5.1 N 48 47 46 5
Fig. 12 Wiring devices and miscellaneous

Fig. 13 Door handles and locks

 METAUCLAD SWITCHGEAR GEF-4351B

Ref. No. Ordering Number Description

33 733-328X656 Bus support, 5KV

34 328X657 Bus support, ISKV
35 328X658 Bracket assembly
36 328X659 Chain
37 328X660 Shutter mechanism assembly (M26)
38 328X661 Shutter mechanism assembly (M36)
45 328X668 Limit switch, Type SBl
46 328X669 Light switch
47 328X670 Keyless receptacle
48 328X671 Duplex receptacle
49 328X672 Strip heater
30 328X673 {Fuse block, open type
51 328X674 {Fuse block, dead front
52 328X675 Limit switch, mercury type
53 328X676 Panel locking handle
54 328X677 Panel handle
55 328X678 Door locking handle
56 328X679 Door handle
57 328X680 Socket

{Specify amp rating of fuse and number of poles.

Fig. 14 Fuse rollout unit

t ROLLOUT UNIT

Fig. Ref. Ordering Number for

No. No. 5K 15KV Description
14 58 733-328X681 G1 G2 Fuse clip
14 59 328X682 G1 G2 Insulator
14 60 328X683 G1 G2 Ground bar
14 61 328X684 G1 G2 Ground finger
14 62 328X685 G1 G2 Barrier
14 63 328X686 £ G2 Cover
14 64 328X687 G1 G2 Tray
14 65 328X688 G1 G2 Strap
14 66 328X689 £ G2 Insulator support
14 67 328X690 £ 02 Insulator clamp
14 68 328X691 G1 a Barrier
14 69 328X692 G1 G2 Compound strap

{All rollout units and potheads can be either 5 KV or 15 KV. When ordering give complete ordering
number plus G1 for 5 KV and G2 for 15 KV.
4^Does not apply to 5 KV unit.
*Not shown.
GEF-4351B METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR

90 88

95 —

Fig. 15 Potential transformer rollout unit

8^109

o
110 I

Fig. 16 Control power transformer rollout unit

NOTE; Figure No. 17 and Ref. No's. 115 thru 129 have been removed and these
parts are no longer avlalable.
 METAUCLAD SWITCHGEAR GEF-4351B

t ROLLOUT UNIT (Cont'd)

Fig. Ref. Orderlnt Number for

No. No. 5K 15KV Description

14 70 733-328X693 G1 G2 Finger
14 71 328X694 A G2 Connection bar
14 72 328X695 G1 G2 Connection bar
14 73 328X696 A G2 Connection bar
14 74 328X697 G1 G2 Connection bar
14 75 328X698 G1 G2 Connection bar
14 76 328X699 G1 G2 Connection bar
15 78 328X701 G1 G2 Insulator
15 79 328X702 A G2 Insulator clamp
15 80 328X703 G1 G2 Insulator support
15 81 328X704 G1 G2 Disconnect bar
15 82 328X705 G1 G2 Finger
IS 83 328X706 G1 G2 Barrier
15 84 328X707 G1 G2 Disconnect bar
IS 85 328X708 G1 G2 Disconnect bar
15 86 328X709 A G2 Barrier
15 87 328X710 G1 G2 Ground finger
15 88 328X711 G1 G2 Ground finger support
15 89 328X712 G1 G2 Ground finger support
15 90 328X713 G1 G2 Barrier
15 91 328X714 G1 G2 Secondary disconnect (stationary)
15 92 328X715 G1 G2 Secondary disconnect (movable)
15 93 328X716 G1 G2 Brace
15 94 328X717 G1 G2 Tray
15 95 328X718 G1 G2 Cover
16 96 328X719 G1 G2 Insulator
16 97 328X720 A G2 Insulator clamp
16 98 328X721 G1 G2 Insulator support
16 99 328X722 G1 G2 Contact bar
16 100 328X723 G1 G2 Ground finger support
16 101 328X724 G1 G2 Ground finger
16 102 328X725 G1 G2 Ground shoe contact
16 103 328X726 G1 G2 Fuse clip
16 104 328X727 G1 G2 Primary contact
16 105 328X728 G1 G2 Ground bar
16 106 328X729 G1 G2 Ground finger support
16 107 328X730 G1 G2 Ground finger
16 108 328X731 A G2 Cross angle
16 109 328X732 G1 G2 Barrier
16 110 328X733 A G2 Barrier
16 111 328X734 G1 G2 Secondary disconnect (movable)
* 112 328X735 G1 G2 Secondary disconnect (stationary)
16 113 328X736 G1 G2 Tray
16 114 328X737 G1 G2 Cover

t All rollout units can be either 5 KV or 15 KV. When ordering give complete ordering number
plus G1 for 5 and G2 for 15 KV.
^ Does not apply to 5 KV unit.
» Not shown.
GEF-4351B METAUCLAD SWITCHGEAR

t3a—

Refer toGEI-77065

Fig. 18 Taping material for bus connection joints Fig. 19 Auto—charged trip device

^3^-

Refer to GEI-77007C
Refer to GEI•88760
Fig. 21 Silicon rectifiers for circuit breaker closing
Fig. 20 Capacitor trip device
ACCESSORIES

Ordering
Number Description

733-328X753 Irrathene ® tape (1-202) 4 in. wide b>' 21 in. longpiece (tor 1200 amp joint)
328X754 Irrathene tape (1-202) 4 in. wide by 29 in. long piece (for 2000 amp joint)
328X755 Irrathene tape (1-202) 1 1/2 in. wide by 25 ft roll
328X756 Glass cloth tape (A2L12B) 1 1/2 in. wide by 36 yd roll
328X757 Black msulating varnish {U-311) (for 2.4 KV and 4.16 KV)
328X758 Brown insulating varnish (U-310) (tor 7.2 KV and 13.8 KV)
328X759 Packing compound (A50H119) 5 lb package
328X760 Auto charged trip device (ST-230)
328X761 Capacitor trip device
328X762 Silicon rectifier assembly for circuit breaker closing service

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY • SWITCHGEAR BUSINESS DEPARTMENT • PHILADELPHIA, PA 19142

 INSTRUCTIONS GEI-88775A

MC-4.76 Horizontal Drowout

MetokClad Switchgear

MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR DEPARTMENT

GENERAL^ ELECTRIC
PHILADELPHIA, PA.
 CONTENTS
Page No•
......... .r'\
... ......
Section I INTRODUCTION ••••••••••• '-

Section II RECEIVlNG, HANDLING, STORAGE 3

Section m DESCRIPTION
General•• .Housing•• .Secondary Enclosure•• .Primary Enclosure ••••••• ... 5
Breaker Removable Element. • .Secondary Disconnecting Device. ••••••••• 10
Primary Disconnecting Device •••Bus Compartment•••Current Transformers 16

.....
Shutters•••Potential Transformer Compartment. •• •••••••• 10
Control Power Transformers•• .Dummy Removable Element •• 12
Handling Dolly. ••Transfer Truck. • .Outdoor Equipment. •• •••• 12
Accessories. • •Test Cabinet. • .Secondary Coupler. ••••• ••••• •• • 17
Breaker Maintenance Operating Handle. • .Rackout Mechanism Operating Handle•••• 17
Position Switch. • .Auxiliary Switch. • .Breaker Interference Stops •• ••• • •• • •• 17
Key Lock 4. 76 Kv. • • •. • . . . • . . . . . . • • • . • • • • . . • . • • . . • . • . 18

......................
Section IV INSTALLATION

......................
Location. • .Preparation of Floor - Anchoring 19
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . 20
Breaker Removable Element•••Test Cabinet•• .Addition of Units to Existing Equipment 21
Section V TESTING & INSPECTION

....... ...
Section VI OPERATION
.....
...... ........
Breaker- Positioning•••• 22

.... ..
Space Heaters ••••••• 2�
Section VII MAINTENANCE. •••• ..... z ..
,

...
TABLES AND ILLUSTRATIONS

.....
Figure 1. Hoisting and Jacking Indoor Equipment • 6

... ...
Figure 2. Installation of Indoor Equipment •••• • 7

...
Figure 3. Hoisting and Jacking Outdoor Equipment • 8

.. . ............
Figure 4. Installation of Outdoor Equipment. ••••• 9

.... ....
Figure 5. Breaker Compartment 4.76 KV ••••• 11

... .........
Figure 6. Installation of Appearance Trim ••••• 13

... ....
Figure 7. Installation of Outdoor Protective Aisle ••• 14

....
Figure 8. Installation of Outdoor Transition •••• 15

..... .......
Figure 9. Installation of Outdoor Common Aisle ••• 16

...
Figure 10. Breaker Key Lock 4.76 KV••••••••• 18
Figure 11. Foundation Floor•••••••••••••• 19
-
Figure 12. Main Bus Connections in Match and Lineup 21
Table I
Table II
Ratings for Horizontal Drawout Metal Clad
Bolt Torque Values for Metal Clad Switchgear .
5
20
,.
....
PHOTOGRAPHS
Line-up of Metal Clad Switchgear••• • •••••••• Cover
Figure A. Indoor Unit ••••• • • •• •••••••••••••• 4
fl'!!tl
Figure B. AMH-4.76-250 Magne Blast Breaker . •••••••• ( \1.
Figure C. AMH-4. 76-250 Mague Blast Breaker with Front Cover,
Box Barrier and Arc Chute Removed •••••••••• ... 4
 MC-4.76 HORIZONTAL DRAWOUT
METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
SECTION i
INTRODUCTION
This book contains instructions for Installing,
operating and maintaining MC-4.76 Horizontal Draw-
out Metal-Clad equipments. It should be care
fully read before installation and initial operation
of these equipments.
For application and specification information
refer to GEA-8629 MC-4.76 Metal-Clad Switchgear.
Separate publications will be supplied for break
ers, relays and other devices not described in this
publication.
In addition to instruction books, the following
drawings will be supplied:
1. Front view and floor plan drawings - these
show the general arrangement, height, rec-
commended aisle space, etc.
2. Summary of switchgear equipment - this is a
partial parts list, giving catalog numbers of
all breakers, devices, etc.
j. When required:
(a) Control wiring diagram.
(b) Elementary or schematic wiring diagrams.
All of these documents are needed for installa
tion, operation and maintenance of the equipment.
SEaiON II
RECEIVING, HANDLING, STORAGE
Every case or package leaving the factory
is plainly marked with case number, requisition
number and customer's order number. If for any
reason it is necessary to divide the equipment for
shipment, the unit numbers of the portion of the
equipment enclosed in each shipping package are
marked on the package.
The contents of each package of the shipment
are listed in the packing details attached to the
package. To avoid the loss of small parts when
These insfrvetions do not purport to cover all dotails or yariations in equipment nor to provide for every possible
conh'ngency to be met in eonneetion with installation, operation or maintenance. Should fbrther information be desired
or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the matter should
-j- fae referred to the General Blectric Company,
unpacking, the contents of each case should be
checked against the packing details before discard
ing the packing material. Notify the nearest General
Electric Company representative at once if any
shortage of material is discovered.
All equipment leaving the factory is carefully
inspected and packed by personnel experienced in
the proper handling and packing of electrical equip
ment. An inspection should be made immediately
upon receipt of any apparatus for any damage
sustained while enroute. If injury is evident or
an indication of rough handling is visible a claim
for damage should be filed at once with the trans
portation company and the General Electric Com
pany notified promptly. Information on damaged
parts, part number, case number and requisition
number should accompany the claim.
HANDLING
The indoor switcl^ear units are most con
veniently handled by a crane. Lifting angles are
provided on the top of the switchgear. A cable
spreader must be used when lifting with a cr^e
in order to obtain a vertical pull on the lifting
angles. Otoerwise the lifting angles will be bent.
If crane facilities are not available the equip
ment may be moved into position by naeans of
construction rollers placed under the shipping sldd.
Where overhead clearance is too low the shipping
skid may be removed and the equipment moved
by rollers placed under the channel sections in the
bottom of the gear. These channels are parallel
with the front of the equipment so movement of
the equipment using the floor plate channels and
rollers can only be accomplished in one direction,
i.e. parallel to the front. The rollers should be
spaced so that the channel sections only are in
contact with the rollers since a direct jqrplication
of the rollers in the space between the channels
may tear or distort the floor plates. Jacks may
also be used to handle the equipment when a crane
is not available. Methods (rf handling are shown
in Figures 1 and 3.
All outer crating should be removed after the
equipment has been moved to the desired location.
Methods of handling outdoor equipment as shown in
Figure 3 are much the same as for indoor equip
ment except that lifting plates are provided at the
base of the structure instead of at the top of the
 I

E2?_

iJfSLlC

-250 M
nt Cov
c Chut
(303'

units.
STORAGE
If it is necessary to store the equipment for
any length of time, the following precautions should
be taken to prevent breakage, corrosion, damage
or deterioration:
1. Uncrate the equipment, Check thoroughly for
damage.
Store in a clean dry place with moderate
temperature and cover with a suitable canvas
to prevent dust, dirt, water or other foreign
substances from entering the swltchgear.
Batteries should be uncrated and put on trickle
charge immediately on receipt.
If dampness or condensation may be encounter
ed in the storage location, heaters should be
placed inside the units to prevent moisture
damage. Approximately 500 watts of heaters
per unit will be required. Remove all cartons
and other miscellaneous material packed inside
units before energizing any heaters. If the
equipment has been subjected to moisture it
shoiiid be tested with a 1000 V or 2500 V meg
ger. A reading of at least 200 megohms should
be obtained. On outdoor switchgear dampness
or condensation can be prevented by making a
temporary power supply connection to the heat
ers already installed in the equipment.
SECTION ill
DESCRIPTION
Metal-Clad switchgear is equipment designed to
control medium voltage circuits.
The switchgear consists of one or more units
which are mounted side by side and connected
mechanically and electrically to form a complete
switching etpiipment.
Each Metal-Clad unit consists of a stationary
housing and a removable breaker element. The
RATINGS FOR HORIZONTAL DRAWOUT METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
NOMINAL
CIRCUIT BREAKER 3 PHASE
KVA CLASS
TYPE MC-4.76
AMH 4.76-250
TABLE I
Metal-Clad Swltchgear Type MC-4.76 GEI-88775
stationary housing is compartmented and contains
the instrument panel, bus compartment, breaker
compartment and cable or termination compartment.
Each of these compartments is enclosed in grounded
sheet metal.
The switchgear is designed to provide maxi
mum safety to the operator.
The circuit breakers are easily removable to
provide maximum accessibility for maintenance
with minimum service interruption.
The equipment is available in the ratings listed
in Table 1, The ratings of the equipment and
devices are based on usual service conditions as
covered in ASA and NEMA Standards.
For outdoor use the same basic equipment is
enclosed in a weatherproof steel housing.
The principal parts and features of the Metal-
Clad equipment are described in greater detail in
the following paragraphs.
HOUSING
The Metal-Clad housings are made of formed
steel panels riveted or bolted together to form
rigid, self-supporting units with metal barriers
between the different enclosures.
Each unit is basically divided into a secondary
and a primary enclosure as described below.
Secondary Enclosure
The secondary enclosure is located above the
breaker compartment on the breaker withdrawal
side of the unit. It consists of a compartment
with a hinged and latched door on which cm be
mounted instruments, control andprotectivedevices.
Terminal blocks, fuse blocks and some control
devices are mounted inside the enclosure and a
trough is provided at the top to carry wirmg
between units.
Primary Enclosure
The primary enclosure contains the high voltage
equipment and connections. It consists of the breaker
compartment, the bus compartment and the cable
termination compartment. Each of these compart
ments is separated from the others by metal
barriers for maximum reliability and safety.
RATED
CONTINUOUS
CURRENT
AT 60 CYCLES
1200
250,000 2000
 O
A M

oo
Oo

SPftEADERS NOT
A -3
<I

FURNISHEO A \
CJ1

;v..

1
m
<l>

I
o
p

H-
1 o.
CO

»-'•
f-t-
C o
cr
oq

3
M
FRONT-

I ;REAR
CD
p
•t

S
.siimber
furnished
not

V
& 0
1
H-
O M 1^.
•
9 -3
a>
S TIE CABLE NOT
P<
FURNISHED
9 /

JACK HERE
3
a
o rollers NOT
o
furnished
front VIEW SIDE VIEW
s*
TJ
B
(2) JACKING ANGLES ZflXljjXl, THK
(FRONT a REAR) NOT FURNISHER
0)
ti

VIEW A-A

(673D0515-1Q't) Holstlnjj &Jacking Indoor Equipment

)
 ) ) ()

LOCATION fOU
INTEAUMT 80LT8

MAIN BUS
splice
ISEC VIEW*A'|

DUMMT C0vCR-FO8USC
WM£N ORCflKfH IS «£•
MQVeO FKOM UNil.
ASSCMBLC ev hOOKINC
LU68 ON BOTTQU INTO
CHANNEL IN Floor
Plate.secure top ev
rotating handle. GROUND BUS-assemble WITH
bolt, PLAIN washer and STAR
lock washer, star washer to
se located BETWEEN GROUND
^ • 16 BOLT
BUS AND UNIT STEEL plain washer
PLAIN WASHER

H
O
BO

ED
rv-

I
o
I—»

Q*

0
ar
SELF LOCKING aq
NUt (D
PLAIN WASHER

1-3

Cmvlon
NVLON
<D
RIVET poLVviNVL Chloride
boot
-Plain waSmcr
g
n
-1^-13 BOLT 1

o>

VIEW-'A' Q
H

00
00
-3
-3
(673110515-185) Installation of Indoor Equipment CJl
 0
HH
1
00
SPREADER NOT FURNISHED 00
•a

01

timber hot
(P
FURNISHED
E.
I
0

a*

1 o

FRONT —» A
P
H

<P

0
CABLE 1

NOT FURNISHED •

-q
O)
§
•1
A

LIFTING EYE

¥• NOT FURNISHED

FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

JACKING TIMBER
not FURNISHED

CABLE JACK here

PARTIAL front OR REAR PARTIAL SIDE VIEW

VIEW FOR jacking FOR JACKING

METHODS OF HANDLING OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT

(673DO515-I86) F "^Alng & Jacking Outdoor Equipment

J J
 Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4.76 GEI-88775
4^
» • s
«
B*
•H
S 3
4 &
H
O
•P
O
c
ML s
"S
iH
*3
IS
s
CO
ITN
iH
irv
am
Figure 4
 GEI-88775 Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4.76
Breaker Removable Element
The removable element consists of a circuit
breaker with a trip-free operating mechanism, an vinyl chloride boots are used to insulate the bolted
interlock mechanism, the removable portion of the
primary and secondary disconnecting devices, the main bus joints and the ends of the bus.
operating niechanism control device and necessary Current Transformers
control wiring, the racking mechanism jackscrew,
the racking mechanism stop pin and foot release
pedal, the racking mechanism position indicator and which are mounted over the primary disconnect
pins and rollers for operating the housing shutters, terminations in the breaker compartment. These
auxiliary switch and position switch. The breakers transformers are accessible by removing the shutter
are mounted on fixed wheels for easy insertion and
removal. The front panel on the breaker becomes
the front cover of the housing when the breaker is
in the connected position.
Secondary Disconnecting Device
Stationary secondary connection blocks are
mounted in the breaker compartment as shown in
Figure 5. Co-operating spring loaded sliding finger
contacts are mounted on the breakers. Both station
ary and movable contacts are silver plated.
Primary Disconnecting Device
The primary disconnecting device utilizes silver
to silver contacts to insure against reduction of
current carrying capacity due to oxidation of the
contact surfaces. The device consists of a plurality
of silver plated copper fingers supported long
itudinally at their center by a non-magnetic metal
spider which spaces and supports the contact fing
ers. The fingers are locked to the breaker studs
in a semi-circular groove machined in the out
ward end of the studs. A double set of stainless
steel garter springs holds the fingers in place in
the grooved stud end. A second set of two garter
sprmgs provides the pressure on the outward ends
of the fingers when the finger assembly is pushed
over the ball end of the stationary studs in the
house. The articulated action of the sliding con
tact fingers permits considerable misalignment of
the breaker studs and the house studs with no loss
of contact pressure.
Bus Compartment
The main buses are enclosed in sheet metal
compartments with removable covers to provide
accessibility.
The buses are rectangular aluminum bars con
tinuous for the shipping split length of the gear.
Primary terminations are welded to the main bus
bars by shielded aluminum arc welding. Copper
terminations at the ends of the main bus bars are
assembled to the aluminum bars by flash butt
welding. Each phase of the bus in shipping split
length is insulated with a filled epoxy compound
applied by dipping in a fluid bed. The three-phase
buses are enclosed In a single sheet metal com
partment with removable covers on the rear. The
buses are supported at each unit line by a track
resistant polyester glass barrier support. These
compound barriers effectively isolate each unit of
the switchgear.
10
All bolted joints in the buses are made with
silver plated copper to copper connections. These
joints occur only at shipping splits. Molded poly-
Provision is made for six current transformers
assembly. The primary power source should be
de-energized before any work is done on the cur
rent transformers. Additionalcurrent transformers,
when required, can be mounted in the rear cable
compartment in the gear.
Shutters
Groimded metal shutters which cover the pri
mary terminations are provided in all breaker
compartments. These shutters are automatically
actuated to open and close with the movement of
the breaker into or out of the compartment.
The shutter consists of a slotted stationary
metal barrier and a movable metal barrier which
slides vertically. This movable barrier is con
nected to a cam arm on each side of the compart
ment, Rollers moimted on brackets to the breaker
frame contact the shutter cam arms as the breaker
is moved into the house. The motion of the cam
arms raises the movable shutter plate so that the
breaker primary disconnects can pass through the
shutter openings and into contact with the station
ary disconnects in the house. As the breaker is
retracted from the house the movable shutter is
driven downward by the cam arm and roller to
close the shutter openings. The motion of the
shutter is complete by the time the breaker reaches
the test position. When the breaker is withdrawn
from the house the primary terminations in the
compartment are completely barriered off by the
grounded metal plates which comprise the shutter.
These shutters are intended to prevent access
to primary conductors in compartments even when
the breakers are removed. No attempt should be
made to tamper with the shutters or to defeat
their purpose unless all energy sources have been
removed from the primary terminations.
Potential Transformer Compartment
Potential transformers can be located in the
upper rear of a breaker compartment or in the
front and upper rtar of an auxiliary compartment.
The potentia transformers are mounted on a
swing down door. The compartment is equipped
with primary and secondary disconnect devices.
One to three transformers can be mounted on each
swing do^ door. The doors are counterbalanced
with torsion bars so that only a portion of the weight
of the transformers must be lifted to close 5ie
door. When the doors are swung open the trans
formers are disconnected and are at a safe striking
distance from all live parts in the gear. As the
 Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4,76 GEI-88775

RELAYS

METERS
TERMINAL BOARDS

CONTROL FUSES

CONTROL
SWITCHES

SHUTTER CAM

MOVABLE SHUTTER STATIONARY SHUTTER

OPENED
JACKNUT

POSITION SWITCH
CAM AUXILIARY SWITCH OPERATING
CAMS a LINKAGE
POSITION SWITCH
STATIONARY AUXILIARY SWITCH
SECONDARY
ENTRANCE
SPRING DISCHARGE CAM
INTERLOCK CAM
GROUND BAR

GUIDE
SECONDARY
DISCONNECTS POSITION STOP

INTERFERENCE STOP

Figure 5. (067310515-183) Breaker Compartment h.j6 KV

11
 GEI-88775 Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4.76
door is swung open the end of the fuse on the po
tential transformers strikes against a grounding block which is fixed in the center front of the
device which effectively removes all charge from me front ofLowering
brewer. the dolly handle then raises
the breaker and permits turning. The
the transformers. In the open position the trans dolly IS intended for use when the breaker is out-
former fuses may be safely removed and replaced. side of the house. It maybeused to line the breaker
All live pa^ ^e barriered off by a polyester up with the house to be sure that the breaker guide
glass partition in the rear of the compartment.
Connections to the transformers are made through ^ 1j house guide are aligned and engaged but
cables which are bolted to the stationary discon ® before the breaker is pushed
and alignment is attained
into the discon
nect parts behind the polyester glass partition. The nect position.
same swing out assembly can be used either in the
front in an auxiliary unit or in the top rear of an Transfer Truck
auxiliary unit or breaker unit.
The transfer truck is supplied with outdoor
Control Power Transformers equipment to facilitate handling of the breaker
elements. The truck has two fixed and two swivel
Control power transformers can be mounted in wheels. A latching member on the front of the
the lower front of the auxiliary unit or in the upper truck lines the truck up with the guide in the out
rear of the breaker or auxiliary units. The control door house and by hooking over a pin in the ^de
power transformers in this gear are stationary holds the truck to the outdoor house while the
mounted in the compartment with the associated breaker is being moved into or out of the house.
fuses mounted on a swing down door. This swing A second latching hook in the rear of the truck
down door also mounts a non-automatic circuit secures the breaker to the transfer truck during
breaker switch which is interlocked with the door movement external to the outdoor housing.
latch so that the door cannot be opened unless the
switch is open and the control power transformer The truck is approximately the same height
secondary circuit is de-energized. A grounding as the outdoor switchgear base but the hinged
device removes the static charge from the fuses as front ramp will allow plus or minus 1/4 inch
the door is opened. variations between the height of the concrete pad and
the floor of the outdoor equipment.
With the door swung open the fuses are readily
accessible for removal and replacement.
Outdoor Equipment
Transformers with ratings up to 25 KVA can
be mounted in the lower front auxiliary position. Outdoor Metal-Clad switchgear is constructed ^
In the upper rear position the size of the trans with a basic indoor equipment completely enclosed
former is limited to 15 KVA. in a weatherproof steel housing. It is available
in three styles:
Dummy Removable Element
1. Standard Outdoor
Dummy removable elements are used as a 2. Protected Aisle Outdoor
means of isolating circuits or bus sections when 3. Common Aisle Outdoor
operation is infrequent and a circuit breaker can
not be economically justified. The device consists The standard outdoor enclosure provides a min
of a framework with a set of six studs similar to imum depth equipment. There is a weatherproof
those on the breakers to simulate the circuit hmged door on the front (breaker withdrawal) side
breaker removable element. The studs are con of each unit. Opening this door gives access to
nected in each phase by fully insulated copper me breaker and the instrument control panel. The
bars. The umts are metal enclosed. The stationary breaker can be moved to the disconnect position
structure in the compartment is the same as for for storage within the outdoor enclosure. The
a circuit breaker. When the device is racked into breakers must be removed from the outdoor hous
the house a connection is made from the bus to ings for inspection and maintenance. A transfer
the load side in each phase. truck is provided for breaker removal.
The dummy element should never be moved The equipment is completely factory assembled
into or out of the house when the bus in energized. in shipping split groups of one to five units. If
A key interlock system is used to insure that all the full equipment is greater than five units the
sources of power are disconnected before the dummy shipping split groups must be assembled and bolted
element can be moved. together in the field. Instructions for assembling
and bolting the shipping sections together are given
Handling Dolly in Figure 4.
A fifth wheel dolly is furnished with each The protected aisle outdoor equipment provides
equipment to aid in handling the breakers when a walk-in aisle enclosure in front of the basic
moving them outside of the housing. This dolly indoor units. The depth of this aisle permits trans
consists of a wheel mounted in a bracket to which is fer of the breakers from one unit to another and
attached a tubular handle. A pin on the top of the provides space for inspection and maintenance of
wheel bracket is engaged in a hole in the lifting the breakers within the enclosure. An access door

12
 ) )

100.00 9J00 l-3X>6-

>10 *32 TAPTllES
setF ThRCAONO TO PAD
SECTIOM
SCCtlOW X-X

REAR TRIM

SlOe TRIM
SH 607-26 INfX)
SH 607-27 t FK)

EQUIPMENT
ROOF
FhONT TRIM
Supports
FACTORY ASSEMBLED

see TRIM
SH 667-37 CORNER TRiM
$H 669• 37

SIDE TRIM SUPPORTS 0

FACTORY assembled SiliPPiNO SPLIT SPLICE
Sli 667-32
SH 607- 33
Sli 600-43
i!
P*
Sh 667-34 CO
SH 687-35
(WHEN REQUIRED)
1
SH 667-36
FRONT TRIM

(D

I
(D

S
0
1

-J
cn

O
M
T
00
00
-a
>3
cn
Figure 6. {0673IX)515-696) Installation of Appearance Trim
CO
 o
n
r
00
00
UC 047)e0»ld.«N.«t7 -J
•4
cn

CONMtll ANMt
S
• f O TA^mc
lO-M M»mc Slt7 •
MifoTAMlHC

OAaiktT O
tWNMteHAOC
UAUC
«ii7.umii»a
C»l7L*f WLSKtAS
IMDCM lACH HU0
MAA70TMK.

I
4%*M»n
iwacHHUkia f
vA-HvKiruicics
SCCTIOM 'A.A'

a
^AlSlC CMO WMk
MjiMui VA-M.aiL
"Altu 7 LOOM
n
ixvwstCR %««Aro V AOOf TMIU
CAiP«ei^t«xi4C>
«»-i«>KriAeics

1/4 -10 CAf

AlSkC IMO WAli
S£CTlQM 'C'^' *41 i<aA o s
LOCM «*SH<n 0
1

*.3
RCMOve SIC4 raiM Mice
miia tHtTACVIMO WIfH HOJSr
a>
SMiPfiHC $reci

MM.L W]

, ilfflNd SraCAOCAS
jACKiso times
Mi,4r ic u$co
res soalino

•ifN 1 CA
MMt Mlf»

tt.
y«6>>"g •
rtOISTIWG AWO 0« «aiu»» MMMBLIO
AH1.C into' wmnOM
INSftUNC fflOTCCllVC AlSLt
.trtim Alien. MoceBiAf gem .Qtww iuLt i
iTosnow AiHC ooM « ArrcMncc to •/«*-«•««
tTOSltlQN AifO ASSCHlLl. AiHI 'fllD «Atc« lUfI • AlSifJ
to Altu. aooit AM «/C OMR.
OAUeMAkC roo OAttCHt to CM WALAO
4.A1KMIi( WAft A»LC' WAlk
9i70SlT>0l| MO' AMCWBLC 0007
OACSfHOtC' 0007 CLIPS AMD A007 lAlU flUOHt A LiftI
ie.i4Ui«|S LissiMS AwsresT rc Ami vA^i.
t.'AMCMKC AISLC COMitll AWdLlS
AHCMOvt SHi^mo srccij
kMtU WiOlA^ ACIOAIMI Mils COAMA AS Mom. •

Figure 7. (0673110515-017) Installation of Aisle

)
) > ')

yicw c - IMlMttNl
llM iNltlS

•Ckf LW»IM
•v'g* T :
ri«M wAtMiA

M*0 AAMt

MOI

6*SKfT

IlUk

YItW'A

•«M9»A»l4 COUCH*
rooar A MAA

CHAM M •4aM*WA( <D

MhC.ftM ••»•«(« «tA*

S3 iOCi MiM|« tiAll •ASfC* to

M iOUIIO HIaCCA CAOm
[M AHOVMT
E
I
n
INSIflLLArtOtI Of TftOMSfORMi;^ A—"
TROtCSinON
n fASlCN IHC t«AN»4llON 10 T((i IRAAOCORHCn 0»4n» wl-ll NUlt
MAhlCH AM cOCAAAiMCn. o*
» riACC m t«AII»t«M MtA* tMC *«)TCN6CA« AM M vmt I(. tHACAOOHC or tnC iAtCA AaaIcO NUlAMCaCn 01 t«4
iMf CninM m fi€ S«nTCMCCAA CM VAti. CO
thAMsrcHucn •utM'NC MvM
t ACMOvC *AO«r M« ACM CMCM raoH im immuhob. 11. ^ !.« IA«M<i(OA UMwCtOA10 lac MM OuA M IM *ailCA>
* *>M«C IwAAia SkMOAt* MO AM COMmCTM* a«t rAStCMO
mt„ ACAJUMAt
•tCAiirtcooT iciiOiA
MM rM $*M«M *««

«. AA«C lM< IMAMlllOM *-AM«( CAOmOU»CL IAMO A»CA» OA

i>
CAMVC(A( tdC CvaCCA%AlCl AaO (UMbaCC fMAaVtCO ««/! •
•> OOaIVaaWAS AAO aOCa AalA)
MMl lAAMCOAMA IHOA «C iMf COPtfAClOA*«M !(« to Ml a AM*. I
A MOitt con uriiN«.
». fctM tH« tAAAbttOA AktoMtlllOA « MltCNACAi |AO VAfci.
TAAMWOAMCn OwBmM «tM4 AM BCCmAC HIIN M«c« AkAice
COAtACt Mis.
10 Ml or tAAMtliQA
sn
M. MSMAtC tHC COmaC€I««(»MlAtCA l.« *A(TChCIA« M> am
AAO Al»CN MOwAtaAC MkC*.
iHt TAANAltrfM COnOmCIOMwWnO IhC AOklVlN'l CnVDAiet
A. CaIICA lAAAlalCMi to CAttCMIM tolanO i/« -M •OLIA.wASmCNIi, MOT. «0u*f IhC MOI riAA* WllHNHONAivCK. IHAMSITIQM IM PlAtLf
ANB iOen vAiMins At ahoan. It. MtuiAU Tn< nCKitl COMNlCToHtCM MANirOMMCn
t. AIMOirl AACCA MCaaiG CAOH ThI ^ACK COM «k*Atl HAlCRiCA. MtHiM ttvOl Of tcrtM.MI Ml tAAIt CO* IAC«M MllAaCIMd lAAhAillON
Ml** OAIACIMTO AtAGC Cm nAH|4l*0N AI.«N«I*C N0«4» IN 10- COAMtCI ti« CMJAOow) to tM( tAAMTMMC* CMWAO
•AtAll wtlN MM* m nAA*tti«M.MCB« BCM6*»KCf mTO ViEW 0 - 0
COAKtCfM.HtlAO IM COAtUClOA aMMMMM Cu*Att(<0.
AtAM At BM— « It. in<H MCittAni CONAtCI la( ACwtRAi. OM TOTM aCmIAa^
O MiMaC AMCAOitimC CAto* taC ciAtf< COM CAM1
IAaMCOMCN OwlMMO MMt lac COaOwCIO* AM nAOOmaC <D
CM Cn( lAiAtCQAMA IMOAt Ancu «AM«r MAtCIAAk AlO
rVAMOaCB.
AiCM OnClAAMCCr tAAAtCOHAC* lOAAtttaOA ImMAI AUCAMO It. tCAAACC nOAf AM *iA« lAAAtit«A COVCAV
M9iC« •A CASACt ailM nOAC* aA l«t IMBAl CaaaM*.
VIEW 'B' t. UiM TAANtC0*HCn (MO AOSitlOA Aii«A(A« tKC sruos m tmt 0
tnAAtcenMCH Ixaoat witM tM macc m ihc tiuMir«ON 1
IMAOAI. lA'
•

-O
o>

o
a

00
CO
Figure 8. (0673IX)515-Ol8) Installation of Outdoor Transition -J
-J
CJ1
GEI-88775 Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4.76
00
c
Q
O
U
f*-i
o
c
isSisSl** o
•H
a • a a » "S
<—I
- ''5
1 5 a ^ • '3
ill lllllfl- •p
to
c _
sll::zz>a
A
0\
r-4
O
I
lf\
S
cn
t^
vo
o
4>
U
3
00
16
 Metal-Clad Swltchgear Type MC-4.76 GEI-88775

is located at each end of the aisle. The basic indoor

portion with its weatherproof enclosure is factory of the breaker contacts to permit checking of the
contact wipe.
/-^ssembled in shipping split lengths. The aisle
-ortion, which consists of prefabricated end panels, Rackout Mechanism Operating Handle
:front wall, roof and floor base, is shipped knocked This handle is used to manually operate the
down for assembly in the field. The assembly breaker racking mechanism. It is a crank type
method is shown in Figure 7. handle with a cross pin in the end which engages
Common aisle equipment is similar to pro- in slots in the coupling on the end of the racking
tected aisle except that there are two lineups of mechanism jackscrew.
basic indoor equipment with outdoor enclosures Position Switch
arranged face-to-face and joined by the aisle en
closure. The aisle enclosure permits transfer of A cam operated position switch can be furnished
breakers from one lineup to the other or between as an accessory when requested. The purpose of
umte in the same lineup. Access doors are located this switch is to indicate the position of the breaker
m the end walls of the aisle enclosure. The basic in the house.
indoor equipments withoutdoor enclosure are factory The switch is located in the rear of the breaker
assembled. The prefabricated aisle is shipped compartment on the left-hand side. The switch
Imocked down and is field assembled after the operating
basic e^pments have been set in place. Assembly the house and is actuated by a fixed pinside
cam is mounted on the left-hand of
on the
instructions are given in Figure 9. breaker frame. As the breaker is moved into the
jtastallation of Outdoor Transitinn house the breaker pin lifts the cam and sequentially
The conductor material and the enclosure for operates the switch, first opening one circuit and
making connections from the switc^ear lineup tothe then closing a second. The switch mechanism is
spring returned to its original position as the break
transformer may be either factory assembled or er is moved out of the house.
smpped knocked down for assembly in the field. In
either case the assembly of the transition and the Auxiliary Switch
connections to the transformer would be made as A stationary auxiliary switch can be furnished
illustrated in Figure 8. in the equipment when requested. This switch is
Transitions for indoor switchgear are similar operated by an arm off of the breaker mechanism
to those used with the outdoor gear except that the and can be used for remote indication of the position
weather resistant gaskets areomittedfromthe indoor of the breaker contacts or for control circuits
installation. which are dependent upon the position of the breaker
contacts. The switch is spring returned to its
'^stallation ofAppearance Trim onOutdoorSwitchgear original position when the breaker is opened.
A horizontal trim band for installation at thetop The auxiliary switch is mounted in the breaker
of the outdoor switchgear is furnished in knocked
down form for installation in the field. The method of compartment. The operating linkage is mounted
assembly is shown is Figure 6. on the right-hand side of the compartment. The
linkage is arranged so that the auxiliary switch can
Test Cabinet
be operated when the breaker is in either the test
position or the connected position in the house.
The test cabinet is designed for wall mounting A crank on the side of the breaker contacts the
and provides a means for operating the breaker operating linkage in the house and the auxiliary
when the breaker is removed from the housing. switch is operated when the breaker closes or opens.
The cabinet includes push buttons to close and The switch can be made to operate only in the con
"ip the breaker and fuse blocks to protect the nected position, if desired," by removal of the front
conteol power cables. A multiconductor cable is bell crank and connecting link.
equipped with secondary disconnecting devices for
connection to the breaker. Breaker Interference Stops
Secondary Coupler Stops are provided in the breaker compart
An extension cable with secondary couplers, ment to prevent the insertion of the breaker with
one of which can be attached to the stationary a ^ 1200A continuous current rating into a house
with a 2000A rating and vice-versa.
blocks in the house and the other to
secondary disconnects, is furnished so The stop block is bolted to the floor of the
that the breaker can be operated outside the house
wiui the box barriers and arc chutes removed. breaker compartment. A projection on the breaker
frame vdll hit against the interference stop if an
Breaker Maintenance Operating Handle attempt is made to insert an incorrect breaker into
This handle provides a means of charging the the house. The breaker rating should be checked
stored energy breaker operating springs manually against the house rating and under no circumstances
jnd with gag pins in place permits slow closing should the interference stop be removed to allow
the breaker to be inserted.

17
GEI-88775 Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4.76

Key Lock If the breaker is in the connected position the

breaker must first be opened. The jackscrew
The key lock for the breaker is located in the shutter slide can then be pushed to the open position.
instrument compartment above the breaker com This moves the interlock linkage on the breaker
partment in the Metal-Clad unit. See FigurelO. to the tripped position and away from the key lock
The purpose of the breaker key lock is to prevent blocking Ihik in toe house. With the jackscrew
the brewer from being closed in the connected shutter slide held in this position it is then possible
position when the key lock key is removed from to pull toe key lock slide forward and turn and
the lock. The key lock mechanism consists of a remove toe key lock key. The breaker then c^ot
series of links and levers which extend from toe be closed while in toe connected position until toe
lock in the upper compartment to a blocking link key is returned and toe key lock is reset. The
fixed to the stationary interlock cam plate on the key lock does not prevent operation of toe breaker
lower left side of the breaker compartment. in toe test or disconnect positions. The breaker
can be operated in these positions even when the
To operate the key lock if the breaker is in key lock key is removed. However, if the breaker
the disconnected or test position the key lock slide is moved to toe connected position the key lock
is pulled forward and the key lock key is turned will prevent its closing until the key is returned
and removed. and toe lock reset.

KEY
KEY LOCK

SLIDE

RETURN
SPRING

ADJUSTABLE
ROD

BLOCKING
LINK

Figure10 (0673D0515-182} Breaker Key Lock h.j6 KV

18
 Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4,76 GEI-88775

SECTION IV The recommended floor construction is shown

in Figure 11. The floor channels must be level
INSTALLATION and true. Installation and removal of the breakers
will be facilitated if the floor in front of the units
Metal-Clad switchgear is accurately built and is smooth, hard, level and flush with the floor
carefully gauged to be true and level to insure channels.
ease of operation and interchangeability of breakers
and housing. It is therefore essential that the
foundation on which it is installed be true and Provision should be made in the floor for
level to avoid distortion of the switchgear structure. conduits for primary and secondary cables. The
location of these conduits can be determined from
Location the floor plan drawing which is furnished for each
metal-clad switchgear requisition. If desired, the
The recommended aisle space required at the conduits may be installed prior to the installation
^ont and rear of the equipment is shown on the of the switchgear. Consideration should be given
floor plan drawing furnished for the particular to installing conduits which might be required for
requisition. future connections. Conduits should project ap-
pro:dmately two inches above the finished floor
Space must be provided at the front to permit for indoor switchgear andapproximately eight inches
insertion and withdrawal of the circuit breakers above the foundation for outdoor switchgear. If
and their transfer to other units. Space at the rear practical, the shipping skid should be left on the
IS required for installation of cables, for inspection equipment until it is at its final location. The
and maintenance and in some equipments for draw- remainder of the crating should be carefully re
out potential transformers. moved so as not to damage instruments or devices
mounted on the front of the equipment.
Preparation of Floor - Anchorintr
The floor or foundation on which the switchgear The skid is bolted to the equipment through
IS to be erected must be strong enough to prevent the anchor bolt holes used for final installation.
sagging due to the weight of the switchgear struc The bolts in the rear can be reached by removing
the rear covers. The bolts in the front of the
ture and to withstand the shock stress caused by breaker units are available when the breakers
the openii^ of the breakers under short circuit are out of the compartments. In auxiliary units
fault conditions. The shock loading is approxi the front doors must be opened for access to the
mately 1-1/2 times the static load. anchor bolts.

— •- 5,a— ^ ;

lUK SLAMP

A-i-

.•^TERNATC MtfHOO OP

4LTt'»NATC VCrwoO ')9

C>*AM<ClS

NSracL-NC •ujCm steei.

shcl ro c«n.U8 aaq

».-** »/? 514, 4MOOt
• H;nf —r
»RCf* r J
j /—»/? 0»A ANCwOA ftou'
IM rkOCR USE CtAMP ^

SmiwS 3* --

amcmcp ANO smiws ro ee

puH4««i«ce 0* «\/kC)<^sca-

OiAMrtiA 'AC*
LT.c(* .-XlkOA]' '• WAriPt-, «s 'O
PtC0M*K*AC8
r,ti. PiN»S'» •I.'OB V'Oui.O ••»»€ PtfC'i e^^,.PwCwT & amt puiL'
rACM MCuNfiftC O-APMCvS AftO >0 CASE IM C>*AH*4au 'VgS
tkc«a fin «tae« 'aTtSb wuqm ucumtujs
'jOAO M Pin>3>< PtOOP «C •iiS'ivfi rxAi* vOwr.* Pd
0>«tCVbV 9h axKOPrM
Ck.;: i.CtS- <MMe0«0 CMAMMlua A4A 0«9<np&
C>«Kitgk» a4»P4 4iM<»VtNT. Ma * <rcu**9Ai,TiOist Oaia* Met*
CM4M*«4 PHic *• MAMMP ^a09«

Figure 11 (O673DO515-2O6) Foundation Floor

19
GEI-«8775 Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4.76
The housings for both indoor andoutdoor metal- 2.
clad switchgear, when correctly installed, should
be true and plumb and present a good appearanw.
The front panels should be flush and square. The
entire assembly should be securely fastened to the
floor channels or base pad.
The reconunended method of fastening the gear
to the floor channels is by welding. A tack weld
should be made at the points indicated for anchormg
on the drawings. If welding facilities are not
available the units should be bolted to the floor
channels using the anchor holes provided at me
front and rear. One half inch diameter bolts
should be used.
The tracks in the breaker compartments should
be checked for levelness both front to back and 3. The ground bus connections between sections
side to side. Any misalignment of the tracks
in either direction can cause difficulty in inserting
the breaker or possible malfunction of the various
interlocking systems. Steel shims should be used 4.
if necessary to level the tracks. Also the plum^
ness of the house with respect to the tracks should
be checked and suitable compensations made.
Whenever possible up to five umts will be
shipped as a single factory assembled pa.ckage.
If the complete switchgear assembly consists of
three or more shipping groups the middle group
should be the first located. The other shippmg
groups should then be installed in order in each
direction from the center of the structure. The
switchgear sections should be placed on the founda- 5.
tion with the aid of a crane, rollers or jacks as
shown in Figure 1 for indoor equipment andFigure 3
for outdoor equipment.. All shipping supports,
lifting lugs and lifting angles should be removed
from the switchgear.
6. The primary cable connections are made in the
Connections
The switchgear sections should then be con
nected and bolted together as follows:
1. Bolt the steel sections together using 3/8-16
bolts, lockwashers and nuts at the points shown
on the installation drawing Figure 2.
bolt torque values for metal-clad switchgear
TORQUE
BOLT SIZE FOOT POUNDS
3/8 - 16 20 - 25
1/2 - 13 50 - 70
5/8 - 11 80 - 90
TABLE n
20
Connect the main buses together using the splice
plates and hardware furnished with the equip
ment. The silvered surfaces on both the main
bus and the splice plates should be wiped
clean. Sandpaper or abrasives should not be
used on the silvered surfaces. After cleaning
apply D50H47 contact grease to the surfaces
in sufficient quantity that the contact area will
be thoroughly -"Sealed with expess grease
squeezed out of the joint when tightened.. The
bolts should be tightened to the torque values
shown in Table H. Aftw the bolts Imve been
securely tightened, the joints are insulated
using the molded polyvinyl chloride boots which
are furnished. These boots are placed over
the bolted joints and the boot flaps are secured
with nylon plastic rivets.
should be made using the splice bars and
hardware furnished.
The control cables should be routed and con
nections made at the shipping splits. After
the complete lineup has been assembled and
tested in the factory, the control cables are
disconnected and the cable folded back into
the end unit of the shipping split. On site
the cable should be unfolded and routed into
the next adjacent shipping split unit, Ter^nal
boards located in this unit are then used to
make the interunit connections. A connection
diagram is furnished to indicate the connections
to be made.
Bus ducts and primary cable conduits shoifld
be lined up and connections made to the equip
ment. Hardware for connecting a bus duct
to the switchgear is furnished with the bus
duct.
rear of the switchgear. The bolted rear
covers must be removed for access to the
cable area. Before any primary cable con
nections are made the cables should be identi
fied to indicate their phase relationship with
the switchgear connections. This is necessary
to insure that motors will rotate in the proper
direction and that the phase rotation is the
same when interconnecting two sources of
power.
MATERIAL
Steel
. Copper
Compound
 Metal-Clad Switct^ear Type MC-4.76 GEI-88775

There are two common methods of making
primary cable connections:
1. Potheads are used when it is desired to her-
~ metically seal the end of the cable to maku
a moisture-proof connection between the cable
and the switchgear bus. A pothead also pre
vents seep^e of oil from the end ofoil impreg
nated varnish cambric or paper insulated cable.
2. Clamp type terminals and wiping sleeve or
cable clamp.
toe breaker can be conveniently done. Conduits
must be installed to carry cables to supply control
power for testing.
Addition of Units to Existing Equipment
Before adding units to existing equipment all
drawings furnished with toe equipment should be
reviewed. In addition to toe usual drawings furnished
with new equipment, special drawings may be fur
nished covering complicated or special assembly
work.

Instructions for making connections using pot-
heads or clamp type terminals are given in in
struction book GEI-28838.
Breaker Removable Element
After the installation of the stationary equip-
nient is complete, the removable breaker elements
should be installed in their proper compartments.
Breakers are assigned to definite compartments
when an order is engineered. Each breaker is
assigned a part or mark number. This number is
shown on the breaker sheets of the summary, the
breaker nameplate and on the identification card on
toe breaker shipping carton. Breakers of identical
design and rating are interchangeable one with toe
other.
Test Cabinet
The test cabinet should be installed on toe wall
it a location where maintenance and testing of
The end cover sheets on toe indoor equipment
are designed so they can be removed from toe
outside. The ends of toe main bus are insulated
and protected with a polyester glass panel so that
removal of toe external steel end sheet does not
expose toe energized bus. After the end sheets
have been removed toe new units can be set in
place. The procedure for making toe main bus
connections is shown in Figure 12. With toe new
equipment in place the bus in the existing equip
ment should be de-energized while toe units gre
being bolted together and toe main bus connections
and control cable connections between the existing
equipment and toe new equipment are made. Since
toe existing equipment need not be entered until
it is necessary to make toe bus connections, toe
down time on toe existing equipment can be held
to a minimum.
Before any covers, other than toe end cover
sheets, or apy doors are opened which would per
mit access to toe primary circuits in the existing
gear, it is essential that toe circuit be de-energized.

0*1 *< vncf

ttiec
IKt

«u**9fir ^

CNo eoot ($)

SECTinw a • Q

•twf Ml*. ^ 'AV-I* 4iao tr««

COvca (?) •SWTMK4
M;AC4lta OMWO
•vs *A0 UMf tKCb.
lae esvca

' i

iMSTauLATtCN gftpCgPUBf ^
^ %r 1 uaeoiT 4«e cae «*«« smc*
/ -14-.^ •ae* C«a 9* C CMHawikT.
•V4CC 4aj4C{aT

'"Ui • .if] (Triri^O

3. acMovt «ae>ir |g« eov(ii 0 he*

«oe-£NeRG»2E g*isTi«o eauipMeNT

s. "fwovc '{.a raou (MSTiKe
C;,v«atHN« acMOvC «n4««a 9* acCflU**!
aaooara hirau^ear ?eoa.
* MXT t'Ctk -0»« 'X taC aea
>9 t'rtTwaa ccwa^eaT
r «SMwae« •*« •cif fa« «*ewa
^aeiM«c aoi'Ctiia 9i4U Mate ^
3a»v( Ua •« a(«ov|9 9* eM«*a<3
awtM ^ 914. avMon 4*0
aavwo 'mc aivC'l Otit.
». atMOvl twaacat «a4Cii(>
•aaCMOvc (ao toei <|)
•••4»M««.f Mua atoVKW lUi Vi
2 nabhCC eoi Oia ® •* CQutaMeat

Figure 12 (06730)515-189) Main Bus Connections in Match and Lineup

21
GEI-88775 Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4.76
SECTION V
TESTING & INSPECTION
After the equipment has been Installed and all
connections made, it must be tested and inspected
before putting it in service. Although the equip
ment and devices have been completely tested at
the factory, a final field test shovdd be made to be
sure that the equipment has been properly installed
and that all connections are correct. The prima^
equipment should be completely de-energized while
the tests are in progress.
BEFORE ENERGIZING SWITCHGEAR BE SURE
THAT ALL JOINTS AND BUS ENDS ARE COVERED
WITH THE POLY VINYL CHLORIDE BOOTS PRO
VIDED FOR INSULATION AT THESE POINTS. ALSO
A POLYESTER GLASS INSULATING BARRIER IS
PROVIDED FOR INSULATION BETWEEN THE BUS
ENDS AND THE STEEL END COVERS. IT IS IM
PERATIVE THAT THIS SHIELDING BARRIER BE
IN PLACE BEFORE THE BUS IS ENERGIZED.
Directions for testing relays, instruments and
meters are given in the instruction books furnished
for each device. The settings of the protective
relays must be coordinated with the other relays
on the system and, therefore, these relays must be
set by the purchaser. General instructions on
setting the relays are given in the relay instruction
books. Special instruction books are furnished for
complicated automatic equipments. These instruc
tions describe the sequence of operation of the
devices required to perform the desired function.
The extent of the tests on the equipment depend
on the type and function of the eqmpment. Tests
which should be performed on all equipments should
include breaker operation, switchgear meggering,
phasing and grounding checks.
High potential tests to check the integrity of the
insulation are not necessary if the installation in
structions are carefully followed. If this test is
required by local codes or the purchaser wishes to
make 60 cycle A.C. high potential tests the voltage
should not exceed 75% of the ASA factory test
voltage. For the power circuit the ASA factory
test voltage for 4.76 KV gear is 19 KV.
Potential and control power transformers must
be disconnected during high voltage testing.
When transformers are furnished to supply the
control power, the primary taps should be selected
so that the control voltage indicated on the wiring
diagram is obtained on the secondary of the trans
former. When a battery is used to supply control
power, the cables from the battery to the switchgear
should be large enough to avoid excessive voltage
drop.
Breaker Operation Test
All breaker compartments have a test position
in which the primary disconnects are disengaged
while the secondary contacts are engaged. This
TEST position permits complete testing of the
22
electrical control circuit without energizi^ the
primary power circuit. When the breaker is first
put into service, its control circuit should be''^^
tiioroughly tested while in this position to make
sure that all closing and tripping circuits are
complete and functioning properly.
The TEST position is not suitable for inspec
tion and maintenance of the breaker and should,
therefore, be used only for testing breaker opera
tion.
Key Interlocks
After initial installation of the switchgear equip
ment, all necessary interlockkeys should be inserted
into the appropriate locks and all spare keys should'
be placed in the hands of a responsible person.
Refer to the key interlock schematic on the front
view furnished with the equipment to determine
the sequence of operation and the correct number
of operating keys required. This precaution is
necessary since improper use of spare keys will
defeat the interlock scheme.
SECTION VI
OPERATION
Breaker Positioning and Racking
The breaker is positioned by centering it with
the compartment and lining up the guide element
on the breaker with the guide in the house. For
the 4.76 KV breaker a single guide channel is.
centered in the house. This guide channel mates
with a similar piece fixed to the bottom of the
breaker frame. The breaker guide is flared to
aid in alignii^ it with the house guide.
When the breaker has been aligned with the
house through the engagement of the guide elements
the breaker should be rolled into the house until
the stop pin engages in the stop block on the floor
of the house. The stop pin is spring loaded and
biased so that its engagement in the stop block
is automatic as the breaker is rolled in. The breaker
is then in the disconnect position. As the breaker
reaches the disconnect position the racking jack-
screw shaft engages with the jacknut in the house.
This nut is spring loaded and self aligning. It is
retracted as it is struck by the end of the jack-
shaft. The spring backed nut is automatically fed
onto the sh^t when the shaft is rotated by the
operating handle.
DAMAGE TO THE JACKSCREW THREADS MAY
OCCUR IF THE STOP POSITION FOOT PEDAL IS
HELD DEPRESSED WHEN THE BREAKER IS IN
SERTED INTO THE HOUSE.
To move the breaker from the disconnect posi
tion it must be first determined that the breaker
is open. The sliding shutter which covers the
handle socket on the front end of the jackshaft
must then be pushed aside and the handle crank ?
inserted. The sliding shutter is part of the inter- —
lock mechanism and cannot be moved aside unless
the breaker is in the open position. After the

crank handle has been inserted the stop pin must
released. This is done by stepping on the
''^ot pedal while simultaneously rotating the crank
.andle clockwise. After a slight movement of the
--breaker the foot pedal should be released. By
continui^ to rotate the handle the breaker will be
moved into the test position, l^en this position
is reached the stop pin will again drop into the stop
block. With the breaker in the test position the
secondary contacts on the breaker are in contact with
the stationary secondary blocks in the house. The
breaker can be electrically operated providing the
crank h^dle has been removed and the jackscrew
shutter is permitted to close. The shutters covering
the primary disconnects in the house are closed.
To move the breaker from the test position the
breaker must be open. The jackscrew shutter is
then pushed aside and the handle inserted. The
stop pin is released by the foot pedal and the crank
handle is turned clockwise. By continuing to
turn the crank handle the breaker is moved to the
connected position. When this position is reached
a collar on the jackshaft is jammed against the
jacknut and further rotation of the crank handle is
impossible. If the motion of the breaker into the
house should be halted between the test and the
connect positions a fixed cam in the house holds
the interlock mechanism in the tripped position
even though the racking handle has been removed
and the breaker cannot be closed. When the breaker
reaches the fully connected position the primary
and the secondary disconnects are both engaged and
closing of the breaker will energize the primary
^^ircuit.
The breaker is removed from the house in a
manner similar to that used to insert it. The breaker
must first be open, then the jackscrew shutter is
retracted, the operating crank is inserted and by
counterclockwise rotation of the crank the breaker
is moved out of the house. The stop pin will again
automatic^y eng^e with the stop block in the
test position and must be retracted with the foot
Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4.76 GEI-88775
pedal to move the breaker to the disconnect posi
tion, The stored energy mechanism operating
springs on the breaker are automatically discharged
between the disconnect and test positions by a house
mounted cam. This discharge of the stored spring
energy will occur each time the breaker is moved
into or out of the house.
Space Heaters
Space heaters are provided in all outdoor
equipment in order to keep the inside temperature
several degrees higher than that outside. Heaters
may also be furnished for indoor equipment when
it is known that abnormal atmospheric conditions
exist at the installation or when specified by the
customer.
By maintaining a slight temperature differential
the heaters facilitate drying and prevent condensa
tion.
Before the heaters are energized be sure the
power source is of the proper voltage,, frequency
and phase arrangement. The heaters should be
connected in accordance with the wiring diagrams
furnished with the equipment. Also be sure all
cartons and miscellaneous material packed inside
the units have been removed before the heaters
are energized.
Heaters should be visually inspected several
times a year to be sure they are operating properly.
It is recommended that heaters be energized at
all times and that thermostatic control not be used.
If thermostatic control is used the contacts of the
thermostat should be set to close between 95 and
100 F on falling temperature de-energizing the
heaters only when strong sunlight beats on the
switchgear. Under no condition should a differential
thermostat be used to control the heaters because
under extremely high humidity conditions this type
of thermostat will not operate at all times to keep
the heaters on enough to prevent condensation in
the switchgear.
23
GEr-88775 Metal-Clad Switchgear Type MC-4.76
SECTION VII
MAINTENANCE
A regular maintenance schedule should be
established to obtain the best service and reliability
from the switchgear. An annual check and overall
maintenance procedure for the switchgear, devices
and ^1 connections should be followed as a mini
mum requirement. Equipment subject to highly
repetitive operation may require more frequent
maintenance.
A permanent record of all maintenance work
should be kept. The record should include a list
of periodic checks and tests made, date made,
condition of the equipment and any repairs or ad
justments that were performed. This record will relays do not operate, it is important that the
be a valuable reference for subsequent maintenance operation of these devices be checked regularly.
work and for station operation.
For specific information regarding the main Check that all properly.
are functioning
tenance of devices, such as breakers, relays, meters
and instruments refer to the separate instruction
book for each device.
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE REMOVED OR
ANY DOORS OPENED WHICH PERMIT ACCESS
TO THE PRIMARY CIRCUITS, IT IS ESSENTIAL
THAT BREAKERS BE WITHDRAWN TO THE DIS
CONNECTED POSITION AND TAGGED.
IF WORK IS TO BE DONE ON REMOTE EQUIP
MENT CONNECTED TO A UNIT, THE BREAKER
FOR THAT UNIT SHOULD BE PLACED IN THE
DISCONNECTED POSITION AND TAGGED. ALSO
THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE ISOLATED
FROM ANY OTHER POWERSOURCES CONNECTED
TO IT,
The primary circuits of metal-clad switchgear
are insulated in order to reduce the size of the
equipment. This insulation, however, in most
instances requires a 'srtain amount of air gap
between phases and to grou'nd to complete the
insulation. Inserting any object in this air space
when equipment is energized whether it is a tool and coat of contact lubricant D50H47 to the house studs
or a part of the body may, under certain conditions,
short circuit this air gap and may cause a break
down in the primary circuit to ground and cause
serious damage or injury or both. The solid in
sulation surrounding an energized conductor must
never be relied on to provide protection to personnel.
Care should be exercised in the maintenance
and checking procedures that accidental tripping or
operation is not initiated.
The switchgear structure and connections should (c) After cleaning, megger and record the resis
be given the following overall maintenance at least
annually.
Breaker and Instrument Compartments
Breakers - Test and inspect all breakers for
proper operation as follows:
De-energize equipment completely except for
test circuits.
24
(a) Operate each breaker while in the TEST posi
tion and check all functions. This is particular-
ly important for breakers that normally remain f
in either the open or closed position for long'
periods of lime.
(b) Remove the breaker from its compartment to
a clean maintenance area. The test cabinet
provides a convenient means for operating the
breakers when toey are removed from the
compartments. The maintenance operation
should be performed in accordance with the
procedure suggested in the appropriate breaker
maintenance manual.
Instruments, Instrument Transformers & Relays
Since under normal conditions, the protective
Check and inspect all devices to see that they
electrical
Check device mounting.
connections are tight.
Breaker Compartment Interiors
(a) Thoroughly clean the interior of the breaker and
instrument compartments. Use a vacuum clean
er and clean rags only. Do not use steel wool
or oxide papers. Blowing with compressed
air is not reconunended.
(b) Check indicating devices, mechanical and key
interlocks.
(c) Check primary disconnecting device contacts
for signs of abnormal wear or overheating, f \
Discoloration of the silver surfaces is not
normally harmful unless atmospheric conditions
cause deposits such as sulphides on the con
tact surfaces. If necessary, deposits can be
removed with a good grade of silver polish.
Otherwise, wiping with a lint free cloth will
suffice.
Before replacing the breaker, apply a thin
the finger disconnects on the breaker.
Bus Compartment
(a) Remove covers and check buses and connec
tions for evidence of overheating or weakening
of the insulation.
(b) Check that all bus mounting bolts and splice
connection bolts are tight.
tance to ground and between phases of the
insulation of buses and connections. Since
definite limits cannot be given for satisfactory
insulation resistance values, a record should
be kept of the readings. Weakening of the
insulation from one maintenance period to the
next can be recognized from the recorded
readings. The readings should be taken under
similar conditions each time and the record _
should include temperature and humidity.
 Metal-Clad Swltchgear Type MC-4.76 GEI-88775

Cable and Bus Duct Terminal Compartment (b) Blue lacquer 254-84299 as make by DuPont
Co.
Inspect all main cable connections for signs
of overheating and, when possible, check that
f connections are tight. (c) Lacquer thinner

Overall Switchgear (d) Viscosity Sand Gray 25 seconds Zahn #2

cup. Blue 27 seconds Zahn #2 cup.
(a) Check that all secondary control wiring connec
tions are tight. Check continuity.
2, Application
(b) Check to see that all anchor bolts and bolts (a) Spray one wet coat.
in the structure are tight,
(b) Air dry 30 minutes.
(c) If the switchgear is eqviipped with heaters
check to see that all heaters are energized (c) Thickness 1.00 mil.
and operating.
(
(d) Check the ground bus connection and mounting Outdoor Finish
bolts for tightness. Clean the ground bus.
1. This finish is applied to surfaces previously
(e) Clean and inspect all painted surfaces. Retouch cleaned and primed.
where necessary.
2. Materials
Paint Refinishing
Indoor and Outdoor Primer (a) Acrylic Sealer 881-007 as made by DuPont
Co.
1. Remove all loose paint, rust, scale, oil or
grease. Sand scratches smooth with fine wet (b) Acrylic Lacquer 890-5001 as made by Du
or dry sanc^aper before priming. Pont Co,

2. Materials (c) Acrylic thinner E-615 as made by Geo.

(a) Synthetic phenolic, alkyd paint 214-488 Senn Co,
Sand Gray as made by Arco Co,
3. Application - Sealer Coat
(b) Thinner, Xylol made by Standard Oil Co.
(a) Reduce sealer to spraying viscosity usiiK
(c) Viscosity 30 seconds Zahn #2 cup. 1 parts 881-007 to 1 parts E-615.

3. Application (b) Spray one coat of sealer.

(a) Primer is preheated to 185°F and sprayed (c) Air dry one hour.
with OeVilbiss type hot spray unit.
(b) Air dry 30 minutes. 4. Application - Finish Coat
(a) Reduce 1 part 890-5001 to 1 part E-615 to
(c) Thickness of paint coating 0.45 to 0.65 mils. spraying viscosity of 21 seconds Zahn#2 cup.
Indoor Finish Coat (b) Apply one coat of finish.
1. Materials
(c) Air dry 30 minutes.
(a) Sand Gray lacquer 246-84296 as make by
DuPont Co. (d) Thickness of finish coat 1.00 mil.

25
 GENERAL ELEaRIC SALES OFRCES

AlAOr 10 ASSST YOU... wrm Yov Krv* SlMtrteai 9rool«iM... NMd INtftlMfbdornaM*... Raqiorc Or4«rtiR( tMtrncaoM

A tt fort WifM 44*04. . 6001 ftAoUkaoy BcdO. NSBRAOIU Ptnabwik 18333 .. . SOO 4tk Aw. Stdt.
AI4U tAduasRQU* 44S0T . .31*011. Mcrldua ft. AI9U OouftaCttOl 40*S.11ttSL WlUlaoeporl 11191 . . . . 3398 Flak Aw.
XST TO SAUS OraUTlOM* Vark mo* 1811 S.Mart*4 SL
C htiUeaeert* «i3«0 .... toto C. Mtt ft.
> Alcaer A OiitntMlx AC OMtfe Bod 48401... 430(1. MttfeftOA St.
Q Ua Vcfia 8*104 IttI t. ft* SL
S3WA PnnOwcaoaiOl.. .1008 CkarlMSL.tf.
I • MflCOlRl SlXtl .VBW HAKPftKRE
U CMu AapM« 33401 .llOSacond 8t.,*.C.
K - Martca ft Mvam nciUttta SaU« V Maachaaur 03104 44 Bay ft. SOUTH CAROLINA
S • tMC&UAttOBsad i*rv(c« laficknrtac C 0«*«Apori 33133 . P. O. OOR 144
At* Oa*«tipor( A 111 ColatsWa 38308 213* Ocviaa ft.
V • ClMtne UttUtjr SeIm a038 SUM SL. OWtMOMf 33131) NIW fWUX * Catonktt 38304. MkUMarfkOUIcaMaU
AC DM Matat* 30310 - . 3*3* KcrU Kaf Ad. C Ban Oraaa* 01011. S4 Mcimaw Gardcaa AI Gracsvtila 38090 . . . . 1403 Uarcas Rd.
U SIM Ctqr 31101 SlORtcrcaft. Aisv ttUbBwami ns.wuto*SL
900TB OAEOTA
aCKU OtrmuciaaSttM.. lUiat^tEBdAv*. NTW MEXICO A ftoaraUaSltei St* Mala Aw.
I H«ftUtnll«MMI..UnMcaBmlPlnTS.
0»«rlaad P»r* 44304... W* M«4ca43 ft. A 1M 9 0 AlOcqvarOM 11108
All MoMUMCM ini s. tfwy. . 130 Madeira Dr. ,H.C.
A WtcMft «T>lt.. . 830 B.ftdiaMp«U8 A**.
V Wtetuta 81393. .194 S. 8read««r 1 31403 . . . 8*8 Oaerctt Ava.
ARIZONA ACIMS ChtNaiBOdt *1811
ntWXQUK
AC I SV PbMou 84012 . . . . 3S94 H. C««U*i Avt. AlMSV Afiaay moi.. . . ilCastpuur Or.waM 8800 B)ds.XajttMa Caatcr
AISU TMmtSYU 40110. 9««bM. XENTCCRY
A U Umvtsa «OSOa. . . . 443 S. AlAtaAd Av*. V Tllf<hamaw 1*803. iOFWWft. I Owapart 31844... 1110 B.BaalBaaRd.
A Cl S U iMsnUt 40318 3309 MaidM Or. AISV Mtaia 14303 *3* Ovtawra Ava. AV BWcvUto 31931. 1301 Maaiak AW.. N.W.
AltlCAyfM
A Btcatftrd 10433 44 H.Ccalral Ava. AISU Maapata 31114 . . . . 3*** Airwara Blvd.
ACtS H. UtU« RocA nil* ttOMtuft. A Kamasa 10814 . . .000 Mamargaack Ava. A Martraaa&ow 31130. Ill )l.w. Bread SL
LOUISIANA
U PtM Btvfl Tim ?.0. a<M 1933 C Kanrdala 13311
AU Alcxaotfru TISOI. . .3001 MACAnftur Or. AU NaaimUa 31303 . . . 1111 Waat End Bld(.
IS B«toQAoucf T04O8. . .8313 Ftorttt Blvd. P.O. BeiSISIS.MeltorRd. C NaMtnUa 31304 3830 Sidco Drlw
CAUrORNU IMSU N«« Yark 10033. . . . 441 Utiac«a AW. M OakJUdcallSSO ... 39* MilaSL.Baal
A BHrUagRa* *4010 . .. TTOAUpon Si«d. ( Uh* C{iari«a 10604 1434 Asru St
Is Mom* 11301 103* li.ftlft ft. C RwUcatar 14018 3390 Maarea Aw.
C *4010 18TS RoltlM Ad. AISU ttocfticftr 14004. 338 Bact Aw.
A19 N«w Orl««M T0133. . 4141 Etrtan Blvd. 7BXAS
Al tawynnt *4000...>000afciUrwart SL U MawOrlaaBa lOttt. . . • 33*8amMft. Also Syraesaa 13301 1*33 Jiflwaft. s V AStlwa 18801 441 Caar 9L
AI rrM»93no isa El. wmc Av*. A VaaallSBOS P.aBoaiOt
U .-(fwOrloM T0U0.930 (ptcf.Tnd* Mart SV Aaanlto 19101 SOSPalkSL
C U«A(«*IM *091* .1*43 W.OI7S9M Blvd. Also BaaaMBtirm 13*8 Caldar Ava.
A 1H $ V U» A(«clM «00M ... 3U N. Vl«aM A. ASU SArvTcpot 11104..3430CeetoAry BItd.
NORTH CAROUMA SV Corpaa Cttftan 11401
A OtUiAdOlOSI 8103 edftwucr Or. ...............308 N. Ckaparral SL
MAINS ACt I U Cbartatta 31301.... 141 pravidcota Rd.
A ORUrto 91T64 314 W«« C ft.
Auoiftd M330. . I33ftai«ft. AI Cracaabaro 31408 . . . . 801 SantMl Ava. A Cl S V Oillu 18341.. .*101 staeoMaa rra4way
S P«lo AKo *4303 . . . . *00 Sm ABtOBMAd. AV RalMfB 31408 1X0 N. BeyUa Ava.
Oaj«0r O4403 . . 11 CMVal ft. ISV BlPaaaftSO* 318ll.SftMeaSL
AS U !fter«ntae *380* . . . . . . . >401 -r* ft. . . . TiBiapaM'a Oolat
PartUiM 04103 A BIPuolOIOS 3SOON.ftaatM8L
AMSU 3uO(«co*ai03 3340 Plrrt Av«. NORTH DAKOrTA A 9ectW»Rli14t01 lOOILVatv.OL
AtMSU SEAfructKoMlOO. £3*Moei9MMfyft. V ftasarcfc 80801 4URocacrA*a.
MARTtAND SV FBR WORR HUB 4eS«.TBlSL
A ftau Cftn *30*0 . . .1400 CalRoaa A«t.
19 U Battusor* 31301 IN.CktrlWft. A Farc» SilOS Ill Oaiwrctiy Or. A C IS V (toaaiea tlOtf 4319 RlctkWd Ava.
AU OalvASU 31403.. 10331 WtaeopiaCircle Al Laebecs194flS *eOB.80aSL
rotOHAlK? OHIO
U Hi|crt(e*B 31140 P.O. Boa 811 AS MMUadlfTOi 233N.14*SL
AC ISO Ocavtr moo . . . . 301 U»T«r«Aif 01*0. At Atooa 44310 aciWMIaPoaOOr.
A SUiAOuTF 31101 P.a Bai 438 ABU SaaABtMUe 19394 ....4i9S.Mata Ava.
IV CaiMu 44103 *13Tblrd SL. H.W.
coNN£C-nci;r
I U
A
tUnd«a 06318 . . . . . . 3M8 Outwall Av*.
Harttard OOIO* . . . . . 784 Afrt«ia AW.
kSASSACNUSSTTS
lU 9o«tea 08111 31SL9tAC« A*«.
A CIS tf
C
AlMBtf
Ctneioaatt 43301.... Iftl vtctory Tftfy.
Ctawlaad 44118. 20880 Ccaicr RUB* R4.
Clavett^ 44114.... 1000 LaeasMe Aw.
UTAH
AISU SattLak»Clty941IO.. allETMrdBSL
"I
C t * V M*fftd«a 08430 . 1 PrflMIS* Or. I 01103 UOKapldft.
C calnmhn* 43313 93lft»raUAWk
ACIMS WcUwiw 03181 IWMttectMft.
AISV Cousaw 43318 lllOMorwRd.
owmiCT or coLUMsu
IM V WlMJifCM X0003... 11T.14thft.. N.W. MICHIGAN
A C t tf
C
DaytM 4843*
MaailUld 44003
M30 E DUic N«V.
104 Park Aw., w.
BatUad 0*101 3* 1/3 Ccidar ft. ij
ACISU OawDtt 48303 .TOO AacfttMat ft.
t PliAt 48*03 80 1 9. Safuav Si. tf Horn Caatta 44130 VOtCfillA
FLORIDA
A IS V .lackaaMnll* 33301.. 4040 Woodcock Dr. AC! Craad Rapida 48804 .1800 Wtctppla AW.H.W. AMS Hawpart Neva 33801 StlMiiaSL 1
3831 Uadtwa Aw., 9. C. V laiada 43W4 4X0 Aw. AISV RtckoaoW 33330. . 1*0* WtU»« U«a or.
ASU MUni 33134 4100W. rU(i«rft.
A Oria^ 33*03 . . 101 N. Fcra Crwft A**. 8(1 3ackam48491 310 W. rraaUta SL A 19 YOucMawi 44101.. 313 8. Aw. AISV XMWka 34018.. .301* Celeau) Ava.. SW
V PwmbbU 33308 P.ft Boa 1931 9 KaUewae 4*003 P.O. Sax 30*9
ACI«U TtB^3*408 SlOOftLMtAw. A19 Saclsiw ilMl. 13*0 S.iWaaia((M Aw. VASUOIOTON
Otaaaom* Ctiy 13104.3000 CUaaca Blvd.
Tttlaa 14108 1138 9.PaorU Ava. AlMSV SaamaMlU lU Aaftvac Park. B.
MfiOfBSOTA
t*V ouifthssio: 300W. BfptftarSc. Talaa 14103 430 MatA SL
AISV SpoWM 3*330 £.1808Tr4idAw.
ACI8U AUtott 3030*.. .1100 Paacbcrw Ad. N.W.
A tdacm 31304 1130 RimMd* Or. ir r«r8w« fall* 98131 talM 14108
A IS U stwaoab 3140* S003 Piutwa ft. 2011/tLUKOtBAW..W. P.0.8dit84l. SeuiAatdaStacwa WB9TV1RQDIU
C MlABcapelU 9*434 .... 40UW. 8901SL Tkiaa 14138 3318 8 4101 Plact AIS CMrtaarea 38338
AtStr Munwpolia *8418 . . . 1*00 Ulac 0r..9. 38*MaccerkiaAve..SB
OMMOSTOI . .i*34ldaMS4. IV yainaaal 3088 310 ficaOt RMS.
MBSSSSffPI AISV Ba9flw9T40* IIIOPaaRSL A StfUMttMniei . SftdiAva. BNUOlSL
ILWOD
U C«tfpoR 39*03 P.a B«l 33 AV Madfordtnoi 10t8.MaiaSL I WkaMtiM 39008 40 Uft SL
AtUSO ChleafB«e*S8 *40 9. Ctotl ft. AS .UCklM 3930* 333 N9. UWI Plat* ACIJU PeRlud 91310.... 3818 N.W.39UI Ava.
C OalfrrMR 80931 1300 Harftr Rd. (T Jaeluoa 39301. . Ra. Ill EUctttd Btdf.
WBC0MI04 .'j
AIV Pcoru 41903. . . . 100* N.B. Pcmr AW. AISU AppU«M84lll. ...SOQlW.ColtataAva.

1
PBHNSYLVAiOA
A I RMldordOltO* 4333 S. ftaic ft. V Midiaoa8*104.. toss PaasayftkM Ava.
A 3o»tkaMt03 SteiTiUSL Altf AUmaova 18103 1444 HtesiMaaSL
U 9prti«fUM 43101... 801 C. AdtO* ft. C MUeaakaa 831*9
AISU XaatatCtiF 4410* IllUttaSL A CaBRBitllteil... utlCadtfOtttDr.
A Sprtninctd4rrOt...43*l/3S9.nR»ft. A CR* 18801 30eiB.t8MRd; .MayCUr Ptua.*4tl M.MaytUr Rd.
AC 19 V ft-lMuUlOl lOUUcaMSL
1 Brn 18801 1001 Stau SL AISV MUmakwSStet . . . OULMICUCtdSL
INDIANA MOTTANA IV Xoaanaapa 18803 84lOtkSL
AC8 U 41114 . .3108 Waaktafwa Aw. A Bllhftca *9101 C PMtadatpUi 11114 34l1W«lMRd. CANADA
C Fort waync 44804 1839 Oroidwar 311 Traaawctlcra LU* Oldc. AlMSV PMladalptla 19103 . 3 Pma Ccnlar PIttt Canadlaa Gcoaral Blactrte Coapaay, Ltd.
S FOR Wayac 44801. . • 3804 S. Callma ft. A19U Butu SftTOl 103 N.WyooUc SL C PltUbars* 18384. . 300 Ml UOaoM Blvd.

OmBtAL aECTRIC SERVICE SHOPS

WHEN YOV NEED 9XRVICS... Hmm GS carvtea caopavnU rapau. ra. praoiaca. lAcatt tae»ry nct&eda aad (caaiM CB rcwwl parta ara
coadittM.ai)4 rcbadd year clactRC apparatKa. Ik* laeiltttea art avail, wad t» oMiaata parferniaaca of year cqaipowL For tall lafonaaUMi
aola day aad u(M. mwa daya a wet, lar wrk tn tita awp* «r ea year aaeai Uiaaa •cwteca.eofitMcyettr acarcai acrvtca abep or •alaaotttca.

ALABAMA DTDIANA NEW MCXICO «• (PttMaartUWaai Mifltia UI2*

««Biriala(*aa 38*11 • FL Waraa46*0* miBdnllAw. «Albiidwtkva 9110.4430 McLaod Rd., KB 490 iMirafnin Itotlov Rd.
1800 Mlaa AW.. E W. • • Dtiisoipalis 46333 . . 110 W. Varcua SL •T»rkli40 SitLKamioaSL
•MWUa ]«409 1*1 LaktaMa Oriia NEW YORE
IOWA *AltHuty 13309 101 Ceetral Avaaaa SOUTH CAROUHA
ARIZONA • iDavanpeRl BattaodeR *1133 « • (Oaltalef Toaawaiida 141*0 viCkarlaaiMiNa. Ctiarlaataa 2M01
• iPfiatBwl Glaadtla 83019 IMS Rata ft. 118 Mtiaaa Rd. 340 DaMMir SL
4911 W. Colter ft. v(Lea« lalaad) OM Dautpasa 11804
•Ploaaa 8*019.. 1*40 W. ciiraMea SL OllTtfCICY 1*3 Bau(pasa.S«aal HaUa* Rd. TtNMBSSSB
•Baenrilla 31914
• ToeaeaMm.. 394* Sa. Pita Vawa Aw. vbMiavUla 40309.. 3900 Crtttaadaa DRw vQiaw York Cuy) Korta »«r«ea, HJ. OlOtt
8001 Tbeeeti# Ava.
301 Oaaaaaev Jaaa Sanar Hvy.
CAUFORKU • Ha^ta 010 10 Heroi Haw SL
LOUISIANA * Wd* Yerk C»y) ClUtaa, N.2. 01913
a L»a Aocaiat 90301.. -9900 ftaMard Aw. • SaiMRauce 10114 . .10** Nerta Dual ft. *BR|MoaRd. TEXAS
•iLsa Ai](cl4ai AnaMUa 93*0* Na* Oriaaaa Wtl4. .. Ill* DaArmaa SU •aScftaaaetwy U3M I Rivar Ra0 aBeaaBKMtmOS... 140 w. Cardlaal Or.
301 B. taPalBia Awi ♦ByrmcttM 100 . . IOlS6.KU«aiM Blvd. vCdrpaaChrlctt 7*401 .. 118 Wacd Siraal
• lUa Aoccleal (nstavead MM! • •Oattaa 0338 0 0 Kaaer Way

•Sacnstaio 98*14
138 w. ptarteca Aw.
9914ftrta ItlB 9l
"*"*"?^Oaltt»r* 3UM 930 B. FOR Aw. ••OMrlatu3S30
««a-n. hma
300 lunliltd.
•HaiaMM nOM.. 8884 Karwy wilaaa Dr.
• Mmmm 1100.. 880 flarvay wuaaa Dr.
•*'Sta Fraaeiacol Oaklod 94801 • MMIaad 19101 10EJoarataaSL
18*0 Mtaft. MAflSACMtMBTTS OHIO
• *4(0accoai Mwiord 019* «*CtacuMMn 4*10 444 wwt Ira ft.
COLORADO 380 My«»« YMlW PtWY. ••oaawUlM 44133 4411 EaM 49tA SL • •salt Law City 94110. .NlEltaWaaift.
«*0aawr80308 0*3 Uruavr 9t. •Coiwoawa 4039 840 Haidlay Rd.
MICFIfOAN «>Ti»lade43M8 «0* Oaartora Avt^ VAdNtA
CONNCCTtCVT • •aiOavoiO Riwrviaw. . .107* Krauw Aw. •y»i(a(ctaa« 44*01. . 10 C. lodliaeU Ava. • •Rtetwigad 3*114 *403 iPdfaa Ava.
• • (So<tU»fl(toa>PtaataviUa 044T9 «Fliet4*$0* . l*ME.CarpefturRd. •Raaaafca 3401* 1004 Rivaa Ava..SB
no Alwaur ft. OKLAHOMA
MiXNBSOTA vT«laaT4l48 *330S. tOOlk BaMAva. WaSHDICTOM
FLORSA • OotiOb 5*07 a«9«ama0|*4.... $40 Pira4 AW..SB«a
v'Jackaoovitla 3**03 . . JOSOW.Bwwr ft. SOut AW.WA SLLMia Bay ORBCOM •Spabana tMII £.4*0 Miaaica ft.
• (MMCDII HUlai* 33010. J043 EacStck ft. • •Muuop.il.SMU ... >o«.M AO..... ri?;.** ?!,•.?.»•
« • Portland 91310 1131
"IL"*. "•
KW 39ui Aw.
••Ttnpa 3301 lOtb « CraMfta.
MBSOURt eRHMSVLVAMta 30 Eftecertia Ava.. SB
CBORCtA
• • (AlUiitt) CimniMaa XOMI vA'taekwe 19103 88* E.MMUaad ft.
*0*8 PaacBtrw ladwtntl Blvd.
9l.Lai«ia0UO lll*Ba«Raad •(Dettwra VallaylCftarrr KUI.N.J. 0*0*4
l190B.MarUMPika 090
ILUNOS ElBWJBRdBY «Jaaa«n«n iSaOE *4lOkk9traa4 m s Racua ft.
• •Catea«»608** . . 804* 9. Kettwciaa Aw. •Naw BrwtwiCK 090 . . . 3 LawrteeaSL APftiladalpaia 19134 - .1040 BaM Brta Ava. •HUaptakw 8*01 . 20 W.OaUAooM Ava.

^ .

4-E
GENERAl ELECTRIC COMPANY. PHIIAOEIPNIA, PA.

INSTRUCTIONS
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
BUTYL-MOLDED AND COMPOUND-FILLED
600-V THROUGH 15-KV
INTRODUCTION
These instructions apply to indoor and outdoor
instrument transformers of butyl-molded and other
dry-type constructions. For information on the in
stallation and care of transformers with unusual
ratings of frequency, secondary voltage, current,
or on installations where unusual conditions exist
(refer to American Standards for Instrument Trans
formers, ASA C57.13-1954, section 13-00), consult
the nearest sales office of the General Electric
Company. When special information is requested,
give the complete nameplate data in order to identify
the transformer.
BEFORE INSTALLATION
INSPECTION
Before installation, transformers should be in
spected for physical damage that may have occurred
during shipment or handling. During shipping, trans
formers usually are supported only by the base or
mounting supports, except that certain butyl-molded
types may be shipped from the factory supported by
butyl surfaces. Transformers should be dry andthe
surface of the bushings should be clean. All butyl
surfaces should be considered the same as the sur
face of a porcelain bushing in regard to cleanliness
and dryness.
DRYING OUT
Transformers that have been submerged in water
should be dried out before installation. Wet asphalt-
impregnated or varnish-impregnated transformers
may be dried by self-heating. To do this, allow the
transformer to stand not less than twelve hours in a
room of constant temperature. Measure and record
the room temperature and resistance of the second
ary winding. Short-circuit the primary winding and
apply a controllable voltage to the secondary wind
ing. Adjust the voltage so that sufficient current will
flow in the winding to raise its temperature to ap-
proximately 80 C. The rate of temperature rise
should not exceed 6 C per half-hour. The winding
temperature should be held at approximately 80 C
These /njffwch'ortt do nol purport to covor oU defo'lt or vongtions m oqu'pmoni nor to providt for every pouibio conlhgoncy to be Tie' it connec'/on
w/'h intloHolion, operation or maintonorKO. Should furlhor inhrmofion be
for 'he purchoser't purposes, 'he matterihouldbe referred 'o /he Genero'Electric Compony.
GEH-230Z
Supersede! GfH*2S0T
until the transformer is dry. It will usually require
24 to 48 hours to dry a transformer.
.The amount of current necgssary to obtain a
winding temperature of 80 C varies because of the
differences in heat dissipation and current densities
in the different typesoftransformers.Itisadvisable
to start with a current notgreaterthantwo amperes
in the secondary of a potential transformer, or not
greater than five amperes in the secondary of a
current transformer. Gradually increase this cur
rent until the proper heating is obtained. Increases
qj current should be made cautiously with frequent
checking of the rise in temperature of the winding,
The temperature of the winding may be deter
mined conveniently by the "resistance change"
method. Since the resistance of a copper winding
increases approximately 1 percent for each21/2C,
the temperature rise may be calculated by measur
ing the "before" and "after" resistances and finding
the percentage increase in resistance. For example,
if the "after" resistance is 0.244 ohm andthe re
sistance at the start (room) temperature is 0.200
ohm, the percentage increase is
0.244-0.200
= 0.22 = 22%
O50
which corresponds to a temperature rise of 22 x
2 1/2 = 55C (approximately). The approximate wind
ing temperature at any time is the temperature rise
at that time added to the ambient (room)temperature.
Butyl-Molded Transformers
Butyl-molded transformers, particularlydesigns
for outdoor use, are relatively impervious to mois
ture. If, due to unusual circumstances, insulation
tests indicate the possibility of the entrance of mois
ture into a butyl-molded transformer, refer to the
nearest General Electric Apparatus Sales Office for
detailed information on proper procedure.
TESTING
If it is desired to make insulation tests after the
drying out period, or at any other time, these tests
or ihould partieutor prohlomt arito which ore no' cptprod soffieitnity
GEH'230Z Instrument Transformers
may be made in accordance with American Standards
for Instrument Trans formers, ASA C57.13-1954.
(Note: Periodic field tests of insulation should not
exceed 65 percent of the ASA test voltage. Incoming
tests of new equipment should not exceed 75 percent
of the ASA test vdltage.)
Convenient methods for testing polarity are given
in American Standards C-57.13, the Electrical Meter-
men's Handbook published by Edison Electric In
stitute, and General Electric publication GET-97.
For ratio and phase angle tests, refer to Elec
trical Metermen's Handbook and General Electric
publications GET-97 and GET-1725.
Certificates
A certificate of test is supplied with many types
of butyl-molded potential and current transformers.
The certificate is in the form of a tag attached to
each transformer. The tag shows the ASA accuracy
classification of the transformer, the burden at
which it has been tested, and the actual test results
of ratio correction factor and phase angle. The tag
is perforated and can be detached as a 3- by 5-in.
card for filing.
INSTALLATION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Always consider an instrument transformer as a part
of the circuit to which it is connected, and do not touch
the leads and terminals or other parts of the transformer
which are not grounded.
The butyl surface of transformers should be considered
the same as the surface of a porcelain bushing, since a
voltage stress exists across the entire butyl surface from
terminals to grounded metal parts.
Do not open the secondary circuit of a current trans
former while the transformer is energized. Thisprecaution
is advisable since current transformers may develop open-
circuit secondary voltages which may be hazardous to per
sonnel or injurious to the transformer or equipment con
nected in the secondary circuit.
Always ground the metallic cases and frames ofirutru-
ment transformers. The secondaries should be grounded
close to the transformers. However, when secontfaries of
transformers are interconnected, there should be only one
grounded point in this circaif.
MOUNTING
Instrument transformers should be mounted so
that connections can be made to the power or dis
tribution lines in such a manner as to avoid placing
appreciable strains upon the terminals of the trans
formers. For high-current transformer ratings,
2000 amperes and above, there may be some inter
ference from the electric field of the return bus
unless the bus centers are kept at a minimum dis
tance of 15 inches apart; for ratings above 5000
amperes this distance should be not less than 24
inches. If this type transformer is used with more
than one primary turn, the loop should be at least
24 inches in diameter. Make sure that the secondary
leads are twisted closely together and carried out
without passing through the field of the primary
conductors. It is not necessary that the bus exactly
fill the window, but the bus or buses should be cen
tralized. For ratings of 1000 amperes or less these
precautions are generally unnecessary.
CONNECTIONS
SECONDARY CONNECTIONS
The resistance of all primary and secondary con
nections should be kept as low as possible to prevent
overheating at the contacts, and to prevent an in
crease in the secondary burden.
The resistance voltage drop of the secondary
leads should be included in calculating the secondary
volt-ampere burden carried by instrument trans
formers. The total burden should be kept within
limits suited to the transformers used.
Short-circuiting Device
Many current transformers are provided with a
device for short-circuitingthe secondary terminals,
and are shipped from the factory with this device in
short-circuiting position. When the transformer is
installed and the primary circuit is energized, the
shorting device should be opened only after a suitable
burden, such as an ammeter, wattmeter, watthour
meter, relay, etc., is connected to the transformer
secondary terminals.
On some designs the secondary cover is inter
locked with the secondary hardware, so that the lead
openings in the cover will be 180 degrees from the
usable position unless the short-circuiting device is
open. The short-circuiting device should be re
placed for safety before the burden is removed from
the transformer secondary.
Dual-ratio current transformers with mid-tapped
secondary windings are completely inoperative when
either portion of the secondary winding is short-
circuited. On current transformers with multiple
secondary taps, short-circuit at least one half the
secondary winding before making or removing con
nections at the secondary terminals when the trans
former is energized.
On dual-ratio or multiple-ratio current trans
formers with secondary taps, all short-circuiting
devices must be in the open position for normal op
eration, so that no portion of the winding is short-
circuited.

PRIMARY BY-PASS PROTECTION
Thyrite ® primary by-pass protectors are rec
ommended for the proper protection of current
transformers which are so located as to be exposed
to the effect of surge currents. They are especially
recommended for low primary-current ratings, as
these ratings have a relatively high winding imped
ance.
Thyrite primary by-pass protectors consist of
one or more Thyrite disks which are connected in
parallel with the primary winding of the transfor
mer. When high-frequency or steep-front voltage
surges occur, the characteristic of the Thyrite is
such that an appreciable part of the surge current
is by-passed through the protector. A high-surge
voltage, which might result in failure within the pri
mary winding, is thus prevented from building up
across the winding.
GROUNDING
Grounding of instrument transformers should be
made in accordance with AIEE Standard No. 52,
March, 1951, Application Guide for Grounding of
Instrument Transformer Secondary Circuits and
Cases.
POLARITY
In wiring instrument transformer circuits, it is
necessary to maintain the correct polarity relation
between the line and the devices connected to the
secondaries. For this reason, the relative polarity
of each winding of a transformer is indicated by a
marker Hi (or a white spot) on or near one primary
terminal, and a marker Xi (or a white spot) near
one secondary terminal; and in some cases by
white bushings. See Figure 1. Where taps are
present, all terminals will be marked in order. The
primary terminals will be Hi, H2, H3, etc.; the
secondary terminals Xi, X2, X3, etc.; and the
tertiary terminals, if present, Yi, ¥3, Y3, etc. Hi
always indicates the same instantaneous polarity as
Xi and Yi-
PRIMARY CURRENT
SECONDARY
CURRENT
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
Fig. I. Elementary Connections of Instrument Transformers
Instrument Transformers GEH-230Z
When connection is made to a secondary terminal
having a polarity marking similar to a given primary
terminal, the polarity will be the same as if the
primary service conductor itself were detached from
the transformer and connected directly to the sec
ondary conductor. In other words, at the instant when
the current is flowing toward the transformer in a
primary lead of a certain polarity, current will tend
to flow away from the transformer in the secondary
lead of similar polarity.
When connecting instrument transformers with
meters or instruments, refer to the Instructions fur
nished with the meters or instruments involved.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
All General Electric transformers are designed
to operate at either or both the ambient tempera
tures, as indicated by the Company, at the standard
rating or ratings for the corresponding ambient
temperatures, provided the altitude does not exceed
3300 feet. Refer to American Standards for histra-
ment Transformers, ASA C57.13-1954, section
13-00. Generally, the allowable ambient tempera
tures and ratings are marked on the transformer
nameplate.
FUSES
Potential transformer fuses are intended pri
marily to protect the line rather than the trans
former, although the modern fuse will afford pro
tection to the transformer in a large number of cases.
The fuses on butyl-type transformers, rated at
0.6-kv through 2.5-kv Insulation Class, are provided
with molded butyl fuse enclosures which are se
cured to the transformer by the spring action of
the fuse clips.
Each fuse and its enclosure may be removed as
a unit from the transformer, using a fiber fuse
puller or by hand if suitable protection is providec.
for the operation. The fuse is then removedthroug'.
an opening in one end of the enclosure.
PRIMARY SECONDARY/^
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE W
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
 GEH-230Z Instrument Transformers
When replacing the fuse and enclosure, be sure
that the plastic insulating piece, fastened under the
transformer fuse clip, is inserted between the end
of the fuse and the open end of the fuse enclosure.
Then press the enclosure firmly onto the trans
former to seat the fuse into both clips.
The fuses of some dry-type transformers, 2400
volts and below, are supported by a hinged cover.
If it is necessary to replace a fuse while the trans
former is connected to an operating circuit, the
cover should be opened by use of an insulating hook,
which should be of sufficient length to prevent the
operator from being burned in case a short circuit
exists in the transformer.
In testing fuses for continuity of circuit, not
more than 0.25 ampere should be used.
In replacing fuses, be certain that the voltage
rating of the fuse is the one nearest above the line-
to-line voltage of the circuit, regardless of the rated
voltage of the transformer. Do not use fuses of
higher voltage ratings, as undesirable overvoltages
may result should the fuse blow. One permissible
exception to this general rule is the use of Size A,
Type EJ-1 fuse in the Types JE-2 and JVM-2
transformers. In this case the Size A fuse can be
used on either 2400-volt, delta circuits or 2400/
4160-volt, solidly grounded Y Circuits.
MAINTENANCE
After instrument transformers for indoor use
have been installed, they should need no care other
than keeping them clean and dry. Transformers for
outdoor installations should receive the same care
in operation as power transformers of similar
design and of similar voltage rating.
CLEANING BUSHINGS
Porcelain bushings may be cleaned by means of
a wet cloth or by use of carbon tetrachloride* or
ammonia. After cleaning a bushing, wash thoroughly
with clean water to remove foreign material from
the surface.
Butyl-molded transformers may be cleaned by
scrubbing the butyl surface with detergent and a
stiff brush to remove accumulated dirt or oil film.
Remove the detergent by washing with clean water.
Then apply a light grade of silicone oil (G-E Silicone
Liquid, SF-92 or equal) to the butyl surface.
DEMAGNETIZING
If by accident a current transformer becomes
magnetized, it should be demagnetized before being
* Precautions against toxic vapors should be taken
when using carbon tetrachloride.
METER DEPARTMENT, GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, SOMERSWORTH, N. H.
1045 (25M)
used for precision work. Connect at least 50 ohms
resistance in series with the meters or instruments
in the secondary circuit. Bring the primary current
up to as near full load as possible and gradually
reduce the series resistance until it reaches zero,
being careful not to open the secondary circuit in
the process. For best results, gradually reduce the
primary current to zero before disconnecting the
resistance circuit.
Demagnetizing JAR-0 Auxiliary Transformers
Due to the wide range of current ratios available
in the Type JAR-0 current transformer and the lack
of standards for demagnetizing the odd ratios avail
able, the following method is necessary to protect
personnel and transfoirmers from excessively high
voltages that could develop. See Fig. 2.
OPEN-
VARIABLE
' CIRCUITED
POWER /
SOURCE^ JAR-0-^
Fig. 2. Scfiemah'c diagram for demagnetizing
JAR-O transformers
Key to Fig. 2.
Ijj = ammeter for reading demagnetizing cur
rent.
= voltmeter for reading demagnetizing vol
tage.
The I^ reading shall not exceed;
Rated current of the winding energized
§5
The reading shall not exceed:
160
Rated current of the winding energized
For example, for demagnetizing any 5-ampere
JAR-O winding, do not exceed 32 volts and 0.1 am
pere. The core will be adequately demagnetized
when either the voltage or the current is increased
to over 80%ofthe maximum value shown in the appli
cable formula (see above), and then gradually re
duced to zero.
DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
Standard General Electric current transformers
may be used for differential protection through a
considerable range of burden and overcurrent. The
range is limited by the difference in burden, the
maximum overcurrent, and the mechanical and
thermal short-time rating. Information regarding
these points may be obtained from the G-E publica n
tion GET-97 or from the nearest sales office of
the company.
JJ.'A ...M .J .

INSTRUCTIONS GEH-908

LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH6EAR DEPARTMENT

GENERAL A ELECTRIC
PHILADELPHIA. PA.
 '0

i*ir II iC
f:|!l •

'•"••:• :.. i*
 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENT SWITCHES

TYPES SB-1, SB-9, AND SB-10

INTRODUCTION APPLICATION

The I^e SB-1 switches (see cover illustration
and Fig. 1} are multi-pole rotary switches with
cam-operated contacts. They have their positioning
device or return spring located between the front
seaport and first barrier while the Type SB-9 (see
Fig. 2) has the positioning device or return spring
located at the rear of the switch. The Type SB-9
also has better Insulation to ground, more sub-
^stantial bearings, and long life cams.
The Type SB-10 switches (see Fig. 3) combine
contacts operated by rotation of the shaft, as In the
SB-1 and 9 switches, with contacts operated by a
lateral motion (push or pull) of the shaft. Only two
lateral positions of the shaft are possible. Inter
locks are usually provided so the push-pull contacts
can be operated only In specific rotary positions of
the switch, and also the rotary contacts can be
operated In only one lateral position of the shaft—
either push or pull.
NOTE: Instructions for Type SB-1 switches
also apply to superseded Type SB-7 switches.
The Type SB-1, SB-9 and SB-10 switches are
primarily Intended for the control of electrically
operated circuit breakers, small motors, magnetic
switches and similar devices, and for the transfer
of meters. Instruments and relays. The Type SB-1
switch Is suitable for most applications, but where
the switch is subject to abnormally frequent opera
tion (approximately ICQ operations or more per
hour), more durable cams are required. In which
case the Type SB-9 switch shomd be ordered.
RATINGS
All switches are rated 600 volts, 20 an^eres
continuous, and 250 amperes for 3 seconds.
The Interrupting rating depends on several
factors; namely, voltage, current, and Inductance
of the circuit. It Is often necessary to connect
several contacts In series to secure sufficient
Interrupting capacity. The Interrupting ratings In
the table below are based on the Inductance of the
average trip coll.

INTERRUPTING RATINGS - ABfPERES

NON-INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT
VOLTS NUMBER OF CONTACTS
2 In Series 4 in Series 2 In Series 4 In Series

24d-c 6.0 30.0 4.0 20.0 30.0

48 d-c 5.0 25.0 40.0 3.0 15.0 25.0
125 d-c 2.7 11.0 25.0 2.0 6.25 9.5
250 d-c 0.75 2.0 8.0 0.7 1.75 6.5
600 d-c 0.25 0.45 1.35 0.15 0.35 1.25

115 a-c 40.0 75.0 24.0 50.0

220 a-c 25.0 50.0 12.0 25.0 40.0
440 a-c 12.0 25.0 5.0 12.0 20.0
550 a-c 6.0 12.0 4.0 10.0 15.0

Thete instrvctioiu do not purport to cover all details or yariations in equipment nor to provkle for every possible
contingency to be met in connection vrith insialkition, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired
or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the inaffer dtould
be referred to the General Electric Company.
GEH-908 Control And Instrument Switches Type SB
RECEIVING AND STORAGE
RECEIVING
Immediately iq>on receipt of a switch, examine
it for any damage sustained in transit. If injury or
rough hamdling is evident, file a damage claim at
once with the transportation company and promptly
notify the nearest wneral Electric Apparatus S^es
Office.
The switches are completely assembled and
packed in individual cartons before shipment.
STORAGE
If the switches are for stock purposes or not
for immediate installation, they should be left in
the shipping carton and stored in a clean dry location.
DESCRIPTION
CONSTRUCTION
All types of these switches are built up of a
series of individual stages, each nested into the
other, plus a common fixed contact support, operat
ing shut, front siqoport and rear support (see Fig. 5).
nte complete stack is tied together with two tie
bolts threaded into the front support Each rotary
stage consists of an insulating barrier carrsring one
or two moving contacts, and two or three cams on
the shaft which operates the moving contacts. A
push-pull stage is similar to the rotary stage except
only one cam is used. Each moving contact and its
associated fixed contact on the fixed contact support
constitute a complete switch contact.
CONTACT IDENTIFICATION
The movable contacts are marked for identifi
cation following a standard system. Starting with
the stage next to the panel, the contacts on the right
side—looking toward the rear—are given odd num
bers beginning with "1" (see Fig. 1), and the contacts
on the left side even numbers beginning with "2".
Occasionally, a contact is omitted from a stage. If
so, toe corresponding number is also omitted.
ENCLOSURES AND MOUNTING
The basic switch design is for panel mounting
and includes a molded cover as shown on toe front
cover. When requested, switches are furnished
assembled in various enclosures, such as toe fabri
cated-metal enclosure for wall mounting, toe water
tight enclosure, and the e^qplosion-proof enclosure.
When conditions require toe switch to be operated
immersed in oil, it is furnished mounted in an
enclosure similar to toe watertight enclosure except
that toe lower removable portion is filled with oil.
Switches for panel mounting are furnished with
shafts and mounting screws suitable for mounting on
panels 1/8 inch to 3/16 inches thick. When re
vested, shafts and mounting screws are furnished
for 1, 1-1/2, or 2 inch panels. For intermediate
thicknesses of panels, spacers are furnished to fill
the excess space between the front support and toe
panel.
INSTALLATION
For panel-mounted switches, holes should be
Erovided in the panel as shown in Fig. 4. The shaft
ole is shown with a 1-1/8 inch diameter. This is
done to provide one panel hole for all switches,
liie removable handle and lock handle switch^
require toe 1-1/8 inch diameter hole, while a 1/2
inch diameter hole suffices for all other switches.
For switches furnished in metal enclosures, mount
ing dimensions should be obtained from toe ^proved
outline drawings, or from toe switches themselves.
To mount a fixed-handle switch on a panel, first
remove toe handle and escutcheon, including where
provided, the position-indicating pointer and curved
spring washer (saddle spring). Next, holdtoe switch ^
in place on toe back of toe panel and insert the
mounting screws through toe escutcheon and panel
into toe switch front support, but do not ti^ten the
mounting screws. Attach toe pointer, saddle spring
and handle. Align toe escutcheon on toe panel.
Insert toe mounting screws throu^ the escutcheon
and panel and place toe spacers (if used) on toe
screws before putting toe switch in place.
When moimting removable-handle switches be
certain that toe shaft dt toe switch is properly
positioned, so toe handle is easily removed, b^ore
toe mounting screws are tightened.
Switches with a key lock in toe handle have toe
handle attached to toe escutcheon so toe two parts
are removed or installed as a unit. The shaft and
handle are joined by a slotted coupling on the back
of the escutcheon and these parts sh<^d be lined
iq) before inserting toe mounting screws.
When a back-of-board locking mechanism and
separate (Tale) lock are furnished with a switch,
the panel drilling shown in Fig. 4 is required. The
lock should be installed first. Turn toe key imtil
toe lever at toe back of toe lock is entirely within
the barrel diameter, and remove toe two knurled
rings. Insert toe barrel throu^ the panel, from
the front, with the spacing ring (where used) at toe
front of the lock and fasten it in place by tiVtening
toe knurled rings on toe barrel behind toe panel.
With toe cylinder in toe locked position the lever
on toe back of toe barrel should extend on toe verti
cal center line towards the switch shaft. Turn toe
iA°">
Sf -D/e/LL
ESCUTCHgQM
D//J.
"a
PANEL DRILLING
FRONT VIEW
Fig. It (II6AI32-U) Panel Drilling (Front View)
 Control And Instrument Switches Type SB GEH-908

switch shaft to a locked position and mount the (B), which allows the contact to close, will be
switch on the panel as directed in a previous para opposite the No. 1 contact and there will be nothing
graph. being careful to put the pin on the lock lever to hold the No. 1 contact open. Therefore, the No. 1
into the slot in the locking bolt of the mechanism. contact must be closed at this point or it must be
Operate the switch and check to see that the locking omitted from the switch. In other words, whatever
bolt will easily enter each slot in the locking wheel. happens to one contact at any point in the periphery
It may be necessary to loosen the lock and shift its of Uie switch rotation must happen to its companion
position slightly to secure satisfactory operation of contact in the same stage when the switch is rotated
the locking mechanism. When the mechanism oper 180 degrees from that point.
ates correctly, the lock must be re-tightened on the
panel. Generally, it is possible to design the switch
so those contacts that close 180 degrees opposite
OPERATION each other are in the same stage, but sometimes it
is necessary to design the switch with only one
Type SB-1 and SB-9 switches are rotary cam- contact per stage.
operated switches. Rotation of the switch shaft
causes contacts to close or open according to the
shape and setting of the cams in the various stages.
Each stage has one or two contacts with two or three •COR CLOS ING CAN
cams. On drawings these cams are designated A, FOR NO. I CONTACT
NOT SnONN.
B and C (see Fig. 5). Cam (A) is the one nearest OPCHINC
SHOMING Ml PE
the panel and is the closing cam for the even num
bered contacts. The (B) cam is next and is the NO.2 CONTUCT NO. I CONTACT
opening cam for both contacts; cam (C) is farthest
from the panel and is the closing cam for the odd
B' OR COMMON
numbered contacts. When a con&ct is omitted, its NOTCH
IN*B* CAM PENINC CAM.
corresponding closing cam is omitted and a spacer
substituted. yV OR CLOSING CAN
FOR NO.2 CONTACT
When the total rotation of the switch is more
than 150 degrees, there is, due to the common open
ing cam (B), a certain limitation to the opening
and closing of the contacts (see Fig. 6). If the No. 2
contact is closed at zero degree, then after the shaft Fig. 6 {K-65079^6) IVplcal Section aiowing
has been rotated 180 degrees, the notch in the cam Operation Of Cams - Front View

MOVING CONTACT BARRIER

SCREW'F"
.MOVING
SCftEW *6" CONTACT
SUPPORT.

-TERMINAL FIXED CONTACT

AND SUPPORT
THIN WASHER WITH
SQUARE HOLE

'E5CUTCHE0N
•TIE BOLTS-

REAR SUPPORT- TORSION SPRING- -FRONT SUPPORT

INDENT WHEEL OR PIN FOR HOLDING

SPRING STRETCHEF SHAFT IN PLACE

Fig. 5 (8009283) Exploded View Of lire SB-1 Switch

GEH-908 Control And Instrument Switches Type SB

Some applications, particularly of momentary REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

contact switches, which have a torsion spring to
return the switch to a central-neutral position,
require a contact action which lags behind the switch
motion (lost motion or slip contacts). Such contacts
use cams with a special loose fit on the shaft. When
the shaft has turned far enough to close or open
these contacts, it can be rotated 45 degrees in the
reverse direction without moving the cams, but
beyond this point, the cam moves with the shaft, and
the contacts either open or close as the case may be.
MOVABLE CONTACTS
If a movable contact is burned, or has a broken
. shunt, replace the entire contact assembly. To do
this, position the switch so the contact to be replaced
is open. Remove screw (E, Fig. 5) and its clamping
washer. Press in on the top of the contact to re
lease the tongue at the lower end and pull the as
sembly upward and off (see Fig. 7).

Momentary contact switches have a torsion
^ring that returns the switch to a central or neutral
position when the handle is released after operation
to a side position or positions. This torsion spring
is design^ for a maximum of 90 degrees operation
to each side of the central position. The torsion
spring znay have one end cut off or tied back in such
a manner as to be effective on one side of the central
position only. That is, the switch may have mo
mentary contact to one side of the central position
and maintaining contacts to the other side, witches
may also be furnished that are spring return from
the extreme-end positions to a position in between
the end position or positions and the central position.
In some momentary contact (spring return)
switches, a locking device is provided by which the
shaft may be held against the action of the torsion
spring by pulling out the handle when the switch is
turned to one of &e side positions.
Type SB-10 switches, in addition to rotary con
tacts using SB-1 cams, have contacts operated by
pulling out or pushing in the switch handle. The
push-pull contacts are located at the front of the
switch, with closing action provided by leaf springs
and opening action by a cylindrical cam which slides
over the shaft to the rotary contacts.
To replace the new contact assembly, slide it
downward with its shoe (1, Fig. 8) on the inside of
the support (3, Fig. 8), until the ton^e (2, Fig. 8)
at the lower .end of the contact drops into the hold
ing notch. (4, Fig. 6) on the support. Bring the loose
end of the shunt (3,. Fig. 7) down to the terminal and
fasten it in place with the clamping washer and
screw (E). Avoid creasing or kinking Die thin metal
, strips of the shunt. Operate the switch and observe
whether the contacts meet squarely and simul
taneously. The contacts can be adjusted by bending
slightly with smooth-faced pliers. After adjustment
. there should be an appreciable opening, with the
contacts closed, between the moving contact and the
moving contact support.
FIXED CONTACTS
Damage to a fixed contact requires replace
ment of Uie complete assemblv of fixed contacts
and support Remove screws (F, Fig. 5), change
assemblies and replace the screws. Operate &e
switch and check the contact alignment.

MAINTENANCE

At regular intervals, switches should be In

spected for burning of the contacts, for broken shunts
on the moving con&cts and for contact wipe.

If contacts are slightly pitted, or coated with

sulphide, scrape them gently with a sharp knife or

\ I
dress with a fine file, such as a #00 dental file.
R the shunts are broken or the contacts badly
pitted, they should be replaced as directed under
"Repair and Replacement".

Contacts have sufficient wipe as long as there

is an appreciable opening, with the contact closed,
between the moving contact and the moving contact
support (see Fig. 6). If there is no opening, it indi 4 5
cates that the parts of the moving contact support
that bears on the cam or the cam itself has become
worn and needs replacing as directed under "Repair 1. Cam 'i. Barrier
and Replacement". Sometimes it is possible to 2. Movable Contact 5. Operating Shaft
secure a temporary repair by bending the moving 3. Shunt
contact so it has a smaller separation from the fixed
contact when in the open position. Pig. 7 Eemovlng Contact Finger

1. Shoe 3. Support
2. Htongue It. Holding Notch
Fig. 8 Installing New Contact Finger
On some switches the ball and spring of the
positioning device are carried in the fixed-contact
support. Care must be exercised to prevent losing
the ball and spring when removing the fixed-contact
support. The ball and spring are replaced best,
after the new fixed-contact support has been as
sembled on the switch, by removing the spring
retainer on the top of the fixed-contact support,
inserting the ball and spring, and replacing the
retainer.
CAMS, BARRIERS, MOVING-CONTACT SUPPORTS,
ETC.
When cams, barriers, moving-contact supports,
etc., need to be replaced or changed, the switch
should be removed from the panel and disassembled
on a bench and re-assembled with replacementparts.
The moving-contact support and terminal areHghtly
assembled on the barrier in the factory. It is
practically impossible to remove them from the
barrier without damage to the parts or the barrier.
If any of the parts require replacement it is best to
secure a complete assembled replacement unit,
including the barrier, moving contact support, and
terminal, from the factory.
SWITCH DIS-ASSEMBLY
Before dis-assembling the switch, secure a
drawing showing the cam arrangement in all the
stages of the switch. Turn the switch shaft to the
switch position corresponding to the cam arrange
ment. This is a twelve-o'clock position unless
Control And Instrument Switches Type SB GEH-908
otherwise noted on the drawing. Remove the handle
and fixed-contact support. Unscrew the tie bolts
from the switch support, but leave them in the
switch. Stand the switch on the bench, resting on
the rear support, and slip the front support off the
shaft being careful to hold the shaft in the switch
so as not to pull it out of the cams in the rear stages.
Do not lose the ball from the positioning device.
Slide the shaft out just enough to remove the pin,
through the shaft, which seats in the counterlrare
in the indent wheel or spring-stretcher (refer to
Fig. 5). Do not slide the sh^t out of the cams in
the rear stage. Push the shaft back Into the switch
and slip off Uie indent wheel and thin washer that is
assembled between the indent wheel and front sup
port. Remove the first barrier to expose the cams
for contacts No. "1-2".
Check these cams against the cam arrangement
drawing. Be sure the cam arrangement drawing is
fully understood before disturbing the cams.
On the drawing, the cams for each stage are
usually shown in horizontal rows of three cams,
or two cams and a spacer. Beside each horizontal
row are the numbers of the contacts, such as "1-2",
with which the cams are used. The vertical rows
are lettered "A", "B", and "C". Cam (A) is the one
removed first, working from the front end of the
switch, cam (B) next, and cam (C) last (see Fig. 5).
Unless otherwise stated, the position of the cams
on the drawing are for the twelve-o'clock switch
position.
Remove the cams from the first stage, and after
making sure there are no jumpers holding the
barriers together, remove the barriers. Continue
removing cams and barriers until the damaged part
is reached
SWITCH ASSEMBLY
To assemble the switch, place the rear support
on the bench, with the rear side down, and with the
bolt heads a^inst the bench, so they are retained
in the rear support, with the dreaded ends extending
vertically. Place the end of the shaft in the rear
support so the shaft stands vertically. Turn the
shaft to the twelve-o'clock position, or to the switch
position that agrees with &e cam arrangement as
stated on the drawing. The cams for the rear stage
may now be assembled in the exact position shown
on the drawing, cam (C) first, cam (B) second, and
cam (A) last. The remaining barriers and corres
ponding cams are similarly assembled. When the
front terrier, which carries no contacts, is inplace,
assemble the indent wheel (or spring stretched and
torsion spring) with the counterbored end toward
the front of the support. Pull the shaft out just
enough to permit the locking pin to be inserted
through the shaft. Push the shaft back into the switch
and slide the thin washer over the shaft. Slide the
front support into place. Hold the stack of barriers
together and turn the switch to a horizontal position
with the moving contacts pointed up.
If it is a maintaining-contact switch with a
large indent wheel, that is, with the ball and spring
GEH-908 Control And Instrument Switches Type SB
in the fixed-contact support, or if it is* a spring-
return switch, the tie bolts may now be screwed
into the front support. Before ti^tening the tie
bolts be sure the barriers are all properly nested.
If the switch is a maintaining-contact switch
with a small indent wheel, slide the front support
forward enough so the ball may be placed into the
socket in toe front siqtport and line ig) a notch in
toe indent wheel with the ball in toe front support.
Then the front support may be slid back into place
against toe front barrier. Blake sure toe barriers
are all pr<9erly nested before tightening toe tie
bolts.
The fixed contacts and siqiport may now be as-
sembed on toe switch. If toe switch has a position
where all the contacts are open, turn it to this posi
tion to assemble toe fixed contacts and support.
SHAFT CHANGE
When it is necessary to change toe switch shaft,
that is, instaU a longer or shorter shaft, toe switch
may be dis-assembled as directed, or the new shaft
may be used to push out the old shaft as follows:
If there is room enou^ behind thepanelto work
on toe switch, it is not necessary to remove the
switch. Otherwise the switch must be removed to
a bench vise where the front siqpport can be siqsported
firmly, with toe fixed contact at toe top.
10*64 GENERAL ELEaRIC COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA, PA.
Remove the fixed-contacts and si^port. Re
move the rear support, being careful to leave toe
rear cams on the shaft. Slide toe complete stack,
including toe indent wheel or spring stretcher, liack
on toe shaft Just enough to remove toe locking pin
toat seats in the counterbore in toe front end en the
indent wheel. This leaves toe shaft free to move
through toe switch.
First, check and make sure toe tapped hole in
toe new shaft for toe handle-holding screw aligns
correctly with toe hple in toe old shaft. Then insert
the new shaft into toe rear end of toe switch, and at
toe same time withdraw the old shaft from toe front
ol toe switch. The front end of toe new shaft should
touch toe rear end of toe old shaft at all times so
toat all toe cams are on one shaft or toe other and
never loose within toe switch.
Replace toe locking pin. If toe positioning ball
has become dislodged, replace it in toe manner
previously described. Replace toe rear support,
tie bolts, and fixed contacts and stq^ort. Check for
prefer operation of toe switch using the new shaft.
RENEWAL PARTS
Refer to Renewal Parts Bulletin GEF-2357. In
toe absence of a renewal parts bulletin address the
nearest General Electric Sales OHice, specify the
quantity required, describe toe part and give toe
complete data from toe nameplate at toe rear of toe
switch.
 198 4555K10-006

TYPE AB-30

AMMETERS AND VOLTMETERS

(THIS PUBLICATION FORMERLY IDENTIFIED AS GEH-1560

Cut and drill the panel as indicated in Fig. 1. All
drilling and wiring on the switchboard should be
completed before mounting the instruments. The in
struments must be mounted in a level position.
These instruments are practically unaffected by
stray fields, but it is advisable to keep wires carrying
heavy current as far as possible from all indicating
instruments. When the instrument is mounted in a
level position, any deviation from zero should be
corrected by means of the zero adjustment.
Connect the instrument as shown in the appropriate
diagram.
GROUNDING CASES OF A-C INSTRUMENTS
If transformers are used on circuits of over 150
volts, connect the grounded side of the secondary cir
cuits to the instrument case. Use No. 12 Awg copper
wire. Grounding connections should be made in ac
cordance with the provisions of the National Electric
Code.
A-C AMMETERS
When the circuit exceeds 30 amperes or 650 volts,
a current transformer of the ratio indicated on the
nameplate must be used.
A-C VOLTMETERS
When the circuit exceeds 750 volts, a potential
transformer of the ratio indicated on the instrument
nameplate must be used.
An external Form-3 resistor must be used on in
struments rated 750 volts.

_v
/• ^ '
^
4oiA.(4HOLes) na panels up tob incl.
L ADAPTER MOUNTING STUD
fON PANELS OVER ^ THICK
^ TKCX SPECIFY PANEL THICKNESS

j^OIA-FOR PANELS OVEN |^*TH1CK WHEN ORDERINS

Fig. 1. Cuf-out and panel drilling dimensions Fig. 2. Adaplor mounting stud

—i r 'H'iI
10.KT«oL....ri.
I i/Xn

ir—.r---''—

Fig. 3. Dimensions of single-tube, Form-3 resistor

Tfiese instruelioni do not purport to cover all datails or voriotions in aguipmani nor to provida for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with initol/otion, operotion or mointcnonce. Should further in
formation be datirad or should porticulor problems orise which ore not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's
purposes, the motter should be referred to the Generol Electric Company.

GENERAL ELECTRIC
4555K10-006 Case and Door Assemblies

TERMINAL SCREWS 10-32 THREAB-,

4MOUNTINC S1U0S £-26 THREAD^ USE ON VOLTMETERS ONLV

o ©

USE ON DOUBLE RATED AMMETERS ONLY

"A"« 3ig FOR AMMETERS

"A* »3|l" FOR VOLTMETERS
fig, 4. Dtfflontiont of Type AB-30 ammofsn and voltmeters

souaec
SOURCE

LOAD • HIGH RATING mr-eoMBwa noavaaum

SOURCE

LOAD LOW RATING aim ciTtmuL niaoaec luow msvi

fig. 5. External eoaneethns of a-e fig. 6. External eonneetiani of fig. 7. External eonneetions of
ammeter double-rated a-e ammeter a-e voltmeter

ISU MS

fig. 8. External connections of a-e fig. 9. External eonneethns of fig. JO. External eonneetions of
voltmeter with potential transformer double-rated a-e voltmeter without double-rated a-e voltmeter wHh'
potential franiformer potential transformer

r, OENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, WEST LYNN, MASS.

57-114
 INSTRUCTIONS
GEH-1788D
SUPERSEOes GEH-I78BC

TIME
OVERCURRENT RELAYS

Types - *1^--

IAC53A IAC53R
IAC53B IAC54A
IAC53C IAC54B

SWITCHGEAR DEPARTMENT

GENERAL0ELECTRIC
PHILADELPHIA, PA.
 TIME OVERCURRENT RELAYS
TYPE lAC

INTRODUCTION

Type Contact Instan. A-C Trip Indue. Outline Int.

Circuits Unit Unit Unit &P. D. Conn.

]AC53A(-)A One No No One Fig. 20 Fig. 12

IAC53B(-)A One Yes No One Fig. 20 Fig. 13
IAC53C(-)A One No Yes One Fig. 20 Fig. 14
IAC53R(-)A One Yes Yes One Fig. 21 Fig. 15
IAC54A(-)A Two No No One Fig. 20 Fig. 16
IAC54B(-)A Two Yes No One Fig. 21 Fig. 17

The Types IAC53 and IAC54 relays are time
overcurrentrelays with a very-inverse time char
acteristic. They are employed to protect against
overcurrent on single-phase and poly-phase circuits.
The various relays described in this instruction book
differ in the number of circuits they close, and if an
instantaneous unit and/or an a-c tripping unit is
included.
These relays consist of an induction unit or an
induction unit with an instantaneous unit which per
mits instantaneous tripping for exteremely high cur
rents, or an induction unit with an a-c tripping unit for
use where d-c power is unavailable or a-c tripping is
preferred. Since practically all Type lAC relays are
composed of various combinations of the above (that
is, file induction imit, the instantaneous unit and the
a-c tripping unit), they are, for convenience, describ
ed separately in the following text. The above table
indicates the units comprising each type and also lists
the internal connections and outline and panel drilling
diagrams.

INDUCTION UNIT

INTRODUCTION APPLICATION

The induction unit is the basic unit in all Type
IA.C relays. Figs. 1 and 2 show the induction unit
mounted in the cradle. These imitsareof the induc
tion-disk construction type. The disk is actuated by a
current operating coil on a laminated U-magnet. The
disk shaft carries the moving contact which completes
the alarm or trip circuit when it touches the station
ary contact or contacts. The disk shaft is restrained
by a spiral spring to give the proper contact-closing
current and its motion is retarded by a permanent
magnet acting on the disk to give the correct time
delay.
There is a seal-in unit mounted on the front to
the left of the shaft. This unit has its coil in series
and its contacts in parallel with the main contacts
such that when the main contacts close the seal-in
unit picks up and seals in. When the seal-in unit
picks up, it raises a target into view which latches
up and remains exposed until released by pressing
a button beneath the lower left corner of the cover.
The induction unit is the main unit in all Type
lAC relays, supplying the very inverse time delay
characteristics of the relay and sounding an alarm or
tripping the breakers for overload currents which
cause it to close its contacts.
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
The induction unit may have one or two circuit-
closing contacts which close as the current increases
to the pick-up value as set on the tap block. The
time delay in closing the contacts is determined by
the setting of the time dial (Fig. 1). The time-cur
rent characteristics are shown in Fig. 3.
RATINGS
The induction unit is designed to use any one of
three operating coils, each having a different com
bination of taps as follows, 4,5,6,7, 8. 10, 12 and 16
amperes; 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, S.OandS.O amperes;
0.5, 0.6, 0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.5 and 2.0 amperes.

These insfruefiom do not purport to cover aU details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible
contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired
or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the matter should
be referred to the Generof Bectric Company.
GEH-1788 Type IA.C Time Overciirrent Relay

J .6 .7 .8 .9 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 00 88 70 B090S g |

MULTIPLES OF RELAY TAP SETTING

Fig. 3 Time-Current Curves for Type (AC Relays with Very-Inverse-Time Characteristics
 Type lAC Time Overcurrent Relay GEH-1788

CALIBRATION
-PLATE
ADJUSTABLE
-POLE PIECE
INSTANTANEOUS CONTACTS -
•UNIT
OPERATING
SHORTING
COIL
COIL
-TARGET
-STATIONARY
CONTACTS
- MOVING
CONTACT A-C
ASSEMBLY TRIPPING
nsHi
i TT v,' j'- ,j
iii'i—r!!-. .''.liViu. UNIT

Type lAC Relay with an Instantaneous Unit Type lAC Relay with an A-C Trip Unit
(Front View) (Rear View)

The current-closing rating of the contacts is BURDENS

30 amperes for voltages not exceeding 250 volts.
The current-carrying ratings are affected by the Burdens for the standard coils are given in the
selection of the tap on the target and seal-in coil following table. These are calculated burdens at
as indicated in the following table: five amperes based on burden of minimum tap.

Volt-ampere burdens for the lowest tap on any

of the three coils can be determined for any value
Amperes, a-c or d-c
Function of current, up to 20 times tap setting, from Fig. 6.
2-Amp Tap 0.2 Amp Tap
Coil
Amps
Tripping Duty 5 Amps
Carry Continuously 0.3
Operating Range 0.2-2
Resistance 7 2.0
Impedance at 60 cy 52 1.7
1.3
1.5-6 14.5
12.0
If the tripping current exceeds 30 amperes an 9.0
auxiliary relay should be used, the connections being 105.0
such that the tripping current does not pass through 86.0
the contacts or the target and seal-in coils of the 82.0
protective relay.

INSTANTANEOUS UNIT

INTRODUCTION the contacts of the main unit. Its coil is connected

in series with the operating coil of the main unit.
The instantaneous unit is a small instantaneous
hinge-type unit which may be mounted on the right When the current reaches a predetermined
front side of the induction unit (See Fig. 4). Its value, the instantaneous unit operates, closing the
contacts are normally connected in parallel with contact circuit and raising its target into view.
* Denotes change since superseded issue.
GEH-1788 Type lAC Time Overcurrent Relay

TAP
RANGE
0.5-2.0
AMPS.

V
0
L
T
A
G
E

S
TAP
RANGE %o
1.5-6.0 I

AMPS.

TAP
i. RANGE
4-16
AMPS.

2 4 6 6 10 12 14 16 18
MULTIPLES OF MINIMUM PICK-UP CURRENT

Fig. 6 Saturation Curves for Lowest Taps of the induction Unit of Type lAC Relays with
Very-lnverse-TimeCharacteristics
 Type IA.C Time Overcurrent Relay GEH-1788

0.030

0.029
00

s
s S> 0.020

0.019

- 0.010

0.009

4 9 6
MUlTlfLES OF FICK-UF

Fig. 7 Time-Current Characteristics of the Instantaneous Unit

The target latches in the eiq)osed position until of two coils having pick-up ranges of 10 to 40, or 20
released by pressing the button beneath the lower to 80 amperes, respectively. The current-closing
left-hand corner of the relay cover. rating of the contacts is 30 amperes for voltage not
exceeding 250 volts.
APPLICATION
BURDENS
The instantaneous unit is used on certain Type
lAC relay models to provide instantaneous tripping Burden data on the instantaneous-unit coils are
for current exceeding a predetermined value. given in the following table:
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
Volt- Imp.
Coil Freq. Amp PF
The instantaneous unit operates over a 4 to 1 Amp Ohms
range and has its calibration stamped on a scale 10-4U 60 5 o.dd U.U33 U.U5
mounted beside the adjustable pole piece. Time- 50 5 0.80 0.032 0.95
current characterisitcs are shown in Fig. 7. 25 5 0.027 0.98
0.68
20-80 60 5 0.20 0.008 0.95
RATINGS 50 5 0.20 0.008 0.95
25 5 0.18 0.007 0.98
The instantaneous unit is designed to use either

A-C TRIPPING UNIT

INTRODUCTION
The a-c tripping unit is a Type REA relay unit
designed to energize a circuit-breaker trip coil
from its associated current transformer upon the
operation of the main imit of the Type lAC relay. It
transfers the current from the secondary of the
current transformer,into the trip coil and removes
the current from the trip coilwhen the breaker trips.
The tripping unit is mounted on the rear of the
frame opposite the tapped operating coil of the in
duction unit (see Fig, The operation of this unit
is illustrated in Fig. 11. The secondary current
circulates through the induction unit current coil and
the main coil of the Type REA auxiliary tripping unit,
returning through the Type REA contacts to the cur
rent transformer. Norn^ly, most of the flux gener
ated by the main Type REA coil passes through the
upper limb of the magnetic structure and holds the
armature firmly against this limb. When the contacts
of the induction unit close, the shorting coil of the
Type REA unit is short-circuited and current flows
in this coil by transformer action, causing a redis
tribution of flux which actuates the armature and the
Type REA contacts. The opening of the Type REA
contacts causes the secondary current to flow through
the trip coil which trips the breaker.
GEH-1788 Type lAC Time Overcurrent Relay

tSIPBUS

Device Function Numbers for Use with ALL

External Diagrams
50 - Instantaneous Unit
51 - Overcurrent Relay, Type lAC
SIN - Ground Overcurrent Relay, Type lAC
52 - Power Circuit Breaker
SI - Seal-in Unit, with Target
TO - Trip CoU
A - Auj^ary Contact, closedwhen
breaker closes. I*.

S
>s
8
A

00

di
Fig. e External Connections Of Three Type
IAC53A Relays Used For Phase-To-Phase And Ground
Overcurrent Protection Of A 3-Phase Circuit

<-C IM

CP
<0
<0
f2
iX 3

o»

IX cn

n
Tf
A^ TRIFPIMG'
•UKIT, ~
X

J1=Z Als]
TOIFFieCX SJfci ,V
o-
I <o

-J I iO
U)

CO
iO

u I

Fig. 9 External Connections Of Three Type Fig. iO External Connections Of Three Type IAC53R
IACS3A Relays Used In Conjunction With Tripping Relays Used For 3-Phase Circuit protection
Reactors For Protection Of A 3-Phase Circuit
 Type lAC Time Overcurrent Relay GEH-1788

APPLICATION
The a-c tripping unit is used in Type lAC relays
where a reliable direct-current tripping source is
not available and it is necessary to trip the breaker
TR P coil
from the ciirrent-transformer secondary.

RATINGS
The a-c tripping unit has a continuous rating of CUSRENT AC TRIP WIT
NOIWALLY
five amperes but will operate on a minimum current ClOSED
3.5 amperes. It should be used with three- OOKTACrS

ampere trip coilh. The contacts of these units will

transfer current-transformer secondary current up
to 100 amperes. For applications where the sec
ondary current exceeds 100 amperes, the Type K TRIP UNIT
MHITIIIG
REAllB relay, which has contacts rated 200 am ooa
peres, can be used in conjunction with Type IA.C
overcurrent relays. The Type REAllB is not
mounted inside the Type TAG case.
n
fO

s
s
BURDENS
K. TRIP UNIT
(O
I Burdens of the Type REA unit are given in the MAIN COIL
following table:

Impedance PF
Volt-
Frequency Amps in Ohms Amperes

60 5 0.49 0.80 12.2

50 5 0.33 0.80 8.3 Fig. II Diagram Illustrating Operation of Type
25 5 0.23 0.62 5.8 lAC Relays having an A-C Tripping Unit

RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE

These relays, when not included as a part of a
control panel will be shipped in cartons designed to
protect them against damage. Immediately upon
receipt of a relay, examine it for any damage
sustained in transit. If injury or damage resulting
from rough handling is evident, file a damage claim
at once with the transportation company and promptly
notify the nearest General Electric Apparatus Sales
Office.
Reasonable care should be exercised in unpack
ing the relay in order that none of the parts are
injured or the adjustments disturbed.
E the relays are not to be installed immed
iately, they should be stored in their original car
tons in a place that is free from moisture, dust
and metallic chips. Foreign matter collected on
the outside of the case may find its way inside
when the cover is removed and cause trouble in
the operation of the relay.

INSTALLATION

LOCATION relay types are shown in Figs. 12 to 17 inclusive.

The location should be clean and dry, free from
dust and excessive vibration, and well lighted to
facilitate inspection and testing.
MOUNTING
The relay should be mounted on a vertical
surface. The outline and panel diagrams are shown
in Figs. 19 and 20.
CONNECTIONS
The internal connection diagrams for the various
Tj^ical wiring diagrams are given in Figs. 8 to
10 inclusive.
One of the mounting studs or screws should be
permanently grounded by a conductor not less than
No. 12 B & S gage copper wire or its equivalent.
INSPECTION
At the time of installation, the relay should
be inspected for tarnished contacts, loose screws,
or other imperfections. If any trouble is fowd,
it should be corrected in the manner described
under MAINTENANCE.

9
GEH-1788 Type lAC Time Overcurrent Relay

INDUCTION
UNIT
SEAL-IN INSTANT
UNIT// UNIT
a
-I—I INDUCTION
•i rr-^'ONiT ao
SEAL-IN
UNIT - a

r\
yf—
V V

I
(p
<o
6 a»
o

•=SHORT FINGER = SHORT FINGER (O

Fig. 12 Internal Connections For Type IAC53A Fig. 13 Internal Connections For Type IAC53B
Relay (Front View) Relay (Front View)

OmeCTlONAL ELEMENT
<eOTTOM) to
CO
-A-C THIP o>
^ UNIT 0
INDUCTICS
s

3
1
seal-in
UNIT

SCAL-IN
UNIT

seAL*m

o
c^a
CO
I

Fig. 14 Internal Connections For Type IAC53C Fig. 16 Internal Connections For Type lACSSk
Relay (Front View) Relay (Front View)

10
 Type lA^C Time Overcurrent Relay GEH-1788

IXOUCTIOM
V UtnT V

SI. ^ I SI
INOJCTION

INDUCTION
UN.T SEAL-IN
INSTANT.
UNIT
UNIT

INDUCTION
UNfT

SEAL-IN
UNIT

INSTANT.
UNIT

• = SHDST FINGER

• = SHORT FINGER.

Fis. 16 Internal Connections for Type IAC54A Fig. 17 Internal Connections for Type IAC5HS

•CAUTION: current circuits and other circuits with shorting

bars that the auxiliary brush be bent high enou^
^ to engage the connecting plug or test plug before
2 Every circuit in the drawout case has an the main brushes do. This will prevent CT sec-
g auxiliary brush. It is especially important on ondary circuits from being opened.
O

CONNECTING PLUG MAIN BRUSH CONNECTING BLOCK

AUXILIARY BRUSH TERMINAL BLOCK

NOTE: AFTER ENGAGING AUXILIARY BRUSH, CONNECTING PLUG

TRAVELS 1/4 INCH BEFORE ENGAGING THE MAIN BRUSH ON
THE TERMINAL BLOCK.

*Fig. 18 Cutaway of Drawout Case Showing Position of Auxiliary Brush

* Denotes change since superseded issue.
GEH-1788 Type lAC Time Overcurrent Relay
ADJUSTMENTS
TARGET AND SEAL-IN UNIT
For trip colls operating on currents ranging
from 0.2 to 2.0 amperes at the minimum control
voltage, set the target and seal-In tap screw In
the 0.2-ampere tap.
For trip colls operating on currents ranging
from 2 to 30 amperes at the minimum control
voltage place the tap screw In the 2-ampere tap.
The tap screw Is the screw holding the right-
hand stationary contact of the seal-In unit. To
change the tap setting, first remove the connecting
plug. Then, take a screw from the left-hand
stationary contact and place it In the desired tap.
Next, remove the screw from the other tap and
place It In the left-hand contact. This procedure Is
necessary to prevent the right-hand stationary
contact from getting out of adjustment. Screws
should not be In both taps at the same time.
INDUCTION UNIT
CURRENT SETTING
The current at which the contacts operate may
required for the contacts to close with a particular
be ch^ged by changing the position of Uie tap plug time-dial
In the tap block at the top of the relay. Screw the
tap plug firmly Into the tap marked for the desired
current (below which the unit Is not to operate).
When changing the current setting of the unit,
remove the connecting plug to short-circuit the
current-transformer secondary circuit. Next,
screw the tap plug Into tap marked for the desired
•current and then replace the connecting plug.
The pickup of the unit for any current tap Is
adjusted by means of a spring-adjusting ring. The
ring may be turned by Inserting a tool In the notches
around the edge. By turning the ring, the operating
current of the unit may be brought Into agreement
with the tap setting employed. If for some reason,
this adjustment has been disturbed. This adjustment
also permits any desired setting Intermediate be
tween the various tap settings to be obtained. The
unit is adjusted at the factory to close its contacts
from any time-dial position at a minimum current
within five per cent of the tap plug setting. The
unit resets at 90 per cent of the minimum closing
v^ue.
TIME SETTING
The setting of the time dial determines the
length of time the unit requires to close its con
tacts when the current reaches the predetermined
value. The contacts are just closed when the dial
is set on 0. When the dial is set on 10, the disk
must travel the maximum amount to close the
12
contacts and therefore this setting gdves the max
imum time setting.
The primary adjustment for the time of oper
ation of the unit Is made by means of the time
dial. However, further adjustment Is obtained by
moving the permanent magnet along Its siqiporting
shelf; moving the magnet toward the mainshaft of
the unit decreases the time, while moving It away
Increases the time.
If selective action of two or more relays Is
required, determine the maximum possible short-
circuit current of the line and then choose a time
value for each relay that differs sufficiently to
insure the proper sequence in the operation of the
several circuit breakers. Allowance must be
made for the time Involved In opening each breaker
after the relay contacts close. For this reasom
unless the circuit time of operation Is known with
accuracy, there should be a dfifference of about 0.5
second (at the maximum current) between relays
whose operation Is to be selective.
EXAMPLE OF SETTING
The time and current settings of the over-
current unit can be made easily and quickly. Each
time value shown In Fig. 3 Indicates the time
setting when the current Is a prescribed
number of times the current-tap setting. In order
to secure any of the particular time-current settings
shown in Fig. 3, Insert the removable plug in the
proper tsip receptacle and adjust the time-dial to
the proper position. The following example Il
lustrates the procedure In making a relay setting:
Assume a Type lAC relay is used In a circuit
where the circuit breaker should trip on a sustained
current of approximately 450 amperes; also, the
breaker should trip in 1.0 second on a short-circuit
current of 3750 amperes. Assume further that
current transformers of 60/1 ratio are used.
The current tap setting is found by dividing the
minimum primary tripping current by the current
transformer ratio. In this case, 450 divided by 60
equals 7.5 amperes. Since there Is no 7.5 ampere
tap, the 8-ampere tap Is used. To find the proper
time-dial setting to ^ve 1.0-second time delay at
3750 amperes, divide 3750 by the transformer
ratio. This gives 62.5 amperes secondary current
•which is 7.8 times the 8-ampere setting. By re
ferring to the time current curves (Fig. 3), it
will be seen that 7.8 times the minimum operating
cxirrent gives 1.0-second time delay when the relay
is set on the No. 6 time-dial setting.
The above results should be checked by means
of an accurate timing device. Slight readjustment
of the dial can be made until the desired time is
obtained.
 Type lAC Time Overcurrent Relay GEH-1788

Aid in making the proper selection of relay

settings may be obtained on application to the near-
I'^est Sales Office of the Gener^ Electric Company. VARIABLE RESISTANCE
OR LOAD SOX

INSTANTANEOUS UNIT
Select the current above which is desired to I 15 VOLTS
RATED FREQUENCY
have the instantaneous unit operate and set the
adjustable pole piece so that the top of its hexagon
SYNCHRONOUS
head is even with the desired calibration on the TIMER
scale. To raise or lower the pole piece, loosen the
locknut and turn it up or down and then tighten in
position.

The contacts should be adjusted to make at

.'^about the same time and to have approximately
1/8 inch wipe. This adjustment can be made by
loosening the screws holding the stationary contacts
and moving the contacts up or down as required.
Oi
O)
CO
A-C TRIPPING UNIT
(O
The a-c tripping unit should not require any
attention other than occasional cleaning of the con-
^cts. However, if the adjustment should be lost,
it may be restored as follows: FREQUENCY METER
(WHEN REQUIRED)

5'C SWITCH
CONTACT ADJUSTMENT

With the unit de-energized, the movable contact

should lie against the stationary contact with enough
tension to always insure a good closed circuit. The
movable contact brush should be free of anv kinks.
Also this contact brush should not touch the com
pound bushing 8iq)ported from the top of the arma
ture. The brass backing strip should be adjusted
to allow a 1/16-tnch contact gap with the contacts
open. The compound bushing support should be
adjusted to allow the back of the movable contact
to just touch the brass backing strip when the
armature operates to open the contacts. The outer
edge of the compound bushing should be approximate
ly 1/32 inch from the inner edge of the stationary-
contact supporting post.
ARMATURE ADJUSTMENT
Loosen the two screws which hold the armature-
assembly bracket to the bottom of the frame. Slide
the bracket in or out, whichever is necessary, vuitil
the armature just touches the pole face of the upper
/rore. In this position, the armature should be
about 1/32 inch from the pole face of the lower
core. Next, slide the bracket in until the armature
leaf spring assumes a vertical position and is
Fig. 19 Test Connections for Type lAC Relays such as
Type IACS3A
spaced clear of both armature and the vertical tip
of the bracket. With this setting, the armature should
be flush against the pole face of both cores, and
should put enough pressure on the armature to
always return it flush against the pole face of the
lower core after each operation of the unit. This
alignment is Important as a slight gap between
armature and pole face of the lower core after the
unit operates may cause contacts to open momen
tarily, dropping the relay target when the circuit
breaker is reclosed. Under these conditions, the
momentary opening of the contacts is due to the
shock of the armature being pulled in aga^t the
pole face when the lower coll is energized. Ex
cessive pressure on the armature, caused by the
bracket being pushed in too far, will result in too
high a pickup or chattering of uie movable contact
during operation of the unit. Tighten the bracket
screws securely after the proper adjustment has
been obtained.

OPERATION

The pick-up current should be checked on one
or more of the taps and the time should be checked
for one or more dial settings.
Recommended test connections for the above
test are shown in Fig. 19.
Before the relay is put into service it should be
given a check to determine that factory adjust
ments have not been disturbed. The time dial
will be set at zero before the relay leaves the
factory. It is necessary to change this setting in
order to open the relay contacts.

13
GEH-1788 Type IA.C Time Overcurrent Relay
MAINTENANCE
DISK AND BEARINGS
The lower jewel may be tested for cracks by
eiqiloring its suiiace with the point of a fine needle.
The jewel should be turned up until the disk is
centered in the air gaps, after which it should be
locked in this position the set screw provided
for this purpose.
CONTACT CLEANING
For cleaning fine silver contacts, a flexible
burnishing tool should be used. This consists of a
flexible strip of metal with an etched roughened
surface, resembling in effect a superfine file. The
polishing action is so delicate that no scratches are
left, yet corroded material will be removed rapidly
RENEWAL PARTS
It is recommended that sufficient quantities of
renewal parts be carried in stock to enable the
prompt replacement of any that are worn, broken,
or damaged.
mparts BuUetinNo. GEF-3883.
* Denotes change since siqierseded issue.
14
and thorou^y. The flexibility of the tool insures
the cleaning of the actual points of contact.
Fine silver contacts should not be cleaned with
knives, files, or abrasive paper or cloth. Knives or
files may leave scratches which increase arcing and
deterioration of the contacts. Abrasive paper or cloth
may leave minute particles of insulating abrasive
material in the contacts and thus prevent closing.
The burnishing tool described is included in the
standard relay tool kit obtainable from the factory.
PERIODIC TESTING
An operation test and inspection of the relay at
least once every six months are recommended.
Test connections are shown in Fig. 19.
When ordering renewal parts, address the
nearest Sales Office of the General Electric Com
pany, specify the quantity required and describing
the parts by catalogs numbers as shown inRenewal
 Type lAC Time Overcurrent Relay GEH-1788

FttNEL LOCATION

's;;;;;^TG.
SEMI-FLUSH SURFACE
MTG^
6| TB-
(C Of
(D lOffi
o>
4-18 STUDS

I 3 5
n '® FOR
SURFACE
MT6.
(0
ooo 10-32 SCREW
o
o o
N.
—2 6- i t ~-(0R STUD)

NUMBERING OF STUDS
10-32*1 MTG. -H
3 ®SCREW
(FRONT VIEW)

o
OUTLINE

-Z-H
•4- 27
I 32^
ZORILL
4 HOLES 4 DRILL
® 2 HOLES 4 DRILL
^ 5 HOLES
CASE.
•T
1 ff PANEL

nK
M
. ^
i|-l8STUD

PANEL DRILLING FOR SEMI'FLUSH

MOUNTING (FRONT VEW)

PANEL DRILLING FOR SURFACE

MOUNTING (FRONT VIEW)
VIEW SHOWING ASSEMBLY OF
HARDWARE FOR SURFACE MTG.
ON STEEL PANELS

Fig. 20 Outline and Panel Drilling Dimensions for Relay Types IAC53A, IAC53B, IAC53C and IAC5>(A

15
GEH-1788 Type IA.C Time Overcurrent Relay

PANEL LOCATION

t;;;^TG
SEMI-FLUSH SURfACE
MT^^

Xs
A-IB STUDS
FOR
/ SURFACE
MTG.

6hhhS 10-32 SCREW

OOOQO, •^(OR STUD)
CM
o>

^2 4 6 8 \0^ O
CM
10-32* ^ MTG (O
NUMBERING OF STUDS ®SCREW I .

(FRONT VEW)
OUTLINE CM

91

U.22Z^227_
h-232 *-2^-^
ioRilf •Idrill
^4 HOLES ®2HOLES ioRILL
\ I ^10 HOLES
CASEy 11
I §13
f -tr
ft hi!/, PANEL

j|-l8 STUD T -l-'li

u
PANEL DRILLING FOR SEMI-FLUSH iinnnni
MOUNTING (FRONT VIEW)

VvA :
J I* 5t H
PANEL DRILLING FOR SURFACE
u MOUNTING (FRONT VIEW)

VIEW showing assembly OF

HARDWARE FOR SURFACE MTG. rX
ON STEEL PANELS

Fig. 21 Outline and Panel Drilling Dimensions for Relay Types IAC53R and lACSHB

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA, PA.

4-65
HANDBOOK REFEKCNCE 722S SUrERBEDCS GEI'ISSYSA

INSTRUCTIONS
THYRITE' MAGNE-VALVE INTERMEDIATE-CLASS
DESCRIPTION
The unit furnished with these instructions Is of
the latest design of the Form 2H Thyrite intermedi
ate-class arrester.
The Thyrite lightning arrester consists of a stack
of one or more arrester units connected in series,
the number depending on the voltage and operating
conditions of the circuit. Terminals for line and
ground connections are furnished.
Three single-pole arresters are required for a
three-phase Installation. The arresters are of
single-pole design. They are suitable for indoor
or outdoor service.
Each arrester unit consists essentially of a per
manently sealed porcelain housing equipped with
pressure relief and containing a number of Thyrite
valve-element disks and magnetic-gap elements in
series. Metal fittings cemented on the housing pro
vide means for bolting the arrester units into a
stack.
Each arrester unit is shipped assembled.
charging or testing operation is required before
placing them in service.
STORAGE
Units, if left in shipping containers, should be
stored indoors.
INSTALLATION
Since the Form2H intermediate-class arresters
(Model No. 9LA2H series) incorporate Thyrite valve
elements of improved characteristics, these ar
rester units should NOT be connected in sbries with
unitsoftheearlierModels9LA2D, 9LA2F, or9LA2G
arresters in the same stack.
• Registered Trade-mark of General Electric Co.
rheie Mrycliom do nof pu^wl (o cover oil delailt orroriolioni in equipmerti noi lo provide lor every pouible conUngency lo bft >n«f in connection
wttfi inslallaUon. operation or maintenoiKe. Shovid lurther informotion bedeiired orihoi/Id porlicular problems arise which ore not covered suHicienllr
lor thepurcho»ef i purposes, the matter should be relerred to the General Clectric Company.
GENERAL
GEH-2901
LIGHTNING ARRESTERS
MODEL 9LA2H-SERIES
Where existing arresters of these earlier designs
are to be increasedin voltage rating by the addition
of arrester units, the new Form 2H units should be
assembled in one stack, and units from the existing
arrester should be used for the additions to the other
stacks so that units of the same Form designation
will be in series.
LOCATION
Install arresters electrically as close as possible
to the apparatus being protected. Line and ground
connections should be short and direct.
GROUNDING
The arrester ground should be connected to the
apparatus grounds and the main station ground, uti
lizing a reliable common ground network of low re
sistance. The efficient operation of thelightning ar
rester requires permanent low-resistance grounds.
Intermediate-class arresters should be provided
with a ground of a value not exceeding five ohms.
No
FOUNDATION FOR BASE MOUNTING
The footings of all piers or supports should ex
tend below the frost line and be elevated above the
ground line sufficiently to prevent splash on the units.
The minimum elevation recommended is one foot;
however, this must be governed by climate and lo
cality.
The top of the foundation must be level, or pro
vision made for leveling the base before assembly
of the arrester units.
BRACKET-MOUNTED
When bracket-mounted arresters are bolted to a
supporting structure, the structure as well as the
finished assembly should be rigid to prevent exces
sive swaying of the arrester.
ELECTRIC
GEH-2901 Thyrite Magne-Valve Intermediate-Class Lightning Arresters, Model 9LA2H-Series

SUSPENSION MOUNTING When arresters are modified, the angle-shaped

If it isdesired tosuspend thearrester, a special
eyeboltcap,Cat.No.482B865Gl, Is required. Either
the top or bottom end may be operated at line poten
tial. The nameplate end of the unit should always
be down so that the porcelain petticoats will shed
water.
Suspend arresters flexibly with a non-rigid type
of attachment, to minimize mechanical strains In
the arrester stack.
nameplates should always be changed for proper
n
Identification.
THE MAXIMUM LINE-TO-GROUND RATING
MUST NEVER BE EXCEEDED.
CLEARANCES
The clearances given on the assembly drawing
are the minimum recommended. The arrangement
of the foundation plan can be modified If desired.

The term "clearance" means the actual distance

NAMEPLATES
The unit nameplate on the bottom bolting lug of
each Individual unit applies to the arrester unit only
and should correspond to the model number given
In the memorandum of shipment and to the model
number comprising the complete arrester.
The main arrester nameplate (angle-shaped)
bears Identification to correspond to the model num
ber and voltage rating of the completely assembled
arrester.
between any part of the arrester or disconnecting
device at line potential, and any object at ground
potential or other phase potential.
ASSEMBLY
1. Set the arrester level. If the feet of the ar
rester do not seat evenly on the foundation, do not
distort them by tightening the foundation bolts, but
shim underneath and grout with concrete If neces-
sajry.

DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES

Minimum Space for

Arrester Approximate Dimen Minimum 3-phase Installations
Rating sions In Inches Clearance* (In Inches)
Kv Model Fig. A B (In Inches) Fig. 0 D E F

20 9LA2H57 24 11/16 21 1/4 9 1/2 68 29 19 1/2 14 1/2

25 9LA2HS9 26 11/16 23 1/4 11 74 32 21 16

1

30 9LA2H61 32 1/16 28 5/8 13 82 36 23 18

37 9LA2H62 37 5/16 33 7/8 15 1/2 92 41 25 1/2 20 1/2

40 9LA2H81 45 15/16 42 1/2 17 1/2 100 45 27 1/2 22 1/2

SO 9LA2H64 49 15/16 46 1/2 19 1/2 5 108 49 29 1/2 24 1/2

6

60 9LA2H65 60 11/16 57 1/4 24 126 58 34 29

73 9LA2H66 71 3/16 67 3/4 28 142 66 38 33

97 9LA2H67 3 94 7/16 91 37 247 107 70 53 1/2

109 9LA2H68 3 104 15/16 101 1/2 41 1/2 265 116 74 1/2 58

121 SLASimfiO 4 46 283 125 79 62 1/2

* These clearances applying both llne-to-Uhe and llne-to-ground are for altitudes below 3300 feet (1000
meters). Add 3 percent to clearances In Inches for each additional 1000 feet altitude above 3300 feet.
 Thyrife Magne-Valye Infermediate-Class Lightning Arresters, Model 9LA2H-Series GEH-2901

r\: LINE TERMINAL S/B'MAX DIA HOLE FOR HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL LEAD
V'

OF
HOR.TAKE
OFF

MINIMUM SPACE REQUIRED

FOR 3 PHASE INSTALLATION

DETAIL OF LINE TERMINAL BRACKET /

FOR ARRESTERS 73 KV AND BELOW

l-H
GROUND CLAMP 5/B" MAX^
OIA HOLE FOR GNO LEAD
PLAN VIEW OF BOTTOM UNIT FITTING
121 KV ARRESTER

3 Vis"

DETAIL OF LINE TERMINAL

BRACKET AND GRADING RING
FOR ARRESTERS RATED 97,109
{3)|"xfsL0TS AND 121 KV

DETAIL OF ARRESTER BOTTOM FITTING

AND GROUND TERMINAL FOR ARRESTERS
2ZZS
20-109 KV

<=^ = >

p'rs-l
I H7l~i
MODEL
9LA2H0I6 P

M-' UNIT NAME-.

PLATE
HEAVY
DUTY

— ARRESTER NAMEPLATE
ARRESTER N.P. ARRESTER N.P,

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4

 GEH-2901 Thyrite Magne-Valve Intermediate-Class Lightning Arresters, Model 9LA2H-Series
A suggested method of leveling and equalizing the
bearing on the lugs of the arrester unit is to thread
a nut on each foundation bolt before putting the unit
in place. This will permit accurate leveling irre
spective of any slight unevenness in the foundation.
After the arrester is completely assembled, the
foundation may be grouted in with concrete.
2. Assemble the required number of units in a
stack in accordance with the instructions.
Base-mounted arresters, rated 121 kv, have an
extra, heavy-duty unit with cast fittings, which should
be used at the bottom of each single-pole stack.
3. Assemble the cap and/or grading ring in ac
cordance with the instructions.
4. Connect the arrester to the line through a suit
able line connector or switch.
When connecting the arrester to an energized
line, it is imperative that a quick, positive, single
connection be made to avoid possible damage to the
arrester. Information relative to a suitable device
can be obtained from the nearest General Electric
Company sales office. Where a rigid connection is
made to the line side of the arrester, it should be
ofcorrect length so thatno excessive strain is placed
on the top of the arrester stack.
Where installations requires long lead from line
to arrester, the "hairpin-loop"connection will pro
vide improved protection.
OPERATION
NOTE: The arrester is alive unless disconnected
from the line. When guard rails or screens are
used, they should be grounded and suitable electrical
clearances maintained.
ARRESTER VOLTAGE
The Thyrite intermediate-class arrester is de-
Signed to limit the surge voltages to a safe value by
discharging the surge current to ground, and to in
terrupt the small power-frequency follow current at
the first current zero. The arrester rating is a
definite limit of its ability to interrupt power-follow
current. It has no short-time overvoltage rating
and may be damaged if the power-frequency voltage
applied to the arrester exceeds its rating, even for
a few cycles after a surge sparks over the gaps. It
is important, therefore, to assure that the system
power-frequency voltage from line to ground under
any condition of switching, fault, or overvoltage,
never exceeds the arrester's rating. In case of
DISTRIBUTION PROTECTIVE
2-63 (SM) generalSelectric
PITTSFIELD, MASS.
doubt as to the application, consult the nearest sales
office of the General Electric Company. ./
ARRESTERS OPERATED AT
REDUCED VOLTAGES
Arresters supplied for temporary operation at a
lower voltage should be erected witt correct elec
trical clearances for the ultimate voltage but with
correct number of units for the temporary voltage.
When the time of temporary operation is to be short,
it is recommended that the ultimate arrester be in-
stalled and the units which temporarily are not re
quired be short-circuited.
Care should be taken that all short-circuiting
connections are removed when the arrester is
changed to ultimate voltage.
MAINTENANCE
Before inspecting or handling the arrester, dis
connect it from the line, and, as a safety precaution,
ground the line end.
The Thyrite arrester requires no special care
except for routine cleaning of the outside of the por
celain housing in contaminated areas. Hence, the
porcelain housing should be kept clean and the line
and ground connections tight.
Energized arrester stacks may be hot-washed.
When replacing the arrester-in service, remove
the temporary ground from the line end, before con
necting the arrester to the line.
The arrester or units do not require any testing,
and NO TEST WHICH APPLIES POWER VOLTAGE
IN EXCESS OF THE ARRESTER VOLTAGE RAT
ING (STATED ON THE NAMEPLATE) SHOULD
BE MADE WITHOUT CONSULTING THE GENERAL
ELECTRIC COMPANY. There is no simple field
test whichwill indicate the operating characteristics
or protective levels of the arrester.
SUPPLY UNITS
When ordering renewal units, reference should
be made to the model number found on the name-
plate on the bottom foot of each unit.
Refer any questions relative to the condition of
the internal parts of these arresters to the nearest
sales office of the General Electric Company.
EQUIPMENT DEPARTMENT
 INSTRUCTIONS GEI-10951L
Supersedes GEI-I0951K

CURRENT-LIMITING FUSE UNITS

TYPES EJ-1 AND EJO-1

INTRODUCTION
A Type EJ-1 fuse unit—for indoor use— or a
Type EJO-1 fuse unit—for indoor or outdoor use-
consists of a Pyrex glass or melamine fibreglass
fuse tube having metal ferniles at each end and
containing current-responsive elements surrounded
by a quartz filler. When the fuse functions, the arc
resulting from the melting of the current-responsive
elements is cooled by the adjacent filler and ex
tinguished without any e^qiulsion of gases or material
from the tube. The maximum current passing
through the fuse before the arc is extinguished is
limited to a value considerably lower than the max
imum short-circuit current usually available in the
circuit.
quency. When rated for 60 cycles only, they may be
used on frequencies of either 50 or 60 cycles.
The "E" current rating must be equal to or
larger than the maximum load current in the circuit,
and at the same time, the current-responsive ele
ment must also be of sufficient size so as not to be
damaged Iqr magnetizing inrush current of associated
transformers. For detailed application data, and
also for time-current and current-limiting curves,
refer to the nearest General Electric Sales Office.

APPLICATION

Fuse unit. Types EJ-1 and EJO-1, with suffix I OPERATING

"E" on the current rating conform with the 1960

High Voltage Fuse Standards. They Will carry
current up to their "E" ampere rating continuously;
fuse units rated lOOE amperes and below will melt
at a current between 200% and 240% of the rating
in five minutes, and fuse units rated 125E amperes
and above will melt at a current between 220% HINGE
and 264% of their rating in ten minutes. nrtiNG

For a given application the recommended volt

age rating of the fuse tmit is that nearest to, but
greater than, the line-to-line circuit voltage, ut no
case should the line-to-line voltage be less than 70
per cent of the nominal voltage of the fuse unit nor Size C 4800 Volts Size D 2400 Volts
greater .than the maximum design voltage rating.
Fig. I Type EJ-1 Fuse Units Assembled with
When the fuse units are rated 25/60 cycles, they Fittings for Type EK-3C and EK-3D Fuse
may be used on systems from 25 to 60 cycle fre Disconnecting Switches

These instfvcfiont do not purpdrt to cover all dotoilt or variafiotu in oqyipmont nor to provlda tor wary potnbia
eontinganey to ba mat in connecfion with InitoHotion, oparation or maintananea. Shoutd fiurfW inhrmatton ba dadred
or dtouldparticular problems arisa which ere not covatad suffieiantly for tha purehasar's purposes, the matter should
ba referred to dta General Baelrie Company.

DISTRIBUTION PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT DEPARTMENT

GENERAL^ELECTRIC
PITTSFIELD, MASS.
GEI-10951 Current-Limiting Fuse Units Types EJ-1 and EJO-1
RATINGS
Fuse units are made in several different dia
meters of tube and ferrule assemblies. Each ferrule
diameter is designated by a "size" letter, with the
relation between size and letter being shown in
Table 1. The tabulation also shows the voltage
ratings for which each size is manufactured.
* May also be used on 4300 volt solidly-grounded
neutral circuits when mounted in porcelain housing
on G-E Type JE-2 or JE-32 potential transformers.
INSTALLATION
A suitable fuse support is required to use the
fuse unit. With Type EK-3 and EKO-3 fuse discon
necting switches, fittings for the fuse unit are fur
nished to make it suitable for use as a disconnecting
blade. To attach these fittings to a Size C or Size D
fuse unit, slide them on the ferrules of the fuse unit
and clamp in place in the position shown in Fig. 1.
With a Size OD fuse unit, attach the hinge fitting to
the bottom ferrule of one tube and the operating eye
to the top ferrule of the other tube, as shown in
Fig, 2. In all cases, the hinge fitting should be
located at the end of the fuse containing the indicating
OPERATION
When a fuse unit functions, it should be re
placed by a complete new unit. Always use a fuse
tongs for handling unless special means are pro
vided for disconnecting the fuse support from all
sources of power. If used in a fuse disconnecting
switch, the fittings should be removed from the
blown unit and transferred to a replacing unit. The
time required to replace a blown fuse unit in a dis
connecting switch may be considerably shortened if
a spare fuse unit with fittings in place is kept on
hand at each installation.
Fig. 2 Size DD Fuse Unit Asseirbled with Fittings
for Type EX-3DD Fuse Disconnecting Switch
S-6e(2M) GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY,
TABLE 1
Ferrule
Size Diameter Maximum Design Rating. Volts
"A 13/16" 600, 2750*
B 1 9/16" 2750, 5500, 8250, 15,500
2750, 5500, 8250, 15,500, 25,800
2750, 5500, 8250, 15,500, 25,800
38,000
2-3"in 2750, 5500, 8250, 15,500, 25,800
Parallel 38,000
2-4" in 15,000
Parallel
target, for ease of viewing from below. The target
end of Size D, DD and some 0 fuse imlts has a con
cave appearance (see left side of Fig. 3 as distin
guished from the flat cap closing the other end^or
ends in the case of Size DD) of the fuse tube, ^e
remaining C size fuses and the B size fuses have
button Indicators.
Unless special means are provided for dis
connecting the entire fuse support or switch from ail
sources of power, the fuse unit should be removed
and inserted only with insulated fuse tongs.
The indicating target provided at one end of the
larger sizes of fuse units, operates when the fuse
unit functions. Its operation is provided by a sep
arate mechanism within the fuse tube, and is not
due to any pressure developed by the main fuse
elements in functioning. The appearance of the tar
get for some size C and larger fuse units is shown,
before and after operation, in Fig. 3. Size B and the
remainder of the size C fuse units have an indicator
consisting of a small plunger which projects from
the end of the fuse unit after the fuse unit functions.
Before Operation After Operation
Fig. 3 Indicating Targets of Size C Fuse Units
PITTSFIELD, MASS.
 INSTRUCTIONS GEI-88760A
SUPERSEDES GEI•88760

CAPACITOR TRIP DEVICE

SWITCHGEAR DEPARTMENT

6ENERAL0ELECTRIC
PHILADELPHIA. PA.
GEI-8b760 Capacitor Trip Device

S-U 31175 STgrtHPe-p

Ti^iuep c.cFrfe'S.
RES v/.-e.£

TWeeclbc i eecTiFiEK.
RscTJFtee

TRlPP»M(i
CAP. c.\kco\T
Ivoap

Fig, 1 Eleoentexy macTasi

41

Pig. S Capacitor Trip De^ce

 CAPACITOR TRIP DEVICE

INTRODUCTION

The capacitor trip device is a device
designed for use in tripping the operating
mechanism of a circuit tveaker, its pur
pose being to provide sufficient electrical
energy to operate the trip coil of the mecha
nism.
The device is primarily for use wiOi
circuit brokers which require some form
of a-c power for their closing operation.
i.e. circuit breakers having either a stored
energy closing mechanism with an a-c
operated release coil or an a-c solenoid
operated closing mechanism. It may also be
used with circuit breakers employing other
means of closing. However it might be
necessary to observe certain iterating
procedures as outlined under "Gperation
and Checking".
In addition to circuit breaker tripping,
the unit may be used to operate hand or
electric reset devices such as lockout
relays.
It is recommended that each circuit
breaker or other device be provided with
its individual capacitor trip device. Ex
ceptions to these recommendations are
particular combinations of circuitbreakers
and lockout relays which tests have indi
cated can be operated reliably from a
single tripping unit.

OPERATION AND CHECKING

The unit Is connected directly to the
230 volt a-c source through the input
terminals 1 and 4, and the leads to the trip
circuit from terminals 3 and 4.
The operation of the unit is completely
automatic and requires only an occasional
check to determine if it is functioning
normally. A neon light is supplied near
the top of the unit. This light is ener^ed
continuously and will glow if the voltage
across the capacitor is above the minimum
tripping voltage. This shows the readiness
of the unit to trip the breaker and does not
indicate If the a-c source is available. A
constant visible check of the a-c line is
available by the indicating lamp on the
metal-clad door or panel.
NOTE: The energy storage capacitor
usea in tnls unit is a special high grade,
low leakage, industrial type electrolytic
capacitor. One characteristic of electro-
lyttc capacitors is that they tend to unform
when left de-energized for extendedperiods.
Although these units have been completely
formed at the factory, they may have been
idle for a considerable period of time. It is
therefore recommended that immediately
prior to putting a unit into operation, it is
energized from the 230 volt a-c source for
a period of at least two (2) hours or more.
NOTE; During testing of the unit with
Its associated circuit breaker, do not have
the tripping circuit completed whenapplying
a-c voltege to'a discharged unit Also,
stqiervision of the trip coil in the usual
manner with the red indicating light should
be avoided.

MAINTENANCE

Voltage measurements should be made
a vacuum tube voltmeter to assure
accuracy, ^e unit should be energized
with a-c power for at least one hour before
any measurements are attempted.
1. The a-c input voltage can be mea
sured at terminals 1 and 4 and
should be from 190v to 250v a-c.
2. The d-c output voltage should be
measured at terminals 3 and 4,
With the a-c line energized, the
output voltage should be from 260v
to 350v d-c.

RENEWAL PARTS
It is recommended that sufficient re SPECIFY THE QUANTITY, CATALOG ETC., IS NOT LISTED IN THIS BULLE
newal parts be carried In stock to enable NUMBER (IF LISTED), REFERENCE TIN. SUCH ITEMS SHOULD BE PUR
the prompt replacement of any worn, broken NUMBER (IF LISTED), AND DESCRIP CHASED LOCALLY.
or damaged parts. TION OF EACH PART ORDERED, AND
THIS BULLETIN NUMBER.
ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS FOR PRICES, REFER TO THE NEAR
1. ALWATS SPECIFY THE COMPLETE STANDARD HARDWARK SUCH AS EST OFFICE OF THE GENERAL ELEC
NAMEPLATE DATA. SCREWS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, TRIC COMPANY.

PART NUMBERS
(Ref. to Figures 1 and 2)

Ref. No. Catalog No. Description

9 0456A0864 P102 Capacitor

10 0456A0864 P128 Rectifier
11 04S6A0864 P034 Resistor
16 045eA0864 P106 Thyrector
23 0456A0864 P032 Terminal Board
24 Q456A0864 P109 Indicator Light

Ihete iiuftvelipnt do not purport to cover off details or variations in equ/pment nor to provide for ever/ possible
eontingeney to bo met incomwcffofl with installation, operation or maitHenanee. Should further information bo dedred
or diouidpartieular problems arise which are not coveredsufficiently for the pvrchocer'i purposes, the metier should
be referred to the General Beetrk Cofflpcny.
 GENERAL ELECTRIC SALES OFFICES CEZ'ZSOOL

RfADV TO ASSIST YOU . . . Wh«n You Hovt Elxtrical frobltmt . . . Ntad SarllMr iRfocnallan Itwivira Ordttfatg IntttMUom
lOUISIANA OKLAHOMA
SAIES OmCE CODE KEY t Aitnandrla 71302 .. 720 Murray SI. *t Oklohomo City 73106: 2000 Cloaaen Blvd.
• Inrfatliiai Eqvipmtnt (Indttdjag Agnl Baton Rouen 7031S 633 Oak Villa Blvd. • t Tulao 74114
and Dblr&alar) Sain lokn Charm. 1424 Ryan St. — Columbia BMg.; 2651 E. 21tt St.
t Elnbic Utility EgalgoMat Sain t J Nnw Orlnoni 70112 837 Gravinr St.
i Maiinn and DtlMiM EqaipniMl Sain Nnw Orlnant 70125 4747 Eathart Blvd. OREGON
t Caatpoaonl Sain Opmtloa t Shrnvnp^ 71101 400 Travli St. • t Eugene 97401 ..1170 Pearl St.
MAINE *t Atedford 97501 - 107 E. Main Si.
t Augualo 152 State St. * 11 Portland 97210 2929 N.W. 29th Ave.
AlABAMA bongor 04402 77 Central St. PENNSYLVANIA
* 11 Birmlnghom 3520S.... .2151 Highland Ave. MARYUND • t Allentown 18102....
Mobile 36602. 732 North 16th St.
—704 Government St. 11 BalHmore 21201- ....1 North Chorin Erie 16501 1001 State St.
ARIZONA . t Hogeratown .49 Eoat Franklin St. ' T Johnitown 15902 841 Oak St.
* 11 Phoenix 85012 . 3550 N. Central Ave. MASSACHUSETTS * 11 ( Philadelphia 19102 3 Penn Center Plou
* 1 Tucaen 85711 ...151 S. Tucaon Blvd. tTI Beaton 02117 . 31 St. Jomet Ave. * 11 PIttaburgh 15233 The Oliver Bldg.,Mellea Sq.
ARKANSAS
Springfield 01103 120 Maple St. I PIttaburgh 15338 .733 Waahlngton M.
Worceater 01605... 288 Crave St. * 1 York 17403 - 56 N. Horrisan St.
* t North little Rock 72114.
MICWOAN
- —1900 E. Woahlngton tl Detroit 48202 .. 700 Antoinette St. SOUTH CAROLINA
t Pine BluH 71602 - O.
P. - -Box 1033
Flint 48503 . 316W W. Court St. *t Columbia 39201 1310 Lady St.
CAIIFORNIA I Grand Replda 49508 2821 Modiaon Ave., S.E, Greenville 39603.. ...108 W. Waahlngton St.
* Frecno 93728 . ..1532 N. Weal Ave. t Jockaon 49201 210 W. Franklin St.
*t S In An^ln 90054.... 212 N. VIgnet St. Kolamatoo — 927 S. Ovrdick St. TENNESSEE
S i loc Angelet 90005 .3325 Wllahlre Blvd. t Lenaing 48901 .. 501 Bank of Lanaing BIdg. *111 Chattanooga 37402... 832 Georgia Ave.
Ooklond 94612 409 Thirteenth St. Soglnow 48607. Second National Bank BIdg. * Klngtport 37662 322 Commerce St.
* Redwood City 94063. .. 55 Velerana Blvd. MINNESOTA * 1 Knoxville 37916. 1301 Hannah Ave., N.W.
* t Satramonlo 95816 2407 "J" St. t Duluth 55802 .14 W. Superior St. *1 MemphSa 38104.. 1420 Union Ave.
* t : Son Diego 92103 2560 Firat Ave. t Fergua Folia 56537 106 E. Woahlngton St. * Murfreeaboro P.O. Box 1040
* T t 5 Son Franciico 94106 . 235 Montgomery St. 11 Mlnneopolla
" 55402 12 S. Sixth St. Noahville 37203 1717 W. End BIdg.
Son Joie 95128 2155 So. Fln't St. MISSISSIPPI t Oak Ridge 353 Main SI., Eoat
' COLORADO t Gulfport 39502 P.O. Box 33
TEXAS
* t T 1 Denver 60201 201 Univeriity Blvd. t Jockaon 39201 210 S. Lomar St.
MISSOURI 1 Abilene 79601 442 Cedar St.
CONNECTICUT * 1 Amorlllo 79101 403 Amarlllo Blvd.
• t Homden 06518 2905.2921 Dixwell Ave. Joplin 64802 212V4 W. Fifth St.
• 11 Konaoa City 64105 106 W. Fourteenth St. * 1 Beaumont 77701. 1385 Colder Ave.
* 11 Hortford 06105 764 Aaylum Ave. 1 Corput Chrlari 78401 205 N. Chaparral
• t St. Louia 63101 ....1015 Lecuat St.
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA MONTANA * 11 Dallaa 75207 8101 Stemmona Freeway
* t t Woihlngton 20005.. .777-l4th St., N.W. *t Blllinga 59101 303 N. Broadway *1 El Paao 79901. 215 N. Stanton St.
FLORIDA *t Suite 59701 103 N. Wyoming St. 1 Fort Worth 76102 408 W. Seventh St.
i Cocoa Beach (Cape Conoverol Office} NEBRASKA * 11 i Houaton 77027. ...4219 Richmond Ave.
— 1325 N. Alionllc Ave. * t Omoho 68102 409 S. Seventeenth St. Lubbock 79408 500 B. 50th St.
Coral Oobin 33146 250 Bird Rood NEVADA Midland 122 North N St.
* t Jockionville 32202 1901 Hill St. t Loa Vegoa 89106_ 1711 S. 8th St. *1 San Antonio 78304 ...419 S. Main Ave.
1 Miami 33134. ... 4100 VFeet Flogler St. NEW HAMPSHIRE
t Peniocolo 32503 ...Flret Bonk BIdg. t Moncheater 03104 1662 Elm St. UTAH
t T Tampa 33609.. Henderaon Blvd. at Lola Ave. NEW JERSEY *1 ! Salt Loke City 84110 .. . 200 S. Main St.
* Tampa 33609. 2106 S. Lala Ave. *t T Eoat Orange 07017 26 Woahlngton St.
NEW MEXICO VERMONT
OEOROIA 1 Rullond
* 11 Allonto 30309 1860 Peachtrn Rd.. N.W. *t Albuquerque 87108 120 Madeira Drive, N.E. ..38V2 Center St.
* Macon 31202 682 Cherry St. NEW YORK
*t { Aibony 12203 8 Colvin Ave. VIRGINIA
* t Savonnoh 31405 5002 Poulaen St. * i Newport Newa 23601
. t Binghomlon 13902 19 Chenongo St.
IDAHO * 11 Buffalo 14202 — 625 Delaware Ave. P.O. Box 1038, 311 Moln St.
•1 Boiae 83706. 1524 Idaho St. *t I New Yark 101^ 570 Lexington Ave. *1 Richmond 23230 5001 W. Brood St.
ILLINOIS • 1 J Rocheater 14604. 89 Eoat Ave. *1 Roanoke 24005, 920 S. Jefferaon St.
• 11 9 Chicago 60680 — 840 S. Conol SI. *11 Syracuae 13206.. 3532 Jamea St.
*t Peorio 61603 ...2008 N.E. Perry Ave. Urico 13501 1001 Brood St. WASHINGTON
* Rockford 61105 4223 Eoat State St. 1 Woverly 14892 P.O. Box 308 1 Poaco 99301 824 W. Lewla St.
t Springfield 63701 607 E. Adoma St. NORTH CAROLINA * 1 ! Seoltle 98104 — 710 Second Ave.
INDIANA *1 T Charlotte 28202 129 W. Trade St. * Spokono 99220 .... S. 162 Poal St.
-IT Evonavllle 47714. 2709 Woahlngton Ave. * Greenaboro 27405 801 Summit Ave. 1 Sprtano 99220 E. 1805 Trent St.
t Fort Wayne 46807 1635 Broadway *1 Raleigh 27602 16 W. Marb'n St.
M Fort Wayne 46806 3606 S. Colhoun St. NORTH DAKOTA WEST VIRGINIA
•IT Indianapolla 46207 3750 N. Meridian St. t Biamordi 58501 418 Rotter Ave. * Charleston 25328... .306 MocCorkle Ave., S.E.
• T South Bend 46601 430 N. Michigan St. OHIO
* 1 Fairmont 26555 310 Jacoba BIdg.
IOWA • 1 Akron 44313 -.2858 W. Morket St. * Wheeling 40 Fourteenth St.
•t Cedar Roplda 52401 210 Second St., S.E. *t Canton 44701..... ...515 Third St., N.W.
MT Davenport 52805 WISCONSIN
* 11 Cincinnati 45206 2621 Victory Pkwy. *t S Appleten 54910.., — 510 W. College Ave.
1039 State St., Bettendorf, Iowa ' t J t Cleveland 44104 . -4966 Woodland Ave.
• t Dea Molnea 50310 3839 Merle Hoy Rd. *t Columbua 43215 395 E. Brood St.
t Modiaon 53703 340 W. WoahlntHon Ave.
t Sioux City 51101 520 Pierce St. Columbua 43212 * 11 Milwaukee 53233.. 940 W. St. Paul Ave.
t ...937 Burrell Ave.
KANSAS * J Dayton 45402 11 W. Monument Ave. CANADA; Conodlon General Etectrlc Coinpony,
• t Wichita 67211... ... 820 E. Indianapolla Ave. • t i Doyton 45402 118 W. Firat St. Ltd., Toronto
KENTUCKY Monafleld 44906. -564 Pork Ave., Weat
• t Lexington 40503 465 E. High St. *tl Toledo 43606 3125 Deugloa Rd.
Youngatown 44507...-.372 E. Indlonola Ave.
HAWAII; American Faclore, Ltd., P.O. Box 3330,
• t T Loulavlllo 40218 2300 Meadow Dr. Honolulu 96801

GENERAL ELECTRIC SERVICE SHOPS

WHEN YOU NEED SBIVCE . . . Theao G>E aervlce ahopa will repair, recondl- performonce of your equipment. For full InformoHon about tbeae eervicee,
Hen, and rebuild your electric apparatue. The focilitiee ore available dor ond conlacl your neoreat eervice abop or aolea oHIce.
night, eeven daye a week, for work In the ahepe or on your premlaea. loteat
factory methoda and genuine G-E renewal perta are uaed to maintain peak
ALABANUL KANSAS Calumbua 43223-
Birmingham 35211, P.O. Box 3687.. *{Strather) Arkanaoa City , . , _ ..P.O. Box 6198, 2128 Eakin Rd.
7,-ieth St., S.W. G.E. Co., P.O. Box 797 Toledo 43605 .405 Deorborn Ave.
ARIZONA KENTUCKY Youngatown 44507 i n E. Indlonola Ave.
(Ptioenix) Glendale 85301- Louiavilie 40209 3900 Crittenden Drive OREGON
.4911 Weat Colter St. LOUISIANA Porllond 97210. 2727 N.W. 29th Ave.
CAUFORNIA New Orleana 70117 1115 De Armaa St. PENNSYLVANIA
loa Angelea 90001 6900 Stanford Ave. MULRYLAND
Allentown 18103 668 E. Highland St.
*(Loa Angelea) Ontorlo kitlmere 21230 —.920 E. Fort Ave.
Johnalown 15902 841 Oak St.
Ontario International Airport Philadelphia 19124 1040 E. Erie Ave.
Oakland 94608 3400 Wood St. MASSACHUSEnS (PittaburgliJ Komcttend 15120
Sacramento 95814 —.99 North 17th St. (Beaten) Medford 02155.. 4910 Buttermilk Itollaw Rd., RD #1,
Son Fronclaco 94l03 1098 Horrlaon St. -3960 Myatic Valley Parkway Weat MIfflin, Pa. 15122
MICHIGAN Yorit 17403 54 N. Harrlion St.
COLORADO Detroit 48302 .5950 Third St.
Denver 80205 3353 Larimer St. TEXAS
MINNESOTA Corpua ChriaH 78401 115 Waco St.
CONNECTICUT Minneopolla 55430... . 2025~49th Ave., N. DoMaa 75235 3202 Manor Way
(Southinglon) Plontaville 06479 MISSOURI Houaton 77030—5534 Harvey Wilaen Drive
- 370 Atwoter St. Konaoa City 64120 . -.3525 Gordner Ave. Midlond 79704 704 S. Jehnaton St.
FLORIDA St. Uuia 63110 -.1115 Eoat Rood UTAH
Jockaonviiie 32203- — — NEW YORK Salt lake City 84104... -.301 S. 7th Weat Si.
P.O. Box 2932, 2020 W. Beaver St. Albany 12205 -10^ Central Ave. VIRGINIA
Miami) Hioleah 33010 1062 E. 2Blh St. BuHolo 14211. .318 Urban St. Richmond 23224 —1403 Ingrara Ave.
Tampa 33601 P.O. Bax 1245 *(New York) Linden, N. J... Roanoke 24007..
GEORGM 1611 W. Eliubeth Ave. P.O. Box 1327, 115 Albermarle Ave., S.E.
(Atlanto) Chamfalee 30005 (Hew Yo^) North Bergen, 1^ J. 07047 WASHINGTON
- — —.5035 Peachtree Induatrial Blvd. - —6001 Tanmlle Ave. Seattle 98134 3422 Firat Ave., S.
ILLINOIS Schnnectady (Inalrutnentallon Service) 12305 *Seattle 98108. -220 Dawaon St.
Chicago 60632 4360 W. 47lh St. 1 River " • Sp^ne 99^-. -E. 4323 Miuion St.
INDIANA NORTH CAROUNA WECT VIRGINIA
Ft. Wayne 46803 —1731 Edaall Ave. Charlotte 28308 2328 Thrift Road Charbaton 25328- .. 306 MacCorkle Ave.
Indlaawpolia 46222 1740 W. Vermont SI. OHIO WISCONSIN
IOWA anclniwH 45202 444 W. Third St. Appleten 54910......Mldwmr Induatrial.Area
(Davenport) Bettendorf 52722. *anclnnati 45232 . 260 W. Mitdieil Ave. P.O. Box 83 County Trunk P
1025 Stale St. Cleveland 44125 4477 Boat 49lh St. Milwaukee 53233 940 W. St. Paul Ave.

6ENESAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA, PA

lt-64